ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200705

®

Command Manual

JULY, 1998

NEC America, Inc.

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc. NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Copyright 1998 NEC America, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 i 4 3 2 1 ii 4 3 2 1 iii 4 3 2 1 iv 4 3 2 1 v 4 3 2 1 vi 4 3 2 1 vii 4 3 2 1 viii 4 3 2 1 ix 4 3 2 1 x 2 1 xi 2 1 xii 2 1 xiii 2 1 xiv 4 4 4 3 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 2 4 3 2 1 3 4 3 2 1 4 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 6 4 3 2 1 7 4 3 2 1 8 4 3 2 1 9 4 3 2 1 10 4 3 2 1 11 4 3 2 1 12 4 3 2 1 13 4 3 2 1 14 4 3 2 1 15 4 3 2 1 16 4 3 2 1 17 4 3 2 1 18 4 3 2 1 19 4 3 2 1 20 4 3 2 1 21 4 3 2 1 22 4 3 2 1 23 4 3 2 1 24 4 3 2 1 25 4 3 2 1 26 4 3 2 1 27 4 3 2 1 28 4 3 2 1 29 4 3 2 1 30 4 3 2 1 31 4 3 2 1 32 4 3 2 1 33 4 3 2 1 34 4 3 2 1 35 4 3 2 1 36 4 3 2 1 37 4 3 2 1 38 4 3 2 1 39 4 3 2 1 40 4 3 2 1 41 4 3 2 1 42

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 1/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 43 4 3 2 1 44 4 3 2 1 45 4 3 2 1 46 4 3 2 1 47 4 3 2 1 48 4 3 2 1 49 4 3 2 1 50 4 3 2 1 51 4 3 2 1 52 4 3 2 1 53 4 3 2 1 54 4 3 2 1 55 4 3 2 1 56 4 3 2 1 57 4 3 2 1 58 4 3 2 1 59 4 3 2 1 60 4 3 2 1 61 4 3 2 1 62 4 3 2 1 63 4 3 2 1 64 4 3 2 1 65 4 3 2 1 66 4 3 2 1 67 4 3 2 1 68 4 3 2 1 69 4 3 2 1 70 4 3 2 1 71 4 3 2 1 72 4 3 2 1 73 4 3 2 1 74 4 3 2 1 75 4 3 2 1 76 4 3 2 1 77 4 3 2 1 78 4 3 2 1 79 4 3 2 1 80 4 3 2 1 81 4 3 2 1 82 4 3 2 1 83 4 3 2 1 84 4 3 2 1 85 4 3 2 1 86 4 3 2 1 87 4 3 2 1 88 4 3 2 1 89 4 3 2 1 90 4 3 2 1 91 4 3 2 1 92 4 3 2 1 93 4 3 2 1 94 4 3 2 1 95 4 3 2 1 96 4 3 2 1 97 4 3 2 1 98

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 2/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 99 4 3 2 1 100 4 3 2 1 101 4 3 2 1 102 4 3 2 1 103 4 3 2 1 104 4 3 2 1 105 4 3 2 1 106 4 3 2 1 107 4 3 2 1 108 4 3 2 1 109 4 3 2 1 110 4 3 2 1 111 4 3 2 1 112 4 3 2 1 113 4 3 2 1 114 4 3 2 1 115 4 3 2 1 116 4 3 2 1 117 4 3 2 1 118 4 3 2 1 119 4 3 2 1 120 4 3 2 1 121 4 3 2 1 122 4 3 2 1 123 4 3 2 1 124 4 3 2 1 125 4 3 2 1 126 4 3 2 1 127 4 3 2 1 128 4 3 2 1 129 4 3 2 1 130 4 3 2 1 131 4 3 2 1 132 4 3 2 1 133 4 3 2 1 134 4 3 2 1 135 4 3 2 1 136 4 3 2 1 137 4 3 2 1 138 4 3 2 1 139 4 3 2 1 140 4 3 2 1 141 4 3 2 1 142 4 3 2 1 143 4 3 2 1 144 4 3 2 1 145 4 3 2 1 146 4 3 2 1 147 4 3 2 1 148 4 3 2 1 149 4 3 2 1 150 4 3 2 1 151 4 3 2 1 152 4 3 2 1 153 4 3 2 1 154

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 3/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 155 4 3 2 1 156 4 3 2 1 157 4 3 2 1 158 4 3 2 1 159 4 3 2 1 160 4 3 2 1 161 4 3 2 1 162 4 3 2 1 163 4 3 2 1 164 4 3 2 1 165 4 3 2 1 166 4 3 2 1 167 4 3 2 1 168 4 3 2 1 169 4 3 2 1 170 4 3 2 1 171 4 3 2 1 172 4 3 2 1 173 4 3 2 1 174 4 3 2 1 175 4 3 2 1 176 4 3 2 1 177 4 3 2 1 178 4 3 2 1 179 4 3 2 1 180 4 3 2 1 181 4 3 2 1 182 4 3 2 1 183 4 3 2 1 184 4 3 2 1 185 4 3 2 1 186 4 3 2 1 187 4 3 2 1 188 4 3 2 1 189 4 3 2 1 190 4 3 2 1 191 4 3 2 1 192 4 3 2 1 193 4 3 2 1 194 4 3 2 1 195 4 3 2 1 196 4 3 2 1 197 4 3 2 1 198 4 3 2 1 199 4 3 2 1 200 4 3 2 1 201 4 3 2 1 202 4 3 2 1 203 4 3 2 1 204 4 3 2 1 205 4 3 2 1 206 4 3 2 1 207 4 3 2 1 208 4 3 2 1 209 4 3 2 1 210

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 4/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 211 4 3 2 1 212 4 3 2 1 213 4 3 2 1 214 4 3 2 1 215 4 3 2 1 216 4 3 2 1 217 4 3 2 1 218 4 3 2 1 219 4 3 2 1 220 4 3 2 1 221 4 3 2 1 222 4 3 2 1 223 4 3 2 1 224 4 3 2 1 225 4 3 2 1 226 4 3 2 1 227 4 3 2 1 228 4 3 2 1 229 4 3 2 1 230 4 3 2 1 231 4 3 2 1 232 4 3 2 1 233 4 3 2 1 234 4 3 2 1 235 4 3 2 1 236 4 3 2 1 237 4 3 2 1 238 4 3 2 1 239 4 3 2 1 240 4 3 2 1 241 4 3 2 1 242 4 3 2 1 243 4 3 2 1 244 4 3 2 1 245 4 3 2 1 246 4 3 2 1 247 4 3 2 1 248 4 3 2 1 249 4 3 2 1 250 4 3 2 1 251 4 3 2 1 252 4 3 2 1 253 4 3 2 1 254 4 3 2 1 255 4 3 2 1 256 4 3 2 1 257 4 3 2 1 258 4 3 2 1 259 4 3 2 1 260 4 3 2 1 261 4 3 2 1 262 4 3 2 1 263 4 3 2 1 264 4 3 2 1 265 4 3 2 1 266

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 5/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 267 4 3 2 1 268 4 3 2 1 269 4 3 2 1 270 4 3 2 1 271 4 3 2 1 272 4 3 2 1 273 4 3 2 1 274 4 3 2 1 275 4 3 2 1 276 4 3 2 1 277 4 3 2 1 278 4 3 2 1 279 4 3 2 1 280 4 3 2 1 281 4 3 2 1 282 4 3 2 1 283 4 3 2 1 284 4 3 2 1 285 4 3 2 1 286 4 3 2 1 287 4 3 2 1 288 4 3 2 1 289 4 3 2 1 290 4 3 2 1 291 4 3 2 1 292 4 3 2 1 293 4 3 2 1 294 4 3 2 1 295 4 3 2 1 296 4 3 2 1 297 4 3 2 1 298 4 3 2 1 299 4 3 2 1 300 4 3 2 1 301 4 3 2 1 302 4 3 2 1 303 4 3 2 1 304 4 3 2 1 305 4 3 2 1 306 4 3 2 1 307 4 3 2 1 308 4 3 2 1 309 4 3 2 1 310 4 3 2 1 311 4 3 2 1 312 4 3 2 1 313 4 3 2 1 314 4 3 2 1 315 4 3 2 1 316 4 3 2 1 317 4 3 2 1 318 4 3 2 1 319 4 3 2 1 320 4 3 2 1 321 4 3 2 1 322

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 6/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 323 4 3 2 1 324 4 3 2 1 325 4 3 2 1 326 4 3 2 1 327 4 3 2 1 328 4 3 2 1 329 4 3 2 1 330 4 3 2 1 331 4 3 2 1 332 4 3 2 1 333 4 3 2 1 334 4 3 2 1 335 4 3 2 1 336 4 3 2 1 337 4 3 2 1 338 4 3 2 1 339 4 3 2 1 340 4 3 2 1 341 4 3 2 1 342 4 3 2 1 343 4 3 2 1 344 4 3 2 1 345 4 3 2 1 346 4 3 2 1 347 4 3 2 1 348 4 3 2 1 349 4 3 2 1 350 4 3 2 1 351 4 3 2 1 352 4 3 2 1 353 4 3 2 1 354 4 3 2 1 355 4 3 2 1 356 4 3 2 1 357 4 3 2 1 358 4 3 2 1 359 4 3 2 1 360 4 3 2 1 361 4 3 2 1 362 4 3 2 1 363 4 3 2 1 364 4 3 2 1 365 4 3 2 1 366 4 3 2 1 367 4 3 2 1 368 4 3 2 1 369 4 3 2 1 370 4 3 2 1 371 4 3 2 1 372 4 3 2 1 373 4 3 2 1 374 4 3 2 1 375 4 3 2 1 376 4 3 2 1 377 4 3 2 1 378

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 7/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 379 4 3 2 1 380 4 3 2 1 381 4 3 2 1 382 4 3 2 1 383 4 3 2 1 384 4 3 2 1 385 4 3 2 1 386 4 3 2 1 387 4 3 2 1 388 4 3 2 1 389 4 3 2 1 390 4 3 2 1 391 4 3 2 1 392 4 3 2 1 393 4 3 2 1 394 4 3 2 1 395 4 3 2 1 396 4 3 2 1 397 4 3 2 1 398 4 3 2 1 399 4 3 2 1 400 4 3 2 1 401 4 3 2 1 402 4 3 2 1 403 4 3 2 1 404 4 3 2 1 405 4 3 2 1 406 4 3 2 1 407 4 3 2 1 408 4 3 2 1 409 4 3 2 1 410 4 3 2 1 411 4 3 2 1 412 4 3 2 1 413 4 3 2 1 414 4 3 2 1 415 4 3 2 1 416 4 3 2 1 417 4 3 2 1 418 4 3 2 1 419 4 3 2 1 420 4 3 2 1 421 4 3 2 1 422 4 3 2 1 423 4 3 2 1 424 4 3 2 1 425 4 3 2 1 426 4 3 2 1 427 4 3 2 1 428 4 3 2 1 429 4 3 2 1 430 4 3 2 1 431 4 3 2 1 432 4 3 2 1 433 4 3 2 1 434

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 8/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 435 4 3 2 1 436 4 3 2 1 437 4 3 2 1 438 4 3 2 1 439 4 3 2 1 440 4 3 2 1 441 4 3 2 1 442 4 3 2 1 443 4 3 2 1 444 4 3 2 1 445 4 3 2 1 446 4 3 2 1 447 4 3 2 1 448 4 3 2 1 449 4 3 2 1 450 4 3 2 1 451 4 3 2 1 452 4 3 2 1 453 4 3 2 1 454 4 3 2 1 455 4 3 2 1 456 4 3 2 1 457 4 3 2 1 458 4 3 2 1 459 4 3 2 1 460 4 3 2 1 461 4 3 2 1 462 4 3 2 1 463 4 3 2 1 464 4 3 2 1 465 4 3 2 1 466 4 3 2 1 467 4 3 2 1 468 4 3 2 1 469 4 3 2 1 470 4 3 2 1 471 4 3 2 1 472 4 3 2 1 473 4 3 2 1 474 4 3 2 1 475 4 3 2 1 476 4 3 2 1 477 4 3 2 1 478 4 3 2 1 479 4 3 2 1 480 4 3 2 1 481 4 3 2 1 482 4 3 2 1 483 4 3 2 1 484 4 3 2 1 485 4 3 2 1 486 4 3 2 1 487 4 3 2 1 488 4 3 2 1 489 4 3 2 1 490

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8

DATE

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

DATE

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 9/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY. 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY. PAGE No. 1998 ISSUE 8 DATE MARCH. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY. PAGE No.8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 491 4 3 2 1 492 4 3 2 1 493 4 3 2 1 494 4 3 2 1 495 4 3 2 1 496 4 3 2 1 497 4 3 2 1 498 4 3 2 1 499 4 3 2 1 500 4 3 2 1 501 4 3 2 1 502 4 3 2 1 503 4 3 2 1 504 4 3 2 1 505 4 3 2 1 506 4 3 2 1 507 4 3 2 1 508 4 3 2 1 509 4 3 2 1 510 4 3 2 1 511 4 3 2 1 512 4 3 2 1 513 4 3 2 1 514 4 3 2 1 515 4 3 2 1 516 4 3 2 1 517 4 3 2 1 518 4 3 2 1 519 4 3 2 1 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 PAGE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. PAGE No. 1994 ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual Revision Sheet Page 10/12 ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 .

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 PAGE No. PAGE No. 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY. PAGE No. 1994 ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual Revision Sheet Page 11/12 ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 . 1998 ISSUE 8 DATE MARCH. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. PAGE No. 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY.

603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No.8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY. PAGE No. 1998 ISSUE 8 DATE MARCH. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. PAGE No. PAGE No. 1994 ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual Revision Sheet Page 12/12 ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 .

. .ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 JULY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AADC Assignment of Additional Digit Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AARS Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Data Entry Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACDN Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Displaying or Changing Data . . . . . . . AAED Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AATC Assignment of Authorization Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAKP Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . ACDD Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial in Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACBC Assignment of Call by Call Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACIC Assignment of CIC Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACID Assignment of Caller ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . AARP Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data. . . . 1998 NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Page LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . AATM Assignment of ATM Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix LIST OF TABLES . . . COMMANDS. . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . ACFS Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . AABD Assignment of ACC Restriction Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . AANI Assignment of ANI Data . . . .1 Assigning New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 COMMANDS . . . . . . . ACFO Assignment of Call Forwarding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACND Assignment of Calling Number Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACOC Assignment of Central Office Code . . . . . . . . . .3 Cautions Pertaining to Entry Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 16 28 29 30 35 39 42 44 45 46 48 50 55 56 57 59 61 63 65 66 67 68 69 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii Revision 4. . . . . . . . 111 AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data. . 106 AHLS Assignment of Hot Line Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 AISD Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 AKYD Assignment of Key Data for Dterm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 ADIM Assignment of Dial Intercom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 ACSC Assignment of CSC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ACPG Assignment of Call Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ALPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ADA2 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ACSA Assignment of Connection Service Index A . . . . 166 AOFC Assignment of Office Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 ND-45687 (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan Data. . . . . . . . 172 APCR Assignment of Primary Call Restriction . . . . . . 168 AOPR Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 AMND Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ADA1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page ACPE Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 ANCD Assignment of Night Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 APHN Assignment of Phantom Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 AISA Assignment of Individual Speed Calling . 147 ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 AMDD Assignment of MODEM Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 AFCD Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ANND Assignment of Necessary Digits Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ADPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 AOSP Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 AEVT Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 ANDD Assignment of Name Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ALDN Assignment of Listed Directory Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 AICD Assignment of Intercom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 AFCP Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 AFRS Assignment of Flexible Route Selection . . . . . 171 APAD Assignment of PAD Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 AISP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 AIZP Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 AMAT Assignment of Master Attendant Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data . . . . . 79 ACSI Assignment of Connection Service Index . . . . . . . . . . 115 AIDD Assignment of User ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 AEKD Assignment of External Key Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 AIOC Assignment of IOC Port Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 AEFR Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 AHMS Assignment of Hold Music Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Terminal Configuration . . . . . . Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Specific Attendant Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Application Data . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing. . Assignment of Speed Calling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of State Translation Data . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Hunting Group-UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Route Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Slumber Time Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service . . . . Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page APSW ARAC ARDN ARNP ARPC ARRC ARSC ARTD ARTE ARTI ASAT ASCL ASDC ASDT ASFC ASGD ASHC ASHP ASHU ASID ASLU ASPA ASPD ASTD ASTN ASTP ASYD ATAS ATCC ATCP ATDP ATGL ATIM ATMD ATNR ATRF ATRK ATTD AUAD AUCD AUNE AUNT AUOG Assignment of Password Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of UCD Overflow Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of TAS Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of System Data . Assignment of Route Restriction Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of UCD Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Timing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Toll Code Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 177 179 180 181 182 183 185 187 204 214 221 222 224 226 229 233 234 237 242 247 250 252 261 262 265 266 268 269 270 271 273 276 277 279 282 283 285 290 292 294 295 296 298 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iii Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Make Busy LENS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Traffic Data . . . . . Continuous Change of Station Number. . . . . . . . . . . Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change of System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] . Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMGx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Install [for IMGx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Install [for IMG (ICS). . . . . ND-45687 (E) 299 300 304 305 306 309 316 322 323 343 360 363 366 375 377 378 380 382 383 385 386 387 388 390 391 398 402 404 406 408 410 412 416 419 426 441 449 453 456 460 472 474 475 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iv Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMGdxh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of LENS . . . . . . IMGxh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Change of Station Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Processor Bus . . . . . Backup of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data . . . . and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display File Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory . Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Setting on Port Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Test-Desk and LTST . . . . . . . . . Display of Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Lock Out Station-Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data . . Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page AVTC AVTL AVTM BAID BKUP BKUPI BOSD CARR CASD CATK CCSE CDSD CMOD CMWL CPRS CSCL CSTN CTDK DCON DDA1 DDA2 DFSN DFTD DHDF DISS DLEN DLSL DLSS DMBL DMBS DMBT DOSD DPKG DPSW DSTN DTF1 DTF2 DTF3 INST INSTI LPRO MBBS MBLE Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Make Busy Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting of Virtual Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlled Alternate PRSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of System Message With Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Deletion of Station Data . . . . . . MMG (ICS). . . . . . . . . . Processor Occupancy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMG (ICS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMGdxh and UMGx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Package Switch . Display of LENS Data. . . . . . . . . . Display of Make Busy Trunk . . . IMGxh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Traffic Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMG (ICS). and UMGx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Lock Out Station-LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of System Message Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning of Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Direct Station Select Data . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning of Route Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name Display Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Hotel System Parameter . . . . . . Assignment of Administration Special Access Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Station Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Station Class Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Guest Special Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and IMGdxh] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-ray HFC [for IMG (ICS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Trunk Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . Administration Station Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Administration Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page MBPM MBRT MBSM MBST MBTC MBTK MMNF NDBU PMBU RALM RLST RVTL SINZ SPTS SRTS TDBU TSTL TTLC XATM XHFC XHFD CHAPTER 3 AACL AANP AASN AASP AAST ADLI ADNR ADSS AFXC AGCL AGNP AGSN AGSP AGST AHKP AHSU AHSY ASCR ASPF ASPS Make Busy of Port Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 476 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 487 489 490 493 497 498 503 505 506 509 513 516 519 521 522 527 529 530 540 545 546 548 549 550 554 556 557 567 572 574 576 577 579 580 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page v Revision 4. . . . . . Assignment of Suite Room Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest Station Class Change . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data . . . Traffic Data Back Up . . . . . Assignment of Guest Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Microprocessor Back Up [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Menu File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-RAY HD or FDD [for IMGx. . . . Guest Station Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL SYSTEM ASSIGNMENT COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMG (ICS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Virtual Tie Line Data . . . . Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMGxh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment DLINT Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Station. . . . . Release of Station/Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System. . . . . . . .

Dial Intercom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call By Call Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Administration Station Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Hotel Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE Attribute Data 1 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determinate Point Code Data List . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page ATCR HISS HMBU RAST RGST RHSU CHAPTER 4 LABD LAKP LAND LANI LARP LATC LCBC LCCD LCDN LCEG LCEL LCFC LCFS LCIC LCID LCMO LCND LCNP LCOC LCPG LCPL LCSA LCSC LDA1 LDA2 LDID LDIM LDNI LDPC LEFR LEKD LEVT LFCD LFCP LFRS Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forwarding /Connection Service Index Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dial In Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Manual Override Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotel Main Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Route Selection Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central Office Code Data List . . . Day/Night Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forwarding Station Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling Number Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Guest Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Pickup Group Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Key Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attendant Key Information Data List (for Business System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data . Area Code Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST UP COMMANDS . . . EPN Facility Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSC Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caller ID Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 592 594 595 597 602 606 609 614 614 614 614 614 614 615 615 615 615 615 616 616 616 616 617 617 617 617 617 617 617 618 618 618 619 619 619 619 619 620 620 620 620 621 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vi Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIC Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Service Index A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANI Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data List . . . .0 . . . Call Forwarding by Calling Service List. . . Automatic Number Identification Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE Attribute Data2 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authorization Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Suite Room Station . . . Call Pickup Group Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling Number Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSGD Special Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSDA Speed Calling Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMAT Master Attendant Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRCF List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOPR Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAE Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LICD Intercom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LREF Reference Number Information Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRPC Remote Point Code for Centralized Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNND Necessary Digit Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LHMS2 Hold Music Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . LKYD Key Data for Dterm List. LSDC Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMDD MODEM Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAT PAD Data /Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page LHLS Hot Line Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSAT Specific Attendant Number Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSYD System/Unit/Status Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSTN Station Data (Number Group) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNPD Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTD Route Class Data List . . . . . . . . . . . LSLU Slumber Time Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOSD List Up of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTC Route/Service Feature Class Data and Tenant Restriction Class/Tenant Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSMD Service Module Data List. . . LNPT Numbering Data List for PTT Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LHMS Hold Music Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLMG Alarm Grade Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSID Special Incoming List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRNP Reverse Numbering Plan Data List . . . . . . . . . . . LRTE Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSHL Station Hunting/UCD Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTI Trunk Application Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLEN LENS Data List (for Business System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRDN Remote Control Day/Night List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIZP Internal Zone Paging Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPCR Primary Call Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNDD Name Display Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSLP Selection Translation Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRAC Remote PBX Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSHG Station Hunting/UCD Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 621 621 621 621 621 622 622 622 623 623 623 623 624 624 624 625 625 625 626 626 626 626 627 627 627 627 627 628 630 632 633 633 633 633 634 634 635 635 635 635 636 637 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vii Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLPE Line Privacy Expansion Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List. . Station Data (Numbering Group) List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suite Room Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same Number Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Special Access Code Data List . Guest Special Access Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 ND-45687 (E) . . Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 638 638 638 638 639 639 639 639 641 641 641 641 641 642 642 642 642 642 642 643 643 643 643 644 644 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page viii Revision 4. . . . . Time/Pattern Information Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Tie Line Call Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL SYSTEM LIST UP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Code Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LENS Data List . . . . . . . . Virtual Tie Line Data List . UCD Delayed Announcement Data List . . . . Hotel System Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . .TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page LTAS LTCP LTDP LTRK LUAD LUCD LUNE LVTC LVTL CHAPTER 5 LANP LASP LDNR LDSS LFXC LGNP LGSP LHEN LHKP LHST LHSU LHSY LSCR LSPF LSPS LTCR TAS Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Data List . . . . . . . . . . . Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List . . . . . Direct Station Select Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Access Code Floor Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCD Control Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Fixed Connection (Nail Down Connection Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . 134 Line Test Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LIST OF FIGURES Figure Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Page Entry Procedure Example (ASPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Data Entry Example (ASDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Example of Entry Procedure (ASHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Dterm (16-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Dterm (24-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Dterm (8-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Functional Block Diagram of TSTL . . . . . . . . 507 ND-45687 (E) LIST OF FIGURES Page ix Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . .

0 ND-45687 (E) .This page is for your notes. LIST OF FIGURES Page x Revision 4.

. . . . . . 317 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Backed Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Station/Trunk Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Hotel/Motel System Errors . . . . . . 9 Restriction Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Counteraction Table against Command Execution Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 ND-45687 (E) LIST OF TABLES Page xi Revision 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LIST OF TABLES Table Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Table 2-5 Table 2-6 Table 2-7 Table 2-8 Table 2-9 Table 2-10 Table 2-11 Table 2-12 Table 2-13 Table 4-1 Page General Errors . . . . . 499 Kind of Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 List for Assignment of ASTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Type of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Reference Table for Type of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 System Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF TABLES Page xii Revision 4.This page is for your notes.0 ND-45687 (E) .

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 1 Revision 4. and other related matters.0 .CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This manual describes commands used with the NEAX2400 ICS systems. This manual is organized to present ICS/IMS commands in alphabetical order. applicable data entry procedures. Included with each command is an explanation of its function. These commands are entered from the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) to perform office and data control system operations.

0 ND-45687 (E) .This page is for your notes. CHAPTER 1 Page 2 Revision 4.

Related Reference Command: Indicates other commands which are used to assign. and displaying data through the use of the commands. Floppy Disk Name: Indicates the name of the floppy disk on which the program for the particular command resides. they should not be used when entering data for your system. change and display the same data. Function: Outlines the function of the command. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE This section explains the procedures for assigning. Precautions: Outlines precautions to be aware of when assigning data. The following categories are included for each category: a.COMMANDS CHAPTER 2 1. delete. Section 3. CCIS and Business systems and Hotel system. deleting. GENERAL COMMANDS This chapter includes the following sections: • Section 2. Commands are in alphabetical order within each section.0 . ERROR CODE LIST This section explains the error codes which are displayed when an erroneous operation has been performed or when data which does not conform to the predetermined format has been entered from the MAT. COMMANDS This section explains NEAX2400 ICS commands. Commands are divided by system usage: ACD. • • Note: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 3 Revision 4. c. b. the procedures for deleting or adding data are also explained. e. For some commands. Entry Procedure: Provides an explanation of the CRT display of the MAT and notes precautions concerning the data to be entered. The parameter values shown are examples only. Section 4. d.

delete. the parameters to be entered differ according to the data for parameter “SRV”.COMMANDS 2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE 2. Therefore. separate screens display for different “SRV” parameters. (5) Entry Procedure • For Office Termination: • For Announcement Service: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 CI: N SKIP: 0 WRT? ACC: 888 SRV: UNIF Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 11 CI: N SRV: ANNC TYPE: 1 ATN: 2 EQP: 122 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: N: H: SRV: UNIF: SKIP: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index Normal Hooking Kind of Service (Enter UNIF.1 Outline The parameters to be assigned for each of the commands are shown in Figure 2-1.) Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from the Access Code. CHAPTER 2 Page 4 Revision 4.) Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Type Announcement-Equipment Number (2-15) Figure 2-1 Note: Entry Procedure Example (ASPA) For the ASPA command. and display data. For each command there is a specific entry procedure (Item 5).0 ND-45687 (E) . which explains how to enter. TN: ACC: CI: N: H: SRV: ANNC: TYPE: EQP: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index Normal Hooking Kind of Service (Enter ANNC.

COMMANDS 2. (5) Entry Procedure Assignment of Station Data TN:1 STN:3112 CRT Display of the MAT LENS:000002 TEC:14 RSC:1 SFC:1 WRT? TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Class (1-31) 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data Terminal via Data Module 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15) RSCs are assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15) SFCs are assigned in the ASFC command. All data values shown are for this example only and should not be entered as data for your system.0 .2 Data Entry Example The following is an example for the ASDT command. Meanings and Values of Parameters Figure 2-2 Data Entry Example (ASDT) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 5 Revision 4.

all subsequent parameters and their assigned values are automatically displayed. press “Y” and ENTER.2 Displaying or Changing Data To display the data. Confirm that the data is correct. After the last parameter. for the ASDT command. 2. press “N” and ENTER. “DEL?” appears on the screen. If the values for certain parameters have been entered. enter the same value as that of the data already assigned. to apply the data to the switch). To “Write” the data (i..e. For example. The cursor on the screen automatically moves to the next parameter. press “N” and correct the data. press “N” and ENTER.1 Assigning New Data Enter the data from the MAT and press ENTER. To keep the data. “WRT?” displays on the screen. when the existing values for TN and STN for ASDT are entered. After all necessary data has been entered. “DEL?” is displayed.COMMANDS 2.2. press “Y” and ENTER. press “Y” and ENTER. When all the data has been displayed.0 ND-45687 (E) . To delete the data. then press “Y”. If an error in data entry has been found. For example. enter the following data: TN: 1 + ENTER STN: 3112 + ENTER LENS: 000002 + ENTER TEC: 14 + ENTER RSC: 1 + ENTER SFC: 1 + ENTER After all the necessary data has been entered for Steps (1) through (6) above. Repeat this operation for all parameters. “WRT?” will display on the screen. CHAPTER 2 Page 6 Revision 4.2. To delete the data. To keep the data. the subsequent parameters are automatically displayed.

(See the example in Figure 2-3.COMMANDS 2.2. (Recommend Max.) 0: No Assignment CNT: Number of stations to be entered.3 Cautions Pertaining to Entry Procedure • The parameters to be displayed on the screen of the MAT are not always the same for any specific command.) SECRETARY: Indication of Secretary Statio PHANTOM: Indication of Phantom Station (Enter 0.) The data values shown in “(5) Entry Procedure” are examples only. Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot TN: 1 STN:3221 SECRETARY: 3200 SECRETARY STN:3111 WRT? Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot TN:1 STN:3221 SECRETARY: 3200 CNT:2 2 STN:3222 SECRETARY STN: Station Number of the Secretary Station TN: STN: Tenant Number Station Number (The station number of the Pilot Station. (b) Assign Secretary Station. For some commands. The parameters to be displayed may differ according to the data entered. they should not be used when entering data for your system.0 . 20 stations) Figure 2-3 Example of Entry Procedure (ASHP) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 7 Revision 4. parameters that have already been entered may be replaced with other parameters in the course of data entry operations. • • To assign a Station Hunting-Terminal Group with a Secretary Station but no Phantom Number: (a) Enter all STNs in the Hunting Group.

(Processor < --. Bus transfer error. The data entered is not the data of the same group. (ATCP command) Transfer (LP-PM) Error. The data stored in the external memory cannot be read out.COMMANDS 3. MEANING 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001B 001C 001D 001E 001F 0020 3XXX 4XXX 5XXX 6XXX The communication line is bad. or you must re-enter a password. O&M BUS transfer error. ERROR CODE LIST Table 2-1 General Errors ERROR No.0 ND-45687 (E) . MAT access denied for software protection. (Return to Menu) The command is being used at another terminal. The data entered has already been used. The data entered cannot be used in this system. One MP’s DM is different from another. (Double Assignment) Data input/output format is incorrect. The pattern data is all zeros. (Transfer Error) This command is aborted. SP-SM. because this command is not in this system. The data cannot be written into memory. Data cannot write into DM Data cannot write into DM Data cannot write into DM Data cannot write into DM CHAPTER 2 Page 8 Revision 4. The data entered is over the number that can be assigned.> Processor) Cannot be used.

0 . This station dies not belong to a UCD Group. Hunting Group is already assigned. Hunting Group assignment is not allowed. MEANING 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 Unit is not yet mounted. Numbering Plan mismatch. Designated LENS is already assigned as SMINT. (MAX. Number Group mismatch. This station does not belong to the Circular hunt group. Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors ERROR No. Designated Processor is not yet mounted.COMMANDS Table 2-2 System Control Errors ERROR No. LENS is not assigned yet. DM segment is not set in system data. Pickup Group is already assigned. This data can not be assigned. Station cannot be used as the opposite party of the hot line. Inserted package location is incorrect. OF 7 UCD Groups) Secretary hunt station cannot be deleted. STN must be assigned as a Dterm (TEC = 12). The SM cannot be deleted because SMINT data exists. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 9 Revision 4. LENS is already assigned. This station does not belong to the Pilot hunt group. The unit cannot be deleted because data exists. Overflow of UCD assignment number. Pickup Group is not assigned yet. Station/Trunk is already assigned. MEANING 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 Station/Trunk is not assigned yet. (Unmounted or unmatched). Group mounting error. Hunting Group is not assigned yet.

(Busy) Station cannot be deleted because it is a secretary station.0 ND-45687 (E) . (Five phantom numbers have been assigned. The My-Line has not yet been assigned.COMMANDS Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors (Continued) ERROR No. Station cannot be assigned. The Prime-Line has not yet been assigned. Deletion is not allowed. The station is not the first in the UCD Group. Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station. Telephone class is not correct. FKY 49 can only be assigned on keys 1-16. Signaling Station Data is not assigned yet. DTE Attribute data-2 not assignable for other then DM/DA (terminal equipment) The designated Station is not assigned to the same MG Number. MEANING 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 0225 0226 0227 0228 0229 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 0240 0241 0242 0243 0245 0250 0251 0255 0260 The LEN assignment for the ATT-CON is not correct. Designated port is already assigned as a Nailed Down Connection. The data entered is over the number of the group that can be assigned. (Double assignment) Phantom station cannot be assigned. Assignment error of DTE attribute data-2. Attribute data-1 not assigned yet. Deletion is not allowed because UCD Announcement Data has been assigned. Outside Trunk Class (ARTD) has not been assigned for this route. Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station. Designated port is already assigned as a Hot Line. Mismatch of LP Number of My Line/Master station. Speed calling service is not provided. (Double assignment) LDN cannot be assigned. (Double assignment) Phantom station cannot be assigned.) An Attendant console has not been assigned yet. The data cannot be assigned because the station is in the same UCD Group. CHAPTER 2 Page 10 Revision 4. Mismatch of designated Signaling Station of Intercom Station Group.

Auto/Manual/Dial Intercom group not assigned yet. Enter TDI = 3 only. SMDR data read error. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 11 Revision 4. Mismatch of Digit Code Input Number of Digits. Data is outside the processing range. Enter 1 digit as the Digit Code. RRI/RES is not correct. because other data is not assigned yet. Dial Intercom group not assigned yet.0 . SMDR data write error. MEANING 0261 0262 0263 Abbreviated digit code (ADC) is not assigned yet. The PC does not correspond to the LENS. The LSG in route class data corresponding to the LENS is inconsistent.COMMANDS Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors (Continued) ERROR No. Digit Code request exists. Table 2-4 Restriction Data Errors ERROR No. Restriction Data input error. Numbering Plan has been read out which cannot be processed. Number of digit are shortage or over/input code is illegal. (Input No. of Digits Internally Developed) Enter Outside Route Number in Route Data. MEANING 0300 0301 0302 0303 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0410 0411 0412 0415 0416 0417 0418 There is NO SMDR service. 6 digits as the Digit Code. Unit not mounted. SMDR sorting error. Enter 3 digits. Line Signal Processing Read error.

DRAM copy is no good. TDSW OUTPUT ST-BY. Standby LP access has been disabled. Measurement Errors ERROR No. TDSW OUTPUT ACT. MP has only a single system (Side-0 only). ACT No. cannot be read out. CHAPTER 2 Page 12 Revision 4. CRAM copy is no good. INT card is defective.0 ND-45687 (E) . The issue data of main memory or port microprocessor cannot be read. TDSW CLOCK system change is not allowed. The circuit card or processor is not mounted or in MB. (1) CPU system change has failed. The PBUS is not mounted or is in MB state. All PBUS cannot be made busy. CPU system change is not allowed. MEANING 0501 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 0516 0517 0518 0519 0520 0521 0522 0523 0524 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 0535 0536 Timer value write error. (3) Periodic Diagnosis Program is being called.COMMANDS Table 2-5 Administration. SP in ACT cannot be set MB. (2) CPU system change has failed. TDSW1 CLOCK output is abnormal.ACT change has failed. CPU system change has failed. The CPU is performing another task. System change has failed. 1 CLOCK output is abnormal. TDSW output system change is not allowed. Another memory is being tested. TDSW0 CLOCK output is abnormal. TDSW0.ST-BY change has failed. Cannot be made idle because MB Switch was used to make busy.

Operating mode change failure (Not allow hardware MB).COMMANDS Table 2-5 Administration.0 . Measurement Errors (Continued) ERROR No. This data can only be assigned by using the “AIOC” command. Designated SM is not assigned yet. MEANING 0537 0539 0540 0541 0542 0543 0544 0545 0546 0547 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 0560 0600 0601 0602 0603 0610 0611 0615 0616 0617 0618 0619 0620 0700 Cannot be set to a MB state since another CSP is not available.) CPU operation mode read failure. (Specified LENS is not assigned to the station. Incoming destination split data not assigned yet. Service Module Memory Write Error. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 13 Revision 4. CPU mode change memory write failure. Trunk Test Data not assigned yet. The standby CPU PKG is not mounted. Standby COPY PKG SRQ key on. Password service bit cannot be assigned because password code is not yet assigned. This data is inhabited except in the APSW command. Entered password code is not assigned in Grade-2. Service Module Memory Read Error. The standby CPU PKG is in a MB state. Act COPY PKG SRQ key on. Route class data cannot be deleted because trunk data assignment exists. Split data not assigned yet. Cannot be deleted because password is in service. The standby COPY PKG is in a MB state. Designated SMPN is already assigned. The ACD System configuration data was not sent to MIS. Designated KOSM and NOSM are already assigned. The last MB order is being executed. Cannot be deleted because ACD position data already assigned. Lamp control impossible. Tenant of ACD not assigned yet. Control agent position not assigned yet.

HFC internal error (file). Selected HFC data transfer error. FD does not exist in the HFC. HFC/IOC mode change memory write failure. MEANING 0701 0800 0801 0802 0803 0804 0805 0806 0807 0808 0809 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 0815 0816 0817 0818 0819 081A 081B 081C 081D 081E 081F 0820 0821 The designated data is not assigned. HFC/IOC Operation mode read failure. Measurement Errors (Continued) ERROR No. Cannot be set MB status using HFC/IOC at HFC/IOC MB set. Selected HFC response time out. HFC/IOC MB set/cancel memory write failure. The Received data is abnormal. HFC select error. System management file does not exist on HFC. The designated HFC/IOC is not mounted. HFC error (other). The selected HFC is not mounted or fault processing. HFC/IOC MB set/cancel failure.0 ND-45687 (E) . HFC/IOC Status is not read. Standby memory reset failure. Program load error. Request order error of HFC. The selected HFC is busy.COMMANDS Table 2-5 Administration. Standby memory read failure. Cannot set HFC/IOC mode because CPU mode is COPY mode. CHAPTER 2 Page 14 Revision 4. Date format error of HFC. HFC/IOC Faulty processing. The designated HFC/IOC is not in an ACT state. Signaling cable error on HFC. HFC/IOC mode change failure. Standby memory write failure.

The communication line is bad (Received error). Table 2-6 Hotel/Motel System Errors ERROR No. MEANING 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 0355 0356 0357 0358 System is not Hotel. MEANING A00F A10F A20F A30F The communication line is bad (Disconnected error).COMMANDS Table 2-5 Administration. cannot be used Cannot be used for Hotel System TEC and station not for Administration TEC and station not for Guest Room Restriction Data check failure No Floor Service Being used by Guest Service Telephone Being used by Suite Room Group Station cannot be used as the opposite party of the One touch. Measurement Errors (Continued) ERROR No. The communication line is bad (Parity error). The communication line is bad (Sent error). ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 15 Revision 4.0 .

See the Table of Contents for page numbers where these commands are described in the manual. Business. CM3-02 CM0-01 CM0-04 CM0-04 CM3-01 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM0-02 CM0-10 CM0-09 CM0-04 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM0-02 × – × × × × × – × × – – – × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × × × × × × – × × × × × CHAPTER 2 Page 16 Revision 4. their associated floppy disk (FD). please refer to the ACD System Manual. Hotel/Motel). For ACD specific commands. COMMANDS The table below lists ICS commands. Hotel only commands are detailed in chapters 3 and 5 of this manual.0 ND-45687 (E) .COMMANDS 4. ACD. SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M AABD AACL AADC AAED AAKP AAND AANI AANP AARP AARS AASN AASP AAST AATC AATM ACBC ACDD ACDN ACFO ACFR Note: Assignment of ACC Restriction Data Administration Station Class Change Assignment of Additional Digit Translation Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data Assignment of ANI Data Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data Administration Station Number Change Assignment of Administration Special Access Code Assignment of Administration Station Data Assignment of Authorization Code Data Assignment of ATM Module Data Assignment of Call by Call Service Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial In Service Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing Assignment of Call Forwarding Data Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-03 CM3-01 CM0-02 CM0-02. and the systems in which these commands can or cannot be used (CCIS.

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M ACFS ACIC ACID ACMO ACND ACNP ACOC ACPE ACPG ACSA ACSC ACSI ADA1 ADA2 ADIM ADLI ADNR ADPC ADSS AEFR AEKD AEVT AFCD AFCP AFRS Note: Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data Assignment of CIC Code Data Assignment of Caller ID Data Assignment of Clocked Manual Override Assignment of Calling Number Data Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data Assignment of Central Office Code Assignment of Call Pickup expand Group Data Assignment of Call Pickup Group Assignment of Connection Service Index A Assignment of CSC Data Assignment of Connection Service Index Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 Assignment of Dial Intercom Data Assignment DLINT Package Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data Assignment of Direct Station Select Data Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction Assignment of External Key Data Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed-Down Connection) Data Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number Assignment of Flexible Route Selection ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-04 CM0-08 CM0-10 CM0-02 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-01 CM0-11 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-08 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM3-02 CM3-02 CM0-08 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-11 CM0-03 CM0-09 CM0-02 × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – – × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 17 Revision 4.0 .

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M AFXC AGCL AGNP AGSN AGSP AGST AHKP AHLS AHMS AHMS2 AHSU AHSY AICD AIDD AIOC AISA AISD AISP AIZP AKYD ALDN ALLC ALMG ALPE AMAT AMDD Note: Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System Guest Station Class Change Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data Guest Station Number Assignment of Guest Special Access Code Assignment of Guest Station Data Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Assignment of Hot Line Station Assignment of Hold Music Data Assignment of Hold Music Data Assignment of Suite Room Station Assignment of Hotel System Parameter Assignment of Intercom Data Assignment of User ID Data Assignment of IOC Port Data Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data Assignment of Key Data for Dterm Assignment of Listed Directory Number Assignment of Line Load Control Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion Assignment of Master Attendant Data Assignment of MODEM Data ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM3-02 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-04 CM3-02 CM3-01 CM0-03 CM0-13 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-02 CM0-11 CM0-01 CM0-01 SYS CM0-11 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-01 × – – – – – – – × × × – – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × × × × CHAPTER 2 Page 18 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .

0 .COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M AMND ANCD ANDD ANND ANPD AOFC AOPR AOSP APAD APCR APHN APSW ARAC ARDN ARNP ARPC ARRC ARSC ARTD ARTE ARTI ASAT ASCL ASCR ASDC ASDT Note: Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits Assignment of Night Connection Data Assignment of Name Display Data Assignment of Necessary Digits Data Assignment of Numbering Plan Data Assignment of Office Name Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern Assignment of PAD Data Assignment of Primary Call Restriction Assignment of Phantom Station Number Assignment of Password Data Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code Assignment of Remote Control Day/Night Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data Assignment of Route Restriction Class Assignment of Route Class Data Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assignment of Specific Attendant Number Assignment of Station Class Data Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction Assignment of Six Digits Least-Cost Routing Assignment of Station Data ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM0-11 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-08 CM0-01 CM0-08 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-01 CM0-04 CM0-09 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-01 × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × – ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 19 Revision 4.

0 ND-45687 (E) .COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M ASFC ASGD ASHC ASHP ASHU ASID ASLU ASPA ASPD ASPF ASPS ASTD ASTN ASTP ASYD ATAS ATCC ATCP ATCR ATDP ATGL ATIM ATMD ATNR ATRF ATRK ATTD Note: Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class Assignment of Special Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot Assignment of Station Hunting-UCD Assignment of Special Incoming Assignment of Slumber Time Data Assignment of Special Access Code Assignment of Speed Calling Code Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number Assignment of State Translation Data Assignment of Station Number Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern Assignment of System Data Assignment of TAS Service Data Assignment of Terminal Configuration Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Assignment of Toll Code Restriction Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp Assignment of Date and Time Assignment of Timing Data Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order Assignment of Trunk Data Assignment of Trunk Test Data ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 SYS CM0-11 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-03 × × × × × × × × × – – × × × × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × CHAPTER 2 Page 20 Revision 4.

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M AUAD AUCD AUNE AUNT AUOG AVTC AVTL AVTM BAID BKUP BKUPI BOSD CARR CASD CATK CCSE CDSD CMOD CMWL CPRS CSCL CSTN CTDK DCON DDA1 DDA2 Note: Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data Assignment of UCD Control Data Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data Assignment of UCD Overflow Group Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] Kinds of Memory Backup Kinds of Memory Backup Back Up of One-Touch Call Memory Data Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Continuous Assignment of Station Data Continuous Assignement of Trunk Data Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment Continuous Deletion of Station Data Change of System Mode Control Message Waiting Lamp Controlled Alternate PRSCs Continuous Change of Station Class Continuous Change of Station Number Connection of Test-Desk and LTST Display of Connection Status Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-03 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-09 SYS SYS CM0-10 CM0-04 CM0-04 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-08 CM0-11 SYS CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-02 × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × – × × × – – × × × × ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 21 Revision 4.0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) .COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M DFSN DFTD DHDF DISS DLEN DLSL DLSS DMBL DMBS DMBT DOSD DPKG DPSW DSTN DTF1 DTF2 DTF3 HISS HMBU INST INSTI LABD LAKP LAND LANI LANP LARP Note: Display File Serial Number Display of System Message with Details Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] Display of Program Issue Display of LENS Data Display of Lock Out Station-LENS Display of Lock Out Station-Number Display of Make Busy LENS Data Display of Make Busy Station Display of Make Busy Trunk Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Display Setting on Port Package Display Package Switch Display of Station Data Display of Traffic Data Display of Traffic Data Display of Traffic Data 3 Display of Hotel Program Issue Hotel System Main Memory Backup System Install System Install ACC Restriction Data List Attendant Key Information Data List Automatic Number Identification Data List ANI Data List Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Area Code Restriction Data List ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-04 SYS CM0-10 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-04 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM3-02 CM3-02 SYS CM0-10 CM0-06 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM3-03 CM0-06 × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – – × × × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × CHAPTER 2 Page 22 Revision 4.

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M LASP LATC LCBC LCCD LCDN LCEG LCEL LCFC LCFS LCIC LCID LCMO LCND LCNP LCOC LCPG LCPL LCSA LCSC LDA1 LDA2 LDID LDIM LDNI LDNR LDPC LDSS Note: Administration Special Access Code Data List Authorization Code Data List Call by Call Service Data List Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data Call Forwarding. Connection Service Index Data List Call Forwarding Station Data List CIC Data List Caller ID Data List Clock Manual Override Data List Calling Number Data List Calling Number Pattern Data List Central Office Code Data List Call Pickup Group Data List Call Pickup Group Data List Connection Service Index Data List CSC Data List DTE Attribute Data-1 List DTE Attribute Data-2 List Dial In Service Data List Dial Intercom Data List Day/Night Information List Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List Determinate Point Code Data List Direct Station Select Data List ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-09 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-05 CM0-04 CM0-08 CM0-08 CM0-06 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-08 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-04 CM3-03 CM0-08 CM3-03 × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × – ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 23 Revision 4.0 .

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M LEFR LEKD LEVT LFCD LFCP LFRS LFXC LGNP LGSP LHEN LHKP LHLS LHMS LHMS2 LHST LHSU LHSY LICD LIZP LKYD LLEN LLMG LLPE LMAT LMDD LNDD LNND Note: EPN Facility Restriction Data List External Key Data List List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS Fixed Connection (Nail-Down Connection) Data List Call Forwarding by Calling Service List Flexible Route Selection Data List Fixed Connection (Nail-Down Connection) Data Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Guest Special Access Code List LENS Data List Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List Hot line Data List Hold Music Data List Hold Music Data List Station Data (Numbering Group) List Suite Room Data List Hotel System Parameter List Intercom Data List List Up of Internal Zone Paging Data Key Data for Dterm List LENS Data List Alarm Grade Data List Line Privacy Expansion Data List Master Attendant Data List MODEM Data List Name Display Data List Necessary Digit Data List ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-06 CM0-05 CM0-09 CM0-06 CM0-09 CM0-06 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM0-06 CM0-11 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-11 CM0-06 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-05 × × × × × × – – – – – × × × – – – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × − × – × × × × × × CHAPTER 2 Page 24 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M LNPD LNPT LOPR LOSD LPAE LPAT LPCR LPRO LRAC LRCF LRDN LREF LRNP LRPC LRTC LRTD LRTE LRTI LSAT LSCR LSDA LSDC LSGD LSHG LSHL Note: Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List Numbering Data List for PTT Network Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List List Up of One Touch Speed Call Memory Data Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List PAD Data Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List Primary Call Restriction Data List Processor Occupancy List Remote PBX Access Code Data List List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List Remote Control Day/Night List Reference Number Information Data List Reverse Numbering Plan Data List List Up of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service Route/Service Feature Class/Tenant Restriction Data List Route Class Data List Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data Trunk Application Data List Specific Attendant Number Data List Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List Speed Calling Data List Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List Special Group List Station Hunting UCD Data List Station Hunting UCD Data List ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-04 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-11 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-08 CM0-09 CM0-05 CM0-08 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-09 CM0-05 CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-05 CM0-05 × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 25 Revision 4.0 .

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M LSID LSLP LSLU LSMD LSPF LSPS LSTN LSYD LTAS LTCP LTCR LTDP LTRK LUAD LUCD LUNE LVTC LVTL MBBS MBLE MBPM MBRT MBSM MBST MBTC MBTK MMNF Note: Special Incoming List Selection Translation Pattern List Slumber Time Data List Service Module Data List Special Access Code Floor Data List Same Number Special Access Code Data List Station Data (Number Group) List System/Unit/Status Data List TAS Service Data List Time/Pattern Information Data List TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List Toll Code Restriction Data List Trunk Data List UCD Delayed Announcement Data List UCD Control Data List Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List Virtual Tie Line Call Data List Virtual Tie Line Data List Make Busy of Processor Bus Make Busy of LENS Make Busy of Port Microprocessor Make Busy of Route Make Busy of System Message Printout Make Busy of Station Make Busy of Trunk .0 ND-45687 (E) .Continuous Make Busy of Trunk Make Menu File ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-04 CM0-06 CM3-03 CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-04 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-11 × × × × – – × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × CHAPTER 2 Page 26 Revision 4.

COMMANDS SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M NDBU PMBU RALM RAST RGST RHSU RLST RVTL SINZ SPTS SRTS TDBU TSTL TTLC XATM XHFC XHFD Note: Name Display Data Backup Port Microprocessor Memory Back Up [for Engineering use only] Release Alarm Remove Administration Station Data Remove Guest Station Data Remove Suite Room Station Release Station/Trunk Remove Virtual Tie Line Data System Initialize Scanning of Port Status Scanning of Route Status Traffic Data Back Up Test Station Line Test Trunk Line Connection X-ray ATM Module Diagnosis X-ray HFC X-ray HD or FDD ×: Command can be used –: Command cannot be used CM0-04 CM0-11 SYS CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-02 CM0-03 CM0-09 SYS CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-10 CM0-10 CM0-10 × × × – – – × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 27 Revision 4.0 .

TN: ADC: SFC: RES: Tenant Number Speed Calling Code (Max. The Abbreviated Digit Codes (ADC) must already be assigned in the ASPD command. Precautions • • This command assigns Speed Calling Restriction Data to each station’s Service Feature Class (SFC). b6=1). 4 digits) Note 1 Service Feature Class (0-15) Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Note 1: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system. Speed Calling Override Service must be assigned (ASYD. in order to restrict it from originating calls. 3. SYS2.0 ND-45687 (E) . CHAPTER 2 Page 28 Revision 4. Entry Procedure LABD TN:1 SFC:X WRT? ADC:123 RES:0 The SFC automatically displays. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Hotel siness. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. which is added to the Service Feature Class of an individual station assigned for Speed Calling.AABD CM0-03 Business. Index 1. a maximum of three (3) digits can be assigned. Function This command is used to assign and display Speed Calling Restriction Data. Note: 4. tel AABD Assignment of ACC Restriction Data 1.

Entry Procedure LOPR Assignment of Additional Digit Translation PNL:1 DC:100 WRT? PNL: DC: Pattern Number Location (1-255) (Option 1-999) Additional Digit Information Max. assign PNL 128-255. delete. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.0 . it must be confirmed that a Pattern Number Location (PNL) has been assigned in the AOPR (Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing) command. Hotel siness. 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Therefore when additional digits are required from 5-24. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 29 Revision 4. and display additional digit information pertaining to the Pattern Number Location designated in the AOPR command. 4 digits Note 1 (If PNL < 128) Max. Function This command is used to assign. tel AADC Assignment of Additional Digit Translation 1. 24 digits Note 2 (If PNL > 127) (Option Max. Precautions Before using this command.AADC CM0-02 Business. 3. 24 Digits PNL: 1-999) Note: Note: If additional digits are required (1-4) data is assigned by software in PNL tables 1-127. If additional digits are required (1-24) data is assigned by software in PNL tables 128-255.

LLEN LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 30 Revision 4. tel AAED Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data 1. This command is not necessary if the announcement device terminates at a station. Related Reference Command List up: LPAE -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter TKAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK. and M. Precautions • • • • When the Announcement Equipment is to be used as a general announcement trunk. delete and display trunk information related to Announcement Equipment. A. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02/CM3-02 CM0-02 (Business System) CM3-02 (Hotel System) 2. INDEX 161. enter “1” to parameter “M”. Parameter “LANG” is displayed and data can be entered when ASYD SYSl. b2 = 1 (Language Service is provided).0 ND-45687 (E) . 4.AAED CM0-02/CM3-02 Business. Function This command is used to assign. Hotel siness. Enter the “0” to the Parameter “LANG” when the Language Service is Provided. “0” must be assigned for parameters C. on a tenant basis. R. For the Hotel system it is also possible to assign Language Class when Language Service is employed (Language Service is a function of the Property Management System (PMS)) 3. When assigning the announcement equipment (EQP = 15) for Alert Service. DLEN List up: LTRK.

Entry Procedure • For a single connection: Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data TN:1 C:0 RT:1 WRT? EQP:0 R:0 A:0 LANG:0 M:0 TN: EQP: Tenant Number Announcement Equipment Number 0: Dead Level Number 1: Unused Number (Not used in Hotel System) 2: Remote Access to PBX 3: May be used for other purposes 4: Outgoing Trunk Busy Announcement 5-6: May be used for other purposes 7: Route Restriction Announcement 8-14: May be used for other purposes 15: Alert Service (for Hotel system) 16: Timed Reminder Set Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Set (for Hotel system) 17: Service Set-up Failure Message (for Hotel system) 18: Timed Reminder Service Cancel Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Reset (for Hotel system) 19: Service Cancel Failure Message (for Hotel system) 20: Room Cut-Off Announcement (for Hotel system) 21: Do Not Disturb Announcement (for Hotel system) 22: Timed Reminder/Wake Up Call Message for Announcement Trunk 23-31: Group Announcement (for Hotel system) 32: Delay Announcement-Attendant 33: Not used 34: Automated Attendant (lst Announcement) 35: Automated Attendant (2nd Announcement) 36: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 1) 37: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 2) 38: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 3) 39: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 4) 40: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 5) 41: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 6) 42: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 7) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 31 Revision 4.AAED CM0-02/CM3-02 Business.0 . Hotel 5.

Duration of Connection 0/1: Disconnect in 30 seconds.AAED CM0-02/CM3-02 Business./The connection is held until the station releases.0 ND-45687 (E) .) Route Number CHAPTER 2 Page 32 Revision 4.Attendant (for the 2nd announcement) 59-121: Not used 122-125: Multiple Announcement 126-127: Not used Language Class (for Hotel system) 0: Common (Language to be designated for each guest individually) 1: Japanese 2: English 3: German 4: French 5: Spanish 6: Chinese 7: Russian 8-15: Spare designations to be used for languages other than those listed above. Sending RBT (Ring Back Tone) 0/1: Send RBT/Do not send RBT Send Answer Signal 0/1: Do not send Answer Signal/Send Answer Signal Multiple Connection (Enter 0) 0: Single connection (TK is not needed for a single connection. Hotel LANG: C: R: A: M: RT: 43-48: Not used 49-53: Delay Announcement .Attendant (for the 1st announcement) 54-58: Delay Announcement .

Hotel • For a multiple connection: Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data TN:1 C:0 RT:1 EQP:0 R:0 TK:1 A:0 LANG:0 M:1 WRT? TN: EQP: Tenant Number Announcement Equipment Number: 0: Dead Level Number 1: Unused Number (Not used in Hotel System) 2: Remote Access to PBX 3: May be used for other purposes 4: Outgoing Trunk Busy-Announcement 5-6: May be used for other purposes 7: Route Restriction Announcement 8-14: May be used for other purposes 15: Alert Service (for Hotel system) 16: Timed Reminder Set Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Set (for Hotel system) 17: Service Set-up Failure Message (for Hotel system) 18: Timed Reminder Service Cancel Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Reset (for Hotel system) 19: Service Cancel Failure Message (for Hotel system) 20: Room Cut-Off Announcement (for Hotel system) 21: Do Not Disturb Announcement (for Hotel system) 22: Wake Up Call Message for Announcement Trunk (for Hotel system) 23-31: Group Announcement (for Hotel system) 32: Delay Announcement-Attendant 33: Not used 34: Automated Attendant (lst Announcement) 35: Automated Attendant (2nd Announcement) 36: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 1) 37: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 2) 38: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 3) 39: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 4) 40: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 5) 41: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 6) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 33 Revision 4.AAED CM0-02/CM3-02 Business.0 .

Attendant (for the 1st announcement) 54-58: Delay Announcement .0 ND-45687 (E) .AAED CM0-02/CM3-02 Business.Attendant (for the 2nd announcement) 59-121: Not used 122-125: Multiple Announcement 126-127: Not used Language Class (for Hotel system) 0: Common (Language to be designated for each guest individually) 1: Japanese 2: English 3: German 4: French 5: Spanish 6: Chinese 7: Russian 8-15: Spare designations to be used for languages other than those listed above. Hotel LANG: C: R: A: M: RT: TK: 42: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 7) 43-48: Not used 49-53: Delay Announcement . Duration of Connection 0/1: Disconnect in 30 seconds/The connection is held until the station releases. Sending RBT (Ring Back Tone) 0/1: Send RBT/Do not send RBT Send Answer Signal: 0/1: Do not send Answer Signal/Send Answer Signal Multiple Connection (Enter 1) 1: Multiple connection Route Number Number of the trunk connected to the Announcement Equipment. CHAPTER 2 Page 34 Revision 4.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2.0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 35 Revision 4. Indexes 8 and 9) becomes invalid.AAKP CM0-01 Business siness AAKP Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position 1. Precautions • • This command is used for Business System only. SYS2. The DAY/NIGHT key on the ATT is set to the NIGHT position. INDEX 9. Function This command is used to set the functions of the top row of ICI (Incoming Call Identification) keys for answering incoming calls at the Attendant Console. When the location of keys has been changed. SYS 1. The maximum number of Attendant Consoles should be assigned by the ASYD command. • • • The ATI circuit card is not mounted. 3. c. The attendant console number (ATN) is the number assigned at TK parameter of the ATRK command. a. The ATT has been made busy by means of the MB switch on the ATI circuit card. the number of waiting call display (ASYD. This command can be executed under one of the following conditions. b.

the function indicated in each ( ) is the default function. Therefore when the default function indicated in ( ) is to be used. which becomes valid if no other function has been set by this command.0 ND-45687 (E) .Business) CHAPTER 2 Page 36 Revision 4.AAKP CM0-01 Business • The location of the keys can be set by this command is shown in below. or if the function set has been deleted. 6 (TIE) 5 (Busy) 4 (NANS) 1 (TF) 2 (EMG/SCB) 3 (CAS/ICPT) ATT Key Position (Desk Console . Desk console Alarm Position Available Position Busy Night Night Position Busy L6 1 L5 2 3 Cancel Vol In this illustration. data entry is not necessary.

AAKP CM0-01 Business Attendant Console AM PM ADJUST H M STATION•STATUS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 TIME STATION / TRUNK NUMBER 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 ANS RING BUSY ATND HOLD L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 1 KEY NUMBER 1 (TF) 2 3 4 5 6 (SCB) (ICPT) (NANS) (BUSY) (TIE) RCL ATND LDN GHI 4 PRS 7 ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8 PE 0 O R MNALM NIGHT CW SRC MJALM PB DES DEF 3 MNO 6 WXY 9 # ATT Key Position (Attendant Console) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 37 Revision 4.0 .

AAKP CM0-01 Business 4. Related Reference Command List up: LAKP -Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK.0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry Procedure Assignment of ATT Key Position ATN:1 KYN:1 FUNC:1 WRT? ATN: KYN: FUNC: Attendant Number Key Number (1-6) FUNCTION CODE (1-16) 1: CAS Line 2: Off-Hook Alarm 3: Priority Call 1 4: Priority Call 2 5: Priority Call 3 6-16: Not used CHAPTER 2 Page 38 Revision 4. DLEN List up: LTRK. LLEN 5.

When a uniformed number of digits is not used Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 CC: 0 SKIP:3 DC: 123 WRT? AT: 0 KT: 0 ADD: 3 RT: AT: CC: KT: SKIP: ADD: DC: Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0) 0: STA Outgoing Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 0) 0: Main Central Expansion of STA Number Length (Enter 0) 0: OFF Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) Office Code to be Added (1-10) Office Code (Max. Entry Procedure • Assigning the ANI data sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of the self office [the individual ATT Number is assigned]: a. 4. delete. 10 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 39 Revision 4.0 . Hotel siness. Related Reference Command List Up: LAND -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List Up: LRTD 5.AAND CM0-04 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. and display ANI data for the number of digits of calling station number and the office code on each route basis for the Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Service. Precautions • The route number set in parameter RT should have been designated in ARTD. 3. tel AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data 1. Function This command is used to assign. ANI (CDN19) = 1.

10 digits) Office Code (Max. 10 digits) CHAPTER 2 Page 40 Revision 4. When a uniformed number of digits is used Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 CC: 0 STNL:5 SKIP:3 DC: 123 WRT? AT: 0 KT: 1 ADD: 3 RT: AT: CC: KT: STNL: SKIP: ADD: DC: • Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0) 0: STA Outgoing Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 0) 0: Main Central Expansion of STA Number Length (Enter 1) 1: ON STA Number Length (1-8) Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) Office Code to be Added (Max.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel b. 10 digits) Assigning the ANI (data to be sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of the self office [the individual ATT Number is not assigned]: Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 AT: 1 DC: 123 WRT? RT: AT: DC: Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 1) 1: ATT Outgoing Office Code (Max.AAND CM0-04 Business.

Hotel • Assigning the ANI data to be sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of the satellite office: Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 CC: 1 SKIP:3 DC: 123 WRT? AT: 0 COC: 80 ADD: 3 RT: AT: CC: COC: SKIP: ADD: DC: Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0) 0: STA Outgoing Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 1) 1: Satellite Central Central Office Code (Max. 5 digits) Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) Office Code to be Added (1-10) Office Code (for the number of digits assigned to parameter ADD.0 . 10 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 41 Revision 4. Max.AAND CM0-04 Business.

Hotel siness. b. ASYD SYS-1 INDEX 125 b4 . b2 is “1”. 4. 3. When ASYD SYS-2 INDEX 15. enter a blank in parameter “TS” (press SPACE key and RETURN key).AANI CM0-04 Business.b7 (Type of MFC Signaling System) should be entered. “LDN” assigned in this command is sent. the following number is sent as ANI data. Related Reference Command List Up: LANI -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List Up: LRTD CHAPTER 2 Page 42 Revision 4. delete and display ANI (Automatic Number Identification) data sent per tenant by the request from opposite office. When toll number is not added to ANI data. Calling party is an Attendant or tandem connection: “LDN” assigned in this command is sent. tel AANI Assignment of ANI Data 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Precautions • • • Before using this command. a. Calling party is a station: Calling party’s station number is sent. If “0” assigned in b2. Function This command is used to assign.

8 digits) Call number of local (Max.0 . Enter the data for parameters TN through LDN. Assignment of ANI Data TN: 1 TS: 0471 LS: 83 LDN: 0351 TN: TS: LS: LDN: Tenant number Call number of toll (Max. Entry Procedure a. The display changes as follows: TN: 1 DC: 0471-83-0351 WRT? “LDN” entered in step (a) “LS” entered in step (a) “TS” entered in step (a) DC: Digit Code ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 43 Revision 4. 8 digits) b.AANI CM0-04 Business. Hotel 5. 8 digits) Listed directory number (Max.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry Procedure Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data OGRT:12 RSC:1 DC:976 555 RES:0 WRT? OGRT: RSC: DC: RES: Outgoing Route Number Route Restriction Class (0-15) Destination (Area/Office) Code (3/6 digits) Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Area/Office code is Restricted 1: Area/Office code is Allowed CHAPTER 2 Page 44 Revision 4. 3.AARP CM0-02 Business. Precautions • The Destination (Area/Office) Code (DC) does not include the access code or the digit “1”. Hotel siness. 4. Related Reference Command List up: LARP -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC 5. if 1 + dialing is required. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. tel AARP Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data 1. delete and display area/office code restriction data. Function This command is used to assign.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. connections are to be restricted. Hotel siness. Precautions • If data is not set.0 .AARS CM0-04 Business. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure ICRT: 1 RSV: 0 WRT? OGRT: 2 CLS: 0 ICRT: OGRT: RSV: CLS: Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Route Service 0: Not used 1: AMP Class Data When RSV = 1 0: Restriction 1: OGT 2: ICT ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 45 Revision 4. 3. Function Various service connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route are to be restricted or the existing restrictions on such service connections are to be canceled. 4. tel AARS Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data 1.

4. Authorization Codes must meet the following criteria: a. delete and display the Authorization Code. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.0 ND-45687 (E) . bit 7 = 1 has been assigned by ASYD command (Using volume of Data Memory at the time of assigning Authorization Code is reduced). Authorization Codes must have 3 to 7 digits. Hote AATC Assignment of Authorization Code Data 1. Hotel ness. 3. Precautions • • The Authorization Code is used in Remote Access to the PBX. When SYS-1 INDEX 19. Function This command is used to assign.AATC CM0-02 Business. Related Reference Command List up: LATC -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC CHAPTER 2 Page 46 Revision 4. Authorization Codes that contain “0” from the 3rd digit to the 7th digit cannot be assigned. b.

Hotel 5.AATC CM0-02 Business.0 . 10 digits) Authorization Code Restriction (Enter 1. Entry Procedure • For changing restrictions set by the SFC and RSC: Assignment of Authorization Code Data TN:1 DC:4444 ACR:1 RSC:0 SFC:0 WRT? TN: DC: ACR: SFC: RSC: • Tenant Number Authorization Code (Max.) 2: Allowed ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 47 Revision 4.) 1: Restricted Service Feature Class (0-15) Route Restriction Class (0-15) For canceling all restrictions set by the RSC: Assignment of Authorization Code Data TN:1 ACR:2 DC:4444 WRT? TN: DC: ACR: Tenant Number Authorization Code (Max. 10 digits) Authorization Code Restriction (Enter 2.

Request the printout of send/received data. #1 #2 #3 AIOC Select the ATM Module Number using the arrow key and press ENTER.AATM CM0-10 Business ness AATM Assignment of ATM Module Data 1. Only the Act-side ATM module can be accessed by this command. Function This command allows assignment/change of ATM module data from the MAT of the PBX. b. View the send/received data list on the screen. Entry Procedure a. 3. Designate ATM Module Number Assignment of ATM Module Data Please choose the ATM module no. Precautions • • • • This command is used for Business system only. The ATM module must be connected with the PBX. 6100-version software or later must be installed in the system. Assignment of ATM Module Data ATM Module #X ACT : PORTX Do you request to print out the send/receive data? Yes/No Yes: No: Print the send/received data list. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Related Reference Command List up: 5.0 ND-45687 (E) . CHAPTER 2 Page 48 Revision 4. 4.

Data Assignment Example Assignment of ATM Module Data ATM Module #X ACT : PORTX 0000000000 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 1111111111 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 2222222222 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC 333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333 3333333333 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD 444444444444444444444444444444 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Send Information Received Information • Enter the data and press ENTER. The data is sent to the ATM Module.0 .AATM CM0-10 Business c. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 49 Revision 4.

delete. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Function This command is used to assign. 3 digits) ND-45687 (E) . assign the Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR). Hote ACBC Assignment of Call by Call Service 1. 3. using the AOPR command.0 Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National Call 1: International Call Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T Feature/Service (0/1) 0: Feature Facility Coding Value 0: Transmit Network Selection 5: Operator 6: Pre-subscribed Transmit Network Operator SCC Distinguish number (Max. Precautions • Before assigning data. 4. Hotel ness.ACBC CM0-09 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. and display the Call by Call Information for an ISDN Network. Entry Procedure • For AT&T and Feature Access: Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:0 SERV:0 CODE:0 SCC:201 WRT? LCBC TDPTN: OPR: RA: MD: INT: NET: SERV: CODE: SCC: CHAPTER 2 Page 50 Revision 4.

Hotel • For AT&T and Service Access (WATS BAND/SDN) Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:1 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:0 SERV:1 CODE:1 BAND:1 SCC:201 WRT? TDPTN: OPR: RA: MD: INT: NET: SERV: CODE: BAND: SCC: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T Feature/Service (0/1) 1: Service Facility Coding Value 1: WATS BAND/SDN WATS Band Number (0-9) SCC Distinguish Number (Max.ACBC CM0-09 Business. 3 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 51 Revision 4.0 .

) Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:1 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:0 SERV:1 CODE:1 BAND:1 SCC:201 WRT? TDPTN: OPR: RA: MD: INT: NET: SERV: CODE: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T Feature/Service (0/1) 1: Service Facility Coding Value 2: MEGACOM 800 3: MEGACOM 5: WATS maximal subscribed band 6: ACCUNET CHAPTER 2 Page 52 Revision 4. etc.0 ND-45687 (E) .ACBC CM0-09 Business. Hotel • For AT&T and Service Access (MEGACOM.

Hotel • For NT (Public. etc.ACBC CM0-09 Business.) Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:1 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:1 SERV:0 CODE:0 WRT? TDPTN: OPR: RA: MD: INT: NET: SERV: CODE: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 1: NT Feature/Service (0/1) 0: Feature Facility Coding Value 0: Public 1: Private 2: INWATS 4: FX 5: Tie Trunk 8: TRD Call ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 53 Revision 4.0 .

ACBC CM0-09 Business. Hotel • For NT (OUTWATS) Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:1 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:1 SERV:0 CODE:3 BAND:0 WRT? TDPTN: OPR: RA: MD: INT: NET: SERV: CODE: BAND: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 1: NT Feature/Service (0/1) 0 : Feature Facility Coding Value 3: OUTWATS WATS Band Number (0-9) (Max.0 ND-45687 (E) . digits) CHAPTER 2 Page 54 Revision 4.

7 digits) Change Digit Code (Max. 3. deleting. Function This command is used for assigning. Hotel ness. Enter the B-Channel Route Number in parameter “RT”. 4.ACDD CM0-04 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Hote ACDD Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial in Service 1. Entry Procedure LDID DAY/NIGHT:D RT:10 DC:24 CDC:36 AD:0 XFR:0 WRT? DAY/ NIGHT: RT: DC: CDC: AD: XFR: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Route Number Digit Code (Max.) Exchange Transfer (0/1) 0: Transfer is restricted 1: Transfer is allowed ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 55 Revision 4. 24 digits) Additional Dialing (Enter 0. and displaying the Change Digit Code for the ISDN line with DID Addressing.0 . Related Reference Command List up: 5. Precautions • • This Command is used when DID Number Conversion is necessary.

Precautions • The “ARTD” command is to be used to assign data “1” to the parameter “CD” (CDN: 58) prior to the operation of this command. Entry Procedure LCDN Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing TN: 1 DC: 23456 CDN: 7 WRT? TN: DC: CDN: Tenant Number Destination Code (Max. It is also necessary to assign the distant office code via “AMND” command beforehand. Hotel ness. Function This command is used to assign. • 4. Hote ACDN Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing 1. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.ACDN CM0-03 Business. 10 digits) Number of Digits of Consecutive Dialing CHAPTER 2 Page 56 Revision 4. As far as tenants are concerned. the same conditions apply as the “AMND” command. delete or display the number of digits to be added to the access code of a distant office that has been assigned via the AMND command.0 ND-45687 (E) . Related Reference Command List up: 5.

or an outside Night connection. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. 3.0 . Function This command is used to assign. Hotel ness. Hote ACFO Assignment of Call Forwarding Data 1. Precautions None 4. and display various call forwarding service data.) 2: Station Station Number Including when the connection between IC call from Tie Line and the station is restricted. delete. Note that the destinations of forwarded calls can be the attendant console.ACFO CM0-02 Business. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 57 Revision 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure • To designate a station as the Call Forwarding destination: LCFC Assignment of Call Forwarding Data TN:1 CF:1 CFI:2 STN:3112 WRT? TN: CF: CFI: STN: Note: Tenant Number Call Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 1-3) 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Call Forwarding-Intercept Note Call Forwarding Destination (Enter 2. a station. on a tenant basis.

Hotel • To designate an ATT as the Call Forwarding destination: Assignment of Call Forwarding Data TN:1 CF:2 CFI:1 WRT? TN: CF: CFI: Tenant Number Call Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 1-3. 4 digits) Note 1 Note 1: When 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system.) 1: Attendant Console (ATT) 2: Station • For Night Connection Outside: Assignment of Call Forwarding Data TN:1 CF:4 ADC:234 WRT? TN: CF: ADC: Tenant Number Call-Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Call Forwarding-Intercept 4: Night Connection Outside Call Forwarding Destination (1-2) (Enter 1. a maximum of 3 digits can be as- signed.) 4: Night Connection Outside Abbreviated Digit Code (Max.ACFO CM0-02 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 58 Revision 4.

Related Reference Command List up: 5. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.0 . 4.ACFR CM0-02 Business. Entry Procedure LRCF Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class TN:1 TSFI:1 CCI:0 RES:0 WRT? TN: TSFI: CCI: Tenant Number Transfer Service Feature Index (1-15) 1: Call Forwarding (All Calls/-Don’t Answer/-Busy Line/Unused Number/Dead Level) 2: Direct in Termination (Night only) 3: Direct in Termination (Day and Night) 4: Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 5: TAS 6: Night ATT 7: Remote Access to PBX 8-14: Not used 15: CAS Line Connection (Satellite) Call Category Index (0-15) 0: Attendant Call (Information Service Call) 1: LDN 2: FX ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 59 Revision 4. Precautions • Data must be assigned to activate the feature. Hote ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class 1. Hotel ness. Function This command is used to assign and display various kinds of trunk call forwarding restriction data on a tenant basis.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel RES: 3: WATS 4: Tie Line 5: CCSA 6: Recall 7: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 8: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 9: Not used 10: Special Common Battery 11: Inter-Position Transfer 12: Priority Call 13: Off Hook Alarm 14: CAS (Main) 15: Not used Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Transfer service is Restricted 1: Transfer service is Allowed CHAPTER 2 Page 60 Revision 4.ACFR CM0-02 Business.

Function This command is used to assign. DSTN. display.ACFS CM0-04 Business. 4. AAST. Related Reference Command List Up: LCFS -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. RGST. Parameter RCV can be displayed and assigned when ASYD. Precautions • • Parameters RCV. Hotel ness. SYSl. RAST. RGST Display: ASDT. RAST.0 . 3. and CFD can be assigned when parameter FUNC = 1. LHST. SRV. LHEN ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 61 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. DLEN List Up: LSTN. Hote ACFS Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data 1. INDEX 79. b2 = 1 (Split Call Forwarding In Service). AGST Deletion: ASDT. LLEN. and delete destinations for Call Forwarding-All Calls / Busy Line / Don’t Answer on a per-station basis.

12 digits) Display of Transfer Destination Data: Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data TN: 1 STN:2000 FNC: 2 CF-AXXXXX CF-BXXXXX CF-DXXXXX The transfer destination data displays here. Entry Procedure • Assignment of Transfer Destination: Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data TN: 1 STN:2000 FNC: 1 RCV: T SRV: A CFD: 2001 WRT? RCV displays when Split Call Forwarding Service is performed.-All Calls B: C.ACFS CM0-04 Business. TN: STN: FNC: Tenant Number Station Number Function Number (Enter “2”) 2: Data Display CHAPTER 2 Page 62 Revision 4.F. (Max.F.O. TN: STN: FNC: RCV: SRV: CFD: • Tenant Number Station Number Function Number (Enter “1”) 1: Assignment Receive Kind (T/S) T: C.-Don’t Answer Call Forwarding Destination No./Tie Line S: Station Call Forwarding Kind (A/B/D) A: C.-Busy Line D: C.0 ND-45687 (E) .F. Hotel 5.

c. with the exception of the point code of the system being programmed. (By use of ARTD Command) The PC of the above-mentioned route is assigned. follow the procedure described below. it is displayed and the cursor moves to the ClC parameter position. a. • The number of offices on a route from the originating office and the terminating office is a maximum of two. • • LSG: 12 is assigned to the Route Class Data of the route to which the CIC concerned belongs. Precautions • Before using this command. Function This command is used for assigning. (The cursor moves to the CSCG parameter position. (By use of ADPC Command) The Trunk Data of the CIC concerned is assigned. Enter the PC. b. b. Business. LENS cannot be assigned.0 . a. Then.) All Point codes in the network. 3. confirm that the following assignments have already been completed. Related Reference Command List up: LCIC ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 63 Revision 4. Business ACIC Assignment of CIC Code Data 1. When changing the CSCG. and displaying the LENS (Line Equipment Number) on the basis of each PC (Determinate Point Code) and CIC (Circuit Identification Code) of the CSCG (Common Channel Signaling Controller Group). (By use of ATRK Command) Unless the Route Number identified from the LENS entered by this command and the Route Number identified from the PC coincide with each other. make the following entry: SPACE + ENTER. If the CSCG Number is already assigned. Hotel . must be assigned in the ACIC command.ACIC CM0-08 CCIS. and entry is awaited. 4. deleting. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. c.

ACIC CM0-08 CCIS. Hotel 5. Entry Procedure Assignment of CIC Code Data PC:1 CSCG:130 CIC:1 LENS:000020 WRT? PC: CSCG: CIC: LENS: Determinate Point Code (1-16383) Common Channel Signalling Controller Group Number (130-255) Circuit Identification Code Number (1-255) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) XX X XX X Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) CHAPTER 2 Page 64 Revision 4. Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .

which are available for I version Series 6200 software or higher: • • Call Block Distinctive Ringing . Related Reference Command List up: 5.ACID CM0-10 Business. Hotel ness. 4. 1.Caller ID RGP: Ringer Pattern (0. Function This command is used to assign. A maximum of 12 calling numbers can be assigned to a single station. Entry Procedure LCID Assignment of Caller ID Data TYPE: 1 TN: CID: SRV: WRT? STN: TYPE: TN: STN: CID: SRV: 1 (Fixed) Tenant Number Station Number Calling ID Number (Max.Caller ID For detailed information on these services. 5-7) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 65 Revision 4. see the System Data Design Manual.0 . 28 digits) Service Kind (5/6) 1-4: Not used 5: Call Block 6: Distinctive Ringing . Hote ACID Assignment of Caller ID Data 1. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Precautions • • This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program. delete and display calling number data for the following services.

Hote ACMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. delete. which is used for changing routes during a specific time period. Entry Procedure LCMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override BLOCK:0 PTN:0 START:12/24 00-00 END :12/25 12-30 WRT? BLOCK: PTN: START: END: Block Number (0-7) Pattern Number (0-7) Start Time (MM/DD HH-MM) End Time (MM/DD HH-MM) CHAPTER 2 Page 66 Revision 4.ACMO CM0-02 Business. Hotel ness. and display Clocked Manual override data. Function This command is used to assign. 3. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Precautions None 4. such as a holiday (Month/Day/Hour/Minute).0 ND-45687 (E) .

delete.ACND CM0-09 Business. assign the Calling Number Pattern (CNP) using the ACNP command. Precautions • Before assigning data with this command. Hote ACND Assignment of Calling Number Data 1. Function This command is used to assign. 4. Hotel ness. and display a Service Identification Number (SID) sent to the ISDN Network. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2.0 . Related Reference Command List up: Entry Procedure Assignment of Calling Number Data CNP:1 SKIP:0 ADD:7 DC:2014386 WRT? LCND CNP: SKIP: ADD: DC: Calling Number Pattern (1-255) Skip Digit (Enter 0) Number of Digits of the Additional Number (0-24) Digit Code of the Additional Number (Max. 24 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 67 Revision 4.

and displaying the Calling Number Pattern (CNP) to the route which allows SID to Network-Present service. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Function This command is used for assigning. deleting. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. 3.ACNP CM0-09 Business. Hotel ness. Hote ACNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Precautions • Enter the B-Channel Route Number in parameter “RT”. Entry Procedure LCNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data OG/IC:0 CNP:1 RT:10 OG/IC: RT: CNP: Kind of Connection (Enter 0) Route Number Calling Number Pattern (1-255) CHAPTER 2 Page 68 Revision 4. 4.

0 . Hote ACOC Assignment of Central Office Code 1.O. 4. line code and tie line code corresponding to particular trunks. and display a C. Precautions • The Central Office Code assigned by this command is displayed as a 4-digit number on the attendant console. This command operates in accordance with the ARTD command parameter R/L (CDN25). Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. DLEN List up: LTRK.ACOC CM0-01 Business. Hotel ness. Entry Procedure Assignment of Central Office Code RT:1 TK:1 DC:9000 WRT? RT: TK: DC: Route Number Trunk Number Digit Code (4 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 69 Revision 4. Related Reference Command List up: LCOC -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter TKAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK. delete. 3. LLEN. Function This command is used to assign. LHEN 5.

KEY FUNCTION ESC INS DEL • This key is used to skip Call Pickup Group station data entry before reaching the 50th station. Related Reference Command List up: LCEG. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. A maximum of 50 stations can be displayed at a time on the MAT screen. “WRT?” appears on the screen when this key is pressed. Precautions • • A maximum of 50 stations can be assigned in a Call Pickup Expand Group.ACPE CM0-11 Business. This key is used to delete a station at the location where the cursor is positioned. change and delete Call Pickup Expand Group data. Assign an access code for a Call Pickup Expand Group using the ASPA command. Hotel ness. 4. using special keys such as “INS” and “DEL” can facilitate data entry. LCEL CHAPTER 2 Page 70 Revision 4. Function This command is used to assign. Hote ACPE Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group 1. This key is used to insert a station at the location where the cursor is positioned.0 ND-45687 (E) . The following special keys are available when ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode is selected. 3. In addition. The previous station is advanced by one when a new station is inserted.

ACPE CM0-11 Business. Hotel 5. Press the ENTER key. Entry Procedure • Mode Selection Press the ↑ and ↓ keys to select your desired mode. Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group Operation Mode : Mode Selection : Cursor up Key Cursor down Key ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Mode Activation : Return Key ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 71 Revision 4.0 .

CHAPTER 2 Page 72 Revision 4.ACPE CM0-11 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 3: ESC. Note 2: Meanings of each parameter are indicated in this area. INSERT and DELETE keys are effective when entering CNT STN data. Hotel • Assignment/Change of Call Pickup Expand Group Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group TN: STN: WRT? Note 1 Note 3 CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: ASSIGNMENT Message Area Note 2 TN: STN: CNT STN: Tenant Number Station Number Station numbers in a Call Pickup Expand Group Note 1: WRT? appears when all station data has been assigned in a Call Pickup Expand Group or when the ESC key is pressed.

0 . If the designated station has not been assigned as a Call Pickup Group station.E. Hotel • Deletion of Call Pickup Expand Group Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group TN: a STN: b WRT? Note CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN 2: xxxxx 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: xxxxx 11: xxxxx 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: xxxxx 21: xxxxx 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: xxxxx 31: xxxxx 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: xxxxx 41:xxxxx 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50:xxxxx DELETION Message Area Note: DEL? appears when all station data of a C. By pressing N. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 73 Revision 4. “Not Assigned!! Assign? (Y/N)” appears. is displayed on the screen.ACPE CM0-11 Business.P.G. When the Y key is pressed. the display is changed to ASSIGNMENT mode. the cursor returns to the station number entry.

the mode changes to Assignment Mode. DLEN. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. In the Deletion Mode. For all other groups. 4. if there are no data for the group. Hote ACPG Assignment of Call Pickup Group 1. LLEN. delete. This key is used when it is desired to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Call Pickup Group station entry. DSTN List up: LSTN. Function This command is used to assign. and display call pickup group via the TN and STN 3. change. “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. LCPL .ACPG CM0-01 Business. Related Reference Command List up: LCPG. the operation skips to “WRT?”. KEY FUNCTION • • ESC INSERT DELETE This key is used when it is desired to skip entry operation at the time of Call Pickup Group station entry. use the “DELETE” key for deletion of a station in the Group. In the Change Mode. LHST. AGST Deletion: ASDT. This key is used when it is desired to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. If “Y” is entered. a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned. RAST. Precautions • • In the Assign mode. Exchanging can be accomplished by entering a new station Number over the existing station Number.Parameter STN Assignment: ASDT. use the “INSERT” key. Special Key Table These keys are effective in the operation mode “Assignment” and “Change” only. RGST. a maximum of 50 stations can be assigned to one group per system. RGST Display: ASDT. If “N” is entered. LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 74 Revision 4. To insert a station in the Group. Hotel ness. If this key is pressed. the operation returns to station number entry. AAST.0 ND-45687 (E) . RAST.

CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the Call Pickup Group. When entering other parameters. ← ← • To assign a Call Pickup Group Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400 WRT? Y CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 CNT STN 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: TN: Tenant Number. press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. Hotel 5. INSERT and DELETE Keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. then press the ENTER key. press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt. After entering the last STNs for your group.) Note: Note: ESC. Entry Procedure • Enter the kind of mode. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 75 Revision 4. STN: Station Number. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.ACPG CM0-01 Business. ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Note: Select the desired mode by using the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow).0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) . When entering other parameters. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the Call Pickup Group. • To Delete a Call Pickup Group Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400 DEL? Y CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 CNT STN 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419 Station numbers of the stations belonging in the call pickup group are displayed automatically. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group. STN: Station Number.ACPG CM0-01 Business. After entering the last STNs for your group. press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt.) Note: Note: ESC. Hotel • To change a Call Pickup Group Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400 WRT? Y CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 CNT STN 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10: 2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419 TN: Tenant Number.) CHAPTER 2 Page 76 Revision 4. INSERT and DELETE Keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station Included in the Call Pickup Group. TN: Tenant Number. press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt. STN: Station Number.

ACSA CM0-02 Business. Hotel ness. This command is used with the ACSI command. LLEN. Precautions • • This data must be assigned in accordance with Connection Service Index A (CSIA) CAS data at the Satellite Station a. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. This is for a CAS Line and Direct in Termination (Day Only). 3. the ADC must be set using the ASPD command 4. DLEN List up: LTRK. DLEN. LHEN -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. LHST. Related Reference Command List up: LCSA -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter TKAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK. b. Hote ACSA Assignment of Connection Service Index A 1.0 . Function This command is used to route incoming calls from selected routes and trunks to a predetermined station. line is terminated at the CAS Line. RAST. When assigning CSIA as 3 using this command. AAST.O. A ring-down incoming call from a C. RIGST Display: ASDT. • It is necessary to set the TEC (Telephone Class) of the CAS Line to “15” in the ASDT/AAST/AGST command. DSTN List up: LSTN. LLEN. AGST Deletion: ASDT. LHEN ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 77 Revision 4.

Entry Procedure • For CAS line or DIT Assignment of Connection Service Index RT:2 TK:1 CSIA:1 TN:1 STN: 3111 WRT? RT: TK: CSIA: STN: TN: • Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index A (Enter 1 or 2) 1: CAS line 2: Direct-In Termination (DAY Only) Station Number Tenant Number For DIT-Outside Assignment of Connection Service Index 2 RT:2 TK:1 CSIA:3 ADC:11 WRT? RT: TK: CSIA: ADC: Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index A (Enter 3. Hotel 5.ACSA CM0-02 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 3: Direct-In Termination-Outside (DAY only) Speed Calling Abbreviated Digit Code (for CSIA3) CHAPTER 2 Page 78 Revision 4.

CIC Group 0 CIC Group 1 CIC Group 2 CIC8. a maximum of eight CSC/CCH/DCH Numbers can be assigned. the CSC number of accommodation location of the CCH/DCH should be assigned to 8 CIC groups from 0 to 7. CIC9... Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. CICl. ... CIC10. Precautions • The relationship between CIC (Circuit Identification Code) Group Numbers and CICS is shown below. Business. Function This command permits the registration. . Business ACSC Assignment of CSC Data 1. CIC23 Even if the CIC has only 7 circuits. CIC17. deletion and display of the CSC (Common Channel Signaling Controller) number corresponding to the CSCG (Common Channel Signaling Controller Group) number and accommodation location of the CCH (Common Channel Handler) for CCIS/DCH (D-Channel Handler) for ISDN. CIC18. CIC15.. Hotel .. CIC Group 7 • CIC7. 3. Related Reference Command List up: LCSC ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 79 Revision 4..ACSC CM0-08 CCIS. CIC16.. .. It is acceptable to use the CSC number or CCH/DCH accommodation location. • 4.0 . For both the basic route and the alternative route totaled. CIC2.

Every time the CCH/DCH accommodation location is input. “CCH” is assigned.0 ND-45687 (E) . it is incremented by 1 (0-7). Note 2: For CCIS.ACSC CM0-08 CCIS. B-Channel:Basic Accommodation Location D-Channel:Accommodation Location CHAPTER 2 Page 80 Revision 4. For ISDN. WRT? CSCG: CCH: CSC Group Number (2-255) Note 1 Accommodation location of the Common Channel Handler Note 2 XX X XX Line Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG 00-31 CSC CIC Group: Common Channel Signaling Controller Number CIC Group Number (display only) Note 1: When the CSCG number is even. assign the accommodation location of the CCT/CCH even in the case of CCT. When the CSCG number is odd. the following data should be assigned to the parameter CCH. it indicates a basic route. Entry Procedure Assignment of CSC Data CSCG:130 CCH:00005 CIC GROUP X “X” indicates a CIC group number. Business. Hotel 5. it indicates an alternate route.

LHST. AGST ASDT. and Direct-In Termination. the ADC must be set by the ASPD. This is for Direct-In Termination (Day and Night). This command must be used for Remote Access from a Ring Down Trunk. register a station number to which an incoming call is terminated using this command. Hotel ness.ACSI CM0-02 Business. Related Reference Command List up: -Parameter RTAssignment: Display: List up: -Parameter TKAssignment: Deletion: Display: List up: -Parameter STNAssignment: Deletion: Display: List up: LCFC ARTD ARTD LRTD ATRK ATRK ATRK. 4. This command must be used when assigning Night Connection Fixed. AAST. night/night) service. RGST ASDT. When setting the CSI to 6 or 7 using this command. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. LHEN ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 81 Revision 4. Function This command is used to route incoming calls from selected routes and trunks to a predetermined station. When providing the Night Connection-Off Site Extension or Direct-In Termination-Off Site Extension (day. Night Connection and Remote Access to the System. DLEN LTRK. DLEN. Hote ACSI Assignment of Connection Service Index 1. DSTN LSTN. LLEN. RAST. LLEN.0 . 3. RAST. LHEN ASDT. Precautions • • • • • This data must be assigned in accordance with the Connection Service Index (CSI). RGST.

) 5: Remote Access to PBX For Direct-In Termination or Night Connection: Assignment of Connection Service Index RT:2 CSI:4 TN:1 STN:3113 TK:1 WRT? RT: TK: CSI: TN: STN: Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index (Enter 3 or 4.ACSI CM0-02 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel 5. Entry Procedure • For Remote Access to PBX: Assignment of Connection Service Index RT:6 CSI:5 TK:1 WRT? RT: TK: CSI: • Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index (Enter 5.) 3: Direct-In Termination (Day and Night Mode) 4: Night Connection Tenant Number Station Number CHAPTER 2 Page 82 Revision 4.

or Night Connection-off Site Extension (CSI = 6).ACSI CM0-02 Business. the ADC must be entered. Hotel • For Direct-In Termination-Outside or Night Connection-Outside Assignment of Connection Service Index 2 RT:2 CSI:7 ADC:11 TK:1 WRT? RT: TK: CSI: ADC: Note: Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index (Enter 7.) 6: Night Connection-Outside 7: Direct-In Termination-Outside (Day and Night Mode) Speed Calling Abbreviated Digit Code When assigning Direct-In Termination-off Site Extension (CSI = 7).0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 83 Revision 4.

Attribute Data 1 is stored as the office data of the switching unit. LLEN. 3. AAST. is stored on the data terminal side and is modified in the course of operation.ADA1 CM0-02 Business. RAST. DSTN List up: LSTN. Function This command is used to assign and delete Attribute Data 1 for each terminal (DTE). Related Reference Command List up: Display: LDA1 DDA1 -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. and is rarely modified in normal operation. DLEN. Hote ADA1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. the operation skips to “WRT?” 4. Precautions • This data can be set for the following TEC (Telephone Equipment Class): TEC = 13 (DTE via Dterm) Refer to command ASDT. RAST Display: ASDT. If ESC key is pressed at the time of attribute data entry. LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 84 Revision 4. LHST. Hotel ness. Attribute Data 2. • • Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). on the other hand.0 ND-45687 (E) . AAST Deletion: ASDT.

Note 2: If. 3 Note 1: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of Attribute Data parameter. that at each data entry. Data entry starts from the Item Number of the parameter designated here. ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Note: Select the desired mode by using the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow) key. or delete DTE Attribute Data 1. however. change. and then operation can be started from Item Number. SPACE + ENTER key is entered.0 .ADA1 CM0-02 Business. then press ENTER. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number Note 4 Note 4: After TN and STN have been entered. Note 3: After the data of the last Item Number has been set or when ESC key is pressed at the time of data entry. “WRT?” is displayed. Hotel 5. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 85 Revision 4. Entry Procedure • Enter the kind of mode. Assignment of DTE Attribute Data-l TN:1 STN:3555 CDN:8 Note 1 WRT? Y FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT MEDIA: CNTP: TCP : FCY : PRI : RST : SRP : CI : 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 Note 2. they will be displayed until the data for CDN = 7 is entered. the cursor returns to parameter CDN. the Item Number is incremented automatically. Note. at the time of data entry. ← ← • To assign.

21 3: V. Hotel CDN: MEDIA (CDN = 1): Counter Display Number Media (1-15) 1: Voice 2: Data 3: FAX 4: TELEX 5: TELETEX 6: Image 7-15: Not used Connection Protocol (0-15) 0: 2400 Protocol 1: X.24 200 Series 4: X.ADA1 CM0-02 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .21 bis 6-15: Not used Transmission Control Protocol (0-255) 0: Free Wheeling 1: Synchronous Non Protocol 2: X.20 2: X.20 bis 5: X.25 3: X.75 4: IBM2780 5: IBM3740 6: IBM3770 7: IBM3780 8: IBM BSC Polled (3270 Terminal) 9: IBM BSC Polling (3270 HOST) 10: IBM SDLC Polled (3270 Terminal) 11: IBM SDLC Polling (3270 HOST) 12: TELETEX 13: TELEX 14: FAX GIII MH 15: FAX GIII MR 16: FAX GIV MH 17: FAX GIV MR 18-255: Not used Facility (0-3) 0: Bothway 1: Outgoing 2: Incoming 3: Not used CNTP (CDN = 2): TCP (CDN = 3): FCY (CDN = 4): CHAPTER 2 Page 86 Revision 4.

0 .ADA1 CM0-02 Business. Hotel PRI (CDN = 5): Priority (0/1) 0: Outgoing 1: Incoming Restriction (0/1) 0: Connection is restricted 1: Connection is not restricted Send Receive Priority (0/1) 0: Data Receive Priority for Called Party 1: Data Send Priority for Called Party Calling Indicator (0/1) 0: CI signal Interval Control 1: CI signal Continuous Control RST (CDN = 6): SRP (CDN = 7): CI (CDN = 8): ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 87 Revision 4.

Related Reference Command Display: DDA2 List up: LDA2 -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT.ADA2 CM0-03 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . LHST. the operation skips to “WRT?” 4. DLEN. press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation on the screen. LLEN. 3. Precautions • • • When the designated station is not a DTE (DA/DM). a zero value means that there is no MODEM. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Attributes requiring a switch setting on the DM can be displayed but cannot be changed by this command and Error code will result if an attempt is made to change these attributes. DSTN List up: LSTN. Hotel ness. RAST. the Attribute Data cannot be assigned and error code will result. LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 88 Revision 4. • • Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). Function This command is used to assign and delete Attribute Data 2 for each terminal (DTE). AAST Deletion: ASDT. Note 1 Note 1: When an error code is displayed. If the ESC key is pressed while entering attributes. Note 1 In the parameter MDM1 and MDM2. Hote ADA2 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 1. RAST Display: ASDT.

TN: STN: CDN: FUNCTION: Tenant Number Station Number Counter Display Number Function corresponding to the CDN is displayed. at the time of data entry.ADA2 CM0-03 Business. Assignment of DTE Attribute Data-2 TN:1 STN:3555 CDN:14 Note 2 WRT? Y FUNC DTR : AUTO: MDM1: MDM2: SPD : PRTY: ASYC: HDX: STOP: CODE: PRFN: HL : HTL : RA : DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note 3. The Item Number is incremented automatically. the cursor returns to parameter CDN. The correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names) is shown below: CDN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FUNCTION DTR AUTO MDM1 MDM2 SPD PRTY ASYC HDX STOP CODE ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 89 Revision 4. Note 4: After the last Item Number has been set or when ESC key is pressed. Note 3: If. Data entry starts from the Item Number of the parameter designated here. 4 Note 2: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of Attribute Data parameter.0 . and operation can be started from Item Number. Hotel • To assign. change. SPACE + RETURN key is entered. “WRT?” is displayed. or delete DTE Attribute Data 2.

0 .ADA2 CM0-03 Business. Hotel 11 12 13 14 PRNF HLT HL RA The parameters of each function are as follows: DTR (CDN = 1): DTR (ER) Control 0: Check 1: No Check Auto Answer (0/1) 0: Manual Answer 1: Auto Answer Originating MODEM Number (0-8) 0: No MODEM 1-8: MODEM Number Incoming MODEM Number (0-8) 0: No MODEM 1-8: MODEM Number Bit Speed Rate (0-31) 0: 50 bps 1: 75 bps 2: 110 bps 3: 150 bps 4: 200 bps 5: 300 bps 6: 600 bps 7: 1200 bps 8: 2400 bps 9: 4800 bps 10: 9600 bps 11: 19.2 K bps 12: 48 K bps (SYNC) 13: 56 K bps (SYNC) 14: 64 K bps (SYNC) 15-31: Not used Parity Addition (0/1) 0: No Parity 1: Parity Asynchronous (0/1) 0: Asynchronous 1: Synchronous ND-45687 (E) AUTO (CDN = 2): MDM1 (CDN = 3): MDM2 (CDN = 4): SPD (CDN = 5): PRTY (CDN = 6): ASYC (CDN = 7): CHAPTER 2 Page 90 Revision 4.

110 5: V. 120 6: X.30 7-15: Not used STOP (CDN = 9): CODE (CDN = 10): PRFN (CDN = 11): HL (CDN = 12): HTL (CDN = 13): RA (CDN = 14): Note: In the case of PROTIMS.0 . Hotel HDX (CDN = 8): Half/Full Duplex (0/1) 0: Full Duplex 1: Half Duplex Stop Bit (0/1) 0: 1 Bit 1: 2 Bit Kind of Data (0-15) 0: No Character 1: ASCII (7-bit) Even Parity 2: ASCII (7-bit) Odd Parity 3: ASCII (7-bit) Parity is “0” 4: ASCII (7-bit) Parity is “1” 5: JIS (7-bit) Even Parity 6: JIS (7-bit) Odd Parity 7: JIS (8-bit) 8: EBCDIC (8-bit) 9: IA#5 (7-bit) 10: ITA#2(5-bit) 11: EBCD 12-15: Not used Profile Number (0-63) Hot Line Terminal (0/1) 0: No Hotline 1: Hotline Hot Line Origination (0/1) 0: DTR (ER) Signal On 1: Normal Origination Kind of RA (0-15) 0: PROTIMS 1: PROTlMS 2: DMI Mode 2 3: PROTIMS 4: V. assign “0”.ADA2 CM0-03 Business. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 91 Revision 4.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. it is necessary to assign the following in advance: ASYD command. Compose a Dial Intercom Group with Dterm stations of the same TN (Tenant Number) under the same MG (Module Group). Related Reference Command List Up: LDIM CHAPTER 2 Page 92 Revision 4. b7 = 1. Precautions • For providing Dial Intercom Service. From 1 to 50 Dial Intercom Groups can be composed on each MG (Module Group) basis. delete and display of Dial Intercom Group Number for Dial Intercom service and of the station Numbers of Dterm stations which constitute the Dial Intercom Group. Hote ADIM Assignment of Dial Intercom Data 1. Index 59. Hotel ness.0 ND-45687 (E) . enter “My Line” Station Number of Dterm station. 3. • • • To parameter “ICMSTN” (Dial Intercom Station Number).ADIM CM0-03 Business. 4. SYS1. Function This command is used to assign. The number of Dterm stations that can be accommodated in a Dial Intercom Group and also the number of digits for Call Number (Dial Intercom STN) are determined by parameter “N” (Dial Intercom Digit Number).

0 . Hotel 5.) 0: one (1) digit (0-9) Dial Intercom STN Bridge Call Restriction (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Number of Intercom STN (2-10) Tenant Number Intercom Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 93 Revision 4. Entry Procedure • For one digit Dial Intercom STN Assignment of Dial Intercom Data MG N0:1 G-ID:1 N:0 BCR:0 ICMCT:10 TN:1 Dial Intercom STN ICM STN Dial Intercom STN ICM STN 0 11000 1 11001 2 11002 3 11003 4 11004 5 11005 6 11006 7 11007 8 11008 9 11009 WRT? MG NO: G-ID: N: BCR: ICMCT: TN: ICM STN: Module Group Number Group ID Number (1-50) Dial Intercom Digit Number (0/1) (Enter 0.ADIM CM0-03 Business.

0 ND-45687 (E) .) 1: two (2) digits (00-31) Dial Intercom STN Bridge Call Restriction (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Number of Intercom STN (2-32) Tenant Number Intercom Station Number CHAPTER 2 Page 94 Revision 4. Hotel • For two digits Dial Intercom STN Assignment of Dial Intercom Data MG N0:1 G-ID:1 N:1 BCR:O ICMCT:32 TN:1 Dial Intercom STN ICM STN Dial Intercom STN ICM STN 00 11000 16 11016 01 11001 17 11017 02 11002 18 11018 03 11003 19 11019 04 11004 20 11020 05 11005 21 11021 06 11006 22 11022 07 11007 23 11023 08 11008 24 11024 09 11009 25 11025 10 11010 26 11026 11 11011 27 11027 12 11012 28 11028 13 11013 29 11029 14 11014 30 11030 15 11015 31 11031 WRT? MG NO: G-ID: N: BCR: ICMCT: TN: ICM STN: Module Group Number Group ID Number (1-50) Dial Intercom Digit Number (0/1) (Enter 1.ADIM CM0-03 Business.

Related Reference Command List up: 5. Business ADPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data 1. 3. Hotel .ADPC CM0-08 CCIS. Precautions • Assign “12” to LSG of the Route Class Data corresponding to the Route Number. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. deleting. Function This command is used for assigning. 4. Entry Procedure LDPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data RT: 1 PC: 10 WRT? RT: PC: Route Number Determinate Point Code (1-16383) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 95 Revision 4.0 . Business. and displaying the Determinate Point Code corresponding to the Route Number.

bit 1). INDEX 94. This restriction data is assigned between RSC1 (Calling Party’s Restriction Class) and RSC2 (Called Party’s Restriction Class). AOPR List up: LRTC. Function This command is used to assign and display Facility Restriction Class (FRL) data. 3.AEFR CM0-02 Business. LOPR CHAPTER 2 Page 96 Revision 4. Related Reference Command List up: LEFR -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC.0 ND-45687 (E) . 4. Bit 1. Hote AEFR Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. INDEX 59. Precautions • This data has Tenant table development (ASYD. Hotel ness. SYS1.

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 97 Revision 4. are automatically incremented. RSC2. Hotel 5. RSC1.0 .AEFR CM0-02 Business. Entry Procedure Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction DAY/NIGHT/URGENT:D TN:1 FRI:0 RSC1:0 RSC2:0 RES:0 WRT? DAY/NIGHT/URGENT: Day/Night/Urgent Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode U: Urgent Mode TN: Tenant Number FRI: Facility Restriction Index (0-31) 0: STA to STA (Dial Access) 1: STA to STA (Via ATTCON) 2: STA to TRK (Dial Access) 3: STA to TRK (Via ATTCON) 4: TRK to STA (Dial Access) 5: TRK to STA (Via ATTCON) 6: TRK to TRK (Dial Access) 7: TRK to TRK (Via ATTCON) 8-31: Not used RSC1: Calling Restriction Class (0-15) RSC2: Called Restriction Class (0-15) RES: Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Note: Parameters FRI.

Function This command is used to assign.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. corresponding to eight circuits of the PFT circuit card. Hote AEKD Assignment of External Key Data 1. Hotel ness.AEKD CM0-02 Business. 4. The external key can control two PFT circuit cards per MG (16 circuits). delete and display data for Day/Night control via an external key of the PFT circuit card. Precautions • A maximum of eight (0-7) external keys can be assigned. Entry Procedure LEKD Assignment External Key Data MG:0 NCU PKG:0 CTN:0 CP:2 CNT:1 TN:1 WRT? MG: NCU PKG: CTN: CP: CNT: TN: Module Group Number (00-31) PFT Circuit Card Number (0/1) External Key Number (0-7) Change Control Pattern (1-4) 1: Not used 2: Day/Night Change 3: Not used 4: Not used Number of Input Parameters (Enter the number of Tenants) (1-8) Tenant Number CHAPTER 2 Page 98 Revision 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. 3.

respectively. 3. 24 digits) CALLED: Called Number (Max. When the parameter VRY (Verification of Connection) is assigned as “1”. delete and display Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 99 Revision 4. Hotel AEVT Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS 1. Precautions • • This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program. Function This command is used to assign. 4.AEVT CM0-11 Business. Entry Procedure LEVT Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS RT: TK: DESTINATION: CALLING: CALLED: C_RT: C_TK: VRY: WRT? RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number DESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 6 digits) CALLING: Calling Number (Max. connection is not established. 24 digits) C_RT: CCIS Signal Route Number C_TK: CCIS Signal Trunk Number VRY: Verification of Connection 0: Not required 1: Required OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC Service (0-4095) Note RA: Order of Route Advance of CBC Service (0-7) Note Note: This parameter appears when Route Number (RT) and Trunk Number (TK) is the same as CCIS Signal Route Number (C_RT) and CCIS Signal Trunk Number (C_TK).0 . if the received number is not the same as the called number assigned in the parameter CALLED. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Related Reference Command List up: 5.

This command requires confirmation of the designated terminal equipment. Related Reference Command List up: LFCD CHAPTER 2 Page 100 Revision 4. additional data is to be assigned after pressing the ENTER key. Function This command is used to assign (connect link). b. and display the data (linked LENS) pertaining to Fixed Connections (Nailed Down Connections). the link will be released by this command. • • • • 4. it means that the last operation is still being executed. If the link is not in a “Nailed Down Connection”. 3. e. The display “EXECUTING” means that the terminal equipment is being released or connected to a link. etc. • Ordinary Telephone Trunk Digital Signaling Trunk MODEM Trunk Conference Trunk Data Module Dterm [DATA] (Line circuit) (DTI. The next operation will wait until the current operation has been completed. If the designated terminal equipment is in the busy state. Hote AFCD Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data 1. delete (release link). g.) (DST) (MDMT) (CFT) (DM) (DLC) If “CONTROL MEMORY BUSY” is displayed when assigning data via this command. the link will be forcibly released and reconnected.AFCD CM0-03 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Therefore.0 ND-45687 (E) . The status of the link is supervised periodically by the CPU. d. f. Precautions • The types of terminal equipment utilized for these connections are indicated below: a. Hotel ness. c.

Entry Procedure Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data LENS-A:000001 EAD-A:00 LENS-B:000002 EAD-B:00 WRT? LENS-A: EAD-A: LENS-B: EAD-B: [LENS] Line Equipment Number (Side-A) Equipment Additional Data (00-1F. Hexadecimal) Line Equipment Number (Side-B) Equipment Additional Data (00-1F.AFCD CM0-03 Business. Hotel 5.0 . Hexadecimal) XX X XX X Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 101 Revision 4.

where 003 is the access code. Example: ignore 003. All digits Some portions ignored. deleting. 3. When the Calling Forwarding Destination is a trunk line.AFCP CM0-09 Business. and displaying the Call Forwarding Destination for the Call Forwarding-Recognition Service of ISDN. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. The entire number is ignored. Function This command is used for assigning. Related Reference Command List up: LFCP CHAPTER 2 Page 102 Revision 4. reverting back to traditioned Call Forwarding services. Hotel siness. 4. assign the Abbreviated Digit Code for the trunk line using the ASPD command.0 ND-45687 (E) . b. c. The “Calling Party” may be treated as: a. tel AFCP Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number 1. Precautions • • • The Call Forwarding Destination can be assigned on the basis of the Calling Party Number or the Calling Party Attribute.

+ Calling No. 32 digits) Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3) 0: Call Forwarding-All Calls 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Direct-In Termination Information Transfer Capability (0-3) 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data) 2: Audio (MODEM) 3: Not used Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 0 (Station)] Station Number of Call Forwarding Destination (Max. Entry Procedure • When the Call Forwarding Destination is a station Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:0 STN:4000 WRT? DAY/ NIGHT: TN: CALLING PARTY: CFSI: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Called No. Hotel 5.0 .AFCP CM0-09 Business. (Max. 5 digits) ITC: CFD: STN: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 103 Revision 4.

+ Calling No.AFCP CM0-09 Business. 32 digits) Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3) 0: Call Forwarding-All Calls 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Direct-In Termination Information Transfer Capability (0-3) 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data) 2: Audio (MODEM) 3: Not used Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 1 (ATT)] ITC: CFD: CHAPTER 2 Page 104 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . (Max. Hotel • When the Call Forwarding Destination is an attendant console Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:1 DAY/ NIGHT: TN: CALLING PARTY: CFSI: Day/Night Mode (D/N) D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Called No.

(Max. Hotel • When the Call Forwarding Destination is a trunk line Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:2 ADC: 100 WRT? DAY/ NIGHT: TN: CALLING PARTY: CFSI: Day/Night Mode (D/N) D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Called No. a maximum of three (3) digits can be assigned. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 105 Revision 4. 32 digits) Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3) 0: Call Forwarding-All Calls 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Direct-In Termination Information Transfer Capability (0-3) 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data) 2: Audio (MODEM) 3: Not used Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 2 (Outside)] Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note ITC: CFD: ADC: Note: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system.0 . + Calling No.AFCP CM0-09 Business.

0 ND-45687 (E) . 3. Precautions • After an Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in this command. at the time of setting 91213. When data has been assigned in this command. the access code must be included. all assignments are deleted. Route Number (RT) is assigned to the Type of Service parameter (LCR or LCRS) in the ASPA (Assignment of Special Access Code) command. Example: • • • • When assigning 90 and 900 to NPC: Number Input Number for NPC 90 90T 900 900 • FLG 1 0 When an NPC is assigned for the first time. (For example. OTHER OPR is momentarily displayed and all assignments in this parameter are deleted. This parameter will assign to the same OPR all other numbers in the same sequence which differ only by the last digit.AFRS CM0-02 Business.) If no assignment is to be made in OTHER OPR. and 91214-9 in OTHER OPR. Function This command is used to assign. If zero (0) is assigned. tel AFRS Assignment of Flexible Route Selection 1. and display area and/or office code data for the related OPR. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. When assigning such a number as shown below to parameter “NPC”. it is necessary to assign alternate route information in the AOPR (Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing) command. It should be noted that the access code may or may not be included in the Number Pattern Code (NPC) depending upon the assignment of CDN 13 (AC) in the ARTD command. the access code is not included.) • • CHAPTER 2 Page 106 Revision 4. OTHER OPR is displayed. When deleting an NPC for which all other last digits are assigned to the same OPR. If one (1) is assigned. Reverse Numbering Plan Data with respect to the Route Number must also be assigned in the ARNP (Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data) command. delete. press SPACE + ENTER. the OPR for 91210-2 and 91214-9 can be set by OTHER OPR. always assign “1” to parameter “FLG”. (For example. Hotel siness. when deleting 91213 and the same OPR has been assigned for 91210-2.

NPA. and or NXX.0 . Related Reference Command List up: LFRS -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter OPRAssignment: AOPR Deletion: AOPR Display: AOPR List up: LOPR 5. This data sometimes may need the assignment of the Trunk Route access code. Entry Procedure Assignment of Flexible Route Selection TN:1 RT:1 FLG = 0 NPC:91213 OPR:0 TN: RT: FLG: NPC: OPR: OTHER OPR: Tenant Number Route Number Number Pattern Code Flag (0/1) Number Pattern Code NPC is the Toll Distinctive Code (TDC).AFRS CM0-02 Business. Hotel 4. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 107 Revision 4. Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) Other Outgoing Route Selection Pattern (0-255) “OTHER OPR” is used when the Number Pattern Codes to be assigned to an OPR differ only by the last digit. and all numbers in the sequence (0-9) are to be assigned. This data can be a maximum of twelve (12) digits.

the Hot Line station must be assigned a TEC of 13.AHLS CM0-02 Business. tel AHLS Assignment of Hot Line Station 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Precautions • • • A hot line station is assigned by assigning the called party’s data to the station to be employed. Function This command is used to assign. Hotel siness. 14 or 18 in the ASDT/AAST command. RAST ASDT. LHST. DSTN LSTN. delete and display the destination of a Hot Line station. the current data must be deleted before the new data is assigned. LLEN.0 ND-45687 (E) . RAST. 3. the called party’s data is also deleted in this command. Related Reference Commands List up: LHLS -Parameter STNAssignment: Deletion: Display: List up: ASDT. When changing the called party’s hot line data. When deleting a Hot Line station. Prior to this assignment. DLEN. LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 108 Revision 4. 4. AAST ASDT.

0 . Hotel 5.AHLS CM0-02 Business. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 109 Revision 4. Note When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system.) 2: ADC Opposite Pady’s Tenant Number Speed Calling Code (4 Digits) Use the Code assigned in command ASPD.) 1: STN Opposite Party’s Tenant Number Opposite Party’s Station Number Assignment of Hot Line Station HOT TN:1 TYPE:2 CON TN:1 ADC:123 STN:3112 WRT? HOT TN: STN: TYPE: CON TN: ADC: Note: Hot Line Tenant Number Hot Line Station Number Connection Type (Enter 2. a maximum of three (3) digits can be assigned. Entry Procedure • For Station: Assignment of Hot Line Station HOT TN:1 TYPE:1 CON TN:1 WRT? STN:3111 STN:3112 HOT TN: STN: TYPE: CON TN: STN: For ADC: Hot Line Tenant Number Hot line Station Number Connection Type (Enter 1.

AHLS CM0-02 Business.) 3: Trunk Line Opposite Party’s Route Number Trunk Number CHAPTER 2 Page 110 Revision 4. Hotel • For Trunk Line Appearance: Assignment of Hot Line Station HOT TN:1 TYPE:3 CON RT:1 TK:1 STN:3112 HOT TN: STN: TYPE: CON RT: TK: Hot Line Tenant Number Hot Line Station Number Connection Type (Enter 3.0 ND-45687 (E) .

0 . Entry Procedure LHMS 000050 000070 000090 000110 000130 000150 000170 000190 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 001050 001070 001090 001110 001130 001150 001170 001190 Assignment of Hold Music Data RT:1 HMSC:7 WRT? RT: HMSC: Route Number Hold Music Data (0-15) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 111 Revision 4. HMSC LENS of DAT HMSC LENS of DAT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Precautions • The relationship between parameter “HMSC” and LENs of Hold Music Equipment (DAT card) is as shown in the table below. 3. When assigning this data. tel AHMS Assignment of Hold Music Data 1. Function This command is used to assign and delete the LENs of Music on Hold Equipment (DAT card) according to routes. Hotel siness. the DAT card must be mounted in the mounting slot specified.AHMS CM0-04 Business. Related Reference Command List up: 5.

Related Reference Command List up: LHMS2 CHAPTER 2 Page 112 Revision 4. it cannot also be assigned in Tenant Number of Held Station and Route Number of Held Trunk. Precautions If a Route is assigned in Route Number of Held Trunk. Hotel siness. tel AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data 1.AHMS2 CM0-04 Business. The total number of music inputs using Expanded Music on Hold Service is sixteen (16). it cannot be programmed in Route Number of Held Trunk. 4. therefore the music input to the 8TLTR card must match. and if a Route is programmed in Tenant Number of Held Station and Route Number of Held Trunk. The 8TLTR card is the only circuit card that is supported for these multiple music inputs. 3. Function This command is used to assign and delete the LENs of Music on Hold Equipment (DAT card) according to routes. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2.0 ND-45687 (E) . The 8TLTR card may be set for either 600 ohms impedance or 900 ohms impedance.

IMGx = 1 ~ 31 IMGxh. MMG/UMG (ICS) = 1 ~ 255 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 113 Revision 4.AHMS2 CM0-04 Business.0 .255 (Note 2) HMSC: 0 WRT? RT: HMSC: Route Number (Note 2) Hold Music Data (0-15) Note 2: IMG (ICS). Hotel 5. IMGdxh. Entry Procedure • Assignment Based on Tenant Number of Hold Station Assignment of Hold Music Data TYPE: Extension Hold Music Data Kind ENTRY: Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select RETURN: Execute Tenant Number of HOLD Station Route Number of Held Trunk Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk TN: xx (Note 1) HMSC: 0 STA: 0 WRT? TN: HMSC: STA: Tenant Number (Note 1) Hold Music Data (0-15) Extension Hold Station Data 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Note 1: IMG (ICS). IMGdxh. MMG/UMG (ICS) = 1 ~ 63 • Assignment Based on Route Number of Held Trunk Assignment of Hold Music Data TYPE: ENTRY: Extension Hold Music Data Kind Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select RETURN: Execute Tenant Number of HOLD Station Route Number of Held Trunk Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk RT: 1 . IMGx = 1 ~ 15 IMGxh.

AHMS2 CM0-04 Business. Hotel • Assignment Based on Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk Assignment of Hold Music Data TYPE: Extension Hold Music Data Kind ENTRY: Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select RETURN:Execute Tenant Number of HOLD Station Route Number of Held Trunk Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk TN: xx RT: 1.255 HMSC: 0 .15 WRT? TN: RT: HMSC: Tenant Number Route Number Hold Music Data (0-15) CHAPTER 2 Page 114 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .

3. tel AICD Assignment of Intercom Data 1. press the F1 (Help) key to display more information. Function This command assigns and deletes Intercom Station Numbers to Intercom Groups. Hotel siness. Precautions • • When assignment of a Signaling Station with no Intercom Station Number is attempted. an error code will result. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.AICD CM0-03 Business. Note When an error code is displayed. Note: 4. Related Reference Command List up: LICD ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 115 Revision 4. an error code will result. Note When assignment of a Signaling Station with the same number as the Intercom Station is attempted.0 .

Enter as many as designated in paramter ICMCT The Signaling Station is the station at which the Intercom Station will ring down.: G-ID: A/M: BCR: ICMCT: TN: ICM STN: SIG STN: Note: Module Group Number (00-31) Group ID Number (1-50) Automatic/Manual Intercom 0: Automatic 1: Manual Intercom Bridge Restriction 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Number of Intercom stations in the group (2-16) Tenant Number Intercom Station Number .AICD CM0-03 Business. Hotel 5.0 ND-45687 (E) .Enter as many as designated in paramter ICMCT Signaling Station Number . 1 2 3 ICM STN 3000 3001 3002 SIG STN 3001 3002 3003 Numbers entered in parameter ICMCT WRT? Y MG No. CHAPTER 2 Page 116 Revision 4. Entry Procedure Assignment of Intercom Data MG: 0 G-ID:1 A/M:0 BCR:1 ICMCT:3 TN:1 NO.

16 digits) ID Code (Max. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 117 Revision 4. Precautions • • This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-13 2. Related Reference Command None 5. 4. see the System Data Design Manual. Entry Procedure Assignment of User ID Data NO: USER NAME: ID CODE: RETYPE ID CODE: WRT? NO: USER NAME: ID CODE: RETYPE ID CODE: Assignment Number (1-15) User Name (Max. 3. which are available for the 6200-version software or higher: • • Audit Trail to Track the MAT usage Lock Out Maintenance Port For detailed information on these services.AIDD CM0-13 Business. Alphanumeric characters are used for the parameters USER NAME and ID CODE. Function This command is used to assign. delete and display User ID data for the following services. Hotel AIDD Assignment of User ID Data 1. 8 digits) Enter the above ID code again.0 .

Related Reference Command None 5. Note: • • After you press ENTER. • When the IOC attribute data is changed.1 are not accommodated.S.S. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 118 Revision 4. Entry Procedure a. the port number may be displayed as [0123****] or [****4567]. select “System Monitoring Function Is Provided/Not Provided. (Depending on the mounting status of the circuit cards. In case the terminal is MAT.A.0 . Assigned ports are numbered. 3.” (FAULT MESSAGE) If any other item has been designated. no display will be made. the IOC card will be initialized. tel AIOC Assignment of IOC Port Data 1. CMAT is not used in the U. etc. Function By this command. Precautions • Port numbers which can be entered are displayed under the Port Number.A. Hotel siness. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. activation of this command will result in an error message.) In case IOC-0. attribute data of various terminals connected with the IOC can be assigned. (0-7) 0 TERMINAL PRINTER/MCI MAT CMAT SMDR ATM Module FAULT MESSAGE ___ IN PORT NUMBER: I/O Port Number (0-7) Note: MAT is used in the U. which will clear the port function memory. 4. To select the type of terminal: Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. only the data you selected will display. Unassigned ports are indicated by an asterisk (*). Type of Terminal and Communication System data are to be assigned to IOC Ports 0-7.AIOC CM0-03 Business.

Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No.AIOC CM0-03 Business. Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. When MAT has been designated as the type of terminal: • The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed. Hotel b. (0-7) 1 SPEED (bps) 4800 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 CHARACTER BIT 8 bit 7 bit TERMINAL PRINTER/MCI STOP BIT 2 bit 1 bit 1+1/2 bit 2 bit PARITY BIT NON ODD EVEN NON DATA CHANGE Yes / No c. When Printer/MCI has been designated as the type of terminal: • The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.0 . (0-7) 0 TERMINAL MAT FAULT MESSAGE __ SPEED (bps) 4800 IN DATA CHANGE Yes / No ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 119 Revision 4.

Hotel d. Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. (0-7) 1 PROTOCOL Free-wheeling BSC (Polling) BSC (Contention) TERMINAL SPEED (bps) 4800 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 SMDR PARITY BIT NON ODD EVEN NON STOP BIT 2 bit 1 bit 1+1/2 bit 2 bit CHARACTER BIT 8 bit 7 bit DATA CHANGE Yes / No e. When SMDR (BSC) has been designated as the type of terminal.AIOC CM0-03 Business. Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. When the protocol has been designated as Non Protocol (Free Wheel) • When SMDR (Non Protocol) has been designated as the type of terminal. • The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.(0-7) 1 PROTOCL BSC Polling TERMINAL SPEED (bps) 4800 SMDR PARITY BIT NON STOP BIT 2 bit SYNC SIGNAL ST1 ST2 CHARACTER BIT 8 bit 7 bit SYNC CHARACTER Bi-sync Mono-sync DATA CHANGE Yes / No CHAPTER 2 Page 120 Revision 4. the data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.0 ND-45687 (E) .

Hotel f.0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 121 Revision 4. Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. When ATM Module has been designated as the type of terminal ( Note 1): • The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.(0-7) 2TERMINALATM Module SPEED (bps)PARITY bitSTOP bit 9 6 0 0N O N1 bit CHARACTER bitATM Module No. 8 bit #1 #2 #3 DATA CHANGE Yes /No Note 1: Available on 6200-version software and later.AIOC CM0-03 Business.

When assigning the individual speed calling entry area of the Attendant Console. use the Specific Attendant Number previously assigned in the ASAT command. AGST Deletion: ASDT. Hotel siness. There are 100 blocks per MG. The master station and slave stations must be stored in the same MG. RAST. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. 4. • SLV (Slave Station) The speed calling area assigned to the master station is shared by the slave stations. delete and display the number of speed calling codes assigned to each individual station. therefore. the speed calling codes assigned cannot be changed by a slave station. DLEN. tel AISA Assignment of Individual Speed Calling 1. LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 122 Revision 4. The speed calling codes assigned to that specific station can be changed. • • • • One block consists of 10 speed calling codes. RGST Display: ASDT. Function This command is used to assign. LLEN. RGST. 3. DSTN List up: LSTN. Precautions • MST (Master Station) A speed calling area is assigned to a specific station. RAST.AISA CM0-02 Business. LHST.0 ND-45687 (E) . AAST. Related Reference Command List up: LSDA -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT.

) M: Master Station Number of Blocks (1-10) For Slave Station: Assignment of Individual Speed Calling TN:1 STN:3111 MST/SLV:S STN:3112 BLOCK:1 TN: STN: MST/SLV: S: STN: BLOCK: Tenant Number Station Number Station type (Enter S.0 . Hotel 5.AISA CM0-02 Business.) Slave Station Master Station Number Number of Blocks (1-10) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 123 Revision 4. Entry Procedure • For Master Station: Assignment of Individual Speed Calling TN:1 STN:3112 MST/ SLV:M BLOCK:1 TN: STN: MST/SLV: BLOCK: • Tenant Number Station Number Station type (Enter M.

AISD CM0-04 Business. Precautions None. 3.0 ND-45687 (E) . and display the destination number of Individual Speed Calling on each station basis. LHST. DLEN List Up: LSTN. LLEN. 24 digits) CHAPTER 2 Page 124 Revision 4. tel AISD Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data 1. LHEN 5. Entry Procedure • Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data TN: 1 STN: 2000 FNC: 1 SPD: 00 TEL: TN: STN: FNC: SPD: TEL: Tenant Number Station Number Function (Enter 1) 1: Assignment Speed Calling Digit Code (2 digits) Telephone Number (Max. RGST Display: ASDT. RAST. Function This command is used to assign. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. delete. DSTN. RGST. AGST Deletion: ASDT. RAST. AAST. Related Reference Command -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. Hotel siness. 4.

Hotel • Display of Individual Speed Calling Data Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data TN: 1 STN: 2000 FNC: 2 SPD: TEL 00 XXXXX 01 XXXXX 02 XXXXX 03 XXXXX 04 XXXXX SPD: TEL 05 XXXXX 06 XXXXX 07 XXXXX 08 XXXXX 09 XXXXX The Speed Calling Digits code and the Telephone Number are displayed here.AISD CM0-04 Business. TN: STN: FNC: Tenant Number Station Number Function (Enter 2) 2: Display ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 125 Revision 4.0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) . 4. 4 digits) CHAPTER 2 Page 126 Revision 4. Precautions • Before using this command. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Related Reference Command List up: 5. delete. 3. Function This command is used to assign. tel AISP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern 1. Entry Procedure LSLP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern PNI:1 DC:44 WRT? PNI: DC: Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15) Additional Digit Information (Max. Hotel siness. and display additional digit information with respect to the Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number. it must be confirmed that an Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNI) has been assigned in the ASTP (Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern) command.AISP CM0-02 Business.

To insert a station in the group. Irrespective of tenant data table development. One D term station can be assigned to multiple Internal Zone Paging groups. Precautions • • • • • • • • • This command is used for Business system only. use the “INSERT” key. If the designated group number has already been assigned. If “N” is entered. Each Internal Zone Paging group must be composed of Dterm stations (TEC = 12). change and delete Internal Zone Paging group data. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to assign. In the ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode. a maximum of 24 stations can be assigned to one Internal Zone Paging group. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 127 Revision 4. “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. the operation returns to tenant number entry. any Dterm station in the system can be assigned to an Internal Zone Paging group. In the ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode. 6100-version software or later must be installed in the system. A maximum of 99 groups can be assigned to one tenant. if there are no data for the group. the mode changes to ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode. 3. In the DELETION mode. the old data must be deleted before entering new data. the current data is displayed. If new data is to be assigned.0 . If “Y” is entered. use the “DELETE” key for deletion of a station in the group.AIZP CM0-11 Business siness AIZP Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data 1.

This key is used when it is desired to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Internal Zone Paging Group station entry. Related Reference Command List up : 5.AIZP CM0-11 Business • Special Key Table These keys are effective in ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode. 4. This key is used when it is desired to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of group station entry. DELETION Mode Selection ASSIGNMENT :Cursor up key. Entry Procedure • Enter the kind of mode. KEY FUNCTION ESC INSERT DELETE This key is used when it is desired to skip entry operation at the time of Internal Zone Paging Group station entry.0 ND-45687 (E) . LIZP • Select the desired mode by using arrow key and press the ENTER key. Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data Operation Mode? ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE Mode Activation :Enter key. :Cursor down key. the operation skips to “WRT?”. If this key is pressed. CHAPTER 2 Page 128 Revision 4.

If “N” is entered.AIZP CM0-11 Business • To assign an Internal Zone Paging group Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data TN :1 IZPG :24 WRT? Y ASSIGNMENT TN : Tenant Number IZPG : Internal Zone Paging Group (1-99) IZPTN : IZP Tenant Number IZPSTN :IZP Station CNT --1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: IZPTN ----1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IZPSTN -----1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 CNT --9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: IZPTN ----98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 IZPSTN -----2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 CNT --17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: IZPTN ----123 123 123 123 123 123 123 123 IZPSTN -----3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 TN : IZPG : IZPTN : IZPSTN : Tenant number of calling station Internal Zone Paging group (01-99) Tenant number of IZPSTN Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group. data assignment is complete. “WRT?” appears. If “Y” is entered.0 . the operation returns to tenant number entry. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 129 Revision 4.) • When all the data is entered or ESC key is pressed.

AIZP CM0-11 Business • To delete an Internal Zone Paging group.) • After the assigned data is displayed. Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data TN :1 IZPG :24 DEL? Y DELETION TN : Tenant Number IZPG : Internal Zone Paging Group (1-99) IZPTN : IZP Tenant Number IZPSTN :IZP Station CNT --1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: IZPTN ----1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IZPSTN -----1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 CNT --9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: IZPTN ----2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 IZPSTN -----2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 CNT --17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: IZPTN ----3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 IZPSTN -----3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 TN : IZPG : IZPTN : IZPSTN : Tenant number of calling station Internal Zone Paging group (01-99) Tenant number of IZPSTN Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group. and the operation returns to tenant number entry. “DEL?” appears. If “Y” is entered. the display and the actual data are cleared. If “N” is entered. CHAPTER 2 Page 130 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . only the display is cleared and the operation returns to tenant number entry.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. If the default data is to be used. Function This command is used to assign.0 . tel AKYD Assignment of Key Data for Dterm 1.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. TYPE OF Dterm LINE/FEATURE BUTTON NUMBER OF BUTTONS 8-button type 16-button type 24-button type 8 (KYN = 1-8) 16 (KYN = 1-6) 24 (KYN = 1-24) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 131 Revision 4. siness. Hotel CD. delete. Figure 2-4 through Figure 2-6 show the association between line/feature buttons and the button number (key number: KYN) of the Dterm series. assignment in AKYD is not necessary. Business. and display the following key data corresponding to each line/feature buttons of Dterm: • • • Line Key Data Function Key Data Intercom Key Data The Dterm (16-button type and 24-button) has the default key data (Refer to (3) “Precautions”). Note: The table below shows the specification pertaining to data assignment for the D term series.

Hotel 01 05 02 06 03 07 04 08 Line/Feature Buttons MICO 1 2 ABC 4 GHI 7 PQRS 5 JKL 3 DEF 6 MNO FNC RECALL 8 TUV 0 OPER 9 WXYD CNF * # LINE /SPD HOLD TRF ANS SPKR Figure 2-4 D term (8-Button Type) CHAPTER 2 Page 132 Revision 4.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .

Hotel 01 05 09 013 02 06 010 014 03 07 011 015 04 08 Line/Feature 012 016 Buttons MICO 1 2 ABC 3 DEF RECALL 4 GHI 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 OPER 6 MNO 9 WXYD CNF FNC 7 PQRS * # LINE /SPD HOLD TRF ANS SPKR Figure 2-5 Dterm (16-Button Type) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 133 Revision 4.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. Business.0 .

CHAPTER 2 Page 134 Revision 4. Business. use the ATNR command and clear the “Tenant to Tenant Restriction”. A “Sub Line” can be assigned not only to a D term but to any conventional telephone. Hotel 01 07 13 19 MICO 02 08 14 20 03 09 15 21 04 10 16 22 05 11 17 23 06 12 18 24 Line/Feature Buttons 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYD # CNF 4 10 FNC 2 8 RECALL 1 7 4 GHI 7 PQRS 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 OPER 3 9 * LINE /SPD 5 11 HOLD TRF ANS SPKR 6 12 Figure 2-6 Dterm (24-Button Type) 3. Precautions • Before assigning the key data for Dterm by this command. The “My Line” corresponds to the physical port associated with the LENS of a DLC/ELC card.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. A station line other than My Line is referred to as a “Sub Line”. Note: • By assigning another station line to a function button via this command an incoming call terminated to a station line other than My Line can be answered or can be transferred to elsewhere as in the case of the My Line.0 ND-45687 (E) . be sure to assign the station data (TN. the station data for My Line and Sub Line must be assigned via the ASDT/AAST command before the key data is assigned. In addition. When the Sub Line and the My Line belong to different tenants. STN. TEC = 12 (Dterm)) of the D term by ASDT/AAST command. The station number assigned by ASDT/AAST command is referred to as “My Line”.

Business.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. the default data is used or the Add-On Module is used. The virtual LENS is assigned by the ASDT/AAST command in the same way as for an ordinary line. (The telephone class is TEC = 18: Virtual Line) • Note: • The Dterm (16-button type) provides 16 line/feature buttons. Virtual Line-----A virtual LENS exists only in memory. Hotel • A Multi-Line key (the key for My Line and Sub Line) on the Dterm can be assigned as “Prime Line”. ex. Station data can be assigned using the ASDT/AAST command unless a key is changed. If the Prime Line is not assigned. The ability to assign line appearances across module groups is available when system one index 321 bit0 = 1. A virtual line can be assigned as a Sub Line of the Dterm. The virtual line can be used the same way as the My Line for outgoing calls and other service operations. stations within module group 2 can appear on stations in module group 3. LENS = 000311. stations within module group 4 can appear on stations in module group 5 and stations within module group 6 can appear on stations in module group 7. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 135 Revision 4. assignments using the AKYD command will not be necessary.15 SPEED-CALL ONE TOUCH If the default data is to be used. The default data for each line/feature button is as follows: 1 Pickup 9 PRIME LINE 2 FWDBY 10 3 FWD- 4 OVERRIDE 12 5 VOICE 6 MSG 7 S&R 8 LAST# 11 13 14 15 16 SYSSPEED KEYS 10 . Data can be assigned but no hardware is provided for it. The way this functions is that stations within module group 0 can appear on stations within module group 1. All buttons must be programmed if any of the default data is changed. When the user goes off-hook. but does not exist physically. This feature is available for D term Series III instruments only.0 . the My Line serves as the Prime Line. the Prime Line is automatically selected on the D term.

The following function keys are basically fixed: FKY = 13: FKY = 18: FKY = 20: FKY = 28: FKY = 51: FKY = 52: FKY = 57: c. The default key data provided for Dterm (16-button type) is also provided for the Dterm (24-button type).0 ND-45687 (E) . only one key is required to activate the features. separate function keys must be assigned.-Busy Line and C. Hotel When assigning the line/feature buttons as function keys. If common access codes are assigned. (Numbers larger than 16 are for feature application). refer to ASYD SYS1 Index 5 (separate/common access for C. b. When assigning the key data of the line/feature button. assign “1” to parameter LN PRE. Also. take the following precautions: a. take the following precautions: a. b. assign ORG (Originate) button as a function button. • CHAPTER 2 Page 136 Revision 4.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. My Line in KYN = 17-24 cannot be assigned without assigning any Line Key or any Function Key in KYN = 1-16. CONF (Three-Way Calling) TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls) HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold) ANSWER MIC SPEAKER RECALL Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used). (Refer to Figure 2-4): FKY = 13: FKY = 18: FKY = 20: FKY = 28: FKY = 51: FKY = 52: FKY = 57: d. Business. Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned as KYI = 0 (Not used) The following function keys are basically fixed. For Call Forwarding-Busy Line and Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer. My Line Key must be programmed. • • The FKY = 49: Speed Calling-One Touch cannot be assigned to a Key Number (KYN) larger than 16. For Dterm (24-button type) the FKY = 55: One-Touch changeover (PAGE) should be assigned when registering destination numbers as one-touch speed calling code more than 12. c. and KYN = 25-40 should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used). • CONF (Three-Way Calling) TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls) HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold) ANSWER MIC SPEAKER RECALL When DK Operation service (Incoming Line Preference.F. Idle Line Preference) is to be provided. If separate access codes are assigned.F.-Don’t Answer). My Line Key must be assigned in KYN = 1-24.

CONF (Three-Way Calling) TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls) HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold) ANSWER MIC SPEAKER RECALL Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used). assign PRI = 0. the key data for all the line/feature buttons must be programmed. assign the Intercom Group Data using the command AICD/ADIM.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. take the following precautions: a. b. • There is no default key data provided for Dterm (8-button type). assign “The response priority when the SPEAKER button is pressed or the station goes off-hook” by parameter “PRl”. take the following precautions: a. When assigning the key data of the line/feature button. Hotel Note: Dterm (24-button type) is equipped with 12 one-touch buttons. • When this command is used. The following function keys are basically fixed: FKY = 13: FKY = 18: FKY = 20: FKY = 28: FKY = 51: FKY = 52: FKY = 57: c. and KYN = 9-16 should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used). • In conjunction with intercom service. (Refer to Step (a) of (5) “Entry Procedure”). Thus. Therefore. Each of these buttons is assigned with 2-page memory (Page 0 and Page 1). when originating an outgoing call. the page of one-touch button can be designated by this function key. One destination number can be assigned on a page basis (24 destination numbers in all). ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 137 Revision 4.0 . the DLC/ELC card must be reinitialized (MB switch UP-DOWN). Business. Before assigning the Intercom Key Data by this command. When providing the Intercom service. My Line Key must be assigned in KYN = 1-8. b. When not providing the Intercom service.

For data entry procedure of Sub Line keys. For data entry procedure of function keys.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. LHEN 5. and Intercom key. RAST. AAST Deletion: ASDT. (c). see Step (d). Entry Procedure It is recommended that the following procedure be read carefully before entering data in this command. see Step (e). “WRT?” prompt is displayed after all function button data has been assigned or when “ESC” is pressed while MAT displays KYN information. LLEN. DLEN. RAST Display: ASDT. When all data corresponding to a specific KYN has been entered. (d) and (e) but do not need to be entered again. The display changes at each of these steps. see Step (c). DSTN List up: LSTN. The TN and STN of the My Line are also displayed in Steps (b).0 ND-45687 (E) . Related Reference Commands List up: LKYD -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. Each button can be used as a Function key. • Note: Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 138 Revision 4. Sub Line key. the KYN increases by one (+ 1) and the MAT is then ready to accept the data for the next KYN. For data assignment. Business. • Assign the data for the My Line before assigning the Prime Line data. For data entry procedure of Intercom keys. Assign the function button data. LHST. see Step (a). Hotel 4.

a button must be pressed. Priority of Answering a Call (0-4) To answer a call on a line having no priority.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. Enter the Station number of the Prime Line. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 139 Revision 4. Hotel a. 3: Ringing Data is to be set for each individual Multi-line. Business. Note 3: When assigning Buttons up to 16 and FLEX keys. 1: All the Multi-lines ring.0 . RING: PRI: Note: Ringing Information (0-3) 0: No Multi-lines ring. Note 4: When assigning Buttons more than 16 and FLEX keys.16 assignable Note 1 1: D term (8 or 16-button type) With Add on Module or Dterm (24-button type) = Buttons 1-40 assignable Note 2 2: D term (8 or 16-button type) = Buttons 1-16 and FLEX Keys assignable Note 3 3: D term (8 or 16-button type) With Add on Module or Dterm (24-button type) = 1-40 and FLEX Keys assignable Note 4 Note 1: When assigning Buttons up to 16. 2: Only the Prime Line rings. Assignment of Key Data for Dterm TN:1 STN:3000 TN: STN: TP: Tenant Number (for My Line) Station Number (for My Line) Type of Dterm (0-3) 0: D term (8 or 16-button type) = Buttons 1 . Note 2: When assigning Buttons more than 16.

AKYD CM0-01 ACD.0 ND-45687 (E) . Business. Dial Intercom Line (Ringing Station) Automatic Intercom Line (Ringing Station) Manual Intercom Line (Signaling Station) CHAPTER 2 Page 140 Revision 4. Hotel LINE PREFERENCE PRI 1 0 1 2 3 4 L D A M A 2 – L L L M 3 – – – – L REMARKS L: D: A: M: As per the Preference pattern when the SPEAKER button is pressed.

Business.0 . Hotel b.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. Enter the Line Preference Data: Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3000 TP:0 RING:3 SPK:0 ANS:0 PRI:0 LN PRE:1 ORG:0 MWD:0 S:0 PL TN:1 STN:3000 LN PRE: SPK: ANS: ORG: MWD: PL TN: STN: S: Line Preference (0/1): 0: Prime Line Pickup 1: Key Line Select Line Preference for Speaker button (0 Only): 0: Prime Line Preference Line Preference for Answer button (0-2): 0: Prime Line Preference 1: Incoming Line Preference 2: Ringing Line Preference Line Preference for Originating button (0/1): 0: Prime Line Preference 1: Idle Line Preference Message Waiting Data Display Selection (0/1) 0: MW data display on the top line 1: MW data display on the bottom line Tenant Number of the Prime Line. OG from Prime Line (0/1) 0: Allowed 1: Inhibited ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 141 Revision 4. Station Number of the Prime Line.

For using keys as Function Keys Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:2 KYI:1 FKY:12 TN: STN: KYN: KYl: FKY: Tenant Number (for My Line) Station Number (for My Line) Key Number KYN = 1-16 (TP = 0) KYN = 1-40 (TP = 1) Service Index 0: Not used 1: Function Key Function Key Number 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (FWD-BY) 2: Call Forwarding-All Calls (FWD) 3: Executive Right of Way (OVERRIDE) 4: Call Waiting 5: Call Back (CALL BACK) 6: Message Reminder (MSG) 7: Save and Repeat (S&R) 8: Last Number Dialed (LAST #) 9: Boss-Secretary-Message Waiting Lamp Control. Business.0 .AKYD CM0-01 ACD. Cancel 12: Call Pickup-Group (PICK) 13: Three-Way Calling (CONF) 14: Voice Call (VOICE) 15: Speed Calling-System (SYS SPEED) 16: FNC 17: CAS SHF 18: Call Transfer-All Calls (TRANSFER) 19: UCD Busy Out 20: Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold (HOLD) 21: Flash Button (FLASH) 22: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (FWD-DA) 23-24: Not used 25: ISDN Malicious Call Trace 26: Speed Calling-Station (Group) (STA SPEED) 27: Originate (ORG) 28: Answer (ANS) 29: Data (DATA) 30: Display/Auto (DSPY/AUTO) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 142 Revision 4. Hotel c. Set 10: Call Hold (CALL HOLD) 11: Boss-Secretary-Message Waiting Lamp Control.

(System Series 6100 version software or earlier. Note 2: For H/M system. Business. Hotel Note 2 31: 32: 34-47: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53-54: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60: 61: 62-82: 83: 84: 85 86 Data Transfer (DTX) Not used OAI/ACD (Note 1) Wake Up Set (WUS) Wake Up Reset (WUR) Do Not Disturb Set (DDS) Do Not Disturb Reset (DDR) Room Cut Off Set (RCS) Room Cut Off Reset (RCR) Message Waiting Set (MWS) Message Waiting Reset (MWR) Check In (C/I) Check Out (C/O) Status (STS) Audit (AUD) Enter (ENT) Clear Enter (E) UCD Call Waiting Lamp (In case Business System)/END (END)/ (In case H/M System) Privacy Set/Release Speed Calling-One Touch Do Not Disturb (DND) MIC Speaker Not used PAGE OFF/ON HOOK FOR HEADSET Recall Not used Release Key Manual Signaling Key DSS Not used Retain for Eight Conference Equipment Serial Call Internal Zone Paging Not used Note 1: For systems with OAI/ACD.AKYD CM0-01 ACD. 34-47 OAI/ACD.0 .) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 143 Revision 4.

0 ND-45687 (E) .AKYD CM0-01 ACD. Business. Hotel Note 87: 88: 89: 90: 91: 92: 93: 94: 95: 96: 97: 98: 99: 100: 101: 102-112: 113: 114: 115: 116: 117: 118: 119-320: Wake Up Set (WUS) Wake Up Reset (WUR) Do Not Disturb Set (DDS) Do Not Disturb Reset (DDR) Room Cut Off Set (RCS) Room Cut Off Reset (RCR) Message Waiting Set (MWS) Message Waiting Reset (MWR) Check In (C/I) Check Out (C/O) Status (STS) Audit (AUD) Enter (ENT) Clear Enter (E) END (END) Not used Calling Number/Calling Name Display Note Not used Call Pickup Expand Note Not used Ringer Mute Note Call Return Note Not used Note: For H/M System (System software: 6200 or later version) CHAPTER 2 Page 144 Revision 4.

20 sec. For using the key as a Multi-Line key. 0 sec. RINGING RG(0-7) DAY NIGHT DELAY TIME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No Ringing Ringing No Ringing Not used Ringing Ringing Ringing Ringing No Ringing No Ringing Ringing Not used Ringing Ringing Ringing Ringing 30 sec. 0 sec.) 0: Line Tenant Number (for Sub-Line) Station Number (for Sub-Line) Ringing Information for Each Line (0-7) Valid only if Ring = 3 in Item (a). Hotel d. Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:2 KYI:2 KD:0 TN:1 STN:3111 RG:0 TN: STN: KYN: KYI: KD: TN: STN: RG: Tenant Number (for My-Line) Station Number (for My-Line) Key Number (1-16) Service Index (Enter 2. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 145 Revision 4. 10 sec. Business.0 . 0 sec.AKYD CM0-01 ACD.) 2: Multi-line Kind of Line (Enter 0.

Tenant Number (for My-Line) Station Number (for My-Line) Key Number (1-16) Service Index (Enter 2. Business.) 2: Multi-line Kind of Line (Enter 2. Hotel e.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 1: Intercom-Option Kind of Intercom 0: Automatic 1: Manual 2: Dial Group ID Number (1-50) For using the key for a DSS key on DSS Console Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:4 KYI:2 KD:2 TN:1 STN:3112 TN: STN: KYN: KYI: KD: TN: STN: Tenant Number (for My-Line) Station Number (for My-Line) Key Number (1-40) Service Index (Enter 2.AKYD CM0-01 ACD.) 2: DSS Console Key Tenant Number (for DSS) Station Number (for DSS) CHAPTER 2 Page 146 Revision 4. For using the key for an Intercom Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:3 KYI:2 ICM:0 G-ID:1 KD:1 TN: STN: KYN: KYI: KD: ICM: G-ID: f.) 2: Multi-line Kind of Line (Enter 1.

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 147 Revision 4. 4. delete and display the Listed Directory Number (LDN) to an Attendant Console when DID service is in operation. Precautions • The number if digits in the LDN must be the same as the number of digits in a station number. Function This command is used to assign. tel ALDN Assignment of Listed Directory Number 1.ALDN CM0-01 Business. LHST TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter N. Hotel siness. Entry Procedure • When LDN Night Transfer service is not provided. 3. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): N WRT? LSTN.0 .

a. Hotel • When LDN Night Transfer service is provided. Station Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):Y TYPE:1 STN:5100 WRT? TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter Y. Number of Outside Party Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):Y TYPE:2 OUTSIDE:8421567 WRT? TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter Y.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 1: STN STN: Station Number b.) 2: Outside OUTSIDE: Number of Outside Party CHAPTER 2 Page 148 Revision 4.ALDN CM0-01 Business. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 2. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 1.

) 3: ADC ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 149 Revision 4.0 . Hotel c.ALDN CM0-01 Business. Abbreviated Digit Code Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):Y TYPE:3 ADC:888 TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter Y. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 3.

b. Function This command is used to designate start and stop of line load control. control of all LPs (ALL LP ? Y) cannot be designated. 4. Hotel siness. Whether incoming calls will be restricted during Line Load Control is determined by System Data 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Related Reference Command None CHAPTER 2 Page 150 Revision 4. Only the stations specified by parameter SFI = 16 of the ASFC command can originate a call while line Load Control is in effect.O. INDEX 59. line or tie line will not be terminated. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. tel ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control 1. 3. If incoming restriction is in effect. All other stations will be restricted. an incoming call from a C.ALLC SYS Business. • For ICS. Precautions • Starting of Line Load Control will result as follows: a.

only 0 and 1 can be designated. • For all LPs Assignment of Line Load Control ALL LP? Y LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0 WRT? Operation Mode Selection (Enter Y.) Y: ALL LPs LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0: Line Load Control Stop 1: Line Load Control Start 2: Automatic Line Load Control is in execution (display only) 3: Status of all LPs not coinciding (display only) ALL LP?: Note: Of the above parameters. Local Partition Number) LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0: Line Load Control Stop 1: Line Load Control Start 2: Automatic Line Load Control is in execution (display only) 3: Status of all LPs not coinciding (display only) ALL LP?: Note: Of the above parameters. only 0 and 1 can be designated.) N: Only One LP LP: Local Processor (or for IMGxh. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 151 Revision 4.0 .ALLC SYS Business. Entry Procedure • For a specific LP Assignment of Line Load Control ALL LP? N LP:0 LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0 WRT? Operation Mode Selection (Enter N. Hotel 5.

. Related Reference Command Display: List Up: 5. “WRT” does not appear on the screen. In this instance. When assigning no data.Z WRT ? Y Note 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <..-> Low High Note 1: When this value is not changed. the default alarm grades are automatically adopted. 4. The PBX user can give the proper alarm grade to each system message according to its requirements. Hotel ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data 1... Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2.ALMG CM0-11 Business. Entry Procedure • Initial Display DFTD LLMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered Note 1 SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <.-> 17 . the cursor returns to the entry of grade. Function This command is used to make a flexible change of system message output grades. the display changes to the entry of a system message.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 2: When the N key is pressed. CHAPTER 2 Page 152 Revision 4. Precautions All of the system messages listed in the System Maintenance Manual are changeable except “6-A”. 3.

.-> 17 .-> Low High Note: A system message corresponding to the input data appears on the screen..ALMG CM0-11 Business.0 ..Z SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 153 Revision 4..U Note DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT) Assignment LMP: MJ MSG 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1-I LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR: 0 GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 WRT ? Y MSG 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-O 1-P 1-Q 1-R LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 MSG 1-S 1-T 1-U 1-V 1-W 1-X 1-Y 1-Z LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <. Hotel • Assignment (for changing default Alarm Grade Data) Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered. SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <.

0 ND-45687 (E) ..-> Low High Note: A system message corresponding to the input data appears on the screen. Hotel • Change (for changing assigned Alarm Grade Data) Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered.. CHAPTER 2 Page 154 Revision 4.U Note DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT) Change / Deletion LMP:SUP MSG 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1-I LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR: 0 GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 WRT ? Y MSG 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-O 1-P 1-Q 1-R LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 MSG 1-S 1-T 1-U 1-V 1-W 1-X 1-Y 1-Z LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <.ALMG CM0-11 Business.-> 17 .Z SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 ... SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <.

Hotel • Deletion (for deleting assigned Alarm Grade Data) Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered. SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <..ALMG CM0-11 Business.Z SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 ..-> 17 .-> Low High Note: A system message corresponding to the input data appears on the screen...0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 155 Revision 4.U Note DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT) Change / Deletion LMP: MN MSG 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1-I LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR: 0 GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 WRT ? Y MSG 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-O 1-P 1-Q 1-R LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 MSG 1-S 1-T 1-U 1-V 1-W 1-X 1-Y 1-Z LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <.

ALPE CM0-04 Business. The Station Number assigned to parameter “STN” must correspond to the assignment of No. tel ALPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel siness. Entry Procedure LLPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion TNF:1 TN:1 STN:3112 WRT? TNF: TN: STN: Tenant Flag 0: Separate 1: Common Tenant Number Station Number CHAPTER 2 Page 156 Revision 4. Function This command is used to assign. on a per-tenant basis. 3. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Precautions • • Assign “1” to parameter TN when “1” is assigned to parameter “TNF”. delete and display the eight-party Conference Trunk (CFT card). Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. 0 circuit on the CFT card. which is seized in Line Privacy Expansion Service. 4.

LLEN. Function When more than one Attendant Console has been installed per tenant. Entry Procedure Assignment of Master ATT Data TN:1 ATN:1 MASTER ATT TN: ATN: MASTER: NIGHT: Note: Tenant Number Attendant Number or Night Attendant Number Master Attendant Number Night Master Attendant Number Parameters MASTER and NIGHT are displayed when a Master Attendant or Night Master Attendant has already been assigned. Precautions • If this Master Console is placed in the Night mode. will place the console in the Night mode. 4. tel AMAT Assignment of Master Attendant Data 1. 3. Removing the handset and/or pressing the Night key on the ATTCON. Hotel siness. all incoming calls will be directed to TAS or a Night Connection Fixed station.AMAT CM0-01 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 157 Revision 4. LHEN 5. Related Reference Command List up: LMAT -Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK. DLEN List up: LTRK. this command assigns a Master Console for controlling the Day/Night function of all the Attendant Consoles on a tenant basis.0 .

Entry Procedure LMDD Assignment of MODEM Data MDM NO:1 CDN:9 Note1 FUNC DR : R : HDX: MD : 2W/4W: SPEED: ASYNC: FCY : RSGT: ASSIGNMENT WRT? Y DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note 2. 4.AMDD CM0-01 Business. at the time of data entry. Note 2: If. SPACE + ENTER key is entered. CHAPTER 2 Page 158 Revision 4. “WRT?” displays.0 ND-45687 (E) .: MODEM Number (1-16) Note: Once the MDM No. 3. Data entry starts from the Item Number of the parameter designated here. the cursor returns to parameter CDN. Function This command is used to assign. it does not need to be entered again for each CDN assignment. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. that at each data entry. Hotel siness. tel AMDD Assignment of MODEM Data 1. Precautions • • Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). however. has been entered for CDN 1. Note 3: After the data has been set or when ESC is pressed at the time of data entry. and then operation can be started from Item Number. If the ESC key is pressed at the time of MODEM data entry. Note. the Item Number is incremented automatically. Related Reference Command List up: 5. the operation skips to “WRT”?. delete and display MODEM Trunk Data. 3 MDM No. Note 1: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of MODEM Data parameter.

0 .2 Kbps 12: 48 Kbps 13: 56 Kbps 14: 64 Kbps 15-31: Not used Asynchronous (0/1) 0: Asynchronous 1: Synchronous R (CDN = 2): HDX (CDN = 3): MD (CDN = 4): 2W/4W (CDN = 5): SPEED (CDN = 6): ASYNC (CDN = 7): ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 159 Revision 4. Hotel CDN: DR (CDN = 1): Counter Display Number (0-9) Data Ready On (0-3) 0: Check 1: No Check 2: Supervise 3: Not Supervise Modem Ringing (0/1) 0: No Ring at MODEM 1: Ring at MODEM Half/Full Duplex (0/1) 0: Full Duplex 1: Half Duplex MODEM/DST (0/1) 0: MODEM 1: DST 2W MODEM/4W MODEM (0/1) 0: 2W 1: 4W Bit Speed (0-31) 0: 50 bps 1: 75 bps 2: 110 bps 3: 150 bps 4: 200 bps 5: 300 bps 6: 600 bps 7: 1200 bps 8: 2400 bps 9: 4800 bps 10: 9600 bps 11: 19.AMDD CM0-01 Business.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel FCY (CDN = 8): Facility (0-3) 0: Outgoing/Incoming 1: Outgoing only 2: Incoming only 3: Not used RS-CS Guard Time (0-15) 0-7: Not used 8: 0 ms 9: 30 ms 10: 60 ms 11: 120 ms 12: 240 ms 13: 360 ms 14: 720 ms 15: 1080 ms RSGT (CDN = 9): CHAPTER 2 Page 160 Revision 4.AMDD CM0-01 Business.

This data determines the register release timing.AMND CM0-01 Business. Precautions • • • Destination Code: Enter the minimum number of digits. delete and display the maximum necessary digits to be sent out on any trunk route. 4. including the access code.0 . When this command is used for Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes. of the destination number required to determine the maximum digits to be dialed. 3. Maximum Necessary Digits: Enter the maximum number of digits. Function This command is used to assign. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Hotel siness. including the access code. the Tenant (T/N) parameter must be assigned as zero (0). tel AMND Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits 1. Related Reference Command List up: LNND ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 161 Revision 4. for which the register must wait when the Destination Code is dialed.

Hotel 5.0 ND-45687 (E) .AMND CM0-01 Business. Entry Procedure Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits TN:1 DC:999 MND:10 TOLL:1 AN:1 RATE:0 A/D:0 WRT? TN: DC: MND: TOLL: AN: RATE: A/D: Tenant Number Destination Code (Max. 10 digits) Maximum Necessary Digits (1-24) Toll Code Identification (0/1) 0: Local Code 1: Toll Code Account Number 0: Out of Service 1: Account Code Option Service Data Always assign “0” Analog/Digital Line Data 0: Analog 1: Digital CHAPTER 2 Page 162 Revision 4.

ANCD CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

ANCD

Assignment of Night Connection Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is necessary to assign the correspondence between C.O. trunks and the 12NCU (Power Failure Transfer) circuit card when the PBX is in the Night Mode. 3. Precautions • • Before using this command, confirm that the 12NCU the (PFT) circuit card has been assigned in AUNT (Assignment of Unit Data) command. The correspondence between C.O. trunks and the stations in the Night Mode is assigned in the ACSI (Assignment of Connection Service Index) command.

4. Related Reference Command List up: LCFC

- Parameter RT Assignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD - Parameter TK Assignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Night Connection Data MG:0 NCU PKG:0 PORT:0 RT:1 WRT? TK:1

MG: NCU PKG: PORT: RT: TK:

Module Group Number (00-31) PFT Card Number (0-3) Port Number of PFT Card (0-11) Route Number Trunk Number
ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 163 Revision 4.0

ANDD CM0-04 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

ANDD

Assignment of Name Display Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete the User Information (Name, etc.) corresponding to each Station Number in Name Display Service. 3. Precautions • • • • Station Numbers must be assigned. This command cannot be used when OAI Name Display Service is in use. The number of digits to be assigned to parameter “NAME” is determined by ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 241, bl. The following must be set: ASYD1, Index 31, b1, b2 =1.

4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LNDD

Assignment of Name Display Data TN:1 STN:3112 NAME:NEC TOKYO WRT?

TN: STN: NAME:

Tenant number Station Number User’s Office Name (8 digits/16 digits)

CHAPTER 2 Page 164 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ANND CM0-01 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

ANND

Assignment of Necessary Digits Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the necessary number of digits for a particular trunk route. 3. Precautions • • • • When entering the Incoming/Outgoing Call code, IC/OG can be entered as characters inputs or can be entered numerically as 0/1. Number of Necessary Digits: The Number of Necessary Digits (NND), including the access code, must be assigned. The number of digits for an Incoming Connection (IC) is not available. Therefore, data assignment is not required. This data must be assigned when SRV = OGC/OGCA is assigned via “ASPA” command. This data determines the number of necessary digits to be sent out to the distant office.

4. Related Reference Command List up: LNND

-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. Entry Procedure

Assignment of Necessary Digits Data RT:1 IC/OG:OG NND:5 WRT?

RT: IC/OG: NND:

Route Number IC: Incoming Call OG: Outgoing Call (Enter OG.) Number of Necessary Digits (1-24)

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 165 Revision 4.0

ANPD CM0-01 Business
siness

ANPD

Assignment of Numbering Plan Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determine the service which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation). 3. Precautions • • This command is used for Business System only. If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system, data need only be assigned for TN = 1. This type of assignment will only function correctly if ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assigned. (0/ 1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for all Tenants)

Note:

• •

When changing any of the numbering plan data, the old data must be deleted before new data is assigned. When the first digit of a particular numbering plan is to be deleted and the first DC (Digit Code) is already in use (i.e. Station Number) the Station Numbering data must first be deleted before the new numbering plan data can be assigned via this command. When entering the Connection Status Index (CI) information, “Normal”, “Hooking”, or “Busy Service” must be designated by entry of the character N, H, or B. Consideration should be given when the system has various digits stations (2 digit STN, 3 digit STN, ..., etc.) whose first digit is the same number. In this case, only a station whose NND (Number of Necessary Digits) values are the same in the ASPA. ANPD command can be displayed in the Busy Lamp Field on ATTs. The remaining stations which do not meet the above condition cannot be displayed.

• •

4. Related Reference Command List up: LNPD

CHAPTER 2 Page 166 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ANPD CM0-01 Business

5. Entry Procedure

Assignment of Numbering Plan Data TN:1 1STDC:5 CI:H NND:1 BLF:1 WRT?

TN: 1ST DC: CI:

NND: BLF:

Tenant Number 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #) Connection Status Index N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Number of Necessary Digits (1-6) Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT 0: Out of Service 1: In service

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 167 Revision 4.0

AOFC CM0-11 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

AOFC

Assignment of Office Name

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command provides users with a facility to assign their office name. The office name appears on the display and on printed out sheets. 3. Precautions • • • Up to 20 characters can be assigned (inclusive of blanks and numbers). To delete the data, press the “space” key 20 times. Entry of “/” key cannot cease this command while you are entering data. To end this command, press “ESC” key, then “Return to menu? (Y/N)” is displayed on the screen.

4. Related Reference Command ASYD, SYS, INDEX96-115 5. Entry Procedure

Assignment of Office Name Office Name: NEC TOKYO WRT? Y Return to menu? (Y/N)

Assignment

OFFICE NAME: Office Name (Max. 20 characters) <RETURN>: Execute <ESC>: Menu

CHAPTER 2 Page 168 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

AOPR CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

AOPR

Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the routing pattern for each Outgoing Pattern Routing Number (OPR), and to assign, delete and display the SKIP information for skipping digits and the Pattern Number Location (PNL) for adding the digits designated in the AADC (Assignment of Additional Digit) command. 3. Precautions • • Before using this command, confirm that an Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in the AFRS (Assignment of Flexible Route Selection) command. When a Pattern Number Location (PNL) is assigned or deleted in this command, it must also be assigned or deleted in the AADC command. However, this is not applicable when the PNL parameter is assigned as “0” (invalid). In the event that a Tie Line is busy and route advance is to a DDD Line, a value larger than 128 must be assigned to the PNL. A maximum of 256 OPR’s (0-255) can be assigned, and a maximum of eight (8) routes can be assigned to each OPR.

• •

4. Related Reference Command List up: LOPR

-Parameter TDPTNAssignment: ATCP Deletion: ATCP Display: ATCP List up: LTCP -Parameter PNLAssignment: AADC Deletion: AADC Display: AADC List up: LOPR

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 169 Revision 4.0

AOPR CM0-02 Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 E:0 RT:1 SKIP:0 PNL:1 0VFT:0 PRSC:0

WRT?

TDPTN: OPR: RA: E: RT: SKIP: PNL: OVFT: PRSC:

Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Route Advance End Indication (0/1: Ended/-) Outgoing Route Number Number of digits to be skipped (0-24) Pattern Number Location (0-255) (Option 0-999) Overflow Tone (0/1: -/Overflow Tone) Priority Restriction Class (0-15)

CHAPTER 2 Page 170 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

AOSP CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

AOSP

Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display skip and additional digit information for each Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number. 3. Precautions • Before using this command, confirm that an Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNO) has been assigned in the ASTP (Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern) command.

4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSLP

Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern PNO:1 ADD:2 WRT? SKIP:1 DC:12

PNO: SKIP: ADD: DC:

Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15) Number of digits to be skipped (0-24) Number of digits to be added (0-4) Additional Digit Information (Max. 4 digits)

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 171 Revision 4.0

APAD CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

APAD

Assignment of PAD Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display PAD control data for tandem connections, and trunk to station connections. 3. Precautions • Details of PAD data are as follows: PAD Data 0: PAD Data 1: PAD Data 2: PAD Data 3: PAD Data 4: PAD Data 15:
Note:

Switch Setting of the Circuit Card Note 2 dB PAD ON Note 4 dB PAD ON Note 6 dB PAD ON Note 8 dB PAD ON Note PAD OFF

Switch setting depends on the Trunk Circuit Card.

• •

When data is not assigned in this command, the PAD is set for PAD OFF. When assigning Station connection, IC PAD data is valid for outgoing call from the station/incoming call from the trunk.

4. Related Reference Command List up: LPAT

-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD

CHAPTER 2 Page 172 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

APAD CM0-02 Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

Assignment of PAD Data TDM/ST:T ICRT:1 OGRT:1 ICPAD:1 OGPAD:1 WRT?

TDM/ST:

Tandem Connection or Station Connection T: Tandem Connection S: Station ICRT: Incoming Route Number OGRT: Outgoing Route Number IC PAD: Incoming PAD Data (1-15) OG PAD: Outgoing PAD Data (1-15) IC/OG PAD Data is as follows: 0: No APAD Setting 1: 2 dB PAD On Note 2: 4 dB PAD On Note 3: 6 dB PAD On Note 4: 8 dB PAD On Note 5-14: Not used 15: PAD OFF Switch setting depends on the Trunk Circuit Card.

Note:

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 173 Revision 4.0

APCR CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

APCR

Assignment of Primary Call Restriction

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display Primary Call Restriction data for specific digit codes. 3. Precautions • Parameter PDC includes the Access Code.

4. Related Reference Command List up: LPCR

-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Deletion: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC 5. Entry Procedure

Assignment of Primary Call Restriction TN:1 BLOCK:0 PDC:67854 RSC:15 RES:0 WRT?

TN: BLOCK: PDC: RSC: RES:

Tenant Number Block Number (0-49) Primary Call Digit Code (Max. 24 digits) Route Restriction Class (0-15) Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed

CHAPTER 2 Page 174 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

APHN CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

APHN

Assignment of Phantom Station Number

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a phantom number for a station. 3. Precautions • • Numbers that are being used as station or LDN numbers cannot be used as phantom numbers. One Phantom Number can be assigned to one Station Number. However, when an incoming call to a Phantom Number has terminated to the corresponding station, no station hunting is performed even if the called station is a member station of a hunt group. An assigned Phantom Number can be deleted by one of the following two methods: a. b. • Designate the desired Phantom Number, then delete it. Enter a space for the desired Phantom Number and delete the Phantom Number by designating the corresponding Station Number.

A maximum of five phantom numbers can be assigned to a station. (Including individual phantom number and phantom number in a hunting group)

4. Related Reference Command List up: LPAE

-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 175 Revision 4.0

(0/1) 0: Individual Phantom No. Hotel 5. Entry Procedure Assignment of Phantom Station Number TN:1 PH:0 WRT? PHSTN:6666 STN:3113 TN: PHSTN: PH: STN: Tenant Number Phantom Number Hunting Condition of Phantom No.0 ND-45687 (E) . 1: Phantom No. in a Hunting Group Station Number CHAPTER 2 Page 176 Revision 4.APHN CM0-02 Business.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. delete and display Password Service data. 3. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 177 Revision 4. After the data is assigned by this command.APSW CM0-03 Business. tel APSW Assignment of Password Data 1. 4. Index 116-123. Precautions • • • • • • The Password code is a four (4) character alphanumeric code. When a command name consists of more than five (5) characters. Function This command is used to assign. Two grades of passwords are assigned in Data Type 1 of this command. Hotel siness. A maximum of sixteen (16) different commands can be assigned to each Grade 2 password. SYS 1. When an error code is displayed.0 . A Grade 1 password allows unlimited access to the commands. which are designated in Data Type 2 of this command. enter the first four (4) characters. A Grade 2 password allows access to a limited number of commands. A space cannot be used as a character in the password code. press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation on the screen. Password service is available when data is assigned to each port in ASYD. A Grade 2 password code cannot be assigned without assigning a Grade 1 password.

‘WRT?’ displays. TYPE: GRD-1: CNT: GRD-2: Data Type (Enter 1.) 2: Grade-2 Command Data Grade-2 Password Code Number of commands to be accessed (1-16) Command Names (4 Characters) CHAPTER 2 Page 178 Revision 4. Hotel 5.) 1: Password Code Data Grade-1 Password Code Number of GRD-2 Passwords to be assigned (1-16) Grade-2 Password Code (s) b. To enter Grade 1 and Grade 2 password codes Assignment of Password Data TYPE. Entry Procedure a.0 ND-45687 (E) . the next Grade-2 Password Code can be assigned. Priority of Grade-2 Password Codes is displayed. TYPE: GRD-2: CNT: CMMND: Data Type (Enter 2. When the number of CMMNDs designated in CNT have been entered. To enter the commands to be accessed by each Grade 2 password code: Assignment of Password Data TYPE: 2 GRD-2: 2222 CNT: 2 WRT? 2 CMMND:ATRK Priority of Grade-2 Password Command Name is displayed.APSW CM0-03 Business.1 GRD-1: 8888 CNT: 2 2 GRD-2:2222 When the data has been entered.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. 5 digits) Tenant Number for Authorization Code ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 179 Revision 4.0 .ARAC CM0-01 Business. Related Reference Command List up: Display: 5. 3. changed or deleted in this command. The Access Code is an unused station number. 4. tel ARAC Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code 1. Precautions • • • An access code designated in any other command cannot be assigned. Hotel siness. Entry Procedure LRAC DSTN Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code ICTN:1 TN:1 WRT? ACC:999 ICTN: ACC: TN: Tenant Number of IC Trunk Access Code (Max. Function This command is used to assign and delete the access code and its corresponding tenant number for Remote Access to System. The tenant number entered in this command is the one to be used for Remote Access to System. When Remote Access to System service is executed from a DID trunk. this command is used to assign the Access Code for it.

and displaying the PC (Point Code) of the Satellite PBX on the basis of the Point Code Index No. This command is used only at the Main PBX. deleting.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Precautions • • When there are plural Satellite PBX Offices By grouping Tenant Numbers. Hotel CIS. Entry Procedure LRDN Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control INDEX:1 PC:10 WRT? INDEX: PC: Point Code Index for Remote Day/Night Change (0-15) Point Code (1-16383) CHAPTER 2 Page 180 Revision 4. tel ARDN Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control 1. of the Main PBX. Related Reference Command List up: 5. mode can be changed on all the Satellite PBX offices or on each Tenant basis. 3. the Day/Night mode of the satellite PBX is also changed.ARDN CM0-08 CCIS. Function This command is used for assigning. Business. siness. 4. If the Day/Night mode of the Main PBX is changed by means of this command.

3 digits) RT0: (Max. and/or Universal Senders are applied. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. 3 digits) Note: When RT = 0. the Office Code (Office ID Number) of the self office is to be assigned to RT = 0. Function This command is used to assign. This data becomes necessary when LCR or LCRS has been assigned in the ASPA command. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 181 Revision 4. tel ARNP Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data 1. Entry Procedure Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data RT:1 ACC:11 WRT? RT: ACC: Route Number Access Code (Max.ARNP CM0-01 Business. LCR service must be used.7 CCIS. delete. The Office Code assigned is used in Centralized Billing-CCIS service and Calling/Called Number Display-CCIS service.0 . 4. In the case of the No. Hotel siness. and display an access code for each individual route in accordance with the ARTD command. This data must be assigned when SMDR. Precautions • • • • This data must be assigned for billing management (When SMDR has been assigned in the ARTD command). 3. Related Reference Command List up: LRNP -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5.7 CCIS. 4 digits) OTHER: (Max. LCR. ACC is a maximum of four (4) digits. In the case of the No.

7 CCIS Network Systems. 4. Precautions This command is used by only No.ARPC CM0-08 CCIS. Business. Hotel CIS. Entry Procedure LRPC Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service CSN: 1 CNT:3 3 RPC: 3 Entry Number WRT? Y CSN: Centralized Service Number (1-7) 1 2-7 Message Center Not used CNT: RPC: Remote Point Code Counter (1-32) Remote Point Code (1-16383) CHAPTER 2 Page 182 Revision 4. delete and display the Remote Point Code under the centralized office. Function This command is used to Centralized Service of Message Center within No. 3. Related Reference Command List up: 5. to assign. siness.0 ND-45687 (E) .7 CCIS Network. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. tel ARPC Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service 1.

4. Function This command is used for restriction of alternative routing of an Incoming Route (ICRT) to an Outgoing Route (OGRT). Entry Procedure • For restriction via an Attendant Console: Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data ICRT:1 OGRT:1 ARI:A RES:0 WRT? ICRT: OGRT: ARI: RES: Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Alternative Route Index (A/D) (Enter A.0 .) A: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via the Attendant Console. tel ARRC Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Related Reference Command List up: LRCF -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. 3. Precautions • Data must be assigned to activate the feature. Hotel siness.ARRC CM0-02 Business. Restriction Data In case of Attendant Console (ATT) 0: Alternate routing is restricted 1: Alternate routing is allowed ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 183 Revision 4.

Restriction Data In case of Dial Access (DIAL) 0: Alternate routing is restricted 1: Alternate routing is allowed 2: Toll Restriction is required CHAPTER 2 Page 184 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel • Via Direct Dial Access from a station: Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data ICRT:1 OGRT:1 ARI:D WRT? RES:1 ICRT: OGRT: ARI: RES: Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Alternative Route Index (A/D) (Enter D.) D: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via Direct Dial Access from a station.ARRC CM0-02 Business.

If the ESC key is pressed at the time of restriction data entry. If SPACE and ENTER are pressed at the time of restriction data entry. Precautions • • • • • • Restriction data RES = 2 is valid only in the case of RRI = 3 when Toll Restriction is assigned. Bit 0. Function This command is used to assign and display route restriction information according to the Route Restriction Class (RSC) of the station and the Route Number (RT). INDEX 170.ARSC CM0-02 Business. System data (ASYD. Index 75. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.0 . 4. -b3) must be assigned in order to activate a new Restriction class (RSC) for stations is Room Cut Off or Do Not Disturb mode. if specified in ASYD. SYS 1. the operation can skip to “WRT?”. the operation can be returned to RRI entry. Related Reference Command List up: LRTC -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 185 Revision 4. Data can be entered on a Day/Night basis. tel ARSC Assignment of Route Restriction Class 1. Hotel siness. Data must be assigned to activate the feature. 3. For Hotel/Motel System.

assign RSC13. with respect to Do Not Disturb. then press ENTER. ← RES DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode TN: Tenant Number RT: Route Number RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) RSC13: When setting Room Cut Off RSC14: When setting Do Not Disturb RSC15: When setting Room Cut Off and Do Not Disturb RRI: Route Restriction Index (0-3) 0: IC Restriction Via ATT 1: IC Restriction Directly 2: OG Restriction Via ATT 3: OG Restriction Directly RES: Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Connection is allowed 2: Toll Restriction is required Note: For Hotel/Motel System.ARSC CM0-02 Business. when Route Restriction Class (RSC) is changed (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 170. 14 and 15. b3 = 1). CHAPTER 2 Page 186 Revision 4. Hotel 5.0 ND-45687 (E) . Room Cut Off service. Entry Procedure ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Note: • ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE Mode TN:1 D/N:D RSC RRI 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 1 RT:1 1 1 1 1 1 RRI:1 2 0 0 0 1 RSC:1 WRT?Y 3 0 1 0 1 4 1 0 0 1 5 0 1 0 2 6 1 1 1 0 7 1 1 0 0 8 1 1 1 0 9 1 1 0 2 10 1 1 1 1 11 0 1 0 2 12 0 1 0 0 13 1 0 1 1 14 0 0 1 1 15 1 0 0 1 ← Select the desired mode by use of (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow).

ARTD CM0-01 Business. etc.e.0 ← . Entry Procedure • Enter the desired mode LRTD ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Note: Select the desired mode by use of (Down Arrow).outgoing. Related Reference Command List up: 5.. the operation can skip to “WRT?”. Function Route Class Data.). Precautions • • Data entry can be initiated from any Counter Display Number (CDN). Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. then press ENTER. incoming signaling. tel ARTD Assignment of Route Class Data 1. outgoing service. If the ESC key is pressed at the time of data entry. type of trunk. (Up Arrow) or ND-45687 (E) ← CHAPTER 2 Page 187 Revision 4. 4. 3. which provides each individual trunk route with specific functions (i. Hotel siness. is to be assigned or deleted using this command.

Route Number Counter Display Number (1-69) A function corresponding to CDN.ARTD CM0-01 Business. such as OSGS. When you press ENTER. If the ESC key is pressed. Hotel • Enter the Route Class Data Assignment of Route Class Data RT:2 CDN: 6 CDN FUNC DT 9 TQ :0 CDN FUNC DT Enter the Route Number. “WRT?” displays after the last CDN in the sequence or when ESC is pressed. is displayed. the operation can skip to “WRT?” even if route class data entry is in progress (Refer to (3) Precautions). Type the CDN number. CDN FUNC DT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OSGS ONSG ISGS INSG TF TCL L/T RLP :2 :3 :1 :0 :3 :8 :1 :2 Enter the data. If SPACE and ENTER are pressed at the same time.0 ND-45687 (E) . The Item Number is incremented automatically. Note: Note: RT: CDN: FUNC: CHAPTER 2 Page 188 Revision 4. Note: CDN is the Item Number of Route Class Data parameter. using the choices displayed on the right side of the screen. the cursor returns to the parameter CDN. the cursor jumps to the corresponding function.

Hotel Shown below is the correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names): CDN FUNCTION CDN FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 OSGS ONSG ISGS INSG TF TCL L/T RLP TQ SMDR TD DR AC TNT LSG SMDR2 H/M MC ANI D MSB MSW TR OC R/L RVSD TL ANS TELP PAD OGRL ICRL HD GUARD 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 WINK VAD CLD FA BC TCM TDMQ TRSC BT PRV A/D CW TPQ BL TRKS DPLY not used 2W/4W FAAT GW TCMA SMDR3 HDT CD CCH TC/EC IRE SCR LYER1 NET INT DC HKS SCF SMDR4 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 189 Revision 4.ARTD CM0-01 Business.0 .

10 pps.7 CCIS 1: Ring Down 2: Second Dial Tone 3: Not used 4: Sender (Immediate Start) 5: Not used 6: Sender (Delay Dial Start) 7: Sender (Wink start) 8-15: Not used Signal Selection for Outgoing (0-15) 0: Not used 1: DP. Interruption or No. Interruption 9: DP. 50% Make 8: PB.7 CCIS 1: Ring Down 2: Second Dial Tone 3: Not used 4: Sender (Immediate Start) 5: Not used 6: Sender (Delay Dial Start) 7: Sender (Wink Start) 8-15: Not used ONSG: (CDN = 2) ISGS: (CDN = 3) CHAPTER 2 Page 190 Revision 4. 33% Make 2: PB. 40% Make 10: MFC 11-15: Not used Signal Interface for Incoming (0-15) 0: No. 60 msec. 120 msec. 33% Make 6: Not used 7: DP.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination. 20 pps.ARTD CM0-01 Business. 20 pps.7 CCIS 3: DP/PB 4: MF 5: DP. OSGS: (CDN = 1) Signal Interface for Outgoing(0-15) 0: No. 10 pps.

Hotel INSG: (CDN = 4) Signal Selection for Incoming (0-15) 0: Not used 1: DP. 10 pps. Interruption 9: DP. 120 msec. 20 pps.0 TF: (CDN = 5) TCL: (CDN = 6) L/T: (CDN = 7) RLP: (CDN = 8) . 50% Make 8: PB. 10 pps. 1: DDD Line 2: FX Line 3: WATS Line 4: Tie Line/Announcement Trunk 5: CCSA Line 6: Toll Terminal 7: CAS Line 8: Paging 9: Code Call Trunk 10: Dictation Trunk 11: General Paging Trunk 12: Radio Paging Trunk 13-31: Not used Line/Trunk Identification This data should always be assigned as “1” 0: Not used (Line) 1: Trunk Trunk Release Pattern (0-3) 0: Calling Party Release (Outgoing only) 1: Not used 2: First Party Release (either station or trunk side) 3: Not used ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 191 Revision 4. 33% Make 2: PB. 33% Make 6: Not used 7: DP.ARTD CM0-01 Business. 60 msec.7 CCIS 3: DP/PB 4: MF 5: DP. Interruption or No. 40% Make 10: MFC 11-15: Not used Type of Trunk Function (0-3) 0: Not used 1: Outgoing Trunk (OGT) 2: Incoming Trunk (ICT) 3: Bothway Trunk (BWT) Trunk Class (1-31) This data is assigned in order to terminate Incoming Calls at their designated keys (TRK ICI Key Lamps) on the Attendant Console. 20 pps.

SYS 3. “1” is to be assigned if the Access Code is included in the Number Pattern Code (NPC). Index 3. Bit 0 = 1) Flexible Routing Pattern Designation (0/1) When outgoing route selection pattern number is to be determined by the AFRS command. 0: Distinctive Ringing is not required (ASYD.0 ND-45687 (E) .7 CCIS or Bch of ISDN) 13: Signal Line (for No. 1: When flexible routing is executed. Tenant Number Check This data should always be assigned as zero (0).Line 2: CDH 3: Caller ID (Loop) 4: Loop 5: E&M Tie Line 6: DX 7: 24V4 8: Loop DID 9-11: Not used 12: Speech Line (for No. SYS 3.ARTD CM0-01 Business. Hotel TQ: (CDN = 9) Outgoing Trunk Queuing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Detailed Billing Information (0/1) 0: SMDR Out of Service (ORT not required) 1: SMDR In Service (ORT required for receiving dialed digits) Toll Denial-Battery Reversal Always assigned as zero (0) SMDR: (CDN = 10) TD: (CDN = 11) DR: (CDN = 12) Distinctive Ringing Pattern (0/1) This parameter designates whether distinctive ringing will be provided for an incoming call. Bit 0 = 0) 1: Distinctive Ringing is required (ASYD.O. 0: Tenant number check is not required in trunk selection.7 CCIS or Dch of ISDN) 14: Not used 15: Not used Detailed Billing Information (0-15) AC: (CDN = 13) TNT: (CDN = 14) LSG: (CDN = 15) SMDR2: (CDN = 16) CHAPTER 2 Page 192 Revision 4. Line Signal (0-15) 0: Loop 1: Ground Start C. 0: When flexible routing is executed. numbers are translated excluding the Access Code. Index 3. numbers are translated including the Access Code.

0 . . Hexadecimal assignment is “01. SMDR is required for toll and local outgoing calls because Bit 1 is assigned as zero (0). Metering pulses are detected by the system. The following explains what hexadecimal data “1” means for SMDR2: • • • For incoming calls SMDR is required because Bit 0 is assigned as one (1). therefore Bit 2 is zero (0) and Bit 3 is zero (0).ARTD CM0-01 Business.” b3 0 8 b2 0 4 b1 0 2 b0 1 1 b0 = bit 0 b1 = bit 1. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 193 Revision 4. . Hotel b3 b2 b1 b0 0/1: -/Incoming Call (SMDR is required) 0/1: SMDR is required for toll and local outgoing calls/SMDR is required only for toll outgoing calls. 0: 1: 2: 3: Example: Metering pulses are necessary.

zero (0) should always be entered.ARTD CM0-01 Business. 3 23- × × × × H/M: (CDN = 17) Hotel service in CCIS No. zero (0) should always be entered.0 ND-45687 (E) . 7. b2.Detailed billing is required only for toll local outgoing calls. When assigning this data. When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. 1. zero (0) should always be entered. 0.Detailed billing is required for incoming calls. 0- × × × × b1 × × × × 1-Metering pulses are used. MC: (CDN = 18) ANI: (CDN = 19) D: (CDN = 20) MSB: (CDN = 21) MSW: (CDNI = 22) TR: (CDN = 23) OC: (CDN = 24) 911-ANI Service 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data. 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data. CHAPTER 2 Page 194 Revision 4.Detailed billing is required for toll and local outgoing calls. Hotel CONTENTS / INPUT 0 × × 1 2 × × 3 4 × × 5 6 × × 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 b0 0-Detailed billing is not required for incoming calls. 1. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data. When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered.

Time Elapse Indication Service (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service RVSD: (CDN = 26) TL: (CDN = 27) ANS: (CDN = 28) TELP: (CDN = 29) Note: TELP (Time Elapse Indication) is a warning tone sent to the caller after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (usually 3 minutes).O. TK display 1: C. Line Number display Trunk Reversal Identification This data is necessary when a specific Trunk route provides battery reversal for answer supervision. 1: Answer signal is given. 0: Battery Reversal System 1: Third Wire System Tone Level When assigning this data. Answer signal from Trunk side. zero (0) should always be entered. RT. Hotel R/L: (CDN = 25) Attendant-Identification of Incoming Trunk Display 0: TN.ARTD CM0-01 Business. This data determines Pad control on the ODT/DTI circuit card Note ODT DTI 0: No Pad 0: 8 db Pad 1: 2 dB Pad 1: 2 dB Pad 2: 4 dB Pad 2: 4 dB Pad 3: 12 dB Pad 3: 6 dB Pad 4: 16 dB Pad 4: 8 dB Pad 5: Not used 5: Not used 6: Not used 6: Not used 7: Pad Off PAD: (CDN = 30) Note: CDN30=0: PAD value can also be set by switch setting on the ODT /DTI circuit card. (See the “Circuit Card Manual”. 0: No answer signal is given.0 . CDN30= 1 ~ 6: Actual PAD value depends on PAD ROM on the trunk circuit card. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 195 Revision 4.

4: 416 msec. 13: 992 msec. 14: 1056 msec. 12: 928 msec. 10: 800 msec. 15: 1120 msec. 5: 480 msec. 12: 928 msec. 6: 544 msec. 7: 608 msec. 5: 480 msec. 9: 736 msec. 14: 1056 msec.) 0: 288 msec. in case of Loop Dialing Trunk CHAPTER 2 Page 196 Revision 4.) 0: 608 msec. 10: 800 msec. 11: 864 msec. Note 1: 224 msec. 8: 672 msec. Hotel OGRL: (CDN = 31) Release timing for outgoing trunk connection. 2: 288 msec. 1: 224 msec. 8: 672 msec. (Normally assigned as 0. 3: 352 msec. 7: 608 msec. 6: 544 msec. 2: 288 msec. 15: 1120 msec. 11: 864 msec.0 ND-45687 (E) . 9: 736 msec. 3: 352 msec. ICRL: (CDN = 32) Note: 160 msec. 4: 416 msec. Release timing for incoming trunk connections. (Normally assigned as 0. 13: 992 msec.ARTD CM0-01 Business.

1: 2 sec. 2560 msec. 5: 10 sec. 4096 msec. 6656 msec. 15: 30 sec.0 . 1536 msec. 4: 8 sec.) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 3072 msec. 1024 msec. Hotel HD: (CDN = 33) Trunk Hold Timing. 7680 msec. 13: 26 sec. 6: 12 sec. 512 msec. 7168 msec.) 0: 10 sec. 10: 20 sec. 7: 14 sec. 3072 msec. 3584 msec. 9: 18 sec. Outgoing inhibit timing after trunk release. 6144 msec. 8: 16 sec. 11: 22 sec. 5120 msec. (Normally assigned as 0.ARTD CM0-01 Business. (Normally assigned as 0. 12: 24 sec. 2048 msec. 2: 4 sec. 4608 msec. 14: 28 sec. GUARD: (CDN = 34) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 197 Revision 4. 5632 msec. 3: 6 sec.

For CCIS voice route and/or to send ANI across CCIS signaling route. 5: 192 msec. zero (0) should always be entered. 7: 265 msec. 6: 224 msec. assign data “0”. zero (0) should always be entered. assign data “1”. 2: 96 msec.ARTD CM0-01 Business. zero (0) should always be entered. TCM: (CDN = 40) TDMQ: (CDN = 41) TRSC: (CDN = 42) BT: (CDN = 43) CHAPTER 2 Page 198 Revision 4. 12: 416 msec. 8: 288 msec. 11: 384 msec.O. 1: 64 msec. 4: 160 msec. Line Idle Balance Condition (0/1) Note 0: Not balanced 1: Balanced BC: (CDN = 39) Note: When assigning this data. 3: 128 msec. (Normally assigned as 0. 9: 320 msec. Terminal Class Mark (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Tandem Off Hook OG Queuing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Trunk Restriction class (0-15) 0: Out of Service 1-15: In Service For any condition other than CCIS. 10: 352 msec. VAD: (CDN = 36) CLD: (CDN = 37) FA: (CDN = 38) When assigning this data.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 0: 160 msec. Hotel WINK: (CDN = 35) Width of a Wink Signal. 13: 448 msec. Forced Account/Forced Authorization Code 0: Check is not required 1: Check is required (For Remote Access to System) C. 15: 512 msec. 14: 480 msec. When assigning this data.

Number Display of Dterm between offices: 0: Not Provided 1: Provided Not Used 2 Wires/4 Wires 0: 2 Wires 1: 4 Wires Authorization Code for ATT: 0: Depends on RSC of ATT 1: Authorization Code always required. etc. Call Waiting. A/D: (CDN = 45) CW: (CDN = 46) TPQ: (CDN = 47) BL: (CDN = 48) TRKS: (CDN = 49) Note: Assign this data reversing to the mate office data (for No. Paging. 1: Select from the trunk which becomes idle last.0 . 7 CCIS). Hotel PRV: (CDN = 44) Line Trunk Privacy (0/1): 0: Privacy Out of Service 1: Privacy In Service For Busy Verification.). Dictation. Data Communication. Analog/Digital Line Data (0/1): 0: Analog 1: Digital Assign data “1” only for digital T1 routes or Bch of ISDN routes Call Waiting Service (0/1): 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Priority OG Queuing (0/1): 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Detection of Blocking Signal: 0: Not detected 1: Detected Trunk Selection Sequence: Note 0: Select from the trunk which becomes idle first. Executive Right of Way. Gateway Option: 0: Out of Service 1: Data Signaling Trunk 2-15: Not used DPLY: (CDN = 50) (CDN = 51) 2W/4W: (CDN = 52) FAAT: (CDN = 53) GW: (CDN = 54) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 199 Revision 4.ARTD CM0-01 Business.

zero (0) should always be entered. Detailed billing for outgoing in tandem connection: 0: Required 1: Not required Heterogeneous Data Trunk: 0: Not Heterogeneous Data Trunk 1: Heterogeneous Data Trunk Consecutive Dialing: 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Common Channel Handler: 0: CCH is not mounted (normal setting) 1: CCH is mounted (ISDN or CCIS line) When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. Hotel TCMA: (CDN = 55) SMDR3: (CDN = 56) When assigning this data.0 . zero (0) should always be entered.7 1: N-ISDN 2 2: Not used 3: INS 1500 4: Not used 5: AT & T (#4/#5 ESS) 6: Not used 7: NT DMS100/DMS250 ND-45687 (E) SCR: (CDN = 62) LYERl: (CDN = 63) NET: (CDN = 64) INT: (CDN = 65) CHAPTER 2 Page 200 Revision 4.ARTD CM0-01 Business. Step Call Restriction for Tie Line Call (0/1): 0: Step Call is restricted 1: Step Call is not restricted Layer 1 (For ISDN): 0: 23B + D 1: 30B + D User/Net Identification (For ISDN): 0: User Side (normal setting) 1: Network side Interface Specification (For ISDN): 0: No. HDT: (CDN = 57) CD: (CDN = 58) CCH: (CDN = 59) TC/EC: (CDN = 60) IRE: (CDN = 61) Inter-reringing signal (0/1) 1: Supervisory When assigning this data.

INDEX 79. b2 = 1. 1: Transfer to a station for incoming station call. Hooking Service 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Split Call Forwarding Note 0: Transfer to a station for incoming C. SYS. HKS: (CDN = 67) SCF: (CDN = 68) Note: This data is valid when ASYD. Hotel DC: (CDN = 66) Dialed Number Confirmation (For ISDN): 0: Sub Address 1-2: Number of Main Address Digits to be translated.O. Detailed billing for incoming in tandem connection: 0: Required 1: Not required SMDR4: (CDN = 69) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 201 Revision 4./Tie Line call.0 .ARTD CM0-01 Business.

ARTD CM0-01 Business.0 OSGS ONSG ISGS INSG TF TCL L/T RLP TQ SMDR TD DR AC TNT LSG SMDR2 H/M MC ANI D MSB MSW TR OC R/L RVSD TL ANS TELP PAD OGRL ICRL HD GUARD 0 0 1 3 2 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 0 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 1 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 2 3 3 4 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 3 2 5 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 1 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 7 0 0 0 0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel The Table below shows examples of standard route class settings. KIND OF TRUNK ROUTE PARAMETER CICT CDN FUNCTION COGT CBWT TIE LINE DID LINE CCIS LINE VOICE DATA ISDN LINE (PRI) B-CH D-CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 CHAPTER 2 Page 202 Revision 4.

0 . Hotel KIND OF TRUNK ROUTE PARAMETER CICT CDN FUNCTION COGT CBWT TIE LINE DID LINE CCIS LINE VOICE DATA ISDN LINE (PRI) B-CH D-CH 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 WINK VAD CLD FA BC TCM TDMQ TRSC BT PRV A/D CW TPQ BL TRKS DPLY not used 2W/4W FAAT GW TCMA SMDR3 HDT CD CCH TC/EC IRE SCR LYER1 NET INT DC HKS SCF SMDR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 203 Revision 4.ARTD CM0-01 Business.

Precautions • Data of CDN1-8 (TCMN-MT) are effective only for the trunk routes for which 4 (MF) is assigned in ARTD CDN = 2 (ONSG) or 4 (INSG). 4. Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). When you press ENTER. tel ARTE Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign and display Expansion Route Class Data for Route Numbers. using the choices displayed on the right side of the screen. the corresponding Expansion Route Class Data is displayed. Initially.ARTE CM0-04 Business. the cursor jumps to the corresponding function. all zeroes display under DT (Expansion Route Class Data) on the screen. Related Reference Command List up: 5. is displayed. Route Number Counter Display Number A function corresponding to CDN. 3. Entry Procedure LRTE Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data RT:2 CDN: 5 CDN FUNC DT 9 TQ 0 CDN FUNC DT Enter the Route Number.0 ND-45687 (E) . For all other trunk routes. CDN FUNC DT 1 OSGS 2 ONSG 3 ISGS 4 INSG 5 TF 6 TCL 7 L/T 8 RLP :2 :3 :1 :0 :3 :8 :1 :2 Enter the data. When a Route Number is specified and the route has been programmed. Data entered for Expansion Route Class RT: CDN: FUNC: DT: CHAPTER 2 Page 204 Revision 4. assign “0” to all of these data. “WRT?” displays after the last CDN in the sequence or when ESC is pressed. The data can be changed when necessary. Hotel siness. such as TCMN. Type the CDN number.

ARTE CM0-04 Business.0 . Hotel The table below shows the correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names): CDN FUNCTION CDN FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 TCMN TCMC MFSP KPST KPPT STC MC MT TONE PPTM MPTM LPTM RSAX CST CSEG CSEU CSEL CMP TALK FOT RST TOCI TOCD ODGD RLS GWD 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 H1 DT CI OID TKS PAD2 TRM TRPX LDR TSC SATS RVPX DQ SLOV SDTO ADVPRA IND UUI DCH CMRT PREF DFS BOB HO1CH IFR CONV CNI ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 205 Revision 4.

48 msec. 6: 96 msec. 1: 56 msec. CHAPTER 2 Page 206 Revision 4. 32 msec. 20.5 sec. 6-15: Not used TCMC: (CDN = 2) MFSP: (CDN =3) 68 msec. 11.0 sec.0 sec. 52 msec. 5.5 (CCITT No. 10.0 sec.ARTE CM0-04 Business.0 sec.5 sec. 15: 168 msec. Digit/sec.0 sec. 8: 112 msec. 4: 80 msec. 7.0 sec 8.0 sec. 1: 56 msec. 3: 68 msec. 24. 14: 160 msec. 7: 104 msec. 13. 4: 48 msec. 3: 72 msec.5) 10 10 10 10 (In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: KPST: (CDN = 4) 24.5 sec. 11: 136 msec. 10: 128 msec. 7.0 sec. 17. Hotel Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination: TCMN: (CDN = 1) Number of digits of TCM (S Code) (0-3) 0: No digit 1: 1 digit 2: 2 digits 3: Not used TCM and KP Sending Sequence (0-3) 0: KP-ST 1: KP TCM-ST 2: TCM KP-ST 3: KP (TCM) -ST Sending Speed (0-15) Tone ON Tone OFF 0: 68 msec. 12: 144 msec. 2: 68 msec. 22.0 sec. 30.0 sec.5 sec. 9: 120 msec.5 sec. 26. 5: 88 msec. 36 msec. 5: 52 msec. 2: 64 msec. 14. 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16.0 ND-45687 (E) . Duration of KP sending (0-15) Note 0: 48 msec. 56 msec.0 sec. 13: 152 msec. 28.

KPPT: (CDN = 5) (In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: STC: (CDN = 6) 12.0 sec. 24.0 sec.0 sec. 17. 24. 26. Stop Code (0-15) 0-11: Not used 12: MF 13: Not used 14: DTMF 15: MF (for MF signaling) MP Start Cause (0/1) This data must always be set to “0”. 20.5 sec. 1: 56 msec. 17.0 sec.0 sec.0 sec. 11.” KP sending is stopped by reserve signal monitor at the related distant office. 22. 12: 144 msec.5 sec. 22. 5: 88 msec.0 sec. 28. 10. 13. 30. 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16.5 sec. 11.0 sec.0 sec.0 sec.5 sec. 10. 13: 152 msec.0 sec. Hotel (In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: Note: 12. 5.0 sec. 14: 160 msec. 14. 13.5 sec.0 sec. 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16.0 sec.0 sec. 6: 96 msec. 7: 104 msec.ARTE CM0-04 Business. 20.5 sec.0 sec 8.5 sec.5 sec.0 sec. Pause after KP sending (0-15) 0: 48 msec. 15: 168 msec. 14. 7.5 sec.5 sec.0 sec.0 sec 8. 8: 112 msec. 26. 5.0 sec.0 sec. When the monitor signal is Reverse and the data is set to“0. 7.0 sec. 28.0 . 0: As per ST 1: Not used MF Frequency (0/1) 0: DTMF (4×4) 1: MF (2 out of 6) MC: (CDN = 7) MT: (CDN=8) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 207 Revision 4. 30.

7. 3400 msec. Hotel TONE: (CDN = 9) TONE Designation for TRK Call Termination (0-15) Note 0: DT 1-15: Not used Note: This data is effective when 2 (Second Dial Tone) is set in ARTD. 5. 3: 1000 msec. 28.0 sec. 9: 2200 msec. 3000 msec. 6: 1600 msec. Sender Prepause (0-15) 0: Standard Note 1: 600 msec. 6: 1600 msec. 11: 2600 msec. Sender Minimum Pause Note 0: 10 PPS/600 msec. 2: 800 msec.5 sec. 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16.0 ND-45687 (E) . 5: 1400 msec.0 sec. 30. 22.5 sec.0 sec. 1: 600 msec. 12: 2800 msec.0 sec. 26. 4: 1200 msec. 7: 1800 msec. 7: 1800 msec.0 sec. 5: 1400 msec. CHAPTER 2 Page 208 Revision 4.5 sec. 13: 3000 msec. CDN = 3 (ISGS). 2600 msec.0 sec.ARTE CM0-04 Business.0 sec. PPTM: (CDN = 10) 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 2000 msec.. 10: 2400 msec. 8: 2000 msec. 2200 msec. 11. 13.0 sec.5 sec. 24.0 sec. (In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: MPTM: (CDN = 11) 24.5 sec. 14. 20. Note: Possible to use when adjusting the inter-digit timer in DP line.0 sec. 2: 800 msec. 3200 msec. 2800 msec. 2400 msec. 20 PPS/450 msec. 14: 3200 msec. 15: 3400 msec. 4: 1200 msec. 17. Note: Depends on the data in SYS1. 10. Index 131 of ASYD. 3: 1000 msec.0 sec 8.

0 sec.0 sec. 24.5 sec. 4: 1200msec. 11. 28. 17. 28.0 sec. 10: 2400 msec. 30. 10.0 sec. 22. 5. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data.5 sec. 2: 800 msec.0 sec.0 sec.ARTE CM0-04 Business.0 sec. zero (0) should always be entered. PB/0.System or Adding digits.5 sec. 7. zero (0) should always be entered. 20.0 .5 sec. 11: 2600 msec. zero (0) should always be entered.5 sec. 24. 14: 3200 msec. When assigning this data. (In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: RSAX: (CDN = 13) CST: (CDN = 14) CSEG: (CDN = 15) CSEU: (CDN = 16) 12. 8: 2000 msec. 1: 600 msec. 14. 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16.5 sec.0 sec 8. 5.5 sec.0 sec. 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16.0 sec.0 sec.0 sec. Sender Inter-Digit Pause Index (0-15) Note 0: DP/1 sec.0 sec. 6: 1600 msec. 20. 13. 5: 1400 msec. Hotel (In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: LPTM: (CDN = 12) 12. 11. 26. When assigning this data.0 sec. When assigning this data. 12: 2800 msec. 15: 3400 msec. 7. 22.0 sec.0 sec.5 sec.5 sec.0 sec. Note: Possible to use when adjusting the duration of Pause in the case of Speed Calling .0 sec. 17..5 sec. 13: 3000 msec.0 sec.0 sec. 13.0 sec 8. 26. 30. 14. 3: 1000 msec. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 209 Revision 4. 10.5 sec. 9: 2200 msec.0 sec. 7: 1800 msec.

When assigning this data. When assigning this data. When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. TOCD: (CDN = 23) ODGD: (CDN = 24) RLS: (CDN = 25) GWD: (CDN = 26) When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. ISDN transmitting information (0 . Trunk Override Calling (0/1) 0: Override inhibited (Calling side) 1: Tie Line Override Service is provided (Calling side) Trunk Override Called (0/1) 0: Override inhibited (Called side) 1: Tie Line Override Service is provided (Called side).15) Note 0: Out of service 1: 16-Digit Caller Number Service. Gate Way Data Service (0-15) 0: Out of service 1: Gate way system 2-15: Not used When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. Hotel CSEL: (CDN = 17) CMP: (CDN = 18) TALK: (CDN = 19) FOT: (CDN = 20) RST: (CDN = 21) TOCI: (CDN = 22) When assigning this data.ARTE CM0-04 Business. Hl: (CDN = 27) DT: (CDN = 28) CI: (CDN = 29) When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data. Attribute Information Notification Service. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data. CHAPTER 2 Page 210 Revision 4. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. and Calling Sub-Address Transfer Service 2-15: Not used Note: Information transfer from ISDN line to CCIS line function. zero (0) should always be entered.0 ND-45687 (E) .

zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data.0 . zero (0) should always be entered. Pad Control Data 2 (0-7) SEND RECEIVE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note: No Pad 2 dB 3 dB 12 dB 16 dB 6 dB 2 dB 3 dB 11 dB 11 dB 6 dB Not used 0 dB 0 dB PAD value can also be set by switch setting on the 8TLT card. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data.ARTE CM0-04 Business. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 211 Revision 4. zero (0) should always be entered. When assigning this data. Hotel OlD: (CDN = 30) TKS: (CDN = 31) PAD2: (CDN = 32) DATA When assigning this data. When assigning this data. When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered. TRM: (CDN = 33) TRPX: (CDN = 34) LDR: (CDN = 35) TSC: (CDN = 36) SATS: (CDN = 37) RVPX: (CDN = 38) DQ: (CDN = 39) When assigning this data. When assigning this data.

Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunks (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data. zero (0) should always be entered.0 ND-45687 (E) . 0: Out of Service 1: In Service ISDN PRI Failure Routing Service (0/l) Note 0: Out of Service 1: In Service SDTO: (CDN = 41) ADVPRA: (CDN = 42) Note: This data is valid for dummy routes. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. zero (0) should always be entered. Hotel SLOV: (CDN = 40) Slumber Time Override Service (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service System message automatic output when Connection Acknowledge signal has not been received (0/1). PREF: (CDN = 47) DFS: (CDN = 48) BOB: (CDN = 49) When assigning this data. HOlCH: (CDN = 50) IFR: (CDN = 51) Indonesia Compulsion Cut Service (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service CHAPTER 2 Page 212 Revision 4. IND: (CDN = 43) UUI: (CDN = 44) DCH: (CDN = 45) CMRT: (CDN = 46) When assigning this data. Broad Band (0/1) 0: 64K 1: Nx 64K When assigning this data.ARTE CM0-04 Business. Inter-office Name Display 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data.

0 . Hotel CONV: (CDN = 52) SMDR Called Number Conversion (0/1) 0: Conversion Number 1: Dialed Number CNI Calling Number Identification format (0-3) 0: No ANI 1: Feature Group D Format 2: Not used 3: Not used CNI: (CDN=53) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 213 Revision 4.ARTE CM0-04 Business.

Hotel siness. When a Route Number is specified and the route has been programmed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. The data can be changed when necessary. Route Number Counter Display Number A function corresponding to CDN. Precautions None 4. Data entered for Expansion Route Class RT: CDN: FUNC: DT: CHAPTER 2 Page 214 Revision 4. Type the CDN number. is displayed.0 ND-45687 (E) . Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). When you press ENTER. such as RST. all zeroes display under DT (Expansion Route Class Data) on the screen. the cursor jumps to the corresponding function. 3. CDN FUNC DT 1 RST 2 HMT 3 TRCRST 4 TRSRST 5 T309LNK 6 T309CON 7 L.ARTI CM0-09 Business. tel ARTI Assignment of Trunk Application Data 1. Function This command is used to assign and display Trunk Application Data for Route Numbers. the corresponding Trunk Application Data is displayed. Initially. “WRT?” displays after the last CDN in the sequence or when ESC is pressed.CRST 8 VCM Enter the data. using the choices displayed on the right side of the screen. Entry Procedure LRTEI Assignment of Trunk Application Data RT:2 CDN: 5 CDN FUNC DT 16 MTC 0 Enter the Route Number. Related Reference Command List up: 5.

0 . Hotel The table below shows the relationship between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names): CDN FUNCTION CDN FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 RETMSG RST HMT TRCRST TRSRST T309LNK T309CON LLCRST VCM OVRT POOL DTRT TMPRT CODEC PASS IRL MTC TC TS 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 CDCSPD DVRST RSCT ROCG RICG STSENQ ANI SRV TON NPI SPMET ECCIS ECCISTM ECCISOB ECCISIB L/T ECCISTD OPCC MFCG2 CLBK ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 215 Revision 4.ARTI CM0-09 Business.

1 kHz audio and 7 kHz audio calls are restricted. Restricted digital and Vido data calls are restricted. CHAPTER 2 Page 216 Revision 4.ARTI CM0-09 Business. + ALERT or CALL PROC. 3.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination: RETMSG (CDN1) 0= 1= RST (CDN2) 0= 1= 2= 3= HMT (CDN3) TRCRST (CDN4) 0= 1= 2= 3-15 = TRSRST (CDN5) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4-15 = T309LNK (CDN6) 0= 1= 2= 3= T309CON (CDN7) 0= 1= 2= 3= LLCRST (CDN8) 0= 1-31 = Note: Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE with Analog Trunk CALL PROC. + ALERT CALL PROC.) – Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element No restriction 384 Kbps (H0) call is restricted 1536 Kbps (H11)/1920 Kbps (H12) call is restricted 384 Kbps and 1536 (H11)/1920 (H12) Kbps calls are restricted – Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link Failure Layer 2 Alarm with T309 is Disabled Layer 2 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled Layer 2 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled – Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 Failure Layer 1 Alarm with T309 is Disabled Layer 1 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled Layer 1 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled – Call restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information Element No restriction Call which includes this user rate value is restricted Note User rate value is based on ITU-T Q-931.) Speech call restriction (Speech. + PROGRESS Assignment of Restart Restart Send per Individual Channel – – Restart Not Send Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element No restriction Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital.

ARTI CM0-09 Business. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. 2= 6 = 1 sec. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 217 Revision 4. Restoration timer (TCxMTC) sec. 7 kHz audio calls are restricted. Also. Hotel VCM (CDN9) OVRT (CDN10) POOL (CDN11) DTRT (CDN12) 0= 1= TMPRT (CDN13) 0= 1= Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. 7= Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Call restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDN. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Call restriction by Temporary Route Information Note No Restriction Restriction MTC (CDN17) TC (CDN 18) TS (CDN19) CDCSPD (CDN20) DVRST (CDN21) 0= 1= 2= 3= RSCT (CDN22) 0= 1= Note: This data is effective when TMPRT = 1. restricted digital and Video data are restricted.) Both Speech and Data calls are restricted. the call restriction can be checked referring to this route information. 0-15 = TC (CDN 18) x MTC (Restart timer value) Timer T309 Counter Value 0= 4 = 30 sec. No Restriction Speech call restriction (Speech.) Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital. Clear call when DTI alarm is detected Note CODEC (CDN14) PASS (CDN15) IRL (CDN16) Note: This data should be set when there is no Dch in the physical DTI. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. 3 = 2 sec. 5 = 5 min. Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm) – Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal as a Layer 1 alarm Temporary Route Information over CCIS – In CCIS. 3. Assignment of Timer T309 Value. the route information can be transferred by the call control messages.1 kHz audio.0 . 1 = 64 msec.

CHAPTER 2 Page 218 Revision 4. Timing to demand ANI Information There is no ANI demand at Incoming Call After receiving 1st digit After receiving 2nd digit After receiving 3rd digit After receiving 4th digit After receiving 5th digit After receiving 6th digit After receiving 7th digit ANI (CDN26) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= SRV (CDN27) Additional Service Selection Note Advice of Charge (AOC) 0 = Valid 1 = Invalid Bit 1: Malicious Call Trace (MCT)/Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 0 = Valid 1 = Invalid Bit 2-Bit 6: Bit 7: For TON (CDN28) and/or NPI (CDN29) 0 = Invalid 1 = Valid Bit 0: Note: Enter this data by a decimal. Hotel ROCG (CDN23) 0= 1= Note: Outgoing Call Account by Temporary Route Information – Effective Note This data is effective when TMPRT = 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Incoming Call Account by Temporary Route Information – Effective Note RICG (CDN24) 0= 1= Note: This data is effective when TMPRT = 1. Status Inquiry Message Send Out of Service In Service Note STSENQ (CDN25) 0= 1= Note: This data is not effective in Australia.ARTI CM0-09 Business.

Hotel TON (CDN28) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= Note: Type of Number Note Unknown International Number National Number Network Special Number Subscriber Number – Abbreviated Number Reserved for Extension This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1. Numbering Plan Identification Note Unknown ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan – Data Numbering Plan Telex Numbering Plan – National Standard Numbering Plan Private Numbering Plan – Reserved for Extension – NPI (CDN29) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5-7 = 8= 9= 10-14 = 15 = Others = Note: This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and ARTI SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1.ARTI CM0-09 Business. Meter Pulse Observation Control – Low to High Transition High to Low Transition Low to High & High to Low Transition Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS) Out of Service In Service SPMET (CDN30) 0= 1= 2= 3= ECCIS (CDN31) 0= 1= ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 219 Revision 4.0 .

ARTI CM0-09 Business. Hotel ECCISTM (CDN32) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= 10-13 = 14 = 15 = ECCISOB (CDN33) 0= 1= ECCISIB (CDN34) 0= 1= L/T (CDN35) 0= 1= Note: Release timer for E-CCIS Line 3 minutes (Default setting) 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour Not used Immediately after call completion Not released OG Billing for E-CCIS Line Out of Service In Service IC Billing for E-CCIS Line Out of Service In Service Local/Toll Local Toll Note Only for Russia Addressing Information used in E-CCIS Called DID Number Called Sub Address Optimal Call Control In Service Out of Service Calling Party Category Subscriber with Priority Subscriber without Priority Kind of Collect Call Blocking Signal GB-7 GB-3 ECCISTD (CDN36) 0= 1= OPCC (CDN37) 0= 1= MFCG2 (CDN38) 0= 1= CLBK (CDN40) 0= 1= CHAPTER 2 Page 220 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .

Precautions • The specific attendant number cannot be a station number or LDN already being utilized. LHEN 5.0 . DSTN List up: LTRK. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. When the specific attendant number is dialed. that particular attendant console will receive the call. delete and display a specific attendant number to an attendant console. tel ASAT Assignment of Specific Attendant Number 1. DLEN. Entry Procedure Assignment of Specific ATT Number TN:1 ACC: 6001 ATN:1 WRT? TN: ACC: ATN: Tenant Number Access Code (The number of digits must be the same as the Station numbers. Hotel siness.ASAT CM0-01 Business. LLEN. Related Reference Command List up: LSAT -Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK.) Attendant Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 221 Revision 4. 3. Function This command is used to assign. 4.

LSTN -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC 5. 3. Precautions • • This command is used for Business System only.0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry Procedure Assignment of Station Class Data TN:1 STN:3113 TEC:3 RSC:1 SFC:1 WRT? TN: STN: Tenant Number Station Number CHAPTER 2 Page 222 Revision 4. DSTN LLEN. and Service Feature Restriction Class). 4. use the ASDT command to delete the present station data and assign new station data. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2.ASCL CM0-01 Business siness ASCL Assignment of Station Class Data 1. Route Restriction Class. The Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) cannot be changed from a Dterm Class (TEC = 12) to any other Telephone Class. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: ASDT ASDT ASDT. or vice versa. When it is necessary to change the present TEC to another type of TEC. without deleting the station number. Function This command is used to change the station class (Telephone Equipment Class. DLEN.

Service Feature Class (0-15) For assignment of SFC from ASFC command.0 .ASCL CM0-01 Business TEC: RSC: SFC: Telephone Equipment Class (1-31) 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data terminal via data module 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used 26: VPS 27: Eight Conference Equipment 28-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15) For assignment of RSC from ARSC command. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 223 Revision 4.

MCI. SPRINT. a Time of Day Change Pattern Number from 1 to 7 is assigned.0 ND-45687 (E) . 0/1 assigned to parameter “EFFECT” has the following meaning: “EFFECT” = 0: “EFFECT” = 1: b. CHAPTER 2 Page 224 Revision 4. Function This command is necessary when LCR six (6) digit translation is required for FX Prefix Codes. designate parameter KIND as “SCC”. • When the “EFFECT” parameter is “2”. means that the digit “1” is required as a prefix for access to an FX line. tel ASDC Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing 1. error code is displayed. When parameter KIND is assigned as SCC. etc. If it has not been assigned. means that the office code is allowed for the area code dialed. When the Translation Pattern is for a Special Common Carrier (MCI. Note: • • • • When the Translation Pattern is for an FX line.). This command is used to assign. 6-digit translation is not required for the area code designated. When assigning data to parameter “EFFECT” the following must be noted: a. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. press the F1 (Help) key to display error-related information. Precautions • • Before using this command. When an error code is displayed. in accordance with the ATCP command. means that an additional digit is not required for access to an FX line. When the route to be used is changed according to the time of day. designate parameter KIND as “PFX”. the following must be confirmed. When parameter KIND is assigned as PFX. An Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in the AFRS (Assignment of Flexible Route Selection) command. 0/1 assigned to parameter “EFFECT” has the following meaning: “EFFECT” = 0: “EFFECT” = 1: means that the office code is not allowed for the area code dialed. delete. Hotel siness.ASDC CM0-02 Business. and display this information. SPRINT and other applications. 3.

KIND = “SCC” “EFFECT” = 0: means that the office code is not allowed for the area code dialed. Hotel 4. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 225 Revision 4. Related Reference Command List up: LSDC -Parameter OPRAssignment: AOPR Deletion: AOPR Display: AOPR List up: LOPR -Parameter TDPTNAssignment: ATCP Display: ATCP List up: LTCP 5. Prefix SCC: MCI.0 .ASDC CM0-02 Business. “EFFECT” = 1: means that the digit “1” is required as a prefix for access to an FX line. “EFFECT” = 1: means that the office code is allowed for the area code dialed. SPRINT Time of Day Change Pattern Number (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) Route Advancing Order (0-7) Office Code (200-999) Designating Data (0/1) KIND = “PFX” “EFFECT” = 0: means that an additional digit is not required for access to an FX line. Entry Procedure Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing KIND:PFX TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 OFFICE:200 EFFECT:0 WRT? KIND: TDPTN: OPR: RA: OFFICE: EFFECT: Kind of Selection (PFX/SCC) PFX: FX.

If new data is to be assigned. extinguish the MW lamp (or MW display on the Dterm) using the CMWL command before deleting the station data. If any item is applicable. that if there is data related to Intercom among the data of the stations assigned via AKYD command. the message “PKG CHECK” is displayed on the CRT. Precautions • • • • • • This command is used for Business System only. SYS 2. station data cannot be deleted by means of this ASDT command unless the above-mentioned data assigned by AKYD command have been deleted beforehand. • • • When TEC = 12 (D term) has been assigned. When the station to be deleted is busy. delete and display station data. then press the ENTER key. When this occurs confirm that the circuit card is mounted in its proper location. however. Business CD. If the station number designated has already been assigned. ensure to check the following items. CHAPTER 2 Page 226 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . assign the key data by AKYD command. When deleting a specific Station Number. the data of the stations assigned via the AKYD command is also deleted. siness ASDT Assignment of Station Data 1. The Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Class Data command (ARTD). an error indication is provided. 3. the current data is displayed. Note. or initialize the DLC/ ELC circuit card concerned after assigning the station data. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction Data command (ARSC). Index 2. If the MW lamp on the station telephone set is lit (or if the Dterm is displaying “Message Waiting”).ASDT CM0-01 ACD. The Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Class command (ASFC). Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. the old data must be deleted before the new data can be entered. When assigning a station to the first circuit of the circuit card. Function This command is used to assign. and the assignment of signaling in ASYD. If station data is deleted. follow the instructions specified in that item before deleting the Station Number. a.

MBST DMBL. DMBS Assignment of Station Data TN:1 STN:3112 LENS:000002 TEC:14 RSC:1 SFC:1 WRT? TN: STN: Tenant Number Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 227 Revision 4. Business 4. Entry Procedure MBLE.0 . LLEN -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display: 5.ASDT CM0-01 ACD. DSTN Change (Part): ASCL. Related Reference Command Display: DLEN. ASTN List up: LSTN.

For assignment of SFC from ASFC command. Business LENS: Line Equipment number (6 digits) XX X XX X Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) TEC: Telephone Equipment Class (1-31) 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data Terminal via data module 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line) 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used 26: VPS 27: Eight Conference Equipment 28-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). For assignment of RSC from ARSC command.ASDT CM0-01 ACD. RSC: SFC: CHAPTER 2 Page 228 Revision 4. Service Feature Class (0-15).0 ND-45687 (E) .

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 229 Revision 4.ASFC CM0-02 Business. 3. 4.0 . tel ASFC Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class 1. Related Reference Command List up: 5. and display restriction information according to Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC) of the Station for the Service Feature Index (SFI). Function This command is used to assign. Hotel siness. Entry Procedure LRTC Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 SFI:1 SFC:0 RES:1 WRT? DAY/ NIGHT: SFC: SFI: RES: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Service Restriction Class (0-15) Service Feature Index (1-255) Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Note: When WRT? = Y is entered the value of the SFC automatically increases by one (+1). Precautions • • Unused data should not be assigned. Data must be assigned to activate the feature. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.

Busy Line 10: Call Hold 11: Data Line Privacy / Attendant Camp on 12: Speed Calling System 13: Trunk Answer (TAS) 14: System Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 15: Not used 16: Line Load Control 17: Not used 18: Not used 19: Individual Speed Calling 20: Not used 21: Off-Hook OG Queuing 22: Not used 23: Voice Mail Password Display Elimination 24: Emergency Call 25: Call Forward Outside .0 .ASFC CM0-02 Business.Don’t Answer 9: Call Forwarding .local (0=Restricted 1=Allowed) 26: Call Forward Outside . Hotel • Each index of parameter SFI (Service Feature Index) is explained below. SFI: Service Feature Index 1: Outgoing Trunk Queuing 2: Call Back 3: Executive Right-of-Way (Calling Party) 4: Executive Right-of-Way (Called Party) 5: Call Waiting Originating (Calling Party) 6: Call Waiting Originating (Called Party) 7: Call Forwarding-All Calls 8: Call Forwarding .long distance (0=Restricted 1=Allowed) 27: Authorization Codes 28: Digital Data 29: Direct Call Pickup 30: Off-Hook Alarm 31: SID to Terminating user DTE 32: Line Circuit Reverse Relay (for 16LC) 33: Periodic Time Indication Tone 34-35: Not used 36: Special Common Battery Station/Brokerage Hot line (Dterm) 37: Radio Paging Answer 38: Meet-Me Paging 39: Individual Trunk Access 40: Not used 41: Timed Reminder (for Business System) Automatic Wake Up (for Hotel System) 42: Group Announcement (for Hotel System) 43: Maid Dial (for Hotel System) 44: Last Number Call Redial 45: Front Desk Terminal (for Hotel System) 46: Bad Call Notify (Faulty Trunk Report) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 230 Revision 4.

ASFC CM0-02 Business.0 . Hotel 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60: 61: 62: 63: 64: 65: 66: 67: 68: 69: 70: 71: 72: 73: 74: 75: 76: 77: 78: 79: 80: 81: 82: 83-86: 87: 88-89: 90: 91: 92: 93: 94: 95: 96: 97: 98: Guest Information Display Terminal (Hotel/Motel) Disable Distinctive Ringing for analog ports (0/1 No/Yes) Not used Off-Premise Extension Boss-Secretary Features Voice Call using an Access Code Message Reminder using an Access Code Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Station-to-station SMDR Not used Not used Not used Priority Outgoing Queue Outgoing Queue Override Line Load Control 1. 2 and 3 Line Load Control 2 and 3 Line Load Control 3 Call Park Access and Answer Call Park Automatic Message Waiting Lamp Off (for Hotel System) Intercom Group Distinctive Dial Tone Calling Station Switch Hook Flash Restriction Not used MWL Setting from the ATT or Station (Called) D term Multiline Conference Add on Trunk Override Inhibit Trunk Override Station Barge in From a Tie Line Hold on Queuing From a Tie Line 8-Party Conference Terminal Recording for an Internal Call MWL Setting from the Station (Calling) Not used Multi Channel Recording (REC) Not used Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY) Subscriber with priority/without priority Not used Voice Call Restrict (0=No / 1=Yes) Calling Party Number Display Direct Call Restriction (for ACD only) Not used Send Facility Message Requesting SID Information Send Facility Message Requesting ANI Information ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 231 Revision 4.

go to ASYD 140. Route Restriction Class of the station which has set CF-OUT SIDE is used.0 ND-45687 (E) . If 103=1.ASFC CM0-02 Business. Not used Analog Caller ID-Station (Single Mode) Not used Call Return Call Forwarding . go to ASYD 247. Hotel 99: 100: 101-102: 103: 104: 105-106: 107: 108-110: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115-121: 122: 123-124: 125: 126-127: 128: 129-130: 131: 132-135: 136: 137: 138: 139: 140: 141-144: 145: 146: 147: 148: 149-150: 151: 152: 153: 154: 155: 156: 157-255: Note: Call Forward I’m Here (Destination) Call Forward I’m Here (Origination) Not used Assignment of No Answer Timer for Blind Transfer to Station/Blind Transfer to Attendant Note Blind Transfer Not used Slumber Time Override Not used Not used Voice Call during Dial Intercom Not used Display on D term when a station is in DND (0/1 RST/DND) (6000 version ICS and above) Not used Call Forward with ATT Camp-on (JO Hotel and D ver ICS) Not used Pad Lock Not used Call Forwarding .8 Party Not used Automatic Idle Return Authorization Code Display Elimination Hold on Consultation Hold Enhancement Not used Send Warning Tone to interrupted parties when THREE-WAY CALLING is established using Hold on Consultation Hold Enhancement Not used Internal Zone Paging.Override Indication Not used If 103=0. Answer Analog Caller ID-Station Not used Personal Ringer Not used When CF-OUT SIDE is performed.Busy Line Override Not used Add on Conference . CHAPTER 2 Page 232 Revision 4.

DLEN. Hotel siness. AAST.0 . RAST. RAST. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. LLEN. DSTN Lisp up: LSTN. RGST. 3. 4. tel ASGD Assignment of Special Group 1.ASGD CM0-02 Business. Entry Procedure Assignment of Special Group TN:1 STN:3111 F:0 GN:1 WRT? TN: STN: F: GN: Tenant Number Station Number Function Number (0-7) 0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 1 5: Priority Call 2 6: Priority Call 3 7: Not used Group Number (1-7) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 233 Revision 4. LHST. When the specific terminating unit group information is assigned or deleted in this command. LHEN 5. RGST Display: ASDT. Precautions • • The station number expansion information must be assigned before assignment in this command. delete and display the specific terminating unit group for a station which has already been assigned. Related Reference Command List up: LSGD -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. the specific terminating unit information must also be assigned or deleted in the ASID command. AGST Deletion: ASDT. Function This command is used to assign.

• • If the assigning group does not need secretary. To exchange a station in the group. LHEN CHAPTER 2 Page 234 Revision 4. Hotel siness. Related Reference Command List up: LSHG. Precautions • In the Assignment Mode. a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned. and display a pilot station hunting group. • • In the Deletion Mode.0 ND-45687 (E) . A maximum of 40 stations can be assigned to one group per system. 3. DSTN List up: LSTN. tel ASHC Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular 1. If Y is entered. “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. the “WRT?” prompt displays. use the DELETE key. delete. AGST Deletion: ASDT. use the INSERT key. enter a new station Number over the existing station Number. LLEN. To delete a Station in the Hunting Group. In the Change Mode. DLEN. enter blank. 4. LSHL -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. Special Key Table These keys are effective in the operation mode “Assignment” and “Change” only. If N is entered.ASHC CM0-01 Business. if there is no data for the group. RAST. RGST. LHST. if no secretary station is designated. This key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. change and deletion of the secretary station are possible. AAST. RGST Display: ASDT. RAST. To insert a station into the Group. KEY FUNCTION ESC INSERT DELETE This key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group station entry. For all other groups. This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group station entry. enter blank. the mode changes to Assign Mode. If this key is pressed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign. the operation returns to station number entry.

CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station included in the CIRCULAR Group.ASHC CM0-01 Business. ← Select the desired mode by use of (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow). ← ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 235 Revision 4. press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt. press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station.) Note 1: ESC. Hotel 5. Entry Procedure • Enter the kind of mode ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Note: • To assign a Station Hunting Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETARY: 2401 CNT STN CNT STN 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10: 2410 WRT? Y CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: TN: Tenant Number. INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. then press ENTER.0 . Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group. STN: Station Number. When entering other parameters.

CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station included in the CIRCULAR Group. STN: Station Number. TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. When entering other parameters. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. Hotel • To change a Station Hunting Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETAR: 2401 WRT? Y CNT STN CNT STN 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10: 2410 CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 CNT STN 16: 2416 17: 2417 18: 2418 19: 2419 20: 2420 TN: Tenant Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the CIRCULAR Group. PHANTOM: Station Number of the Phantom Station.ASHC CM0-01 Business. press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group.) Note 1: ESC.) CHAPTER 2 Page 236 Revision 4. INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group. • To delete a Station Hunting Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR TN:1 STN:2400 SECRETARY: 2420 CNT STN CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10: 2419 WRT?Y CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419 Station numbers of the station belonging in the station hunting group are displayed automatically. SECRETARY: Station Numbers of the Secretary Station. press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.

If the assigning group does not need secretary. the pilot station number is displayed as “P: 2400”. If this key is pressed. change or deletion of phantom stations are limited only where phantom stations have been entered or where no phantom stations are assigned yet. 3. For all other groups. If Y is entered. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. the mode changes to Assign Mode. When the phantom number for the hunting group is required. use the APHN command. Precautions • • In the Assignment Mode. This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 237 Revision 4. if there is no data for the group. the pilot station number is the one which has been entered first. delete. the “WRT?” prompt displays. the designation of the pilot station cannot be changed. At the time of Station Hunting Group data entry. Function This command is used to assign. enter blank.0 . KEY FUNCTION • • • ESC INSERT DELETE This key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group Station entry. For inserting a station to the Group. In the Change Mode. for instance. If N is entered. Special Key Table These keys are effective in the operation mode “Assignment” and “Change” only.ASHP CM0-01 Business. In the Deletion Mode. and display a pilot station hunting group. Change and deletion of the secretary station and phantom stations are possible. When the group has a phantom station. the operation returns to station number entry. tel ASHP Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Pilot 1. However. Hotel siness. A maximum of 40 stations can be assigned to one group per system. Exchanging a station in the group can be made by entering a new station number over the existing station number. delete the phantom station number first. use the DELETE key. use the INSERT key. For deletion of a station in the hunting group. This key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned.

RGST Display: ASDT. then press ENTER. Entry Procedure • Enter the kind of mode. LSHL -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. AGST Deletion: ASDT. LLEN. ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 238 Revision 4. LHST.0 ← Select the desired mode by use of (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow). AAST. DSTN List up: LSTN. RAST. RAST. LHEN 5. Hotel 4. DLEN.ASHP CM0-01 Business. Related Reference Command List up: LSHG. ← ND-45687 (E) . RGST.

Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group.PILOT TN:1 STN:2400 SECRETARY: 2401 CNT STN CNT STN P: 2400 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10: 2410 WRT? Y CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: TN: Tenant Number. press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. When entering other parameters. press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 239 Revision 4.) Note 1: ESC. STN: Station Number.0 . SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station.ASHP CM0-01 Business. Hotel • To assign a Station Hunting Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group . CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group. INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.

STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group. CHAPTER 2 Page 240 Revision 4. press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.ASHP CM0-01 Business. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.) Note 1: ESC. When entering other parameters.PILOT TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETAR: 2401 CNT STN CNT STN P: 2400 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10:2410 WRT?Y CNT STN 11: 2411 12: 2412 13: 2413 14: 2414 15: 2415 CNT STN 16: 2416 17: 2417 18: 2418 19: 2419 20: 2420 TN: Tenant Number. press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. Hotel • To change a Station Hunting Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group . INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group.0 ND-45687 (E) . SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station.

ASHP CM0-01 Business, Hotel

To delete a Station Hunting Group
Assignment of Station Hunting Group - PILOT TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETARY: DEL? Y CNT STN CNT STN P: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419 2401

Station numbers of the station belonging in the station hunting group are displayed automatically.

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 241 Revision 4.0

ASHU CM0-01 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

ASHU

Assignment of Station Hunting Group-UCD

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a UCD Station Hunting Group. 3. Precautions • • In the Assignment Mode, the recommended maximum number of member stations in a UCD Hunting Group is 20. In the Change Mode, for deletion of a Station in the Hunting Group, use the DELETE key. For inserting a station into the Group, use the INSERT key. Exchanging can be made by entering a new station number over the existing station number. In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. If Y is entered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry. The stations in the group are displayed in a prearranged order. A maximum of 63 UCD groups can be assigned on a system basis. If more than 63 UCD groups are attempted, an Error Code will be displayed. When assigning UCD Overflow Groups (refer to AUOG command), the Tenant and Station numbers of the UCD Pilot Station assigned in this Command are used to designate the overflow group. Special Key Table. These keys are effective in the operation mode “Assignment” and “Change” only.
FUNCTION

• • • • •

KEY

ESC INSERT DELETE

This key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group station entry. If this key is pressed, the “WRT?” prompt displays. This key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group station entry.

CHAPTER 2 Page 242 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ASHU CM0-01 Business, Hotel

4. Related Reference Command List up: LSHG, LSHL

-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure • Enter the kind of mode

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION

Note:

Select the desired mode by use of (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 243 Revision 4.0

ASHU CM0-01 Business, Hotel

To assign a UCD Group
Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD TN:1 STN: 2400 WRT? Y CNT STN CNT STN 1: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20:

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. When entering other

parameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.

CHAPTER 2 Page 244 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ASHU CM0-01 Business, Hotel

To change a UCD Group
Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD TN:1 STN: 2400 WRT? Y CNT STN CNT STN 1: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. When entering other

parameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 245 Revision 4.0

ASHU CM0-01 Business, Hotel

To delete a UCD Group
Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD TN:1 STN:2400 DEL? Y CNT STN CNT STN 1: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419

Station numbers of the station belonging in the UCD group are displayed automatically.

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station Included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

CHAPTER 2 Page 246 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ASID CM0-02 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

ASID

Assignment of Special Incoming

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the information for a specific terminating unit in the terminating unit group which has been assigned via the ASGD command. 3. Precautions • • • Data must be assigned in the ASGD command before data can be assigned or deleted in this command. This command must be programmed when Off-Hook Alarms, Attendant Night Transfer, and/or Priority Calls 1, 2, 3 are assigned. An Attendant Console cannot be assigned as the specific terminating unit type for ATT Night Transfer (Function Number = 3). This function can only be assigned for GN = 1.

4. Related Reference Command List up: LSID

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 247 Revision 4.0

ASID CM0-02 Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure • When the call connection destination is a station:
Assignment of Special Incoming TN: 1 GN:1 S/A: STA SSTN:3111 F: 0

WRT?

TN: F:

GN: S/A: SSTN:

Tenant Number Function Number (0-7) 0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 1 5: Priority Call 2 6: Priority Call 3 7: Not used Group Number (1-7) Specific Terminating Equipment (Enter S.) S: Station Special Station Number

CHAPTER 2 Page 248 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ASID CM0-02 Business, Hotel

When the call connection destination is an ATT:
Assignment of Special Incoming TN: 1 GN: 1 S/A: A F: 5

WRT?

TN: F:

GN: S/A:

Tenant Number Function Number (0-7) 0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 1 5: Priority Call 2 6: Priority Call 3 7: Not used Group Number (1-7) Specific Terminating Equipment (Enter A.) A: Attendant Console

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 249 Revision 4.0

ASLU CM0-04 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

ASLU

Assignment of Slumber Time Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display of the Slumber Time Group designation, and the connection destinations and a time zone for each Slumber Time Group for the Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb service. 3. Precautions • • • Time data should be assigned using military time. When assigning plural time data for a specific Slumber Time Group, the time data assigned should not be duplicated. When setting a 24-hour slumber time, set both FROM and TO to “00:00”.

4. Related Reference Command List up: LSLU

-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure • Designation of Slumber Time Group
Assignment of Slumber Time Data FUNC: 1 TN: 1 G: 1 WRT? STN: 2000

FUNC: STN: G:

Kind of Function (Enter 1) 1: Group Information Station Number Slumber Time Group Number (1-7)

CHAPTER 2 Page 250 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ASLU CM0-04 Business, Hotel

Assignment of Connection Destinations and Zone for Slumber Time Group
Assignment of Slumber Time Data FUNC:2 G: 1 CNT: 2 2 TFR: 1

Input order of Slumber Time Count is displayed.
FROM:10:00 WRT? TO:13:00

Assign as many as designated by parameter CNT.

When all the data have been entered, ‘WRT?’ displays.

FUNC: G: CNT: TFR:

FROM: TO:

Kind of function (Enter 2) 2: Transfer/Time Data Slumber Time Group Number (1-7) Slumber Time Counter (1-4) Transfer Kind (1/2) 1: Attendant 2: Announcement Slumber Time Start Time Slumber Time End Time

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 251 Revision 4.0

ASPA CM0-01 Business
siness

ASPA

Assignment of Special Access Code

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when a Special Access code or Trunk Access code has been dialed. 3. Precautions • • • • • • • • • • • This command is used for Business System only. When changing the data, the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned. When the Access Code (ACC) is for a station number, the first digit of the numbering plan must be assigned. For example, if the numbering plan for station numbers is 5xxx, “5” is entered as the ACC. The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command. Unused levels should not be assigned. In the case of Speed Calling - System (SRV = SSC, SID = 15); assign NND as the number of digits for ACC, and NND1 as the number of digits for Abbreviated Digit Code (ADC). When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum number of necessary digits (NND) is 5. When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum number of necessary digits NND is 15. When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 63), the ACC equals the number of necessary digits (NND). When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRC=SSC, SID=17), the maximum necessary digits (NND) is 8. When assigning individual TRR access (SRV= SSC;, SID = 17), the maximum number of necessary digits is eight.

CHAPTER 2 Page 252 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

ASPA CM0-01 Business

4. Related Reference Command List up: LNPD

-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5. Entry Procedure • For Station Number Level:
Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 3 CI: N SRV: STN WRT?

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter STN.) STN: Station Number Level

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 253 Revision 4.0

/Tie)./Tie). Cancel Speed Calling-Station (Program) Speed Calling-System TAS Answer Individual Trunk Access Not used OG Trunk Queuing (Set) OG Trunk Queuing (Cancel) Speed Calling-Station (Access) ND-45687 (E) . Set Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C. Set Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C. Cancel Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O.O. Set Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C. Cancel Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C. Entry Executive Right-of-Way (Override) Call Waiting Originating Call Back (Cancel) Call Pick-Up Group Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C./Tie).O.0 Call Hold Attendant Call (OPR) Call Back./ Tie).O.O.O./Tie).ASPA CM0-01 Business • For Service Code: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 22 CI: H SRV: SSC SID: 1 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SlD: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index The contents of parameter SID are explained below: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: CHAPTER 2 Page 254 Revision 4./ Tie).

0 . Business 6100 Series Software and above) Timed Reminder.I’m Here (Cancel) Not used Call Pick-up Direct Not used Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Dial Access to Lock Flash Signal Send (CAS-Main) Last Number Redial Not used Bad Call Notify (Faulty Trunk Report) Wake Up Call Set (Hotel.I’m Here (Set) Call Forward . Cancel Not used Attendant Manual Override Station Call Park (Park) Station Call Park (Local Retrieval) Station Call Park (Remote Retrieval) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 255 Revision 4.ASPA CM0-01 Business 22-27: 28: 29: 30-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50-59: 60: 61: 62: 63: Not used Call Forward . Entry Timed Reminder.

Cancel 52: Not used 53: Boss/Secretary Override 54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON or Station. Entry Note 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station). Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station). Set 55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON or Station. Cancel 56-62: Not used 63: Call Pickup Expand 64-65: Not used 66: Multi Channel Recording (REC) 67: Not used 68: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY) 69-84: Not used 85: Dial Access to Unlock 86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station). Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD). Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD). Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station). Delete 48: Data Privacy on Demand. Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station).0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand. Cancel 92-95: Not used CHAPTER 2 Page 256 Revision 4.ASPA CM0-01 Business • For Service Code Appendix: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 10 CI: B SRV: SSCA SIDA: 41 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SIDA: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter SSCA) SSCA: Service Code Appendix Service Feature Index A (1-225) The contents of parameter SIDA are explained below: 1-40: Not used 41: Voice call 42: Message Remainder (D term) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control. Assign 47: Line Load Control. Entry 87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station).

bit 2 is assigned as “1” (Call Forwarding is in service). Index 79.0 .) OGC: Outgoing Call Route Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 257 Revision 4. • For Outgoing Call: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 90 CI: B SRV: OGC RT: 3 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: RT: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter OGC.ASPA CM0-01 Business 96: 97: 98: 99-105: 106: 107-225: Note: Follow Me Phone Call Hold Conference Internal Zone Paging Not used Call Return Not used These indexes are used when ASYD. SYS1.

the number ahead of RT increases by one and then the next RT No.ASPA CM0-01 Business • For Outgoing Call (Advance): Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 CI: N CNT:3 WRT? ACC: 80 SRV: OGCA 1-3RT: 5 After entering CNT. one after another. as designated by CNT are entered. can be entered..) When as many RT Nos. (If ENTER is pressed after entering a RT No.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection Route Number. (Enter Dummy Route Number.0 ND-45687 (E) . ‘WRT?’ displays.) Second Dial Tone (0/1: -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1: -/AH) Sub Address Dialing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service CHAPTER 2 Page 258 Revision 4. of the alternate routes. enter Route No. TN: ACC: CI: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter OGCA) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) Number of advanced route Route Number SRV: CNT: RT: • For Least Cost Route Selection: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 70 CI: H SRV: LCR RT: 3 2nd DT: 0 AH: 0 SUB: 0 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: RT: 2nd DT: AH: SUB: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter LCR.

) LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number (Entry Dummy Route Number).) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from the Access Code (1-5) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 259 Revision 4.ASPA CM0-01 Business • For Register Sender LCR: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 777 CI: H SRV: LCRS RT: 3 2nd DT: 0 AH: 0 SUB: 0 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: RT: 2nd DT: AH: SUB: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter LCRS. Second Dial Tone (0/1: -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1: -/AH) Sub Address Dialing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service • For Office Termination: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 888 CI: N SRV: UNIF SKIP: 0 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SKIP: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter UNIF.0 .

.ASPA CM0-01 Business • For Announcement Service: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 CI: N TYPE: 1 ATN: 1 WRT? ACC: 11 SRV: ANNC EQP: 122 TN: ACC: CI: SRV: TYPE: ATN: EQP: Note: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter ANNC). . -/Multiple Announcement) Announcement Trunk Tenant No. (1-127) When TYPE equals 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . • For Paging Answer or Paging Cancel: Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 21 CI: N SRV: PAGA RT: 10 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: RT: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter PAGA or PAGC. EQP must be 122 through 125. ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Type.) PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number CHAPTER 2 Page 260 Revision 4. (0/1 . (1-255) Announcement Equipment No.

24 Digits) corresponding to the Abbreviated Digit Code (ADC). a maximum of 3 digits can be as- signed. *. Hotel siness. Function This command is used to assign. Related Reference Command List up: 5. 4. However.ASPD CM0-02 Business. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 261 Revision 4. and pause. P is entered where the pause is required.0 . enter an M where digits are to be dialed manually. delete and display the telephone number corresponding to each Abbreviated Digit Code. #. this can be changed in the ASYD command (SYS-1 INDEX = 131). Note 1: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system. Entry Procedure LSDA Assignment of Speed Calling Code TN: 1 ADC: 23 CD: 123 WRT? TN: ADC: CD: Note: Tenant Number Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1 Telephone number (max. If a pause is required in the number to be assigned. 3. all digits following the M must be dialed manually. It should be noted that once M is entered in any part of telephone number. tel ASPD Assignment of Speed Calling Code 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. The standard length of a pause is 3 seconds. The data that can be assigned as ADC are limited to numbers 0 through 9. Precautions • • • The access code for the designated outgoing trunk route must be included in the telephone number to be assigned to the Abbreviated Digit Code. When assigning a number in which certain digits vary.

CHAPTER 2 Page 262 Revision 4. STS. refer to the table on the following page. tel ASTD Assignment of State Translation Data 1. Hotel siness. At initialization.ASTD CM0-03 Business. all the data becomes “0”. Precautions • • This command should only be used by NEC Engineering. Function This command is used to assign and display various kinds of status translation data on a system basis. Entry Procedure LSYD Assignment of State Translation Date STM: 0 STS: 0 ST: 1 WRT? STM: STS: ST: State Translation Main Category Number (0-31) State Translation Category Number (0-31) State Translation Information (0/1) For assigning parameters STM.0 ND-45687 (E) . and ST. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Related Reference Command List up: 5. 3. 4.

Hotel Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD STM STS ST =standard settings * Processing at the time of originating an outgoing C.ASTD CM0-03 Business.O. STS 0) 1 Kind of Trunk to be seized for an outgoing C. side. line has a release signal. only Trunk Release 0 1 1 2 3 * = standard settings 0* 0* 0 1* Station (Calling Party Release) Trunk Note 2 Note 2: Valid when C. ATT. (STM=0.O.O. Warning tone is sent out to the Station. line call 0 If the calling station is that of RSC = 1. side.0 . The call is processed by second dial tone system. and Sta. Passing dial tone 0 Processing for warning tone sending at the moment when ATT has overridden into a connection between COT and station (Busy Verification) 0 Processing for warning tone sending at the moment when ATT has overridden into busy COT (Attendant Override) 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* Note 1: One setting applies to five items. O. 0* 0* 0* ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 263 Revision 4. side. Warning tone is also sent out to the C. the call is outgoing via LCR. BWT only Either BWT or OGT Restricted Allowed (depending on ARRC) Note 1 1* Processing for an override from a station into a connection between COT and another station. and C. Override not allowed Override allowed Invalid Valid Warning tone is sent out to both the ATT and the station. Warning tone is not sent out to the C. 3. line call from ATT Tandem connection with COT included 0 1* 0 1* 2 3 4 Enable Passing Dial Tone Busy Verification Tone for Att.O.O.

then Busy Verification Warning Tone is sent out periodically. ATT. Line after holding a station or a Tie Line Processing for calling a fully-restricted station after holding the COT Processing in which ATT overrides to the connection between the COT and a station (Busy Verification).O. Hotel Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD (Continued) STM STS ST =standard settings * 0 1 2 3 2 4 Three-way calling with COT included Three-way calling with COT included in Executive Right of Way service Outgoing call to a C.0 ND-45687 (E) .ASTD CM0-03 Business. Remote Access to PBX/Automated Attendant.O. Allowed Restricted Not provided In service Standard for MMG/UMG/ IMGxh/IMGdxh Standard for IMG/IMGx 5 6 4 0 0 6 1 2 3 7 0 * = standard settings 0* 0* 0* 1* CHAPTER 2 Page 264 Revision 4. Type of System 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0* 1 0 1 0 1* 0* 1* Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed (Note: The call can be transferred. Outgoing call to a C. and C.) Warning tone is sent out to both the station and the ATT Warning tone is sent out to the station. Step Call when a Tie Line incoming call encounters busy. Line or a Tie Line after holding the COT. side.O.

DLEN.0 . LSTN Assignment of Station Number TN: 1 STN: 3113 NEW STN: 3666 WRT? TN: STN: NEW STN: Tenant Number Station Number New Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 265 Revision 4. if “Message Waiting” is displayed). Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. 4. Function This command is used to change the station number assigned to a particular LEN. in the case of a Dterm. Precautions • • This command is used for Business System only. 3. Entry Procedure ASDT ASDT ASDT. extinguish the MW lamp (or MW display on the Dterm) using the CMWL command. If the MW lamp is lit at the station to be changed (or. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: 5.ASTN CM0-01 Business siness ASTN Assignment of Station Number 1. DSTN LLEN.

tel ASTP Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern 1. In the case of Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNI). 3. the AOSP (Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern) Command must be executed. b. Function This command is used to assign. In the case of Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNO). Related Reference Command List up: LSLP -Parameter PNIAssignment: AISP Deletion: AISP Display: AISP List up: LSLP -Parameter PNOAssignment: AOSP Deletion: AOSP Display: AOSP List up: LSLP -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD CHAPTER 2 Page 266 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.0 ND-45687 (E) . PNI) in case digit addition or deletion is necessary for an outgoing or incoming call on any particular route. Hotel siness. delete and display selection translation pattern numbers (PNO. the AISP (Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern) Command must be executed. 4. a. the following commands must be executed.ASTP CM0-02 Business. Precautions • When a signal translation pattern number (PNO. PNI) is to be assigned or deleted by means of this command.

Hotel 5. Entry Procedure • For Incoming: Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern IC/OG: IC TN: 1 PNI: 1 WRT? RT: 1 IC/OG: TN: RT: PNI: • For Outgoing: Kind of Assignment (Enter IC.) IC: Incoming Tenant Number Route Number Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15) Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern IC/OG: OG TN: 1 PNO:1 WRT? RT:1 IC/OG: TN: RT: PNO: Kind of Assignment (Enter OG.) OG: Outgoing Tenant Number Route Number Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 267 Revision 4.0 .ASTP CM0-02 Business.

Hotel siness. (SYS 1) Assignment of System Data-2. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. tel ASYD Assignment of System Data 1.ASYD CM0-03 Business. • Assignment of System Data-1. (SYS 2) Assignment of System Data-3. Refer to “Office Data Specification” of each particular system for the applicable system data. Related Reference Command List up: 5. c. as follows: a. b.0 ND-45687 (E) . Precautions • ASYD is divided into three sections. Entry Procedure LSYD Assignment of System Data SYS: 1 INDEX: 5 WRT? DATA: 00 SYS: TN: INDEX: DATA: System Data Type 1: System Data 1 2: System Data 2 3: System Data 3 Tenant Number System Data Index SYS INDEX 1 0-511 2 0-15 3 0-31 System Data (Hexadecimal) CHAPTER 2 Page 268 Revision 4. 4. (SYS 3) System data must be entered using hexadecimal numbers. Function This command is necessary for assigning and changing system data in the PBX. 3.

Function This command is used to assign. Entry Procedure LTAS Assignment of TAS Service Data TN: 1 MG: 00 WRT? UNIT: 0 CN: 0 TN: MG: UNIT: CN: Tenant Number Module Group Number (00-31) Mounted Unit Number (0-3) Circuit Number (0/1) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 269 Revision 4. on a per-tenant basis.ATAS CM0-02 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. 3. tel M0-02 ATAS Assignment of TAS Service Data 1. and display TAS (Trunk Answer from Any Station) information. delete.0 . Precautions None 4. Hotel siness. Related Reference Command List up: 5.

Related Reference Command None 4. The baud rate in the MAT is preset to 4800 bps. Enter the intended data from the MAT. tel M0-03 ATCC Assignment of Terminal Configuration 1. Entry Procedure Assignment of Terminal Configuration Program Version Number: 8.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel siness. the IOC in the system must also be changed to match the new baud rate. If the baud rate is changed at any time.ATCC CM0-03 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to change the baud rate of the MAT. Depending on the type of connection to the system. Any of the baud rates displayed at the right side of the ATCC screen may be enabled. Default data is displayed.00 Program Version Date: 86/05/16 Data Transmission Speed:4800 This section is automatically displayed. 3. WRT? Data Transmission Speed Selection: 300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps (MODEM) 4800 bps (DEFAULT) 9600 bps CHAPTER 2 Page 270 Revision 4. this may have to be changed.

enter W. These Time of Day Change Patterns are used to change the routes to be used during a specific time period. Function This command is used to set or change the time period corresponding to each Time of Day Change Pattern Number (0-7). Assignment intervals must be at least 30 minutes. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. and the required function must be selected at the start of the command operation. tel ATCP Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information 1. Hotel siness. 4.ATCP CM0-02 Business.) W: Assignment D: Display Time Data for TDPTN Time of Day Change Pattern (Enter 0-7). ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 271 Revision 4. Entry Procedure • To Assign Time/Pattern Change Data Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information WRT/DPY: W FROM 00:00 TO 08:00 TDPTN: 1 WRT? LTCP WRT/DPY: FROM-TO-: TDPTN: Note: Note: Operation Mode (To assign data. Related Reference Command List up: 5. The system will fill in any unassigned time patterns for a 24-hour period. so that trunks can be effectively utilized and call charges can be kept to a minimum. Precautions • The Data display function and data assignment function of this command are separate. 3.0 .

Times must be entered from 00:00 to 24:00. To Delete Time/Pattern Change Data Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information WRT/DPY: W FROM 00:00 TO 24:00 TDPTN: 0 WRT? Y WRT/DPY: FROM-TO-: TDPTN: Note: Note: Operation Mode (To delete data. WRT/DPY: FROM-TO-: TDPTN: • Operation Mode (To display data. and all assigned patterns will be displayed. Hotel • To Display Time/Pattern Change Data Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information WRT/DPY: D FROM 00:00 TO 08:00 TDPTN: 1 WRT? Press ENTER. enter D. This number will increase by one. enter W. To change any assignments. This deletes all assignments.) W: Assignment D: Display Time Data for TDPTN Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7). you must delete all assignments and then reassign the new ones.0 ND-45687 (E) . CHAPTER 2 Page 272 Revision 4.) W: Assignment D: Display Time Data for TDPTN Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7).ATCP CM0-02 Business.

0 . Hotel siness. The AARP command is necessary when restriction data has been assigned to RES = 2 (Toll Restriction is required) in the ATDP command. Precautions • • When assigning the destination (Area/Office) code (DC) all the digits plus the digits in the access code must be assigned. tel ATDP Assignment of Toll Code Restriction 1. 4. Function This command is used to assign. the ARSC command or in the ARRC command. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. delete and display allowable calls or define 3/6 digit toll restriction on an outgoing connection basis and a tandem or trunk-to-trunk connection basis.ATDP CM0-02 Business. Related Reference Command List up: LTDP -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 273 Revision 4.

Entry Procedure • For a Tandem Connection: a.O. Enter the remainder data.) T: Tandem Connection DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode TDM/OG: b. Assignment of Toll Code Restriction TDM/OG: T DAY/NIGHT: D (Enter T.ATDP CM0-02 Business. Hotel 5.0 ND-45687 (E) . Operator Call (9 + 0) Applicable only when TDI=2 CHAPTER 2 Page 274 Revision 4. Enter the data of TDM/OG. DAY/NIGHT. Assignment of Toll Code Restriction TDM ICRT: 1 OGRT: 1 DC: 44 TDI: 0 This is displayed when T has been entered. WRT? TDM: ICRT: OGRT: DC: TDI: NND: Tandem Connection Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Destination (Area) Code (Max. 11 digits) Restriction Data 0: Connection is Restricted 1: Connection is Allowed 2: 3/6-Digit Toll Restriction 3: C.

O. Operator Call (9 + 0) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 275 Revision 4. Enter the remainder data.ATDP CM0-02 Business. Hotel • For an Outgoing Connection: a. DAY/NIGHT. when NIGHT has been entered for parameter DAY/NIGHT. Assignment of Toll Code Restriction TDM/OG:0 DAY/NIGHT:D TDM/OG: (Enter O. However. 11 digits) Restriction Class (0-15) Restriction Data 0: Connection is Restricted 1: Connection is Allowed 2: 3/6-Digit Toll Restriction 3: C. Enter the data of TDM/OG. Assignment of Toll Code Restriction OG RSC: 0 DC: 44 DAY OGRT: 1 TDI: 0 This displays when 0 has been entered.0 . WRT? OGRT: DC: RSC: TDI: Outgoing Route Number Destination (Area) Code (Max. NIGHT is displayed here.) O: Outgoing Connection DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode b.

Related Reference Command List up: LPAT -Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK. This command allows each Attendant Console to have any route dedicated to any TG lamp. Precautions None 4. DLEN List up: LTRK.0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry Procedure Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp ATN: 1 TGN: 1 RT: 1 WRT? ATN: TGN: RT: Attendant Console Number Trunk Group Number (1-10) Route Number CHAPTER 2 Page 276 Revision 4.ATGL CM0-02 Business. LLEN. tel ATGL Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp 1. delete and display the Trunk Group Busy Lamps on the Attendant Console. when all the trunks in a specific route are busy. LHEN -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. Function • • This command is used to assign. Hotel siness. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2.

Related Reference Commands None 5. Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME MONTH 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :7 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 277 Revision 4.e. 4. Note: Year must be entered in four digits: i.0 . Hotel siness. The clock information entered in this command sets both the software and the hardware clock. and a software clock.ATIM SYS Business.. Entry Procedure a. minute and second. Enter “MONTH”. a hardware clock showing the hour. tel ATIM Assignment of Date and Time 1. Precautions • This clock is assigned in military time. Function The NEAX2400 ICS is provided with two kinds of clocks. Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME YEAR 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :1998 b. Clock information is executed when the Y key is pressed following the “WRT?” prompt. Enter “YEAR”. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. 1998. 3.

Assignment of Date and Time DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE] TIME 16:16 MINUTE :16 WRT? When the MINUTE data is entered. Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME DAY 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :15 d.0 ND-45687 (E) . Enter “HOUR”. the ‘WRT?’ prompt displays. Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME HOUR 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :16 e. Hotel c.ATIM SYS Business. Enter “MINUTE”. Enter “DAY”. CHAPTER 2 Page 278 Revision 4.

SYS1. When the following message appears on the lower part of the screen during data entry.0 . Function This command is used to assign the system timer value (ASYD. 149-152. Assign another value. 3.ATMD CM0-11 Business. therefore Timer value is correct. 189). Hotel siness. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 279 Revision 4.SYS1. ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION RESPONSE The existent data is invalid. please take appropriate measures in accordance with the information below. Timer value is not correct. indication of command. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. but no suitable data must be assigned. The timer value other than this can be assigned by ASYD (Assignment of System Data). Precautions • • This command can assign only the typical timer value. Enter the correct data by this command. Related Reference Command ASYD. Present data is invalid. 155-159. 189 Error messages are described below. 149-152. INDEX 128-147. INDEX 128-147. 155-159. tel ATMD Assignment of Timing Data 1. 4. Assign correct data first.

23. 22. 11. (via ATT) Automatic Recall Timer for D term > Up < Assign Index 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 144 <ESC> Next Page < ← Assignment of Timing Data Kind of Timer No. Automatic Cancel Timer ACM. 2. Hotel 5. 26. 1. 6. 12. 27. Assignment of Timing Data Kind of Timer Register Prepause Timer Register Inter Digit Timer Sender Connection Acknowledge Timer Sender Prepause Timer Sender Inter Digit Timer for DP Sender Inter Digit Timer for PB Trunk Soft Hold Timer for Attendant Console Seizure Guard Timer Ground Button on Hold Timer for SCB Telephone Periodic Timer Indication Tone Timer (Starting Timer) Periodic Timer Indication Tone Timer (Tone Interval) No Answer Timer (Station to Station Connection) No Answer Timer for Recall on Call Transfer No Answer Timer for Station Call from ATT using C. 8. 4. Kind of System timer selection screen • Selection Display -1 No. 15. UBM signal No Receiving Timer > Up < < ← CHAPTER 2 Page 280 Revision 4. Entry Procedure a. 21. 19. 14. 28.F. 10. 18. 5. 16. 17. 13. Attendant Automatic Recall Timer Howler Tone Timer DIT Supervisor Timer at Terminal Station Busy Camp On Recall Timer for CAS-Satellite Station CAS Flash Signal Sending Guard Timer for CAS-Main Station CAS Flash Signal Timer for CAS Main Station Interval for Call Waiting Indication Tone to Busy Station Attendant Sender Pre-pause Timer Trunk Soft Hold Timer A Trunk Soft Hold Timer B Attendant Busy Verification Warning Tone Timer OG Queuing.ATMD CM0-11 Business. 24.0 ← • ← > Down <RETURN> Execution Selection Display . 25. 7. 3. 9. 20.D.2 Assign Index 145 146 147 149 150 151 152 155 156 157 158 159 189 <ESC> Next Page > Down <RETURN> Execution ND-45687 (E) .

Kind of Timer Display (Example: Register of Prepause Timer. 2.ATMD CM0-11 Business. To go back to the Selection Display screen (Timer Menu).] * Default 2 4 6 8 10 20 22 24 26 28 *When this data is DEFAULT. [See (b). Note 3: When the following Message appears in the lower part of the screen. and present Timer value display.“The Existing Data is Invalid. Hotel Procedure: 1. Note 1: Timer. Press ENTER. ← ← ← <RETURN> Execution <ESC> Timer Menu ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 281 Revision 4.) Assignment of Timing Data Register Prepause Timer Index Number [128] Timing Data:12 sec. use the arrow keys. < > Up < > Down < > Right < ←> Left Procedure: 1. [sec. Use the ESC key to move between Screen Display 1 and Screen Display 2. “ ←”. as selected on Selection Display. Move the cursor to the desired position.] a. 4. “WRT” displays. Select the kind of Timer you want to assign: Use the ( or ← ← ) keys to move through the list. 3. 12 30 WRT? Y 14 16 18 Assign Select the timer value from the following. press ESC. “ ”. Note 2: To select another parameter. or “ ← ← ”) 2.0 .. Press ENTER. you can return to the Selection Display screen by pressing ENTER. Suitable Data Must Be Assigned”. “Y”: “N”: Assign the Timer value.12 sec. Return to the Selection Display. is to be set. A screen will display for the kind of timer you have selected. Index No. ← (“ ”.

and display tenant restriction information for each service feature. 4. Precautions • • Not used data should not be assigned. Interposition Transfer.0 ND-45687 (E) . Function This command is used to assign. Individual Attendant Calling 5: Day/Night Mode Change 6: Not Used 7: Routing of an incoming call to a station 8-15: Not used RES: Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed CHAPTER 2 Page 282 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Data must be assigned to activate the feature. Entry Procedure LRTC Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class DAY/NIGHT: D OGTN: 1 TMTN: 1 TRI: 0 RES: 1 WRT? DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode OGTN: Originating Tenant TMTN: Terminating Tenant TRI: Tenant Restriction Index (0-15) 0: Station to Station Call 1: Assignment of Call Forwarding-All Calls from a Station 2: Not used 3: Assignment of Call Forwarding-All Calls from an ATTCON 4: Attendant Call. tel ATNR Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class 1. Hotel siness. Related Reference Command List up: 5.ATNR CM0-02 Business. 3.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. This input data will be ignored.0 . 3.m. 4. A request for traffic measurement is performed when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command.m. this will not be ignored and a traffic-study for a two-hour period will be processed. DTF3 TDBU ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 283 Revision 4. it is because System Data 1. For Example: • 9:00 a.m. Precautions • If error message “12” is displayed when data “1” or “2” (Traffic measurement) is entered for “Type of Traffic Measurement”.m. an interval of less than one hour cannot be specified. When assigning the traffic measurement duration time. tel ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order 1. to 11:00 a. Bit 7 is assigned as “0”(Traffic Measurement Out of Service). but from 9:00 a.9:30 a.. Hotel siness. The collected traffic measurement data can be output from the MAT printer or stored on the HD of the MAT. . DTF2.ATRF CM0-03 Business. Related Reference Command Display: BackUp: DTFl. Function This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs. INDEX 47.

When designating output time particulary. When the number of files exceeds 100 for each type. Note 3 Note 2: The following types of Traffic Measurement can select OUTPUT=1 (MAT (HARD DISK)): 1. OUTPUT: 0: 1: Printer MAT (HARD DISK) Note 2. 4. the new data is overwritten eliminating the oldest data. (0-7) Output Interval must be assigned by units of 10 Minutes (30-120 minutes). Entry Procedure Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order TYPE: 1 INTERVAL:60 FROM 09:00 TO 17:00 OUTPUT: 1 WRT? PORT: 0 TYPE: PORT: INTERVAL: FROM-TO-: TIME: Type of Traffic Measurement (1-16) 1: Terminal Traffic 2: Route Traffic 3: Station Peg Count 4: ATT Peg Count 5: Route Peg Count 6: Service Peg Count 8: UCD Route Peg Count 9: UCD Group Peg Count 10: UCD Station Peg Count Traffic Information Output Terminal No. Terminal Traffic Route Traffic Station Peg Count ATT Peg Count Route Peg Count Note 3: A maximum of 100 files can be stored on the HD of the MAT for each type of Traffic Measurement.ATRF CM0-03 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 284 Revision 4. Measurement is to be designated. 3. Output Time Note 1 Note 1: Enter this parameter only when INTERVAL = 0 and TYPE = 3 ~ 10 (assigning the output time of traffic measurement information).0 ND-45687 (E) . assign 0. 5. Hotel 5. 2.

When this occurs. confirm that a circuit card is mounted in the proper location. then press ENTER. This message means that the CIC trunk is busy or the line concerned is not connected. 3. Precautions • • When trunks are assigned via this command. and display LENs information corresponding to a route (RT) and trunk number (TK). ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 285 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. and must be made idle using the MBTK and MBTC commands. When deleting the ClC trunk of the No. If the trunk is a DCFT. confirm the line status by means of “DCON” command. delete. Therefore. Note: • • • When an Attendant Console is assigned. the message “PKG CHECK” is displayed on the CRT. When assigning the first trunk of each circuit card. unplug the handset from the Attendant Console before executing the command.7 CCIS. the “PKG CHECK” message is always displayed.ATRK CM0-01 Business. message “LINE BUSY” is sometimes displayed instead of “DEL?”. on a per-tenant basis. they are in the make-busy state. Hotel ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data 1. (Maximum of 10) When deleting an Attendant Console.0 . Function This command is used to assign. enter the number of the tenants which that Attendant Console can handle. before deleting the ClC trunk.

Related Reference Command Display: List up: DLEN LTRK. LHEN -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Deletion: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Deletion: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display: MBLE. DMBT CHAPTER 2 Page 286 Revision 4. TRUNK NAME ROUTE No.ATRK CM0-01 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .). Hotel ROUTE No. TRUNK NAME 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 Attendant Console Originating Register Trunk Incoming Register Trunk MF Receiver Sender Trunk DP/PB PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service AMP Not used Three-Way Conference Trunk Not used Not used Originating Register Trunk for ATTCON Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON Not used Night ATTCON MFC Register 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 MFC Sender Not used MODEM (Bus. MBTK. DLINT (H/M) MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM Not used Not used Data Signaling Trunk-Option Rate Adaptation Conversion Trunk Not used 4. MBTC DMBS. LLEN.

ATRK CM0-01 Business.0 . Hotel 5. Entry Procedure • For OG/IC Trunk: Assignment of Trunk Data RT: 1 TK: 1 LENS: 000160 TN: 1 WRT? RT: TK: LEN: Route Number Do not enter the following Route Numbers for OG/IC Trunk. 901: ATT 902: ORT 903: IRT 904: MFR 905: Sender 906: PBR for Automated Attendant Service 907: AMP 909: DCFT 912: ORT for ATT 913: DCFT for ATT 915: Night ATT 916: MFCR 917: MFCS 919: DLINT (for H/M System). MODEM (for Business) 920-926: MODEM 929: DST 930: RCT 933: CRT Trunk Number (1-255) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) XX X XX X Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) TN: Tenant Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 287 Revision 4.

Hotel • For Intra-office Route Assignment of Trunk Data RT: 901 TK: 1 LENS: 000200 MASTER CNT: 1 TN: 1 This is displayed only for the master ATTCON.ATRK CM0-01 Business. RSC: 0 SFC: 0 DEL? RT: TK: LEN: Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra-office Route Number: 901: ATT 902: ORT 903: IRT 904: MFR 905: Sender 906: PBR for Automated Attendant Service 907: AMP 909: DCFT 912: ORT for ATT 913: DCFT for ATT 915: Night ATT 916: MFCR 917: MFCS 919: DLINT (for H/M System).0 Number of Tenants Tenant Number Route Restriction Class (0-15) Service Feature Class (0-15) ND-45687 (E) . MODEM (for Business) 920-926: MODEM 929: DST 930: RCT 933: CRT Trunk Number (1-255) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) XX X XX X Level (0-1) Group (00-20) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) CNT: TN: RSC: SFC: CHAPTER 2 Page 288 Revision 4.

3) MG (00-31) Note: DCFT cannot be assigned to Unit = 0. 2. • ATT LENS: XX X XX X Level (0-1) Group (20) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) • DCFT MG UNIT GROUP LEVEL X X X XX X X X X X LENS: XX X XX X 21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 0 3 6 1 4 7 2 5 Level (0-7) Group (21-23) Unit (1.0 .ATRK CM0-01 Business. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 289 Revision 4. Hotel Note: Be careful when entering the LENs of the ATTCON and DCFT.

Function • • This command is used to assign. Precautions This data must be assigned before using the TTLC command.0 ND-45687 (E) .ATTD CM0-03 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Related Reference Command Test Operation: TTLC -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD CHAPTER 2 Page 290 Revision 4. 3. 4. Trunk Test data: Tone type of response and dial code for sending/LENS data and Access Code for the LTST circuit card. tel ATTD Assignment of Trunk Test Data 1. delete and display trunk test data for the TTLC Command. Hotel siness.

) 1: Trunk Test Parameters Route Number Response Pattern TT: Test Tone (Continuous 1 Khz Tone) RB: Ring Back Tone TO: Time Over (No Tone) Note Note: Each trunk is automatically tested eight seconds after the previous digits have been sent out. Entry Procedure • For Trunk Test Parameters: Assignment of Trunk Test Data TYPE: 1 RESP: TT DC: 3 WRT? RT: 1 TYPE: RT: RESP: Information Type (Enter 1. an error is indicated. If Test Tone (TT) or Ring Back Tone (RBT) has been acknowledged.ATTD CM0-03 Business. 24 digits) DC: • For the LTST circuit card: Assignment of Trunk Test Data TYPE: 2 LENS: 000001 TN: 1 WRT? ACC: 801 STN: 3111 TYPE: LENS: ACC: TN: STN: Information Type (Enter 2.0 . Dial Code (Max. Hotel 5. 3 digits) Tenant Number Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 291 Revision 4.) 2: LENS of the LTST circuit card LENS of the station connected to LTST Individual Trunk Access Code (Max.

take note of the following: a. Related Reference Command List up: LUAD CHAPTER 2 Page 292 Revision 4. Function This command is used to assign. Precautions The Control Station of the UCD Group must be designated as the UCD Group Station. tel AUAD Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data 1. When the system data has been designated as common to all Groups (b6 = 0). 3. 4. INDEX 70. When designating “b6 = 0/1: Common to All Groups/On an Individual Group basis” in SYS-1. and the TN and STN parameters are not displayed. The system data cannot be changed after Delay Announcement-UCD Data has been assigned. Hotel siness. b. “GROUP COMMON” is displayed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. delete and display information relating to the delay announcement for each UCD group. when the Delay Announcement-UCD Data is shared by all Groups.AUAD CM0-03 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .

0 . interval: applicable only when RP = 1) Number of Announcement Trunks (1-8) Route Number of Announcement Trunk Trunk Number of Announcement Trunk ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 293 Revision 4. 2-sec. Hotel 5. interval) Message Timer (0-30 sec.. interval) Number of Times Announcement is sent (0/1) 0: Once 1: Replay Announcements Replay Interval (0-30 sec. 2-sec.AUAD CM0-03 Business.. Entry Procedure Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data TN: 1 DLYT: 10 RP: 0 CNT: 1 WRT? Y STN: 3155 MSGT: 10 INT: 10 1 RT: 10 TK: 1 Only when RP=1 The sequence of the current data The ‘WRT?’ prompt displays after entry of the number of trunks designated in CNT.. 2-sec. TN: STN: DLYT: MSGT: RP: INT: CNT: RT: TK: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station Station Number of UCD Group Control Station Delayed Timer (0-30 sec.

AUCD CM0-04 Business. Precautions • Before assigning a Threshold Value by this command. tel AUCD Assignment of UCD Control Data 1. Related Reference Command List up: 5. delete. SYSl. INDEX 61 b5 = 1: Call Waiting Display-UCD in Service. Function This command is used to assign. Entry Procedure LUCD TN: 1 STN: 2000 QTH ACT: 0 QTH: 0 CWT: 2 MCI: 0 WRT? TN: STN: QTH ACT: QTH: CWT: MCI: Note: Tenant Number UCD Station Number Note UCD Queing Peg Count Value Valid/Invalid (1/0) UCD Queing Peg Count Value (0-255) Threshold Value of Call Waiting (1-255) Message Center Interface Data Transfer Valid/Invalid (0/1) Enter any of the Station Numbers assigned within the UCD Group for which Call Waiting DisplayUCD service is to be provided. 4. 3. and display the Threshold Value of Call Waiting to a UCD group for Call Waiting Display-UCD service. be sure to assign the following data: a. b. • ASYD. CHAPTER 2 Page 294 Revision 4. LAHP flashing: When the preassigned number of calls or more are waiting in the UCD queue.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. ASHU: Assign the UCD Group for which Call Waiting Display-UCD service is to be provided. Hotel siness.

tel AUNE Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN 1. and ASTP commands. 3. press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation on the screen. Hotel siness. Entry Procedure Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN TN:1 RT:11 NPC:1009 SKIP:0 WRT? TN: RT: NPC: SKIP: Tenant Number Outside Route Number Number Pattern Code (Max.AUNE CM0-01 Business. and display the skip data for Uniform Numbering of EPN. 12 digits) Skip Data (0-12) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 295 Revision 4. (Double assignment) Note: When an error code is displayed. Precautions If error code is displayed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. 4. Related Reference Command List up: LUNE -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. delete. then the NPC is already assigned in the AFRS. Function This command is used to assign.0 .

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. delete and display the type of unit to be mounted. Precautions • • There are three (3) types of mounting units (see Entry Procedure below). Hotel siness.AUNT CM0-03 Business. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure • For PIM: Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data MG:00 WRT? TYPE:1 UNIT:0 LSYD MG: TYPE: UNIT: Module Group Number (00-31) PIM Type Indication (Enter 1. Function This command is used to assign. Perform system initialization without DM clear. 3. after assigning or deleting Unit Data. tel AUNT Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data 1.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 1: Port Interface Module Unit Number (0-3) CHAPTER 2 Page 296 Revision 4. 4.

Hotel • For PFT Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data MG:00 PKG:0 WRT? TYPE:2 MG: TYPE: PKG: • For LTST Module Group Number (00-31) PIM Type Indication (Enter 2.0 .AUNT CM0-03 Business.) 4: Line Test Circuit Card ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 297 Revision 4.) 2: Power Failure Transfer Circuit Card Number (0-3) Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data MG:00 WRT? TYPE:4 MG: TYPE: Module Group Number (00-31) PIM Type Indication (Enter 4.

STN-A. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. LSHL 5. Hotel siness. STN-B: Tenant Number and UCD Station Number of Overflow Destination CHAPTER 2 Page 298 Revision 4. Related Reference Command List up: LSHG. This command is required when all stations in one particular UCD group are busy.AUOG CM0-01 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . tel AUOG Assignment of UCD Overflow Group 1. 4. Precautions The station numbers assigned to a UCD group in the ASHU (Assignment of Station Hunting-UCD) command must be used. Function This command is used to assign. STN-B. The calls designated to that group can overflow (Hunt) to another group. to TenantB. and display Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Overflow Group information. Entry Procedure Assignment UCD Overflow Group TN-A:1 STN-A:3000 TN-B:1 STN-B:3100 WRT? TN-A. They overflow from Tenant-A. 3. LSHL -UCD Hunting GroupAssignment: ASHU Deletion: ASHU Display: ASHU List up: LSHG. delete. STN-A: Tenant Number and Station which belongs to a UCD group TN-B.

Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Hotel siness. delete and display Virtual Tie Line Numbers to be used in Virtual Tie Line Service. tel AVTC Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data 1.AVTC CM0-09 Business. Precautions • • This data is to be assigned at the terminating office. 3. A Virtual Tie Line Number is a station number converted. from one of the subscriber numbers assigned on the ISDN line.0 . as a number for Virtual Tie Line service. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Function This command is used to assign. 4. Entry Procedure LVTC Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data TN : 1 STN: 1010 WRT? TN: STN: Tenant Number Idle Station Number use Virtual Tie Line Call ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 299 Revision 4.

Hotel siness. Designation in reverse direction MON-SUN: Seven days when going back by one week TUE-SUN: Six days when going back by two weeks SAT-WED: Five days when going back by three weeks CHAPTER 2 Page 300 Revision 4. the B Channel Route is valid only when LSG = 12.AVTL CM0-09 Business. • Virtual Tie Line service is valid only within the time period designated by the Time Range on the days designated by the Week Range in the period designated by the Date Range. Example: MON-FRI: SAT-SUN: MON-MON: Five days from Monday to Friday Two days from Saturday to Sunday One day if the same Monday is designated. check to see if the corresponding Route Data is assigned or not.0 ND-45687 (E) . tel AVTL Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data 1. The maximum input value for Route Number should be the value assigned by ASYD. Virtual Tie Line service is valid from 8:30 through 17:30 from Monday through Friday of every week starting from September 1st through September 30th. and the D Channel Route is valid only when LSG = 13. After entering Route Number. Example: DATE: 09/01-09/30 WEEK: MON-FRI TIME: 8:30-17:30 When the above is designated. Of the Route Class Data. If not assigned. The Week Range is entered as follows. 3. Precautions • • At the time of data setting. Example: 01/01-12/31: 12/01-11/30: • One year from January 1st to December 31st. • The entry range (DATE) of the Date Range is within one year. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. One year from December 1st to November 30th of the following year. ERROR Number (ERR = 0019) is displayed. assign outgoing /incoming call data synchronously. Function This command is used to assign a schedule for virtual tie line implementation period in Virtual Tie Line Service.

AVTL CM0-09 Business. The relationship between the Data Range and the Week Range is as follows. WEEK.0 . • The Time Range cannot be designated when the end time is earlier than the start time. Thus. these seven days are the subject for processing. Example:| In the case of DATA. Example: 00:10-20:00 From 0:10 to 19:59 05:20-05:30 From 5:20 to 5:29 10:10-09:10 Cannot be designated 10:50-10:10 Cannot be designated 4. 13th through 15th are Monday through Wednesday of next week. 11/08-11/22. Related Reference Command Deletion: Display: List up: RVTL RVTL LVTC ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 301 Revision 4. only the starting week is displayed. Hotel • When the Date Range is one day. 8th is the first Monday. In the designated Date Range. and 20th through 22nd are Monday through Wednesday of the week after next. 11/22 is Wednesday of two week after. MON-WED When 11/08 is Wednesday.

Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data CALLED : 654321 SUB : 1 SUB NO : 1111 WEEK : TUE .AVTL CM0-09 Business.SUN TIME : 08:30-17:20 WRT? RESULT: 03/29 DATE: PTN: IC/OG: IC: RT: TK: D-LENS: [a]/[b] . Entry Procedure Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data DATE : 03/27 . Hotel 5.03/31 PTN: 0 IC/OG : OG RT: 12 TK: 1 D-LENS : 001014 CH: 6 CALLING: 123456 KEYPAD : 1 NEXT? Y If “Y” is entered to parameter NEXT.0 . 24 digits) (Subscriber Number of ISDN Line of the Originating Office) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 302 Revision 4.[c]/[d]: Date Range a: Start Month (01-12) b: Start Day (01-31) c: Last Month (01-12) d: Last Day (01-31) Pattern Number Incoming Call OG: Outgoing Call Route Number Trunk Number LENS of Dch XX X XX X Level Group Unit MG CH: CALLING: (0-7) (00-23) (0-3) (00-31) Bch Number Calling Number (max. the display changes as follows.

0 . 12 digits) [e]-[f]: Week Range e: Start Week (SUN-MON) f: Last Week (SUN-MON) [g]:[h]-[i]:[j]: Time Range g: Start Time (0-23) h: Start Minute (0-50:10 minutes) i: Last Time (0-23) j: Last Minute (0-50:10 minutes) [k]/[I]: Result Display k: Month (01-12) l: Day (01-31) SUB: SUB NO: WEEK: TIME: RESULT: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 303 Revision 4.AVTL CM0-09 Business. Hotel KEYPAD: CALLED: Keypad Information (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Called Number (Max. 24 digits) (Subscriber Number of ISDN Line of the Terminating Office) Note Note: This Subscriber Line is the Subscriber Number of the ISDN Line corresponding to the Station Number assigned by Virtual Tie Line Call Data (AVTC) at the Terminating Office. Kind of Sub Address (0/1) 0: Not Assign 1: Assign Sub Address (Max.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Function This command is used to activate Virtual Tie Line urgently. 4.AVTM CM0-09 Business. Entry Procedure AVTL. Hotel siness. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: 5. LVTC Starting of Virtual Tie Line Starting of Virtual tie line execute WRT?: Y CHAPTER 2 Page 304 Revision 4. causing a link release. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. 3. Precautions • This command is used in following conditions. a. b. When a failure is occurred in a Virtual Tie Line. AVTC LVTL. tel AVTM Starting of Virtual Tie Line 1. When using the Virtual Tie Line urgently.

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 305 Revision 4.0 . Function This command is a debugging aid that should be used only under the supervision of NECAM Engineering.BAID SYS Business. Hotel siness. Precautions Call NECAM Engineering before using this command. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. 3. tel BAID Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] 1.

Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. and UMG (ICS)] 1. Save. Data Verify 3. tel BKUP Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMG (ICS). Precautions • Parameters: The following are equipment options: a. Data Save 2. Load and Verify are available.BKUP SYS Business. MMG (ICS). MEM →HDD (ΜΕΜ ↔ HDD: in case of verify) Μ HDD →MAT (HDD ↔ FDD: in case of verify) 4. Data Load Execution Status Indication Area Supplementary Indication Area Parameter Input Area CHAPTER 2 Page 306 Revision 4. Hotel siness.0 ND-45687 (E) . b. Function This command administers various data using a Hard Disk mounted in the NEAX2400 IMS and FD (Floppy Disk) of MAT. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure • Initial Display Each Kind of Memory Backup Function: 1. The following data can be processed by this command: • • • • Call Forwarding Data Office Data stored in DM (Data Memory) Individual Speed Calling Data Name Display Data 3.

Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Call Forwarding Data 3.) 1: MEM HDD LP NUMBER: For MMG/UMG Note Note: This parameter appears for MMG/UMG when the Processed Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Call Data).Data Save 2.Data Memory 2. Data Memory 2.Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data 1. Speed Calling Data 4.0 . Hotel • Data Save (MEM Each Kind of Memory Backup Function: 1.) 1: Data Save 1. MEM HDD 2. Call Forwarding Data 3.BKUP SYS Business. Name Display Data UNIT: (Enter 1. ND-45687 (E) ←← ← ← ← ←← ← ← ← ← ← HDD) 50 100 HDD1 50 100 CHAPTER 2 Page 307 Revision 4. HDD MAT 0 Office Name: Date :1992/07/22 22:00 MEM HDD0 Data: Unit: MEM 0 Accessing Now!! Number of Files Remaining: 7 Files FUNCTION: DATA (1-4): (Enter 1.

Data Verify 3. CHAPTER 2 Page 308 Revision 4. HDD MAT Office Name: Date :1992/08/19 14:39 HD0(ACT) MAT Data: 0 Unit: Number of Files Remaining: 1 HFC Selection: Accessing Now!! 0.Data Memory 2.BKUP SYS Business. Speed Calling Data 4. Call Forwarding Data 3.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4. MEM HDD 2. Data Memory 2.Name Display Data 1. HDD MAT Note LP NUMBER: For MMG/UMG HFC SELECTION: (0/1) 0: HFC0 1: HFC1 Note: This parameter for MMG/UMG appears when the Processed Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data).HFC0/1. Name Display Data UNIT: (Enter 2) 2.Data Load 1.0 ND-45687 (E) ← ←← ← ← ← ← ← MAT) 50 100 . Hotel • Data Save (HDD Each Kind of Memory Backup Function: 1.HFC1 FUNCTION: DATA(1-4): (Enter 1) 1: Data Save 1.Data Save 2.

Save. • HDD → MAT (HDD ↔ MAT: in case of verify) SAVE and VERIFY are executed to the system in operation. b. MEM → HDD (MEM ↔ HDD: in case of verify) HDD → MAT (HDD ↔ FDD: in case of verify) • Designation of LP Number is necessary in IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. 3. a. IMGxh. Function LOAD.0 . Precautions • This command administers the following data using Hard Disk mounted in the NEAX2400 ICS and FD (Floppy Disk) of MAT. c. tel BKUPI Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMGx. The parameter appears when the following equipment options are selected. Hotel siness. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Call Forwarding Data Speed Calling Data ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 309 Revision 4. b.BKUPI CM0-10 Business. a. Load and Verify are available. • Call Forwarding Data Office Data stored in DM (Data Memory) Individual Speed Calling Data Name Display Data Parameters: The following are equipment options. b. d. • MEM → HDD (MEM ↔ HDD: in case of verify) SAVE and VERIFY are executed to the both system. SAVE and VERIFY are executed as follows depending on the type of equipment. a. IMGdxh and UMGx] 1. • HDD → MEM LOAD is executed to both systems.

Related Reference Command None CHAPTER 2 Page 310 Revision 4. Data Load Data Memory Name Display Data MEM ↔ HDD MEM ↔ HDD HDD ↔ MEM HDD ↔ MEM • • Designation of system (0/1) is necessary in UMGx. a message appears. 4. Data Verity Data Memory Name Display Data b. Two FDs are required for saving Data Memory from HDD to MAT. The parameter appears when the Data Verify is selected. When System Data1. When the storage capacity of FD is insufficient. Hotel • Designation of CM Number is necessary in UMGx. two Data Memory files are made. a. Change the disk according to the message.0 ND-45687 (E) . Index 30 is assigned as “02”. This parameter appears in the following conditions.BKUPI CM0-10 Business.

Name Display Data 1. Entry Procedure • Initial Display Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Verify 3.BKUPI CM0-10 Business. Data Load Execution Status Indication Area Parameter Input Area Supplementary Indication Area • Data Save Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Data Load 1. Data Save 2. HDD→ MAT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 LP Number: OFFICE NAME: DATE :1995/07/22 22:00 MEM HDD0 0 Data: Unit: LP Number: MEM 0 Accessing Now!! Number of Files Remaining: 7 ND-45687 (E) ← ← ←← ← ← ←← 50 100 HDD1 50 100 CHAPTER 2 Page 311 Revision 4.Speed Calling Data 4. Hotel 5.Data Memory 2. MEM→ HDD 2. Data Verify 3.0 .

Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data Unit: (Enter 1.) 1: MEM HDD 2: HDD → MAT LP NUMBER × (0 ~ 31): for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx Note: This parameter appears for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx when “Data” is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data).CM0/1.Data Save 2.Data Load 1. The contents of the parameter “LP Number” vary depending on the system configuration. MEM↔HDD 2. CHAPTER 2 Page 312 Revision 4.Data Verify 3. • Data Verify a. When the “Data Memory” or “Name Display” is selected. Call Forwarding Data 3.) 1: Data Save 1.SYSTEM0/1. Note 1: This parameter appears when “Unit” is 1 (MEM ↔ HDD).CM1 Note 1 Note 1 0 OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/08/19 14:39 HD0(ACT)→→→→MAT 50 100 Data: Unit: CM Number: System: 0.Name Display Data 1.Data Memory 2. Only even numbers can be selected.Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data 4. Data Memory 2. Hotel Function: Data (1-4): (Enter 1.0 ← Note Number of files remaining: 1 ND-45687 (E) .BKUPI CM0-10 Business.SYSTEM1 Note: The parameter “CM Number” and “System” appears only for UMGx. [BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1. HDD↔MAT 0.

How to assign LP Number is as shown below: Move the cursor to a desired number using arrow key. Press the space key to select/cancel the number.Data Memory 2. Note 2: This parameter appears only for UMGx. MEM↔HDD 2. 2 Designated numbers are indicated with flashing.Speed Calling Data 4.Data Load 1.SYSTEM0/1.BKUPI CM0-10 Business. HDD↔MAT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0. This parameter appears when “Data” is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data).Data Save 2. [BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1. When the “Call Forwarding Data” or “Speed Calling Data” is selected. press the return key.Data Verify 3. After all desired numbers are designated.Name Display Data 1. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 313 Revision 4. Hotel b. 3 LP Number entry is complete.0 . The contents of the parameter “LP Number” vary depending on the system configuration. 1 Only Even numbers can be selected.Call Forwarding Data 3.SYSTEM1 Note 1 0 LP Number: OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/08/19 14:39 HD0(ACT)→→→→MAT 50 100 Data: Unit: LP Number: Number of files remaining: 1 System: Note 2 Accessing now!! Note 1: Designation of LP Number is necessary for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. and designated numbers are highlighted.

Data Verify 3.BKUPI CM0-10 Business.CM1 Note 1 0 0 OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/07/22 22:00 HDD→→→→MEM0 50 100 Data: Unit: LP Number: HDD→→→→MEM1 50 100 Accessing now!! Number of files remaining: 1 Note 1: Designation of CM Number is necessary for UMGx.Name Display Data HDD→MEM 0. [BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1. Hotel • Data Load a.Data Load 1.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4. CHAPTER 2 Page 314 Revision 4.Data Save 2. When the “Data Memory” or “Name Display Data” is selected.Data Memory 2.CM0/1.0 ND-45687 (E) .

Data Verify 3. The contents of the parameter “LP Number” vary depending on the system configuration. and designated numbers are highlighted.BKUPI CM0-10 Business. When the “Call Forwarding Data” or “Speed Calling Data” is selected.Call Forwarding Data 3. 2 Designated numbers are indicated with flashing. [BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1.0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 315 Revision 4.Name Display Data 1. 3 LP Number entry is complete.Speed Calling Data 4. 1 Only Even numbers can be selected. This parameter appears when “Data” is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data). press the return key. HDD→ MEM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 0 LP Number: OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/08/19 14:39 HDD0→→→→MEM 50 100 Data: Unit: Note 1 LP Number: HDD1→→→→MEM 50 100 Accessing now!! Number of files remaining: 1 Note 1: Designation of LP Number is necessary for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. Hotel b.Data Load 1. Press the space key to select/cancel the number. After all desired numbers are designated.Data Save 2. How to assign LP Number is as shown below: Move the cursor to a desired number using arrow key.Data Memory 2.

FKY = 49) is assigned to one of the function keys. Precautions • • • Before saving One-Touch Speed Call Memory data. Note • Load Function Loads the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk into the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card. When “Speed Calling One-Touch key” (AKYD. Error messages for Load or Verify do not display on the screen. • Verify Function Verifies the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk with the data residing in the OneTouch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card.0 ND-45687 (E) . in the case of a Dterm on which “Page Changeover Key” (AKYD. • • Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 316 Revision 4. The circuit cards and the Port Microprocessor (PM) which can be backed up are as shown in Table 2-8. Function • Save Function Saves the data residing in the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card onto a floppy disk. Hotel BOSD Backup of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. floppy disks must be formatted. The numbers assigned to 20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys of D term are the subject for backup. 40 numbers (2 × 20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys) are the subject for backup. the number assigned to that function key is not the subject for backup.BOSD CM0-04 Business. Also. Memory data for as many as 704 lines can saved in one floppy disk. Note 3. You must turn on your printer to see the error messages. FKY = 49) is assigned to a function key D term.

For Example: [ TENANT : 1 . (Refer to Table 2-8. (Refer to Table 2-8.) [NW]: An attempt has been made to write data into a circuit card and a Port Microprocessor into which data cannot be loaded. [NS]: The circuit card and the Port Microprocessor concerned are not the subject of backup.) [RD]: Indicates occurrence of a read error.COMMON ] ER __ ND TN __ 1 STN ____ 2870 LENS ______ 032060 MEM _____ SPD DAT _____________________________ DLC DATA: FD DATA: NO DATA LEFT IN FD 4. [ND]: Indicates that there is no data of the designated station number on the floppy disk. Hotel • Error Indications [VR]: Data saved in the floppy disk does not match the data saved in DLC/ELC card. Related Reference Command Display: List up: DOSD LOSD Table 2-8 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Backed Up CIRCUIT CARD PM NAME / PM NUMBER PA-16ELCH SP-3005 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 317 Revision 4.0 . [WR]: Indicates failure of load.BOSD CM0-04 Business.

BOSD CM0-04 Business. Entry Procedure • Backup by designating a station Backup Onetouch Speed Call Memory Data [INPUT PARAMETER] DRV :A FUNC1 : S FUNC2 : S TN: 1-COMMON STN: 51000 TO: 51003 [FILE INFORMATION] OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE: 95/11/01 [FRI] IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-A AND READY (Y/N)?Y This is displayed when the Tenant Pattern is used in Common. DRV: FUNC1: FUNC2: TN: STN: OFFICE: DATE: FD Drive No.0 ND-45687 (E) . File Information is displayed. Hotel 5. (A/B/C/D/E/F) Kind of Function (S/L/V) S: Save L: Load V: Verify Designation of Processing Order (Enter S) S: Station [a] TO [b]: Tenant Range a: Start Tenant Number b: End Tenant Number [c] TO [d]:Station Range c: Start Station Number d: End Station Number Office Name Date of File CHAPTER 2 Page 318 Revision 4.

COMPLETED: Save.0 . Y: Return to MENU N: Restart of operation ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 319 Revision 4. Load. DRIVE. Reminder: The floppy diskette must be formatted.[ ]!!: The file is being copied to a floppy diskette. IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-[ ] AND READY (ENTER Y ONLY)?: Floppy disk must be changed. Do you wish to overwrite? NO SPACE LEFT ON FD!!: There is no space on the disk.BOSD CM0-04 Business. or Verify has been completed VERIFY ERROR: Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed when FUNC1 = V (Verify) RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next operation. Hotel Listed below are the messages that are displayed while this command is being executed: OVERWRITE EXISTING ONE-TOUCH SPEED DATA ON FD (Y/N)?: The diskette in the drive already has data on it. FLOPPY DISK IS DIFFERENT!!: There is no One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data File on the floppy disk. MAKING ORIGINAL FILE.

Hotel • Backup by designating Line Equipment Number (LENS) Backup Onetouch Speed Call Memory Data [INPUT PARAMETER] DRV :A FUNC1 : S FUNC2 : L LENS: 000090 TO : 000090 [FILE INFORMATION] OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE: 95/11/01 [FRI] IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-A AND READY (Y/N)?Y File Information is displayed.0 ND-45687 (E) . DRV: FUNC1: FUNC2: LENS: OFFICE: DATE: FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F) Kind of Function (S/L/V) S: Save L: Load V: Verify Designation of Processing Order (Enter L) L: LENS [e] TO [f]: Line Equipment Number Range e: Start LENS f: End LENS Office Name Date of File CHAPTER 2 Page 320 Revision 4.BOSD CM0-04 Business.

0 . COMPLETED: Save. Reminder: The floppy diskette must be formatted. Do you wish to overwrite? NO SPACE LEFT ON FD!!: There is no space on the disk. MAKING ORIGINAL FILE. RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next operation. Hotel Listed below are the messages that are displayed while this command is being executed: OVERWRITE EXISTING ONE-TOUCH SPEED DATA ON FD (Y/N)?: The diskette in the drive already has data on it. VERIFY ERROR: Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed when FUNC1 = V (Verify). or Verify has been completed.BOSD CM0-04 Business. IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-[ ]AND READY (ENTER Y ONLY)?: Floppy disk must be changed. Load. DRIVE-[ ]!!: The file is being copied to a floppy diskette. FLOPPY DISK IS DIFFERENT!!: There is no One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data File on the floppy disk. Y: Return to MENU N: Restart of operation ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 321 Revision 4.

3. Related Reference Command None 5.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. ARI: CHAPTER 2 Page 322 Revision 4. Precautions None 4. DIAL: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via Direct Dial Access from a station. Entry Procedure Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction ICRT: 1 To 2 OGRT: 3 To 4 ARI : ATT RES: DIAL RES: ICRT [a] To [b] : Incoming Route Range a: Start Incoming Route Number b: End Incoming Route Number OGRT [c] To [d]: Outgoing Route Range c: Start Outgoing Route Number d: End Outgoing Route Number RES: Restriction Data (0-2) 0: Alternate routing is restricted 1: Alternate routing is allowed 2: Toll restriction is required Alternative Route Index ATT: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via ATTCON/Station. Hotel siness. tel CARR Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction 1. Function This command is used to continuously assign the restriction of alternative routing of an Incoming Route (ICRT) to an Outgoing Route (OGRT).CARR CM0-04 Business.

Up to 10 blocks can be assigned at a time. 3. Discrepancy in the numbering plan of station number Note 1 TEC is not correspond to the designated location.0 . the following messages appear on the display: Message List INDICATED MESSAGE DESCRIPTION PACKAGE CHECK DIGITS UNMATCHED NGI DISCREPANCY STN ALREADY ASSIGNED STN DOUBLE ASSIGNMENT LENS ASSIGNMENT AREA NOTHING NUMBERING PLAN UNMATCHED TEC DISCREPANCY Displays when the first circuit on the circuit card is assigned. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 323 Revision 4. You can assign the station data continuously from the designated LENs. Line cards (LC. Discrepancy in the digits of station number Note 1 Discrepancy in the digits of station number (NGI=Number Group Index) Note 2 The same station number has been assigned. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. No area exists for data entry within the designated mounting location. Note 2: This message is applicable only when the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system. Precautions • • • • • This command is used for Business System only. Function This command can assign many station data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers. The same station number has been assigned in the other NGI.CASD CM0-11 Business siness CASD Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1. ELC and DTL) should be mounted on the designated LENs. When data entry is rejected while assigning station data. Note 1: This message is applicable only when the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system. DLC.

delete the specific station number prior to deletion of station data. When the following message appears while deleting station data. 4. • When you assign initial station data to a Line Card “PKG Check” appears on the display. Indicated Message “Night Station exists” “Secretary exist” “Phantom exist” • The related STN Night Transfer Station Secretary Station Phantom Station The following should be noted when you want to delete station data: a. prior to the deletion of station data. Deletion of any busy station results in error number indication. the Station Hunting-Pilot Data is also deleted.0 ND-45687 (E) . b. When you delete the station data which has Dterm key data. all billing information is cleared from the system. Display of Station Data Assignment Continuous Assignment of Station Data SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration TN TN 1 --. all speed calling information is also cleared. Accordingly.CASD CM0-11 Business When you delete station data while SMDR is in service. the system prints out the billing information of the stations which are deleted. 2. be sure to print out billing information. the information of the key also cleared. Entry Procedure • When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system a. When you delete the pilot station in the Hunting Group.Range of STN --.Class --From. Is Input Data correct? (Y/N): Y CHAPTER 2 Page 324 Revision 4.Range and Type of LENS --From . When you delete the master station of Individual Speed Calling. In this case.--. c.To Type 000020-000025 1 1.To Step TEC SEC 2000-2005 1 2 2 RSC 2 ASSIGNMENT --.

When you enter “N” the display moves to the next one without printing. see screen prompt for descriptions) IS INPUT DATA CORRECT?: Confirmation of Input Data Procedure: 1. Enter Station Data in each parameter.” the following prompt displays: “Do you need Data list (Y/N)?” 4.0 . In this case “Is Input Data correct?” appears on screen without pressing “ESC”. Note: Station Data can be assigned on the basis of block (up to 10 blocks). When you enter “Y. press ESC. 3. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 325 Revision 4. When you enter “N” the cursor returns to the first parameter (= TN). When you enter “Y” the display moves to the next one after printing out the existing one. After entering Station Data on a block basis. “Input Data is correct? (Y/N)” is on screen.CASD CM0-11 Business TN: Tenant Number RANGE OF STN STN FROM: Start Station Number STN TO: End Station Number STEP: Size of increment (for example. step 2 increments by 2) TEC: Telephone Class (1-31) SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) RANGE AND TYPE OF LENS LENS FROM: Start line equipment number LENS TO: End line equipment number TYPE: LENS increment type (assign in this order. 2.

When the Range of LENS data comprises multiple Group Numbers. input these parameter according to the following conditions (See Example 3 and 4 ): From: Level Number of LENS must be “0”.CASD CM0-11 Business Note 1: The Range of LENS data is assigned basically on a Group Number basis (See Example 1 and 2 ). PIM J 03 Level No. PIM J 03 Level No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 block 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 From : XX0020 CHAPTER 2 Page 326 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . 02 04 Unit0 Level No. 02 04 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 To : XXX047 1 block From : XXX020 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 To : XX2057 4 Unit2 05 Group No. 02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 To : XXX026 1 block From : XXX022 2 Group No. PIM J 03 05 Group No. Example (When the shaded ports are assigned as Range of LENS data) 1 Group No. 04 Level No. 02 To : XXX033 2 blocks From : XXX030 To : XXX027 From : XXX022 3 Group No. PIM J 03 Level No. To: Level Number of LENS must be “7”.

See the following example for detailed in- formation Example: (When the 16 LC circuit cards are accommodated as shown below) U=2 00 05 16 L PIM J C 10 15 16 16 L C L C U=3 20 16 16 L PIM J C L C 16 L C U=0 U=1 • Type: 1 (Level → Group → Unit) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. Group No. 05 06 56 64 15 16 U=3 72 80 88 96 1MG 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 49 57 16 24 32 65 73 81 89 40 48 9 17 25 33 41 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1 02 03 04 05 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 327 Revision 4. U=2 Slot No.0 .CASD CM0-11 Business Note 1: “Type” parameter determines how to arrange station data.

Group No. U=2 Slot No.CASD CM0-11 Business • Type: 2 (Level → Unit → Group) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order. U=3 15 16 05 06 24 56 32 64 80 96 1MG 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 17 49 40 72 88 25 57 73 89 16 48 33 65 81 9 41 02 03 04 05 U=0 00 01 02 03 U=1 • Type: 3 (Group → Level → Unit) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. Group No. U=3 15 93 16 96 05 06 63 64 1MG 29 51 52 49 50 32 69 65 47 48 72 68 5 1 2 3 8 4 35 36 33 34 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1 02 03 04 05 CHAPTER 2 Page 328 Revision 4. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=2 Slot No.0 ND-45687 (E) .

Group No.0 . U=2 Slot No. U=3 15 93 16 96 05 06 91 92 1MG 85 19 20 7 8 88 21 9 89 90 24 12 13 1 2 3 16 4 17 18 5 6 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1 02 03 04 05 • Type: 5 (Unit → Level → Group) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=3 15 16 05 06 31 63 32 64 80 96 1MG 7 39 3 35 29 61 79 95 8 40 68 84 4 36 66 82 30 62 5 1 37 67 83 33 65 81 6 2 38 34 02 03 04 05 U=0 00 01 02 03 U=1 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 329 Revision 4. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=2 Slot No.CASD CM0-11 Business • Type: 4 (Group → Unit → Level) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order. Group No.

CASD CM0-11 Business • Type: 6 (Unit → Group → Level) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order. U=2 Slot No. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No.0 ND-45687 (E) . U=3 15 16 05 06 87 91 89 92 94 96 1MG 15 19 3 7 85 89 93 95 16 20 22 24 4 8 10 12 86 90 13 17 21 23 1 5 9 11 02 03 04 05 U=0 14 18 2 6 00 01 02 03 U=1 CHAPTER 2 Page 330 Revision 4. Group No.

Execute ESC-Input Data End MG NUMBER: UNIT NUMBER: GROUP NUMBER: PACKAGE TYPE: MG No.Card Selection <-. Unit No. Group No. Display of Circuit Card Localization (Two units display) ASSIGNMENT 2MG Configuration Continuous Assignment of Station Data SYSTEM TYPE: MG Number: 0 UNIT Number: 0 Group Number: 2 Circuit Card Type LC GroupDLC ELC SMI DTL Delete END GroupSlot0 MG-00 PIMA3 PIMA2 PIMA1 PIMA0 1 L C 7 15 23 1 7 15 23 0 4 6 8 12 20 12 0 15 6 19 12 20 23 ← ← . Circuit Card Type ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 331 Revision 4.0 .-> Group Selection <RETURN> .CASD CM0-11 Business b.

Respond “Y” to “Is Input Data Correct?” The cursor returns to the UNIT Number.. • • When you enter “Y” the current display shifts to the display (c) with a list. Enter UNIT Number. and press ENTER..0 ND-45687 (E) . LC) is displayed.. ← ← 5. Move the cursor (by “ ← ” or “ ”) to assign the selected type to the vacant Group No. 4. press ENTER. choose “Delete. 7. When you enter “N” the current display shifts to the display (c) without a list. • When you want to eliminate the Circuit Card which you assigned by mistake. The Circuit Card information (i. Repeat the same procedure to assign another Circuit Card (even if it is located in the same Unit). 6. 2. When finished. The following prompt displays: “Do you need PACKAGE MOUNT DATA List? (Y/N)”. Press the BACKSPACE key to move to the previous screen.” move the cursor to select the Group No. Move the cursor (by “ ” or “ ”) to the appropriate package type. When you want to terminate Data entry in the specific UNIT. press ENTER. move the cursor to “END” and press ENTER. Enter MG Number.CASD CM0-11 Business Procedure: 1. Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 332 Revision 4.e. press ESC. ← 3. press ENTER.

Depress ‘N’ key when data change is necessary. The data from screen (d) displays and prints out. “N”: Error data appears only on screen. “Y” interrupts Continuous Assignment of Station Data. “Is input data correct? (Y/N)”. Note: The printer must be on for either response (Y or N). “N”: Even if an error is detected the system continues its processing. returning to the display (a). “N” resumes it.CASD CM0-11 Business c. “Stop on error?” . 2.Confirmation of the input data “N”: Return to the display (b) “Y”: Next parameter appears. “N”: Enter when you want to assign data only to newly mounted Circuit Card. When the number of errors exceeds more than 250 Continuous Assignments are temporarily suspended.Appointment of temporary suspension in case of error “Y”: When the system detects an error “Interruption!! Cancel it?” displays and suspends processing. “Start Now? (Y/N)” “Y”: Continuous Assignments start. an error list can be obtained. Is input correct? (Y/N) Assign vacant port? (Y/N) Stop on error? (Y/N) Error list required? (Y/N) Start now? (Y/N) :Y :Y :N :Y :Y Procedure: 1.0 . 3. “Assign vacant port?” “Y”: Enter when the mounted Circuit Card has any vacant ports. The system restarts its processing with the completion of an output of an error list. Display of Continuous Assignment Continuous Assignment of Station Data ASSIGNMENT * Depress ‘Y’ key when all data are right. “Error list required? (Y/N)” “Y”: With the completion of Continuous Assignment. 5. “N”: Returns to the previous indication “Input data is correct? (Y/N)” ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 333 Revision 4. 4.

“End of order. Display of Continuous Assignment Execution Continuous Assignment of Station Data SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration Interrupted!! Cancel? (Y/N):Y TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STN 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 TEC 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 RSC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 SFC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LENS reference 020010 020020 020030 ___ ASSIGNMENT STN is already assigned 020050 NGI is not correct TEC is not correct 020060 020070 Complete. When assignment completes. “Y” interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a). Return to Menu? (Y/N)” is displayed.CASD CM0-11 Business d. “Interrupted!! Cancel it? (Y/ N)” appears on screen with a warning tone resulting in a temporary half of processing. “N” restarts Continuous Assignment. • CHAPTER 2 Page 334 Revision 4. return to menu? (Y/N): Y 2MG Configuration Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Y • When you press END while Continuous Assignment is being performed.0 ND-45687 (E) .

When you enter “N”. Enter Station Data in each parameter. 2. After entering Station Data on a block basis.CASD CM0-11 Business • When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system a. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 335 Revision 4. TN : XXX STN : from XXXXX to XXXXX Step XX TEC : XX RSC : XX SFC : XX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX Group Number range : from XX to XX Level Number range : from XX to XX TYPE : X Example of assignment data plan STN LENS STN LENS STN XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX LENS STN LENS STN LENS XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX Note: Block Number (1-10) TN: Tenant Number STN From: Start Station Number To: End Station Number Step: Digit Increment (1-10) TEC: Telephone Class RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) LENS From: Start Line Equipment Number To: End Line Equipment Number Group Number range (0-31) 0-23 Except TEC 18 0-31. LENS) and “Is Data Correct? (Y/N)” appears on the screen. Level Number range (0-7) TYPE: LENS Assignment (1-6) Procedure: 1. the cursor returns to the parameter TN. 3. When you enter “Y”.0 . Example of assignment data plan (STN. Display of Station Data Assignment Continuous Assignment of Station Data Note 1. the display moves to the next one (= b).

“Do you want an error list?: (Y/N)” “Y”: With the completion of Continuous Assignment.CASD CM0-11 Business b. “N”: Error data appears only on screen. the system continues its processing.0 ND-45687 (E) . an error list can be obtained. “N”: Station and LENS data appears only on screen. 3. “Y” interrupts Continuous Assignment of Station Data. 2. “Interruption!! Continue the assignment?” is on screen and suspends processing. “N”: Returns to the display (a). “List of Station and LENS Data?: (Y/N)” “Y”: Station and LENS data list can be obtained. returning to the display (a). The screen changes to the display (c). CHAPTER 2 Page 336 Revision 4. “Do you want to stop if an error is found?: (Y/N)” “Y”: When the system detects an error. “N”: Even if an error is detected. Display of Continuous Assignment [CASD] List of Station and LENS Data ? (Y/N) :Y Do you want to stop if an error is found ? (Y/N) :Y Do you want to an error list ? (Y/N) :Y Do you want to assign station data now ? (Y/N) :Y Procedure: 1. “Do you want to assign station data now?: (Y/N)” “Y”: Continuous Assignments start. 4. “N” resumes it.

“Complete!! Return to the menu? (Y/N)” is displayed. “Y” restarts Continuous Assignment. • ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 337 Revision 4. Display of Continuous Assignment Execution Continuous Assignment of Station Data Interruption !! Continue the assignment ? (Y/N) :N IN STN TEC RSC SFC XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX LENS REFERENCE XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Executing • When you press / key or the system detects an error (in the case you have entered “Y” for “Do you want to stop if an error is found?”) while Continuous Assignment is being performed.0 . “Interruption!! Continue the assignment? (Y/N): N” apperas on the screen resulting in a temporary halt of processing.CASD CM0-11 Business c. “N” interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a). When assignment is complete.

CASD CM0-11 Business Example 1 Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1. TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1 RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 000001 to 000237 Group Number range : from 0 to 15 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 Example of assignment data plan STN LENS 100 000001 101 000002 102 000003 103 000004 STN LENS 104 000005 105 000006 106 000007 107 000010 STN LENS 108 000011 109 000012 110 000013 111 000014 STN LENS 112 000015 113 000016 114 000017 115 000020 STN LENS 116 000021 117 000022 118 000023 119 000024 When you assign data as shown above.0 ND-45687 (E) . L E V E L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP CHAPTER 2 Page 338 Revision 4. stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “ ”.

TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1 RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 001000 to 001237 Group Number range : from 0 to 23 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 Example of assignment data plan STN LENS 100 001000 101 001001 102 001002 103 001003 STN LENS 104 001004 105 001005 106 001006 107 001007 STN LENS 108 001010 109 001011 110 001012 111 001013 STN LENS 112 001014 113 001015 114 001016 115 001017 STN LENS 116 001020 117 001021 118 001022 119 001023 When you assign data as shown above. stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “ ”. L E V E L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 339 Revision 4.0 .CASD CM0-11 Business Example 2 Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1.

L E V E L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP CHAPTER 2 Page 340 Revision 4.CASD CM0-11 Business Example 3 Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1. stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “ ”. TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1 RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 001000 to 001237 Group Number range : from 0 to 23 Level Number range : from 2 to 5 TYPE : 1 Example of assignment data plan STN LENS 100 001002 101 001003 102 001004 103 001005 STN LENS 104 001012 105 001013 106 001014 107 001015 STN LENS 108 001022 109 001023 110 001024 111 001025 STN LENS 112 001032 113 001033 114 001034 115 001035 STN LENS 116 001042 117 001043 118 001044 119 001045 When you assign data as shown above.0 ND-45687 (E) .

stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “ ”. TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1 RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 001000 to 001237 Group Number range : from 10 to 20 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 Example of assignment data plan STN LENS 100 001100 101 001101 102 001102 103 001103 STN LENS 104 001104 105 001105 106 001106 107 001107 STN LENS 108 001110 109 001111 110 001112 111 001113 STN LENS 112 001114 113 001115 114 001116 115 001117 STN LENS 116 001120 117 001121 118 001122 119 001123 When you assign data as shown above.0 . L E V E L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 341 Revision 4.CASD CM0-11 Business Example 4 Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1.

L E V E L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP CHAPTER 2 Page 342 Revision 4. TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1 RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 001000 to 001237 Group Number range : from 5 to 18 Level Number range : from 2 to 5 TYPE : 1 Example of assignment data plan STN LENS 100 001052 101 001053 102 001054 103 001055 STN LENS 104 001062 105 001063 106 001064 107 001065 STN LENS 108 001072 109 001073 110 001074 111 001075 STN LENS 112 001082 113 001083 114 001084 115 001085 STN LENS 116 001092 117 001093 118 001094 119 001095 When you assign data as shown above.CASD CM0-11 Business Example 5 Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1. stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “ ”.0 ND-45687 (E) .

Message List When Trunk Data cannot be assigned INDICATED MESSAGE DESCRIPTION PACKAGE CHECK TK ALREADY ASSIGNED TK UNMATCHED Displays when first circuit on the Trunk Card is assigned. LRTC ARTD. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. ASSIGNED LENS ALREADY ASSIGNED The same LENS number has been assigned. Precautions • • • • Trunk cards should be mounted on the designated LENs. the following messages appear on the display. DMBL.CATK CM0-11 Business. Hotel siness. tel CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. ASFC. MBTK ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 343 Revision 4. ARSC. DMBT LTRK. Descrepancy in the trunk number TRUNK CLASS HAS NOT BEEN Trunk Class has not been assigned. Related Reference Command Display: List UP: Assignment: Displays when first circuit on the Trunk Card is assigned. MBLE. Make busy of trunks Trunk has not been assigned.0 . You can assign or delete the trunk data continuously from the designated LENs. ASFC. 3. LRTD. ARSC. When data entry is rejected while assigning/deleting trunk data. Up to 10 blocks can be executed at a time. LLEN. ARTD. DLEN. The same trunk number has been assigned. Function This command can assign or delete many trunk data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers. When Trunk Data cannot be deleted INDICATED MESSAGE DESCRIPTION PACKAGE CHECK TK BUSY TK NOT ASSIGNMENT 4.

this parameter need to be designated. Entry Procedure Parameter RT: TK Route number from: Range of TK-Start Trunk number to: Range of TK-End Trunk number Step: Number increment (1-10) CNT: Number of Tenant (1-10) Note 1 TN: Tenant number Note 2 RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) Note 1 SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15) Note 1 LENS from: Range of LENS-Start Line Equipment Number Note 3 (see the next page) to: Range of LENS-End Line Equipment Number Group Number range (0-23) Level Number range (0-7) Type: Line Equipment Number Assignment (1-6) Note 4 (see page 346~349. Hotel 5.0 ND-45687 (E) .CATK CM0-11 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 344 Revision 4.) Note 1: When RT number is 901(ATT) or 915 (ATT). this parameter need to be des- ignated. Note 2: When RT number is 0-899 (Inter-office Trunk) or 901(ATT) or 905(ATT).

When the Range of LENS data comprises multiple Group Numbers. PIM J 03 Level No. 02 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 To : XXX026 1 block From : XXX022 2 Group No. 02 04 Unit0 Level No. 02 To : XXX033 2 blocks From : XXX030 To : XXX027 From : XXX022 3 Group No. Hotel Note 3: The Range of LENS data basically is assigned on a Group Number basis (See Example 1 and 2 ). 04 Level No. 02 04 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 To : XXX047 1 block From : XXX020 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 To : XX2057 4 Unit2 05 Group No. PIM J 03 Level No.0 .CATK CM0-11 Business. Example (When the shaded ports are assigned as Range of LENS data) 1 Group No. PIM J 03 Level No. To: Level Number of LENS must be “7”. input these parameters according to the following conditions (See Example 3 and 4 ): From: Level Number of LENS must be “0”. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 block 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 From : XX0020 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 345 Revision 4. PIM J 03 05 Group No.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Group No. See the following example for detailed infor- mation Example: (When the 16 COT circuit cards are accommodated as shown below) U=2 00 05 16 C PIM J O T 10 15 16 16 C O T C O T U=3 20 16 16 C PIM J O T C O T 16 C O T U=0 U=1 • Type: 1 (Level → Group → Unit) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. U=2 Slot No. Hotel Note 4: “Type” parameter determines how to arrange trunk data. U=3 15 16 05 06 56 64 72 80 88 96 1MG 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 49 57 16 24 32 65 73 81 89 40 48 9 17 25 33 41 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1 02 03 04 05 CHAPTER 2 Page 346 Revision 4.CATK CM0-11 Business. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No.

LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=3 15 93 16 96 05 06 63 64 1MG 29 51 52 49 50 32 69 65 47 48 72 68 5 1 2 3 8 4 35 36 33 34 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1 02 03 04 05 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 347 Revision 4. Hotel • Type: 2 (Level → Unit → Group) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=2 Slot No. U=3 15 16 05 06 24 56 32 64 80 96 1MG 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 17 49 40 72 88 25 57 73 89 16 48 33 65 81 9 41 02 03 04 05 U=0 00 01 02 03 U=1 • Type: 3 (Group → Level → Unit) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.0 . U=2 Slot No.CATK CM0-11 Business. Group No. Group No.

CATK CM0-11 Business. U=2 Slot No. U=3 15 16 05 06 31 63 32 64 80 96 1MG 7 39 3 35 29 61 79 95 8 40 68 84 4 36 66 82 30 62 5 1 37 67 83 33 65 81 6 2 38 34 02 03 04 05 U=0 00 01 02 03 U=1 CHAPTER 2 Page 348 Revision 4. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=2 Slot No.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel • Type: 4 (Group → Unit → Level) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Group No. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. U=3 15 93 16 96 05 06 91 92 1MG 85 19 20 7 8 88 21 9 89 90 24 12 13 1 2 3 16 4 17 18 5 6 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1 02 03 04 05 • Type: 5 (Unit → Level → Group) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Group No.

U=2 Slot No. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. Hotel • Type: 6 (Unit → Group → Level) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Group No.0 . U=3 15 16 05 06 87 91 89 92 94 96 1MG 15 19 3 7 85 89 93 95 16 20 22 24 4 8 10 12 86 90 13 17 21 23 1 5 9 11 02 03 04 05 U=0 14 18 2 6 00 01 02 03 U=1 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 349 Revision 4.CATK CM0-11 Business.

Enter Trunk Data in each parameter. LENS) and “Is Data Correct ? (Y/N)” appears on the screen.CATK CM0-11 Business. 2. 3. When you enter “Y”. • When assigning ATT 0·········10·········20·········30·········40·········50·········60·········70········79 0 [CATK] 1 2 Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 3 4 1. Hotel a. The followings shows the display vary kinds of TK data. Example of assignment data plan (TK. After entering Trunk Data on a block basis. the display moves to the next one (b).0 ND-45687 (E) . When you enter “N”. RT : 901 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX CNT : XX XX TN : XXX 5 Note RSC : XX SFC : XX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX 6 Group Number range : from XX to XX 7 Level Number range : from X to X TYPE : X 8 9 <Example of assignment data plan> 10 11 TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK 12 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 13 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 14 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 15 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ASSIGNMENT LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Note: Block Number (1-10) CHAPTER 2 Page 350 Revision 4. the cursor returns to the parameter TN. Display of Trunk Data Assignment Procedure : 1.

Hotel • When assigning the route for Inter-office Trunk 0·········10·········20·········30·········40·········50·········60·········70········79 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1.CATK CM0-11 Business. Note RT : 1 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX TN : XXX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX Group Number range : from XX to XX Level Number range : from X to X TYPE : X ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Note: Block Number (1-10) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 351 Revision 4.0 .

Hotel • When assigning the route for Intra-office Trunk [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. RT : 902 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX Note LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX Group Number range :from XX to XX Level Number range : from X to X TYPE : X ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX Is Data Correct ? (Y/N) Note: Block Number (1-10) CHAPTER 2 Page 352 Revision 4.CATK CM0-11 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .

the system continues its processing.0 . “N”: Even if an error is detected. “Interruption !! Continue the assignment ?” is on screen and suspends processing. 1. “N” interrupts Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data.CATK CM0-11 Business. “Do you want to assign trunk data now ? :(Y/N)” “Y”: Continuous Assignments start. “N”: Returns to the display (a) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 353 Revision 4. The screen changes to the display (c). 2. returning to the display (a). Display of Continuous Assignment [CATK] Do you want to stop if an error is found ? (Y/N) : Y Do you want to assign trunk data now ? (Y/N) : Y Procedure : Select Y or N in the following parameters. “Y” resumes it. “Do you want to stop if an error is found ? :(Y/N)” “Y”: When the system detects an error. Hotel b.

“Interruption !! Continue the assignment ? (Y/N) : N” appears on the screen resulting in a temporary halt of processing.0 ND-45687 (E) . “Y” restarts Continuous Assignment. RT XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX TN XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX RSC XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX SFC XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX REMARKS ASSIGNMENT Complete !! Return to the menu ? (Y/N) :Y • When you press / key or the system detects an error (in the case you have entered “Y” for “Do you want to stop if an error is found ?” ) while Continuous Assignment is being performed. Hotel (c) [CATK] Display of Continuous Assignment Execution Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data Interruption !! Cotinue the assinment ? (Y/N) :N 1. “N” interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a). “Complete !! Return to the menu ? (Y/N)” is displayed.CATK CM0-11 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 354 Revision 4. • When assignment is complete.

CATK CM0-11 Business. 7 K 6 K 5 K L E V E L 4 K 3 K 2 K 1 K 0 0 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 355 Revision 4. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 000001 to 000237 Group Number range : from 0 to 15 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK 100 101 102 103 LENS 000001 000002 000003 000004 TK 104 105 106 107 LENS 000005 000006 000007 000010 TK 108 109 110 111 LENS 000011 000012 000013 000014 TK 112 113 114 115 LENS 000015 000016 000017 000020 TK 116 117 118 120 LENS 000021 000022 000023 000024 TK 120 121 122 123 LENS 000025 000026 000027 000030 When you assign data as shown above. trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “K”. Hotel Example 1 [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1.0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) . trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “K”. Hotel Example 2 [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1.RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 001000 to 003237 Group Number range : from 0 to 23 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK 100 101 102 103 LENS 001000 001001 001002 001003 TK 104 105 106 107 LENS 001004 001005 001006 001007 TK 108 109 110 111 LENS 001010 001011 001012 001013 TK 112 113 114 115 LENS 001014 001015 001016 001017 TK 116 117 118 119 LENS 001020 001021 001022 001023 TK 120 121 122 123 LENS 001024 001025 001026 001027 When you assign data as shown above.CATK CM0-11 Business. 7 K 6 K 5 K L E V E L 4 K 3 K 2 K 1 K 0 K 0 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP CHAPTER 2 Page 356 Revision 4.

Hotel Example 3 [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 001000 to 003237 Group Number range : from 0 to 23 Level Number range : from 2 to 5 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK 100 101 102 103 LENS 001002 001003 001004 001005 TK 104 105 106 107 LENS 001012 001013 001014 001015 TK 108 109 110 111 LENS 001022 001023 001024 001025 TK 112 113 114 115 LENS 001032 001033 001034 001035 TK 116 117 118 119 LENS 001042 001043 001044 001045 TK 120 121 122 123 LENS 001052 001053 001054 001055 When you assign data as shown above.0 . 7 6 5 K L E V E L 4 K 3 K 2 K 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K GROUP ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 357 Revision 4. trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “K”.CATK CM0-11 Business.

Hotel Example 4 [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. 7 6 5 L E V E L 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP CHAPTER 2 Page 358 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “K”.CATK CM0-11 Business. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 001000 to 003237 Group Number range : from 10 to 20 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK 100 101 102 103 LENS 001100 001101 001102 001103 TK 104 105 106 107 LENS 001104 001105 001106 001107 TK 108 109 110 111 LENS 001110 001111 001112 001113 TK 112 113 114 115 LENS 001114 001115 001116 001117 TK 116 117 118 119 LENS 001120 001121 001122 001123 TK 120 121 122 123 LENS 001124 001125 001126 001127 When you assign data as shown above.

0 . Hotel Example 5 [CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “K”.CATK CM0-11 Business. 7 6 5 L E V E L 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K GROUP ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 359 Revision 4. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 001000 to 003237 Group Number range : from 5 to 18 Level Number range : from 2 to 5 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT <Example of assignment data plan> TK 100 101 102 103 LENS 001052 001053 001054 001055 TK 104 105 106 107 LENS 001062 001063 001064 001065 TK 108 109 110 111 LENS 001072 001073 001074 001075 TK 112 113 114 115 LENS 001082 001083 001084 001085 TK 116 117 118 119 LENS 001092 001093 001094 001095 TK 120 121 122 123 LENS 001102 001103 001104 001105 When you assign data as shown above.

To abort the command. Related Reference Command None CHAPTER 2 Page 360 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Hotel CIS. return the screen display back to the menu and enter the command once again. this command is not aborted. CCH cannot be placed into make-busy state or cannot be released from make-busy state. siness. Business. Precautions • • • Make-busy by this command is executed at system initialization or of a fault occurrence. to retry the intended processing.0 ND-45687 (E) . 3. If the intended make-busy setting/cancel is not executed within about 2 min. Therefore. “Return to Menu (Y/N)?” comes on the screen. the corresponding Error Number is displayed. after the processing has been activated (statement “Under Processing” is already on display).CCSE CM0-08 CCIS. tel CCSE Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment 1. Function This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the CCH circuit card and to display the status of CCH. this command is not to be used while the system is in operation unless there is a reason otherwise. press “/” key. Even if the processing has failed to complete within 2 minutes or a key has been pressed. 4. Therefore.

Make Busy of Processor 3 . Hotel 5. “UNDER PROCESSING” displays. Type 2 Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment TYPE OF CHANGE:2 PROCESSOR: MB:1 CHANGE? Y CCH00005 TYPE OF CHANGE: Specify the type of processing 2 .Status Display of Processor PROCESSOR: CCH name and accommodation location CCH XX X XX Group (00-20) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) MB: Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy 2: Not Available CHANGE (Y/N)? Change instruction/make busy instruction Y: Execute X: Not execute Note: During processing. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 361 Revision 4.0 . Entry Procedure a.CCSE CM0-08 CCIS. Business.

Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .CCSE CM0-08 CCIS.Status Display of Processor PROCESSOR: Processor Selection LINK: Link Status 0: Link Open 1: Link Close 2: Not Available MB: Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy 2: Not Available CHAPTER 2 Page 362 Revision 4. Hotel b.Make Busy of Processor 3 . Type 3 Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment TYPE OF CHANGE:3 PROCESSOR: MG 00 PROCESSORMBLINKPROCESSOR MBLINK LP00-0 0 LP00-1 0 CCH0000022 CCH0000122 CCH0000222 CCH0000322 CCH0000400 CCH0000522 TYPE OF CHANGE: Specify the type of processing 2 .

When deletion of station data is rejected.0 . the following messages display on the screen: MESSAGE MEANING Secretary exists Intercom exists Night STN exists Phantom exists Digits mismatch NGI is not correct LENS not assigned STN BUSY Package Check STN not found 4. Deletion is not allowed because the station has a phantom number. Related Reference Command List up: LRTC Deletion is not allowed because the station is a secretary Deletion is not allowed because the station is a member of Intercom Group Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station.CDSD CM0-11 Business siness CDSD Continuous Deletion of Station Data 1. Precautions • • This command is used for Business System only. 3. Function This command deletes all station data within the specific numeric range by designating both start station number and end station number. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Deletion is not allowed because of Line Busy Circuit Card is OFF LINE Information appointed does not exist ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 363 Revision 4. The number of digits is not correct Number Group discrepancy (NGI=Number Group Index) LENS have not been assigned yet.

“Start Now? (Y/N)” “Y”: Starts the processing “N”: Returns to the procedure (4). “Is input data correct? (Y/N)” . an error list is printed. “N”: Any detection of error does not stop the processing. press the “ ” key. 4. 2. Enter terminal station number to be deleted. “Error list required? (Y/N)” “Y”: With the completion of Continuous Deletion. 6.Confirmation of Input Data “Y”: Shifts to next parameter. 7. Depress N key when change is necessary. Enter initial station number to be deleted. “N”: No list will appear. Enter tenant number. “I”: Abort Note: To return the cursor to the previous parameter while you are entering data. Entry Procedure a. Display of Continuous Deletion [Entry] Continuous Deletion of Station Data Deletion System Type: Consists of 2MG TN: 1 STN: 2000 TO: 2009 Is Input data correct? (Y/N): Y * Depress Y key when all data are right.0 ND-45687 (E) . ← CHAPTER 2 Page 364 Revision 4. “Stop on error? (Y/N)” “Y”: Each detection of error suspends the processing. 3. Stop on error? (Y/N): N Error List required? (Y/N) Start Now? (Y/N): Y :Y TN: STN FROM: STN TO: Procedure: Tenant Number Start station number End station number 1. “N”: Return to procedure (3) 5.CDSD CM0-11 Business 5.

• Note: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 365 Revision 4. Continuous Deletion is suspended temporarily. When the deletion is rejected.0 . the reasons display under Remarks. Return to menu? (Y/N): Y 2MG Configuration Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Y STN From: STN To: • Start Station Number End Station Number “Break Now!! Cancel? (Y/N)” displays when you cannot delete a station. Display of Continuous Deletion [While Printing] Continuous Deletion of Station Data System Type: TN: 1 STN: 2000 Deletion 2MG Configuration TO: 2070 Break Now!! Cancel? (Y/N):Y TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STN 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 TEC 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 RSC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 SFC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LENS Remarks 020010 020020 STN is busy 020030 STN not found 020050 020060 020070 020100 020110 020120 End of Order. “Y”: Interrupts continuous Deletion.CDSD CM0-11 Business b. “N”: Returns to the display (a) The information of the station which is under processing always appears on the screen. return to menu? (Y/N)” appears on the screen with the completion of Continuous Deletion. “Y”: Returns to menu. returns to display (a) “N”: Restarts Continuous Deletion “End of order.

CMOD SYS Business. ACT/STBY change can be executed only in the case of dual system configuration. When CPU/TSW system change is executed. When CPU change is executed. ACT/STBY change by this command is executed only when the system is initialized or when an error has occurred. parameter entry into the MAT is restricted. Precautions • • • • • Note that the contents of this command vary slightly according to the system type. This command can be executed only with a dual system configuration. 3. CPU change is not executed. Hotel siness. If an attempted ACT/STBY change has failed. the reason for the failure is indicated by an error number. The contents of error numbers can be viewed if F1 (Help) is pressed. or when the processor designated by ACT system change happens to be in operation. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used to execute ACT/STBY change of the processor (CPU)/TSW. When the processor and the TSW designated by ACT system change is of single system configuration. If an error exists in the data memory. tel CMOD Change of System Mode 1. the ACT-side data memory and the STBY-side data memory are verified with each other. Otherwise. the current ACT-side CPU/TSW number is displayed. • • 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Related Reference Command None CHAPTER 2 Page 366 Revision 4. a bit error may occur at a terminal engaging in data communications when ACT/STBY change is executed.ACT system number display.

Change Copy / Separate Mode. Change HFC Connection. Hotel 5. Change CPU System ACT. System See IMG (ICS) IMGx IMGxh. Entry Procedure The entry procedure varies depending on the system you are using.CMOD SYS Business. Refer to the table below to locate the appropriate entry procedures for your system. Set / Cancel HFC. IMGdxh MMG (ICS) UMG (ICS) UMGx a. as follows: Red = Make Busy Green = Active Blue (***) = Changing Brown = Standby ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 367 Revision 4. Change TDSW System ACT.0 . Display (Example only) TDSW0 TDSW1 CPU 0 ACT CPU 1 MB Note: Different colors represent different states. For IMG (ICS): (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Change of System Mode Function: Change CPU System ACT.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel b. [Input Parameters and Supplementary Explanations] • Equipment Selection: CPU INPUT PARAMETER SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION Execution? (YES/NO) • Equipment Selection: TDSW INPUT PARAMETER * Execute change ACT system for CPU SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION Execution? (YES/NO) * Execute change ACT system for TDSW CHAPTER 2 Page 368 Revision 4. For IMGx Change of System Mode Equipment : CPU : TDSW Display State TDSW 0 ACT Supplementary Explanation Display Area TDSW 1 ST-BY CPU 0 ACT CPU 1 ST-BY “In Execution” Display Area Note: Parameters are to be entered using the cursor.CMOD SYS Business.

0 . Make Busy of TDSW. “Cancel MB? (YES/NO)” appears ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 369 Revision 4.CMOD SYS Business. For IMGxh and IMGdxh: • To change the operating mode Change of System Mode Function: Change of Operating Mode. Make Busy of TDSW. Device (CPU/TDSW) PLO STBY ACT CLK STBY ACT TDSW STBY ACT CPU STBY ACT 1 0 Display ACT System: 0 CHANGE? (YES/NO) • To make busy the TDSW (one card at a time) Change of System Mode Function: Change of Operating Mode. as follows: Red =Make Busy Green = Active Blue (***) = Changing Brown = Standby Note 1: This parameter appears when TSW is selected. Note 2: When status is “MB”. Hotel c. Switch Switch No: 1 (SSW/TSW) Note 1 PLO STBY ACT CLK STBY ACT TDSW STBY ACT CPU STBY **** 1 0 System (0/1) Status: STBY SET MB? (YES/NO) Note 2 SSW: TSW: Note: Secondary switch TDSW Different colors represent different states.

“CANCEL MB? (YES/NO). Device (Processor/TDSW/CM/HC) Display Area Note: If the processor is already in a make-busy state. Change HFC Connection. Make Busy of Processor. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Display Area • To make busy the processor Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Hotel d.0 ND-45687 (E) . For MMG (ICS) and UMG (ICS): • To change operating mode Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode.CMOD SYS Business. Make Busy of Processor. you are prompted.” CHAPTER 2 Page 370 Revision 4. Displaying other MG. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Change HFC Connection. Displaying other MG.

Displaying other MG: LP00-07 & AP0 & IP0 LP08-15 & AP1 & IP1 LP16-23 & AP0 & IP2 LP24-31 & AP1 & IP2 Display Area 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note: Note: The Display on the right will change for each module group selected. To change Copy/Separate mode • Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Change HFC Connection.CMOD SYS Business. Make Busy of Processor. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Displaying other MG. Displaying other MG. Hotel • To display other MGs Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Change COPY/SEPA Mode.0 . Make Busy of Processor. Processor (SP/ LP /AP/IP) Processor No: 0 CHANGE SEPARATE MODE? (YES/NO) Display Area ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 371 Revision 4. You can display only eight (8) module groups at a time. Change HFC Connection.

Change HFC Connection. Select HFD (0/1) Connect HFC Display: 0 CHANGE? (YES/NO) Display Area CHAPTER 2 Page 372 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Displaying other MG.CMOD SYS Business. Make Busy of Processor. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Hotel • To change the HFC (hard drive controller) connection Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode.

CMOD SYS Business. Note 2: This parameter appears when the Processor is LP or AP or IP. Make Busy of Processor.0 . Hotel e. TDSW. CM Change ACT System Note 1: AP is not used. Displaying other MG. P BUS 0 ACT SP STBY ACT 1 ACT IP0 MODULE GROUP SWITCH NUMBER:0 Note 1 AP0 HP PLO CLK TDSW CM STBY STBY STBY STBY STBY STBY STBY 1 ACT MP ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT 0 Supplementary Explanation Display Area 0 ACT 1 ACT 2 ACT 3 ACT LP 0 STBY ACT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 0 • To change Operating Mode INPUT PARAMETER SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Note 1 Processor No: Note 2 Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) CHANGE? (YES/NO) Selected Processor. For UMGx: Change of System Mode Function: Change operating Mode. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 373 Revision 4.

TDSW Switch No. TDSW. CHAPTER 2 Page 374 Revision 4. Hotel • To Make Busy/Make Busy Cancel of Processor INPUT PARAMETER SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Note 1 Processor No: Note 2 Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Switch (SSW/TSW) Switch No. Note 2: This parameter appears when the processor is LP or AP or IP. Corresponds to Module Group No. LP00-07 & AP0 & IP0 LP08-15 & AP1 & IP1 LP16-23 & AP0 & IP2 LP24-31 & AP1 & IP2 Display other Module Group Status. CM Make Busy Set/Cancel.CMOD SYS Business. Note 1: AP is not used.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 3: This parameter appears when the switch is TSW. • To displaying other Module Group (MG) INPUT PARAMETER SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION Displaying other MG.: Note 3 System (0/1) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) System (0/1) SET MB? (YES/NO) CANCEL MB? (YES/NO) Selected Processor.

If this command has been used to control ON/OFF of the MW lamp without performing the required procedures thereafter. this command can also be used to control Message Waiting Display on the Dterm. the input data for Dterm designation is Station/LEN at the Voice Port.CMWL CM0-03 Business. If the station telephone set is a Dterm. lamp control cannot be executed if the LEN entered is not that of a station. Precautions • This command should not be used to control the ON/OFF of the MW lamp while the system is in service. 4. not Station/LEN at the Data Port. 3. the current status of system operation must be confirmed. Function This command is used to indicate ON/OFF status and to control the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFF (MW Lamp) at the station telephone set. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.0 . If the designated station data has been entered by LEN. synchronization may be lost. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 375 Revision 4. If the need arises to use this command for this purpose while the system is in service. • • If the station telephone set to be designated is a Dterm. Hotel siness. tel CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp 1. This command can control ON/OFF of the MW lamp independent of the call processing status within the PBX itself.

Entry Procedure Control Message Waiting Lamps TYPE: 1 TN: 1 STN: 3500 MWLAMP: 1 MCI: 0 ATT: 0 STA: 1 VMM: 0 CONTROL FOR MW LAMP: READY (Y/N)? MW Lamp Control side status is displayed.0 ND-45687 (E) . When CONTROL FOR MW LAMP = 9 has been entered. TYPE: Type of Input 1: Station Designation 2: LENS Designation TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number Information (6 digits) (Enter the data only when TYPE = 2 has been entered.) MWLAMP: Message Waiting Lamp Status 0: Lamp Off 1: Lamp On Names of MW Lamp Controlling Side MCI: Message Center MW Status ATT: Attendant Console MW Status STA: Station VMM: Voice Mail Module MW Lamp Control Side Status Indication 0: Off 1: On CONTROL FOR MW LAMP: MW Lamp Processing Directive Code 0: Lamp Off 1: Lamp On 8: Details of Lamp Control Side 9: Only Display CHAPTER 2 Page 376 Revision 4.CMWL CM0-03 Business. Hotel 5. this prompt is not displayed.

When the Priority Restriction Class is specified as normal in this command. • 4. Entry Procedure Controlled Alternate PRSCs NORMAL/URGENT: N READY? FACILITY RESTRICTION LEVEL N: Normal U: Urgent ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 377 Revision 4. Precautions • • This command is allowed only when Bit 1 of System Data 1. the urgent control data assigned in the AEFR command is used.CPRS CM0-03 Business. Related Reference Command None 5. Function This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Hotel siness. It either selects the class used between two priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent). Index 59 is “1” (Controlled Alternate PRSCs in service). or indicates the class used. tel CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs 1.0 . 3. the Day/Night control data set in the AEFR command is used. If urgent is specified. Priority Restriction Class control is also possible by operation of the ATTCON key.

the following message appears on the screen.0 ND-45687 (E) . 4. SFC) by designating the range of the station number (TN / Tenant Number. Precautions • • • This command is used for Business System only. LEN is not assigned yet. STN < To > /last station number). When change of the station data is rejected. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Change of TEC is refused when Circuit Cards are a different type. RSC. Related Reference Command ASCL MESSAGE DESCRIPTION STN not found LEN not assigned Numbering Plan Mismatch NGI discrepancy Digit discrepancy TEC discrepancy RSC discrepancy SFC discrepancy Package Check Station data is not assigned yet. STN < From > /first station number. 3. Numbering Plan Mismatch NGI discrepancy (numbering group) Digits discrepancy Telephone Class discrepancy Restriction Class discrepancy Service Feature discrepancy Circuit Card OFF LINE CHAPTER 2 Page 378 Revision 4. Function This command can change the station class information (TEC.CSCL CM0-11 Business siness CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class 1.

← 6. old SFC).CSCL CM0-11 Business 5. Entry Procedure Continuous Change of Station Class Is input data correct? (Y/N) : Y Stop on error? (Y/N): Error list required? (Y/N): Y Start now?(Y/N) : Y TN: STN FROM: STNTO: OLD TEC: OLD RSC: OLD SFC: NEW TEC: NEW RSC: NEW SFC: Note: Tenant Number Start Station Number End Station Number Old Station’s Telephone Class Old Station’s Route Restriction Class Old Station’s Service Feature Restriction Class New Station’s Telephone Class New Station’s Route Restriction Class New Station’s Service Feature Restriction Class If you want to change all existing classes. old RSC. You can return the cursor to the previous parameter during data entry by pressing the “ ” key or the BACKSPACE key.0 . Related Commands ASCL ← ← ← TN: 1 Old TEC: 3 Old RSC: 2 Old SFC: 3 STN: 1000 New TEC: 24 New RSC: 1 New SFC: 1 N TO: 1005 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 379 Revision 4. enter “**” for each parameter (present TEC.

the following message appears on the screen when change of station number is rejected.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. LENS is not assigned yet. 3. Numbering Plan is mismatching Numbering Group Discrepancy Deletion is not allowed because of Line Busy Digits Discrepancy Circuit Card Off Line CHAPTER 2 Page 380 Revision 4. Function This command can change the consecutive station numbers by designating the initial station number. In the process of Continuous Change of Station Number. 4. Precautions • • This command is used for Business System only. Related Reference Command ASTN MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Present STN not found New STN **** already assigned LENS not assigned yet Numbering Plan Mismatch NGI Discrepancy Present STN busy Digits Discrepancy PKG Check The station has not assigned yet. New station number is already used.CSTN CM0-11 Business siness CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number 1.

CSTN CM0-11 Business 5. Entry Procedure Continuous Change of Station Number TN: 1 Old STN: 1000 TO: 1005 New STN:2000 TO: 2005 Is input data correct? (Y/N) : Y Stop on error? (Y/N) : Y Error list required? (Y/N) : Y Start now? (Y/N): Y TN: OLD STN FROM: OLD STN TO: NEW STN FROM: NEW STN TO: Tenant Number Old Start Station Number Old End Station Number New Start Station Number New End Station Number Note 1: You can return the cursor to the previous parameter during data entry by pressing the “↑” key. “*” and “#” cannot be renewed. Note 2: Numbers which can be renewed are “0-9”. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 381 Revision 4.0 .

By changing the function. Function This command is used to connect and disconnect the LTST with the Test-desk. Entry Procedure • To Connect: Connection of Test-Desk and LTST FUNC:CN LENS:000001 READY (Y/N)? FUNC: LENS: • To Disconnect: Function Code (Enter CN.CTDK CM0-03 Business. Related Reference Command None 5. Hotel siness. FUNC: CHAPTER 2 Page 382 Revision 4. 3. connection status will be changed. 4. tel CTDK Connection of Test-Desk and LTST 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.) CN: Connection LENs of LTST Connection of Test-desk and LTST FUNC:CO LENS:000001 READY (Y/N)? Function Code (Enter CO. Precautions The printer must be on.) CO: Cut-off LENS: LENS of LTST The displayed FUNCTION (CN/CO) indicates the current status.0 ND-45687 (E) .

the connected party is displayed.) or LENS of Dterm must be for the prime line. Precautions • One of the following messages is displayed.) 1: Station’s Connection Status Tenant Number Station Number TYPE: TN: STN: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 383 Revision 4. Related Reference Command None 5. tel DCON Display of Connection Status 1. • 4. IDLE: Idle state BUSY: Busy state MAKE BUSY: Made-busy state LOCKOUT: Lockout state STN (Station No. depending on the connection status. Function This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks.0 . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.DCON CM0-03 Business. Entry Procedure • To display connection status of Station: Display of Connection Status TYPE: 1 TN: 1 IDLE STN: 3111 Line status is displayed here (Common to TYPE = 1. 3. 2. If the specified station or trunk is busy. Hotel siness. 3) Kind of Connection Status: (Enter 1.

) 2: Trunk Connection Status Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra office Route Number Trunk Number To display connection status of LENS: Display of Connection Status TYPE:3 LENS:000160 IDLE TYPE: LENS: Kind of Connection Status (Enter 3. Hotel • To display connection status of Trunk: Display of Connection Status TYPE:2 RT:1 TK:1 IDLE LENS:O00160 LENS of the designated Trunk is displayed.DCON CM0-03 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) .) 3: LENS Connection Status Line Equipment Number CHAPTER 2 Page 384 Revision 4. TYPE: RT: TK: • Kind of Connection Status (Enter 2. Line status is displayed here.

0 . The contents of DTE Attribute Data-1 are explained in the command ADAl. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 385 Revision 4. When an error code is displayed. LLEN. press the F1 (Help) key to display error-related information.DDA1 CM0-03 Business. Function This command is used to display designated DTE Attribute Data-1. RAST Display: ASDT. Note: 4. “error code” is displayed and DTE Attribute Data-1 is not displayed. AAST Deletion: ASDT. LHST. RAST. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Entry Procedure Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 TN:1 STN:3555 LENS:000036 MEDIA:1 CNTP:0 TCP:0 FCY:3 PRI:0 RST:0 SRP:0 CI:0 TN: STN: LENS: Note: Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number LENS of the entered STN is automatically displayed. DLEN List up: LSTN. LHEN 5. Refer to ADA1. tel DDA1 Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 1. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: ADA1 LDA1 -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT. Precautions • When the input Station Number is not a DTE. 3. Hotel siness.

Precautions • When the data cannot be read from P. Hotel siness.DDA2 CM0-02 Business. The contents of DTE Attribute Data-2 are explained in the command ADA2. Function This command is used to display designated DTE Attribute Data-2. “error code” is displayed. RAST. DLEN List up: LSTN. press the F1 (Help) key to display supplementary information. LHEN 5. 3. tel DDA2 Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . LLEN. AAST Deletion: ASDT. Note: 4. (Made Busy or not mounted).M. Refer to ADA2. LHST. RAST Display: ASDT. DSTN. Entry Procedure Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 TN:1 STN:3555 LENS:000036 DTR: 0 AUT0:0 MDM1:0 MDM2:0 SPD: 0 PRTY:0 ASYC:0 HDX: 1 STOP:0 CODE:0 PRFN:4 HL: 0 HTL: 0 RA: 0 TN: STN: LENS: Note: Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number The LENS of the entered STN is automatically displayed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. which is assigned at a DTE terminal with manual operation. When an error code is displayed. CHAPTER 2 Page 386 Revision 4. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: ADA2 LDA2 -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT.

PRG SERIAL NO. Entry Procedure • Designate the equipment. enter Y. a. If the back tab key is pressed. Hotel siness. HDD File Serial Number Display Screen Display File Serial Number SYSTEM : 0 (0/1) GENERATION: 0 (0/1) Start display (Y/N)? Y FILE NAME \MMLM\00\MMLM0l.DFSN CM0-04 Business. the operation returns to the entry of “System”. If the back tab key or “N” + ENTER is pressed when the inquiry message has been displayed as to whether the command is to be terminated or not after display of Display End message. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 387 Revision 4.0 . PRG SYSTEM GENERATION SERIAL NO. the operation returns to the System Selection. Function This command is used to display and print the serial numbers of the files in the HD. tel DFSN Display File Serial Number 1. 4. 73OEU97518 Display completed!! Return to the MENU (Y/N)? Y SYSTEM: GENERATION: • HFC/HDD System (0/1) Program File Area Number To start the display. Related Reference Command None 5. If the back tab key or “N” key is pressed when the inquiry message has been displayed as to whether serial number display is to be made or not. Precautions • • • Enter parameter “Generation (0/1)”. 3. 73OEU97518 : HFC/HDD System (0/1) : Program file area number FILE NAME \UPDR\00\UPDR0l. the operation returns to the entry of “System”. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2.

4. Function This command is necessary for printing system messages detected by the PBX Fault Diagnostic programs.DFTD SYS Business. Entry Procedure Display of System Message With Details List New or Previous Message (N/P)? Are details necessary (Y/N)? Stop on next message display (Y/N)? • The following messages may be displayed during and following execution of this command. Refer to the Maintenance Manual if no details are available. Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 388 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . a. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for information on how to interpret each System Message. messages will display on the screen only. press the “/” key. Related Reference Command None 5. No message Printer not ready (1: continue 2:end) If 2 is pressed. Messages print out completed. tel DFTD Display of System Message With Details 1. Hotel siness. c. 3. b. Precautions • • • To end this command. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2.

Hotel Example of System Message: SYSTEM MESSAGE O-C [MN] RESTORATION FROM CCS LINK FAILURE NEC TOKYO JUL 15 13:05 LP00-0-ACT 1:EC00 F063 4004 0000 2:0109 0000 0000 0000 3:0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000 Denotes Package mounting location Module Group number: 01 Unit number: 03 Group number: 12 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 389 Revision 4.0 .DFTD SYS Business.

DHDF CM0-10 DHDF Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command should be used only under the supervision of NECAM Engineering.0 ND-45687 (E) . Precautions Call NECAM Engineering before using this command. 3. CHAPTER 2 Page 390 Revision 4.

c. Precautions • The main memory program issue No. the program information (version. display does not occur in the following cases: a.0 .) in the port microprocessor memory mounted in each circuit card in the PBX. issue No. Function This command outputs to the printer and displays at the MAT.DISS CM0-03 Business. b. 3. tel DISS Display of Program Issue 1. display does not occur in the following cases: a. • The program information is not stored at the specified location in the main memory. d. c. Display of one port microprocessor Display of all port microprocessors mounted in one unit Display of all port microprocessors mounted in the system ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 391 Revision 4. The circuit card has been made busy. Hotel siness. b. The program information is not stored at the specified location in the port microprocessor memory. b. The port microprocessor program issue No. The circuit card is not assigned in the ASDT or ATRK command. • Any of the following specifications is allowed for port microprocessor memory program issue No. and issue No. and date) in the main memory and the program information (SP No. display: a. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. The corresponding processor has been made busy. The circuit card is not mounted.

xx xx. Boot RAM version and issue.) Program Version Program Issue No.xx DATE 94/12/27 xx/xx/xx The applicable system type displays. Entry Procedure a. MM/PM: VERSION: ISSUE: DATE: PMN: Main Memory/PM Memory (Enter M. Related Reference Command None 5.0: IMG MP/PM/IP/ACDP: M VERSION x x ISSUE xx. Main Memory Display of Program Issue PBX TYPE V7.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel 4. Program Issue Date Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) CHAPTER 2 Page 392 Revision 4. Main Memory/PM Memory/IP/ACDP Memory Generic version installed in the switch.DISS CM0-03 Business.

PROCESSOR No.DISS CM0-03 Business.) PROCESSOR: Processor Number. SYSTEM SP MP LP PMN: -00 -15 00 . Hotel b.xx DATE xx/xx/xx MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter M.0 .07 0/1 -0/1 Port Microprocessor Equipment Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 393 Revision 4. Display of one processor of main memory Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:M MMG The applicable system type displays PROCESSOR: SP-0 VERSION x ISSUE xx.

CHAPTER 2 Page 394 Revision 4.) PROCESSOR: Processor Number (Enter ALL. issue.DISS CM0-03 Business. Hotel c.XX XX/XX/XX The system type displays. To stop further display. Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot Program. press N. Processor Number/MPXX/LPXX/SP/AP/IP/ ACDP All= All processors. Display of all Main Memory processors mounted in the system Display of Program Issue PBX TYPE V7. PROCESSOR VERSION SP-X X --------- --------- --------- CONTINUE (Y/N)? MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter M.0 --------ND-45687 (E) .) CONTINUE (Y/N)?: This displays if the list of processors (with version. press Y. and date) fills the screen. To display data of other processors.0: MMG MM/PM/BT:M PROCESSOR: ALL ISSUE DATE XX.

Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) XX X XX Line Group Number Unit Number Module Group Number Firmware Number Program Issue No.: ISSUE: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 395 Revision 4. XX. Display of one port microprocessor Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:P PMN: 00150 SP No. Hotel • For Port Microprocessor (example for MMG system): a.) BT will not display for the IMG system.DISS CM0-03 Business. MM/PM/BT: Note: PMN: SP No. ------ -----Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter P.0 .XX ISSUE XX The applicable system type displays.

CHAPTER 2 Page 396 Revision 4. 0 1 SP No.: SP No.0 .) BT will not display for the IMG system. --------- MM/PM/BT: Note: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM? (Enter P. XXXX ISSUE XX MMG System type is displayed here. Display of all port microprocessors mounted in one Unit Display of Program Issue M/PM/BT:P PMN: 001 GROUP No. Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (3 digits) XX X PMN: --------Unit Number Module Group Number ND-45687 (E) GROUP No.DISS CM0-03 Business.: ISSUE: ------ Group Number (0-23) Firmware Number Program Issue No. Enter the Unit Number. Hotel b.

press N. This parameter is displayed every time the data of one PIM is displayed. Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (Input ALL.: ISSUE: CONTINUE (Y/N): --------ND-45687 (E) ------ CHAPTER 2 Page 397 Revision 4.) BT will not display for the IMG system.: SP No. 0 1 SP No. Hotel c. XXXX ISSUE XX MMG System type is displayed here. Otherwise. press Y. When the data of another PlM is to be displayed. Enter ALL.) Group Number (0-23) Firmware Number Program Issue No. --------- CONTINUE (Y/N) MM/PM/BT: Note: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter P. Display of all port microprocessors mounted in system Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:P PMN: ALL GROUP No. PMM: GROUP No.DISS CM0-03 Business.0 .

RAST. LTRK. Ground/Underground (G). RGST. ATRK. Hotel siness. DLEN. DSTN LSTN. AGST. ATRK ASDT. AAST.DLEN CM0-01 Business. For the Hotel system. tel DLEN Display of LENS Data 1. 4. LHEN. RAST. Function This command is used to display the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN. Floor (FLR)] will also be displayed. ATRK ASDT. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: ASDT. Precautions • Floor Service data are displayed only in the case of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165. LLEN. -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC CHAPTER 2 Page 398 Revision 4. Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX). 3.0 ND-45687 (E) . RGST. LHST. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. b7=1 (Floor Service is provided).

The ATT will show RSC and SFC. and TK are displayed. Entry Procedure • For Business System Display of LENS Data LENS:000001 TN:1 TEC:3 STN:3111 RSC:1 SFC:1 LENS: Note: Note: Line Equipment Number When the LENS is entered.DLEN CM0-01 Business. STN. parameters TN. Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Class (1-31) 1: DP(10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4-10: Not used 11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot line 15: CAS Line 16: Data terminal via data module 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used 26: VPS 27: Eight Conference Equipment 28-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15) Service Feature Class (0-15) Route number Trunk Number TN: STN: TEC: RSC: SFC: RT: TK: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 399 Revision 4.0 . TEC. RSC. the following parameters are displayed. When the designated LENS is for a station. parameters TN. RT. When the designated LENS is for a trunk. and SFC are displayed. Hotel 5.

and cause the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR to be displayed [See (b)].DLEN CM0-01 Business. RT. TEC. the following parameters are displayed. SFC. ND-45687 (E) LENS: TN: STN: TEC: RSC: SFC: NXT: CHAPTER 2 Page 400 Revision 4. Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) 1: Admi. Enter the data for parameter LENS LENS:010201 TN: 1 STN: 3000 TEC:1 RSC:2 SFC:3 NXT? Note: Note: When the LENS is entered. and TK are displayed. DP (10 pps) 2: Admi. PB 3: Admi. NEXT Enter Y. parameters TN. Hotel • For Hotel System a. as assigned in the ARSC command. When the designated LENS is for a trunk parameters TN.0 . House Phone 10: Guest House Phone 11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). DP (20 pps) 5: Guest DP (10 pps) 6: Guest PB 7: Guest DP/PB 8: Guest DP (20 pps) 9: Admi. Service Feature Class (0-15). STN. RSC. as assigned in the ASFC command. When the designated LENS is for a station. NXT are displayed. DP/PB 4: Admi.

Hotel b. ROOM CLASS:Room Class (0-15) ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground FLR: Floor (1-127) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 401 Revision 4.0 . Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR LENS: 010201 ROOM CLASS: 1 ANX:0 G:0 FLR:1 The LENS entered in (a) is displayed.DLEN CM0-01 Business.

0 ND-45687 (E) . tel DLSL Display of Lock Out Station-LENS 1.DLSL CM0-03 Business.) 2: Printout of MG indication in LENS Module Group Number CHAPTER 2 Page 402 Revision 4. but only those LENS in lockout stations will print out. Note: All LENS numbers display. 4. “NOTHING” is printed out. 3. Precautions If there are no lockout stations to be displayed. Related Reference Command None 5. Function This command is used to print out the LENS of stations in lockout mode. Entry Procedure • To display the LENS of all lockout stations in the system: Display of Lockout Station-LENS TYPE:1 LENS: XXXXXX TYPE: • Type of printout (Enter 1.) 1: Printout of all Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)in lockout LENS. To display the LENS of the lockout stations in a specific MG: Display of Lockout Station-LENS TYPE: 2 MG:0 LENS: XXXXXX TYPE: MG: Type of printout (Enter 2. Hotel siness. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.

Hotel • To display the LENS of the lockout stations in a specific unit: Display of Lockout Station-LENS TYPE:3 MG:0 UNIT:0 LENS: XXXXXX TYPE: MG: UNIT: Type of printout (Enter 3.) 3: Printout of unit indication in LENS Module Group Number Unit Number (0-3) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 403 Revision 4.0 .DLSL CM0-03 Business.

TYPE: TN: Type of Print out Number (Enter 2. Function This command is used to print out stations in lockout mode by station number. Precautions If there are no lockout stations to be displayed. Hotel siness.0 ND-45687 (E) . Tenant Number CHAPTER 2 Page 404 Revision 4.DLSS CM0-03 Business. Entry Procedure • To display the Station Numbers of all lockout stations in the System: Display of Lockout Station-Number TYPE: 1 XXXX Station number displays after ENTER is pressed.) 2: Indication of lockout stations by tenant. “NOTHING” is printed out.) 1: Print out of all lockout stations To display the Station Numbers of the lockout stations in a specific Tenant: Display of Lockout Station-Number TYPE: 2 TN: 1 XXXX Station number displays. Related Reference Command None 5. tel DLSS Display of Lock Out Station-Number 1. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. TYPE: • Type of Print out Number (Enter 1. 4.

0 .) 3: Print out of lockout stations within a specified range of station numbers.DLSS CM0-03 Business. TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]:Station Numbers a: Start Station Number b: Last Station Number TYPE: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 405 Revision 4. Type of Print out Number (Enter 3. Hotel • To display the Station Numbers of the lockout stations within a designated range of Station Numbers: Display of Lockout Station-Number TYPE: 3 TN:1 STN:3111 TO 3113 XXXX Station number displays.

Module Group number CHAPTER 2 Page 406 Revision 4. 3. TYPE: • Type of Print out (Enter 1. Function This command is used to print out LENS in make busy state on a system-wide basis or for each MG or each unit. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. DMBS.) 2: Print out of LENS in make busy state for a specific MG. MBTK MBLE. MBTK.) 1: Print out of all LENS in make busy state. TYPE: MG: Type of Print out (Enter 2. Entry Procedure • To display all LENS: Display of Make Busy Lens Data TYPE: 1 XXXXXX MBLE.0 ND-45687 (E) . Related Reference Command Assignment (Busy/Idle): Display: 5. Precautions If there are no LENS in make busy state. “NOTHING” is printed out. tel DMBL Display of Make Busy LENS Data 1. MBST. DMBT LENS number displays. Hotel siness. MBST. To display the LENS for a specific MG: Display of Make Busy Lens Data TYPE:2 MG:0 XXXXXX LENS number displays.DMBL CM0-03 Business. 4.

DMBL CM0-03 Business. Hotel • To display the LENS related to a specific unit: Display of Make busy Lens Data TYPE:3 MG:0 UNIT:0 XXXXXX LENS number displays.) 3: Print out of LENS in make busy state for a specific unit. Module Group number Unit Number (0-3) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 407 Revision 4.0 . TYPE: MG: UNIT: Type of Print out (Enter 3.

• For stations in a specific tenant: Display of Make Busy Station TYPE:2 TN:1 XXXX Station number displays. Tenant Number CHAPTER 2 Page 408 Revision 4. Function This command is used to print out all stations in the make-busy state. 3. Precautions If there are no stations in the make-busy state to be displayed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. MBLE MBST. Hotel siness. or to print out specific stations in the makebusy state by tenant or station numbers.) 1: Print out of make-busy stations in all tenants. MBLE. Note: In a multi-tenant environment.) 2: Print out of make-busy stations in a specific tenant. “NOTHING” is printed out. DMBL Station number displays. tel DMBS Display of Make Busy Station 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 1.DMBS CM0-03 Business. Related Reference Command Assignment (Busy/Idle): Display: 5. TYPE: TN: Type of Print out (Enter 2. all stations will print out under tenant 1. Entry Procedure • For all stations: Display of Make Busy Station TYPE:1 XXXX MBST. 4.

TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]: Station Numbers a: Start Station Number b: Last Station Number TYPE: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 409 Revision 4. Hotel • For specific stations: Display of Make Busy Station TYPE:3 TN: 1 STN:3111 TO 3113 XXXX Station number displays.) 3: Print out of make-busy stations in a specific tenant and station range.0 . Type of Print out (Enter 3.DMBS CM0-03 Business.

3. CHAPTER 2 Page 410 Revision 4. tel DMBT Display of Make Busy Trunk 1. MBLE. Precautions If there are no trunks in the make-busy state “NOTHING” is printed out. DMBL TYPE: Kind of Print Out (Enter 1. 4. MBLE MBTK. Function This command is used to display the numbers and locations of trunks in the make-busy state. Hotel siness.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Related Reference Command Assignment (Busy/Idle): Display: 5. Entry Procedure • For all trunks: Display of Make Busy Trunk RT: XXX TYPE: 1 TK: XXX MBTK. trunks in a specific route. or trunks in a specific range of routes. but only those in a make-busy state will print out. for all trunks in the system.) 1: All of the Trunks Note: All route numbers and trunk numbers will display.DMBT CM0-03 Business.

) 2: All trunks of a specific route number.) 3: All trunks of a specific trunk number range. RT [a] TO [b]: Route Numbers a: First Route Number b: Last Route Number TYPE: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 411 Revision 4. Kind of Print out (Enter 3. TYPE: RT: • Kind of Print out (Enter 2.DMBT CM0-03 Business. Route Number For trunks in a specific range of routes: Display of Make Busy Trunk TYPE:3 RT:1 TO 3 RT: XXX TK:XXX Enter a range of route numbers. Hotel • For trunks in a specific route (single route): Display of Make Busy Trunk TYPE:2 RT: 1 RT: XXX TK: XXX Enter route number.0 .

Related Reference Command Back up: List up: BOSD LOSD CHAPTER 2 Page 412 Revision 4. The circuit cards and the Port Microprocessor (PM) which can be displayed are as shown in the table below.DOSD CM0-04 Business. Precautions • The numbers assigned to 20 Speed Calling-One-Touch keys of Dterm are displayed. both station number and LENS can be designated from DLC/ELC card. For displaying One-Touch Speed Call Memory data. When “Speed Calling One-Touch key” (AKYD.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. the number assigned to that function key is not displayed. tel DOSD Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory 1. but only station number can be designated from the floppy disk. Function This command is used to display One-Touch Speed Call Memory data either from the floppy disk in with OneTouch Speed Call Memory data has been saved by “BOSD” command or from the DLC/ELC card. 4. FKY = 49) is assigned to a function key of Dterm. up to 40 numbers (2×20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys) are displayed. Table 2-9 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Displayed CIRCUIT CARD PM NAME/PM NUMBER • • • PA-16ELCH • Error Indications SP-3005. where a Dterm on which “Page Changeover Key” (AKYD. SP-3033 “NS”: Indicates that the circuit card and the Port Microprocessor concerned are not backed up. FKY = 55) is assigned to one of the function keys. 3. Also. Hotel siness. “RD”: Indicates occurrence of a read error “ND”: Indicates that there is no data of the designated station number on the floppy disk.

Entry Procedure • When displaying the data by designating station from DLC/ELC card. NO. Hotel 5. SPEED CALLING DATA 11 : XXXXX 12 : XXXXX 13 : XXXXX 14 : XXXXX 15 : XXXXX 16 : XXXXX 17 : XXXXX 18 : XXXXX 19 : XXXXX 20 : XXXXX NO. SPEED CALLING DATA 01 : XXXXX 02 : XXXXX 03 : XXXXX 04 : XXXXX 05 : XXXXX 06 : XXXXX 07 : XXXXX 08 : XXXXX 09 : XXXXX 10 : XXXXX ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 413 Revision 4. FUNC1: FUNC2: TN: STN: b.0 .DOSD CM0-04 Business. Designating a station: Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory [INPUT PARAMETER] FUNCl: P FUNC2: S TN: 1 -COMMON READY (Y/N)?Y STN: 2000 This is displayed when the Tenant Pattern is used in common. S: Station Tenant Number Station Number If “Y” is entered to parameter “READY”. the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the designated station is displayed. a. P: Circuit Card Kind of Function (Enter S). Kind of Function (Enter P).

Kind of Function (Enter P). SPEED CALLING DATA 01 : XXXXX 02 : XXXXX 03 : XXXXX 04 : XXXXX 05 : XXXXX 06 : XXXXX 07 : XXXXX 08 : XXXXX 09 : XXXXX 10 : XXXXX CHAPTER 2 Page 414 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . a. Designating a LENS: Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory [INPUT PARAMETER] FUNCl: P FUNC2: L LENS: 000012 READY (Y/N) ?Y FUNCl: FUNC2: LENS: b. SPEED CALLING DATA 11 : XXXXX 12 : XXXXX 13 : XXXXX 14 : XXXXX 15 : XXXXX 16 : XXXXX 17 : XXXXX 18 : XXXXX 19 : XXXXX 20 : XXXXX NO. the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the designated LENS is displayed. Hotel • When displaying the data by designating Line Equipment Number (LENS) from DLC/ELC card. P: Circuit Card Kind of Function (Enter L). L: LENS Line Equipment Number If “Y” is entered to parameter “READY”.DOSD CM0-04 Business. NO.

a. FUNC1: DRV NO: FUNC2: TN: STN: OFFICE: DATE: b. Designating a station: Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory [INPUT PARAMETER] FUNC1: F DRVNO: B FUNC2: STATION ONLY TN: 1 STN: 2000 [FILE INFORMATION] OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE :91/11/1 [FRI] IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-B AND READY (Y/N) ?Y File Information is displayed. SPEED CALLING DATA 11 : XXXXX 12 : XXXXX 13 : XXXXX 14 : XXXXX 15 : XXXXX 16 : XXXXX 17 : XXXXX 18 : XXXXX 19 : XXXXX 20 : XXXXX NO. Hotel • When displaying the data from floppy disk. SPEED CALLING DATA 01 : XXXXX 02 : XXXXX 03 : XXXXX 04 : XXXXX 05 : XXXXX 06 : XXXXX 07 : XXXXX 08 : XXXXX 09 : XXXXX 10 : XXXXX ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 415 Revision 4. Kind of Function (Enter F).0 . F: Floppy Disk FD Drive No. the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the designated station is displayed. (A/B/C/D/E/F) Station only Tenant Number Station Number Office Name Date of File If “Y” is entered to “IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-xx AND READY (Y/N)”. NO.DOSD CM0-04 Business.

Function This command displays information of Circuit Cards accommodated in the specific PIM or in all PIMs. “*” is attached before the type of Circuit Card. the circuit card name is displayed. (ex. Precautions • • • If a Circuit Card is in operation. In this case. Table 2-10 Reference Table for Type of Circuit Cards TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARDS FUNCTION LC TRK DTI RST ATI DLC CFT MODEMT GWT 4. 3.g. If a circuit card is in make-busy status. the type of the Circuit Card will appear on the display. *DLC).DPKG CM0-11 Business. *TRK.. Hotel siness. it is displayed with an asterisk and the card type (e. ELC→*DLC) The Type of Circuit Cards which is printed out from MAT are shown below. Even if the Circuit Cards do not belong to the table below.0 ND-45687 (E) . tel DPKG Display Setting on Port Package 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Related Reference Command None Line Circuit Trunk Digital Trunk Interface Register Sender Trunk Attendant Interface Digital Line Circuit 3 party Conference Trunk Modem Pool Trunk DST (Digital Signaling Trunk) CHAPTER 2 Page 416 Revision 4.

0 . enter All.) Unit Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 417 Revision 4.DPKG CM0-11 Business. Hotel 5. Entry Procedure • When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system Display Setting on Port Package MG : 00 UNIT: 0 Group Number MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number 1 1 6 L C B H Group Number Slot Number 0 0 5 6 7 8 R S T J 12 10 20 0 15 6 15 23 1 7 Display 15 23 12 20 20 23 MG: UNIT: Module Group Number (When displaying all circuit cards mounted in all PIMs.

Note 3: Indicates the 24DTI card is mounted in Slot 9.) DISPLAY Display Port Package Location MG : 00 UNIT : 0 Group Number MG : Module Group Number UNIT : Unit Number 0 5 10 15 20 23 # # # R S T L C L C D T I D T I D T I D T I Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 MG: UNIT: Module Group Number Unit Number Note 1: Indicates the 8RST card is mounted in Slot 4.DPKG CM0-11 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 2: Indicates the 16LC card is mounted in Slot 6. Hotel • When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system (Unit 0 of PIMJ is used in the following example. CHAPTER 2 Page 418 Revision 4. “###” is displayed on Group 00 because no data is as- signed.

you can scroll the display to obtain another switch information. Entry Procedure a. When the Circuit Card has plural switch information.0 . Function This command displays the status and function of all switches on each Circuit Card (control and line circuit cards) which are accommodated in the PBX. Precautions • • When you choose the display of the status and function.DPSW CM0-11 Business. 4. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. without connecting MAT to the system. only the function of the switches appears on the screen. Hotel siness. Only explanations of function of each circuit card are available. tel DPSW Display Package Switch 1. 5. Selection of Display Type Display Package Switch Selection of Display Type: Display of Both Status and Function Display of Function Select using the up or down arrow keys. Display of Both Status and Function: Shows actual settings in the switch and explanations of switch settings Display of Function: Provides explanations of switch settings ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 419 Revision 4. you can see only one switch information at a time. In this case. Related Reference Command None.

additional information may display.DPSW CM0-11 Business. Hotel • Specify package type and package name: Display Package Switch Package Type: Package Name: Switch Status and Function Explanation Control Package Line/Trunk Package Depending on the package name entered. Ready? Yes/No Package Type: Select type of package by (←) Package Name: Type in Circuit Card Name (number of characters will vary) CHAPTER 2 Page 420 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . such as MG# or Processor selection.

DPSW CM0-11 Business.0 . EMA Card (for UMGx) [DPSW] Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: XXXXXXXXXX Processor Number : X Ready? Yes/No Display Switch Function Area Note 1 Switch status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package Processor Select : SP LP Display Switch Status Area Continue Display? Yes No Before Note 2 Package Type: Package Name: Processor Select: Processor Number: Select Control Package by (←) Type in Circuit Card Name Select the Processor Enter LP Number Note 1: This parameter appears when the “Processor Select” is LP. Hotel Example a. See Figure entitled “System Configuration (UMGx)” for the LP number. Note 2: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to “Return to menu? Yes/ No”. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 421 Revision 4.

CPU KEY Card (for UMGx) [DPSW] Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: PH-BS21 Processor Number : 0 Note 1 Ready? Yes/No Display Switch Function Area Switch status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package Processor Select : SP LP MP Select System : Zero One Note 2 Display Switch Status Area Continue Display? Yes No Before Note 3 Package Type: Package Name: Processor Select: Processor Number: Select System: Select Control Package by (←) Type in Circuit Card Name Select the kind of Processor Enter the selected Processor No. Select the system of Circuit Card Note 1: This parameter appears when the Processor Select is LP or MP. See Figure “System Configuration (UMGx)” on page 424 for the LP number. PBI. CHAPTER 2 Page 422 Revision 4. Hotel b.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 2: This parameter appears when the “Processor Select” is LP.DPSW CM0-11 Business. Note 3: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to “Return to menu? Yes/ No”.

DPSW CM0-11 Business.0 . DTMC Card (for UMGx) [DPSW] Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: Processor Number : 0 Note 1 Ready? Yes/No Display Switch Function Area Switch status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package Display Switch Status Area Continue Display? Yes No Before Note 2 Package Type: Select Control Package by (←) Package Name: Type in Circuit Card Name Processor Number: Enter the MP Note 1: This value is the MP number. Hotel c. See Figure “System Configuration (UMGx)” on page 424 for the MP number. Note 2: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to “Return to menu? Yes/ No”. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 423 Revision 4.

. Hotel PMG1 PMG0 MP3 MP2 MP1 MP0 IMG0 PIM MPM PIM PIM PIM LP00 IMG1 PIM PIM PIM PIM HSWM IMG2 PIM PIM PIM PIM HSWM IMG3 PIM PIM PIM PIM HSWM HSWM HSWM MISCM HSWM HSWM SPM LPM Note 1 IMG4 PIM PIM PIM PIM LP08 IMG8 PIM PIM ..DPSW CM0-11 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . PIM PIM LP24 ...... System Configuration (UMGx) CHAPTER 2 Page 424 Revision 4. PIM PIM LP16 IMG12 PIM PIM ....... LPM LPM LPM Note 1: One LP is in charge of four IMGs......

this indication changes to “Return to menu? Yes/ No.DPSW CM0-11 Business.” ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 425 Revision 4. Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: Switch Status Area (display of actual switch settings) Switch Status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package Switch Function Area (explanation of functions of specific settings) Continue Display? Yes/No Note: With the completion of display of status and function. Hotel • Specify PMN number (Additional information displays.X Ready? Yes/No • Displayed information varies depending on the Package Name.) Display Package Switch Package Type: PMN Number: XXXXX Switch Status and Function Explanation Control Package Line/Trunk Package XPackage Edition: X Package Name: XX-XXX Firm information: XX-XXXX V.0 .

Hunting. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Room data is also displayed in Hotel. 3. Function This command is used to display the registered Station Data.0 ND-45687 (E) . in UCD Hunting Group display.DSTN CM0-01 Business. the details of the Hunting Group to which that specific secretary station belongs cannot be displayed. the station of the group is displayed in a preassigned order. the Station Number assigned to Voice port and the key data of the Dterm are displayed. However. the designated station is usually displayed as the first one. • • • • • Specific Attendant Number (ASAT command) Remote Access Code (ARAC command) Listed Directory Number (ALDN command) Individual Phantom Number (APHN command) Group Phantom Number (ASHP command) In addition. Dterm Key Layout. The command can also be used to display the following data related to Number Group. and Call Pickup is also displayed as the data related to the designated stations. When the station number belonging to a group (Pilot. the information of Hot Line. When the Station Number of TEC = 13 (Data terminal via Dterm) has been designated. Hotel siness. Precautions • • • When a secretary station has been designated. CHAPTER 2 Page 426 Revision 4. tel DSTN Display of Station Data 1. UCD DSTN or Call Pickup) is designated.

HUNTING: Kind of Hunting (“PILOT”/“CIRCULAR”/“UCD”/“SECRETARY”) CALL PICKUP: Belonging to Call Pickup Group or not.0 . Parameters TN: STN: Tenant Number Presently Assigned Station Number -Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number TEC: Telephone Class (Message display at the same time too) RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15) ROOM CLASS: Room Class (for Hotel system) PHANTOM TYPE: Phantom Number Type (“NOTHING”/“INDlVIDUAL”/“GROUP”) NUMBER: Individual Phantom Number HOT CON TN. parameter “HOT CON TN.DSTN CM0-01 Business. HOT ADC: Note: When the registered destination of hot line connection of the designated station is a station. parameter “HOT ADC” is displayed. STN: Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Tenant Number and Station Number Note: When the registered destination of hot line connection of the designated station is a station registered for Speed Calling-System service. STN” is displayed. Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Abbreviated Digit Code. [To be displayed only when TEC = 13 (Data terminal via Dterm)] Detail Data The following detail data can be displayed: • Next Station Display • Dterm key Position • Hunting Group • Call pickup Group ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 427 Revision 4. Hotel 4. (“BELONG”/“BLANK”) VOICE STN: Station Number of Voice Port corresponding to the Data Port.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel Dterm key Position The following detail data can be displayed: • Detail Data Change • Key Position (1-16) • Key Position (17-40) • Flexible key position (1-8) -Parameters after detail data has been requestedPILOT: Pilot Number SECRETARY: Secretary Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number CNT: Enter the number of Group Station Number STN: Enter the lead station Number of the Hunting Group -Specific Attendant NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number RT: Route Number (901 or 915) TK (ATK): Trunk Number (Attendant Number) CNT: Number of handling TNs TN: Handling TNs (Smaller number first) TRSC: Trunk Route Restriction Class TSFC: Trunk Service Feature Restriction Class -Listed Directory Number/Remote Access CodeEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number -Individual Phantom Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number TN: Tenant Number of Master Station STN: Master Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number of Master Station MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number TEC: Telephone Class of Master Station (Message is to be displayed simultaneously) RSC: Route Restriction Class of Master Station SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class of Master Station ROOM CLASS: Room Class (for Hotel system) CHAPTER 2 Page 428 Revision 4.DSTN CM0-01 Business.

Individual Phantom Number. Entry Procedure Pilot Number Secretary Number Phantom Number Enter the number of Group Station Number Enter the lead station Number of the Hunting Group TN: 1 STN: 5000 TN: STN: Tenant Number Station Number. Hotel -Group Phantom NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number The following parameters are the data of a Pilot Group for which a Phantom Number is registered.DSTN CM0-01 Business. Listed Directory Number. PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN: 5. Specific Attendant Number. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 429 Revision 4.0 . Group Phantom Number Data are displayed of the Number Group of the number entered. Remote Access Code.

DSTN CM0-01 Business. The key position on the Dterm at this time is the VOICE-side station. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system) PHANTOM: Phantom Number Type NUMBER: Individual Phantom Number HUNTING: Kind of Hunting PICKUP: Belonging to Call Pickup Group or not HOT CON TN: Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Tenant Number HOT CON STN:Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Station Number CHAPTER 2 Page 430 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) ↑ ↑ . If there are Dterm key data. the above data are displayed. the corresponding Station Number of VOICE port displays. Note: When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm). select the desired item with the ↑ (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow). then press ENTER. Station Data Display Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS: SFC: <Related data> PHANTOM: NUMBER: HUNTING: CALL PICKUP: HOT CON TN: STN: Detail Data? Next Station Display Dterm key Position Hunting Group Call Pickup Group MODE SELECTION: ↑ Up Arrow MODE ACTIVATION: Down Arrow When a Station Number has been entered. Station Hunting Group data. Hotel • For Station Number a. and Call Pickup data to be displayed.

DSTN CM0-01 Business. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system) ND-45687 (E) ↑ Key Position (1-16) Key Position (17-40) Flexible Key Position (1-8) MODE SELECTION: ↑ Up Arrow MODE ACTIVATION: Down Arrow ↑ CHAPTER 2 Page 431 Revision 4. Note: When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm). If there are Dterm key data. Hotel The following explains a request for detail data. select the desired item with the ↑ (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow). then press ENTER. Dterm Add on Module key data. b.0 . the above data is displayed. and Dterm Flexible key data to be displayed. When a D term key Position has been entered in display (a). The key position on the Dterm at this time is that of the VOICEside station. the corresponding Station Number of VOICE port is displayed. the following information displays: Display of Station Data TN: STN: LENS: TEC: SFC: DISPLAY EFFECTIVE TN: MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS: Dterm Position Type? Detail Data Change When a D term key Position has been entered.

the following displays. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system) PRI: From of Line Preference SPK: Line Preference of Speaker Button ANS: Line Preference of Answer Button ORG: Line Preference of Originating Button MWD: Waiting Message *: Dterm Key Data CHAPTER 2 Page 432 Revision 4. DISPLAY Display of Station Data TN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC MESSAGE ROOM CLASS: <Dterm key position> Note VOICE STN: PRI: SPK: ANS: ORG: MWD: 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 * ENTER RETURN KEY!! With the Enter key pressed.DSTN CM0-01 Business. the corresponding Station Number of VOICE port is displayed. When key position (1-16) has been entered as the answer for the question “Dterm Position Type?” in display (b). c. Hotel The following explains a request for detail data. The key position on the Dterm at this time is that of the VOICEside station. the screen returns to display (a). Note: When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm).0 ND-45687 (E) .

d. DISPLAY Display of Station Data TN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X) TEC MESSAGE <D term key position> PRI: SPK: ANS: ORG: MWD: 17 25 33 18 26 34 19 27 35 20 28 36 21 29 37 22 30 38 23 31 39 24 32 40 ENTER RETURN KEY!! * After a detail data request has been entered. When key position (17-40) has been entered in reply to the question “Dterm Position Type?” in the display (b). the contents of key data for Keys 17 through 40 are displayed. When Enter is pressed. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class PRI: From of Line Preference SPK: Line Preference of Speaker Button ANS: Line Preference of Answer Button ORG: Line Preference of Originating Button MWD: Waiting Message *: Dterm Key Data ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 433 Revision 4. the screen returns to display (a).0 .DSTN CM0-01 Business. Hotel The following explains a request for detail data. the following will display.

DSTN CM0-01 Business. Hotel e. the following will display.0 ND-45687 (E) . In reply to the question “Detailed Data?” in the display (a). [Station Hunting-Pilot] Display of Station Data DISPLAY TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL: X) TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: SFC: <HUNTING-PILOT> PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN: ENTER RETURN KEY!! ** [Station Hunting-Circular] <HUNTING-CIRCULAR> SECRETARY: CNT: STN: ** CHAPTER 2 Page 434 Revision 4. when you set Hunting Group.

When the Enter key is pressed. the screen returns to display (a). Number of Stations in the Group Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group CNT: **: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 435 Revision 4. the stations belonging to either one of Station Hunting GroupPilot/-Circular/-UCD are displayed there depending on the case involved. Note: No display is made if UCD Overflow Group is not assigned.DSTN CM0-01 Business. Hotel [Station Hunting-UCD] <HUNTING-UCD> CNT: STN: Note <UCD OVERFLOW GROUP> TN: STN: ** After a detail data request has been entered.0 .

the display scrolls to the following. When the Enter key is pressed. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class CNT: Number of Stations in the Group **: Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group CHAPTER 2 Page 436 Revision 4. the screen returns to display (a).DSTN CM0-01 Business. the stations belonging to the Call Pickup Group are displayed. Hotel f. When you answer by Call Pick-up Group in reply to the question “Detailed Data?” in the display (a).0 ND-45687 (E) . Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X) TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: SFC: <CALL PICKUP> CNT: STN: DISPLAY ENTER RETURN KEY!! ** After a detail data request has been entered.

For Night Master ATT. “NIGHT MASTER” is displayed here. TN: Tenant Number STN: Specific Attendant Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RT: Route Number TK(ATN): Trunk Number (Attendant Number) CNT: Number of ending TN TN: Handling TNs (Smaller Number first) TRSC: Trunk Route Restriction Class TSFC: Trunk Service Feature Restriction Class • For LDN Number When an LDN Number is entered. Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Display Listed Directory Number (ALDN) TN: Tenant Number STN: Listed Directory Number EFFECTIVE TN:Effective Tenant Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 437 Revision 4. the following displays. Hotel • For Specific Attendant Number When a Specific Attendant Number is entered. Display of Station Data TN: LENS: RT: CNT: TN: TRSC: Display STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Specific Attendant Number (ASAT) (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL: X) TK(ATN): MASTER Note TSFC: Note: This “MASTER” is displayed for Master ATT with respect to the Effective TN.DSTN CM0-01 Business.0 . the following displays.

Display of Station Data DISPLAY Individual Phantom Number (APHN) TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: <MASTER> TN: STN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL:X) TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS: SFC: TRSC:i TSFC:j TN (line 1): Tenant Number STN (line 1): Individual Phantom Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number TN (line 3): Tenant Number of Master Station STN (line 3): Master Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number of Master Station TEC: Telephone class of Master Station RSC: Route Restriction Class of Master Station SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class of Master Station ROOM CLASS: Room Class (H/M only) CHAPTER 2 Page 438 Revision 4. Hotel • For Remote Access Code When a Remote Access Code is entered.DSTN CM0-01 Business. the following displays.0 ND-45687 (E) . the data of the Master Station displays. Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: DISPLAY Remote Access Code (ARAC) TN: Tenant Number STN: Remote Access Code EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number • For Individual Phantom Number When an Individual Phantom Number is entered.

DSTN CM0-01 Business. Hotel • For Group Phantom Number When a Group Phantom Number is entered. the data are displayed of the Pilot Group to which that phantom is assigned. Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: <HUNTING-PILOT> PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN: DISPLAY Group Phantom Number (APHN) ** TN: STN: (2nd) TN: PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: **: Tenant Number Group Phantom Number Effective Tenant Number Pilot Station Number Secretary Station Number Group Phantom Number Number of Stations in the Group Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 439 Revision 4.0 .

Hotel 6.0 ND-45687 (E) . AAST. RGST APHN ASHP ASHC ASHU ACPG AHLS AKYD -Specific Attendant NumberAssignment/Deletion: ATRK ASAT AMAT -Listed Directory NumberAssignment/Deletion: ALDN -Remote Access CodeAssignment/Deletion: ARAC -Individual Phantom NumberAssignment/Deletion: APHN ASDT. AGST/RAST. AAST.DSTN CM0-01 Business. Related Reference Command -Station NumberAssignment/Deletion: ASDT. RGST -Group Phantom NumberAssignment/Deletion: ASHP CHAPTER 2 Page 440 Revision 4. AGST/RAST.

The traffic information which can be displayed by this command is as follows: • • • • • Terminal Traffic Route Traffic Station Peg Count Attendant Console Peg Count Route Peg Count 3. If Type of a Traffic Measurement is requested.999. Bit 7.0 . but no traffic data has been obtained.000. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. determines whether traffic data is to be printed out in Erlang or CCS. if the number of calls has exceeded 1. Index 47. or Traffic Measurement is not in service in System Data 1. the data will be displayed as 999. 4. Hotel DTF1 Display of Traffic Data 1. NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned. Index 47. Related Reference Command Assignment: ATRF ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 441 Revision 4. Precautions • • System Data 1.000. WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned. Bit 0. Function This command is used to display the traffic data recorded in the system. the following messages may be displayed.DTF1 CM0-03 Business. • In the display of Station Peg Count and Attendant Console Peg Count.

99 0.00 0.DTF1 CM0-03 Business.00 0. Hotel 5.00 0.00 0.00 0.99 0.00 LV7 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.49 0.00 The total traffic for each Unit or MG is printed out.0 ND-45687 (E) .21 0.00 LV6 0.00 LV5 0. CHAPTER 2 Page 442 Revision 4.11 0. Examples of Printout • For Terminal Traffic (CCS) * TERMINALTRAFFIC(CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 LENS LVO LV1 000000 000010 000020 0.00 0. Entry Procedure Display of Traffic Data TYPE:5 PRINTING OUT NOW This message is displayed while printout of the traffic information is in progress.00 LV2 0.00 21.00 28. TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement 1: Terminal Traffic 2: Route Traffic 3: Station Peg count 4: ATT Peg Count 5: Route Peg Count 6.49 0.00 LV3 0.00 LV4 0.

00 0.00 0.00 0.38 0.00 0.00 0.DTF1 CM0-03 Business.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 • For Station Peg Count * STATION PEG COUNT * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 TENANT 1 ORIGINATOR STA TO STA-OG OUTGOING OTHER : : : : 13 9 1 3 STA TO STA-IC INCOMING RINGING NO ANSWER (30 SEC) ANSWER NO ANSWER OTHER : : : 6 0 6 : : : : 0 1 5 0 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 443 Revision 4.00 0. Hotel • For Route Traffic (CCS) * ROUTE TRAFFIC (CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 ROUTE 902 905 909 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NUMBER OF TRUNKS 20 20 4 4 4 32 12 12 8 8 8 4 TRAFFIC 8.0 .00 0.

When a station engaged in a call places the call on hold and dials an access code for an outgoing trunk group (OGC. LCRS). STA TO STA-IC (Number of terminations of Station to Station calls) Same as “STA TO STA-OG”. Note: Number of Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is not included in the count. When a station. LCR. b.O. Priority Calls. Last number calls and Hot Line-Outside calls. are counted. Stop calls are not counted. Number of station calls attempted by direct dialing (not via the Attendant) from C. When a D term user presses the Trunk Line button and makes an outgoing trunk call. b. c. number of unanswered calls. number of times a call is unanswered within a predetermined timing (standard 30 seconds). such calls are counted. Last number calls. places the call on hold. A station started dialing but replaced the handset before dialing was completed. are counted. RINGING (Number of terminated station calls) Add “STA TO STA-IC” and “INCOMING” above for the number of terminated station calls. ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) Of the “RINGING”. STA TO STA-OG (Number of Station to Station calls) a. it is not counted as ‘ANSWER”. Off-Hook Alarm calls and Calls Back of Message Reminder. Number of times a station went off-hook and dialed an access code for an outgoing trunk group (OGC. Calls back from Call Back or Call Waiting are not counted. Hot Line calls. and dials a station number.O. NO ANSWER (Number of unanswered calls) Of the “RINGING”. Hotel An explanation of the output results is given below: ORIGINATOR (Number of times call origination is attempted). Number of times a station went off-hook for call origination. LCR. b. OTHER (Others-Outgoing) The number obtained by subtracting the number of “STA TO STA-OG” and the number of “OUTGOING” from “ORIGINATOR”.DTF1 CM0-03 Business. d.0 ND-45687 (E) . Number of terminated DIT (Direct-In Termination) calls. Number of times a station went off-hook and dialed a station number. (Number obtained by subtracting “ANSWER” from “RINGING”) CHAPTER 2 Page 444 Revision 4. line. Examples of “OTHER” are: a. a dead number or a specific attendant number. OGCA. c. number of answered terminated calls. tie line incoming calls) a. NO ANSWER (30 SEC) (Number of times a call is unanswered for a predetermined period of time) Of the “RINGING”. such calls are counted. such calls are counted. Note that even if a station user answers the call after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. OGCA. b. A station lifted the handset but did not dial any digits. lines or TIE lines. LCRS). d. while engaged in a call. e. a dead number or a specific attendant number. OUTGOING (Number of Outgoing Attempts) a. INCOMING (Number of terminated C.

a.O. Number of incoming calls on each ATTCON ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 445 Revision 4.DTF1 CM0-03 Business.0 . and there are the following cases. The cases where the calls were transferred to ATTCON • For Attendant Peg Count * ATTENDANT PEG COUNT (CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 TM LDN ATND RCL FX WATS 1 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 * ATTENDANT ANSWER * ATN LDN ATND RCL 1 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 CCSA 0 0 0 0 TIE 0 0 0 0 BUSY NANS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICPT 0 0 0 0 SCB 0 0 0 0 TF 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 3 0 0 0 (1) Number of incoming calls on each Tenant basis FX 0 0 0 0 0 0 WATS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 BUSY NANS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICPT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SCB 0 0 0 0 0 0 TF 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 1 0 0 0 1 0 7. The cases where the calls encountered line busy b. Hotel OTHER (Others-Incoming) The number obtained by subtracting the number of “RINGING” (Number of terminated station calls) form the sum of “STA TO STA-IC” and “INCOMING” (Number of terminated C. line/tie line incoming calls).

Hotel The following table explains how to interpret the output results. line Recall from station Outside prefix Wide Area Telephone Service Direct Inward Dial Trunk Call termination from Tie line Call which encountered called line busy has terminated to ATTCON Call which encountered no answer has terminated to ATTCON Call which was restricted has terminated to ATTCON Not Used Call termination by Inter-Position Transfer CHAPTER 2 Page 446 Revision 4.O. SYMBOL NAME OF KEY ON ATTCON DESCRIPTION LDN ATND RCL FX WATS CCSA TIE BUSY NANS ICPT SCB TF Listed Directory Name Attendant Recall Foreign Exchange Wide Area Telephone Service Common Channel Signaling Arrangement Tie Line Busy Don’t Answer Intercept Special Common Battery Inter-Position Transfer CALL termination from C.DTF1 CM0-03 Business.O.0 ND-45687 (E) . line Operator access from C.

when register blocking has occurred. Trunks (CBWT). REGISTER ACCESS This value. OUTGOING (Number of call originations) Number of times trunks were accessed. (Connections to Attendant Consoles are not included). For Intra office Trunks (ex. The count does not always coincide with the number obtained by subtracting “BLOCK” from “ATTEMPTS”. ESTABLISHED Number of connections to specific intra-office trunks. BLOCK Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk.) ATTEMPTS Number of times a trunk selection was attempted. etc.0 . BLOCK Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk. b. Route 901. 902. the count in INCOMING and the count in REGISTER ACCESS do not always coincide. For IC/OG Trunks ATTEMPTS Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk.DTF1 CM0-03 Business. from the count in “INCOMING”. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 447 Revision 4. INCOMING Number of terminated incoming trunk call arrivals. In the case of Bothway C. Also.O. Hotel • For Route Peg Count ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 ROUTE902 ATTEMPTS BLOCK ESTABLISHED ROUTE 1 ATTEMPTS BLOCK OUTGOING INCOMING REGISTER ACCESS: ATT STATION TANDEM OTHER : 18 : : 18 : 5 : 5 : 0 : 0 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 0 Below is an explanation of the output results: a. is the number of actual ORT/IRT register connections. the count becomes “0”.

OGCA. • Calls to unused numbers • Calls that encountered station busy CHAPTER 2 Page 448 Revision 4. OTHER The number obtained by subtracting “ATT”. is the number of calls that received an outgoing trunk group access code (OGC. STATION (Number of Station to Station calls) This value is calculated from “REGISTER ACCESS” and “INCOMING” only when the calls are station-to-station (not via the Attendant Console).0 ND-45687 (E) . TANDEM (Number of Tandem Connections) This value. LCRS) through an incoming trunk. These calls include the following: • Incoming calls terminated but released before the connection was made.DTF1 CM0-03 Business. LCR. Hotel ATT (Number of Connections to Attendant Consoles) This value is calculated from “REGISTER ACCESS” and “INCOMING” only when the calls are directed to the ATTCON. from the count in “REGISTER ACCESS”. and “TANDEM” from “INCOMING”. “STATION”.

Hotel siness. 3. but no traffic data has been obtained. Precautions • When Type of Traffic Measurement is requested. WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned. the data will be displayed as 999. if the number of calls has exceeded 1. TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement 6: Service Peg Count ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 449 Revision 4. Related Reference Command Assignment: 5. Function This command is for printing out the result of traffic measurement data for Type 6 (Service Peg Count) assigned in the Assignment of Traffic Measurement (ATRF) command.000. NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned. Printout of other traffic measurement data is performed either by command DTF1 or DTF3. Printout of the traffic measurement results by this command is applicable only to Service Peg Count. • • In the display of Service Peg Count.0 .DTF2 CM0-03 Business. tel DTF2 Display of Traffic Data 1. 4.999.000. Entry Procedure ATRF Display of Traffic Data TYPE:6 PRINTING OUT NOW! This message is displayed while output of traffic measurement result data to the printer is in progress. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. the following messages may be displayed.

CALL BACK CANCEL Count Number of times Call Back is canceled. CALL BACK (ENTRY) Count Number of times a busy station has called back to the calling station. Example of Printout SERVICE PEG COUNT FROM 07/24 09:00 TO 07/24 10:00 TENANT 1 CALL HOLD CALL BACK CANCEL EROW CALL WAITING-ORIGINATE CALL WAITING-TERMINATE CALL PICK UP DIRECT CALL PICK UP CF ALL CALLS-ENTRY CF ALL CALLS-CANCEL CF-BUSY LINE-ENTRY CF-BUSY LINE-CANCEL CF-DON’T ANSWER-ENTRY CF-DON’T ANSWER-CANCEL SPEED CALLING ACCESS SYSTEM SPEED CALLING ACCESS INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL-ENTRY TAS ANSWER OFF HOOK OG QUEUING ON HOOK OG QUEUING-ENTRY ON HOOK OG QUEUING-CANCEL CONSULTATION HOLD CALL TRANSFER ADD ON CONFERENCE : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 An explanation of the output results is given below: CALL HOLD Count Number of calls originated by a station while keeping the original call on hold. EROW (EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY Count) Number of times a specific station has entered a busy stations call using EROW.DTF2 CM0-03 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 450 Revision 4. CALL WAITING-ORIGINATING Count Number of times a busy station is automatically called by camp-on tone being sent from another station. CALL WAITING-TERMINATING Count Number of times a busy station is automatically called by a camp-on tone being sent to indicate an external call waiting. Hotel 6.0 ND-45687 (E) .

CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ENTRY Count Number of times Call Forwarding-All Calls is set by a station.(GROUP) Count Number of times a terminating call is answered by another station in the same pick-up group by dialing the call pick-up code. CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE-CANCEL Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Busy Line is canceled by a station. ON-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-ENTRY Count Number of times the Off-Hook Queuing feature is set after encountering all trunks busy. SPEED CALLING ACCESS SYSTEM Count Number of times a System Speed Calling number is dialed.DTF2 CM0-03 Business. SPEED CALLING ACCESS INDIVIDUAL Count Number of times an individual Speed Calling number is dialed. DIRECT CALL PICK UP Count Number of times a terminating call is answered by another station by dialing a call pick-up code and the terminating station number. CALL FORWARDING DON’T ANSWER-CANCEL Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is canceled by a station. Hotel CALL PICK UP . ON-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-CANCEL Count Number of times Off-Hook Queuing feature is canceled. SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL-ENTRY Count Number of times an individual Speed Calling number is registered. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 451 Revision 4. CONSULTATION HOLD Count Number of times CONSULTATION HOLD is executed. OFF-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING Count Number of times trunk is seized after a station is getting Off-Hook Queuing upon encountering all trunks busy. CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-CANCEL Count Number of times Call Forwarding-All Calls is canceled by a station. TAS ANSWER Count Number of calls answered via Trunk Answer from Any Station.0 . CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE-ENTRY Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Busy Line is set by a station. CALL FORWARDING DON’T ANSWER ENTRY Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is set by a station.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS Count Number of times a station and attendant console are called out by dialing. by hooking.DTF2 CM0-03 Business. without the intervention of attendant console operator. ADD ON CONFERENCE (THREE-WAY CALLING count) Number of three-party conference calls. the office originating/terminating calls as well as busy calls generated in self-office. CHAPTER 2 Page 452 Revision 4.

The traffic information which can be displayed by this command is listed below. but no traffic data has been obtained. • 4. Function This command is used to display the traffic data recorded in the system. tel DTF3 Display of Traffic Data 3 1. In the Uniform Call Distribution Route Peg Count. Uniform Call Distribution Group Peg Count and Uniform Call Distribution Station Peg count.0 . the data will be displayed as 999. WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned.DTF3 CM0-03 Business.000. Hotel siness. • • • UCD Route Peg Count UCD Group Peg Count UCD Station Peg Count 3. Precautions • If Type of Traffic Measurement is requested. Entry Procedure • For UCD Route Peg Count: Display of Traffic Data 3 TYPE:8 ATRF TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 8.000.) 8: UCD Route Peg Count ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 453 Revision 4. if the number of calls has exceeded 1. NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Related Reference Command Assignment: 5.999. the following messages may be displayed.

) 10: UCD Station Peg Count 6.0 ND-45687 (E) .DTF3 CM0-03 Business. Hotel • For UCD Group Peg Count Display of Traffic Data 3 TYPE:9 TYPE: • Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 9.) 9: UCD Group Peg Count For UCD Station Peg Count: Display of Traffic Data 3 TYPE:10 TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 10. Example of Printout • For UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT: UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 ROUTE 1 UCD GROUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ROUTE TOTAL 1 2 3 4 5 T0 07:24 10:00 INCOMINGANSWER ABANDON XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX 2 XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX An explanation of the output is given below: INCOMING (Number of terminated calls) ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls) CHAPTER 2 Page 454 Revision 4.

Hotel • For UCD GROUP PEG COUNT: UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 T0 07:24 UCD GROUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TOTAL 10:00 ANSWERABANDON XXXXX XXXXX INCOMING XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX An explanation of the output is given below: INCOMING (Number of terminated calls) ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls) • For UCD STATION PEG COUNT: UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 T0 07:24 UCD GROUP 1 TN XXX 10:00 STN XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX TOTAL XXXXX INCOMING XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX ANSWER XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX ABANDON XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX 2 GROUP XXXX An explanation of the output is given below: TN (Tenant Number) STN (Station Number) INCOMING (Number of terminated calls) ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 455 Revision 4.DTF3 CM0-03 Business.0 .

INST SYS Business. Speed Calling-Station Data and Name Display Data. 4. be sure to install data on an FD basis. Verify must be executed after Install.. press any key. tel INST System Install [for IMG (ICS). 3.) • Data installation on an HD Basis: When this type of install is used. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No The number of copied FDs is X. If an HD copy processing has resulted in an error such as Verify Error. Related Reference Command AIOC BKUP SINZ 5. Is the file to be verified after copying? Yes/No Place the target FD into Drive: X. etc. MMG (ICS). Entry Procedure • Input Parameters Select the data to be installed.0 ND-45687 (E) . and UMG (ICS)] 1. press any key. Hotel siness. Data Memory/CF/SPD/Name Display Data/Main Memory Select the equipment to be installed. including office data. Call Forwarding data. Function This command is used to install various data from Floppy Disks (FDs). If NO. to the Hard Disk (HD) of the HFC. Copy the target file into the HD of the MAT. MAT/FDD Is data to be installed on HD basis? Yes/No Is verify to be executed at the time of installation? Yes/No (This prompt displays if “Yes” was entered above. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. the data of the selected item is stored once on the MAT HD from the FD(s) before loading the data to the PBX. If ready. Precautions • • • Data installation is to be made on FD basis. Installation is executed to the ACT-side HD.The FDD of the MAT is used for installing this data. When confirmed. repeat CHAPTER 2 Page 456 Revision 4.

0 . When ready. When ready. press any key. repeat DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND Install data Select (Multiple selections possible) ( Selection: [↔] Choose: [RETURN] Cancel: [SPACE] Start: [S] ) Data Memory / Call Forwarding Data / Speed Calling Data / Name Display Data  DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Select Install Type HD_BASE/FD_BASE HD_BASE : This Function copies all install FD to MAT-HD then installs from MAT to HD in PBX FD_BASE : This Function does not use MAT-HD installs from MAT to HD in PBX ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 457 Revision 4.INST SYS Business. press any key. Installation will start. HDD initialization? Yes/No Place the FD (Basic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. • Data Installation on an FD Basis: When this type of install is used. Place the FD with the target file into Drive: X. When ready. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No a. press any key. the data of the selected item is directly loaded to the PBX from FD. Initial Display If NO. Hotel HDD initialization? Yes/No Set the FD (Basic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X.

If you are ready. DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND Install Passage 0:end CHAPTER 2 Page 458 Revision 4. Hotel b.INST SYS Business. When HFC number is selected System Install Selected HFC: HFC0 Data Install Set install FD in drive: A. Hit the return key.0 ND-45687 (E) . When Install data is selected [INST] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND Install HFC number select HFC0 / HFC1 c.

INST SYS Business.0 . Hotel System Install Selected HFC : HFC0 Data Install DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM File Number: 1 x Date: 1995/03/10 15:19 0 25 50 75 100% xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Install Passage 0:end ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 459 Revision 4.

4. Hotel siness. Precautions • • • When data is not to be installed on an HD basis. the following installations can be controlled from the MAT. call Forwarding data. Entry Procedure • Input Parameters Select the data to be installed. Note that the FDD of the MAT is used when installing the program. data installation is to be made on FD basis. and individual Speed Calling Data) need to be installed to the HDD. Verify must be executed after Install. name display. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2.) CHAPTER 2 Page 460 Revision 4. MAT/FDD Is data to be installed on HD basis? Yes/No Is verify to be executed at the time of installation? Yes/No (This prompt displays if “Yes” was entered above. IMGxh..INSTI CM0-10 Business. IMGdxh.0 ND-45687 (E) . office data. Function In the PBX. Related Reference Command AIOC BKUPI SINZ 5. “HD basis” indicates the method to install data after copying all target FDs onto the HD of the MAT. and UMGx] 1. etc. only the ACT side HDD should be installed. Data Memory/CF/SPD/Name Display Data/Main Memory Select the equipment to be installed. • • • Formatting of HDD Data installation from MAT to HDD Data installation from FDD to HDD 3. If an HD copy processing has resulted in an error such as Verify Error. various data (program. tel INSTI System Install [for IMGx. be sure to install data on an FD basis. When installing the data from the MAT. Using this command.

If NO. press any key. Copy the target file into the HD of the MAT. press any key.INSTI CM0-10 Business. When confirmed. repeat ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 461 Revision 4. HDD initialization? Yes/No Place the FD (Generic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. repeat • Data Installation on an FD Basis: When this type of install is used. Place the FD with the target file into Drive: X. If ready. press any key. Installation will start. the data of the selected item is directly loaded to the PBX from FD. the data of the selected item is stored once on the MAT HD from the FD(s) before loading the data to the PBX. Is the file to be verified after copying? Yes/No Place the target FD into Drive: X.0 . Hotel • Data installation on an HD Basis: When this type of install is used. When ready. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No The number of copied FDs is X. When ready. press any key. When ready. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No If NO. HDD initialization? Yes/No Set the FD (Generic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. press any key.

Hotel a. DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Select Install Type HD_BASE/FD_BASE HD_BASE : This Function copies all install FD to MAT-HD then installs from MAT to HD in PBX FD_BASE : This Function installs from MAT-FD to HD in PBX When “FD_BASE” is selected.0 ND-45687 (E) . or Data Memory is selected. b.INSTI CM0-10 Business. the display changes to (h). When Call Forwarding Data or Speed Calling Data or Name Display. CHAPTER 2 Page 462 Revision 4. the display changes to (l). Initial Data [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Install data Select (Multiple selections possible) (Select: [↔] Choose: [RETURN] Cancel: [SPACE] Start: [S]) Data Memory / Call Forwarding Data / Speed Calling Data / Name Display Data / Main Memory When “Main Memory” is selected.

the display changes to (g). When “HD_BASE” is selected [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM MAT-HD file reference now! ! When no files exist on the HD of the MAT.INSTI CM0-10 Business. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 463 Revision 4. the display changes to (f). When “No” is selected [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Delete Files in MAT . Hotel c. When files exist on the HD of the MAT [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Do you want to install files on MAT . d.0 .HD? Yes / No When “Yes” is selected. e.HD Deleting Files Now ! ! Files are being deleted.

INSTI CM0-10 Business.HD Files copy with verify? Yes / No Set Install FD in drive: X If you are ready. When files on the HD have been deleted or when no files exist on the HD of MAT [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Install Files copy to MAT . g. Hit the Return Key Are all the FD copied? Yes / No Copied FD number : n If you are ready. Hit the Return Key Note: Note Select “No” to install another FD. Hotel f. When the Return Key is pressed [INSTI] System Install ACT System : 0 System Install Now! ! Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM File Number: 1 x DM Install Progress 0: end Date: 1995/03/10 15:19 Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM 0 25 50 75 100% ************************************** CF SPD When the install is completed. CHAPTER 2 Page 464 Revision 4. the display changes to (k).0 ND-45687 (E) .

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 465 Revision 4.0 . Hit the return key i.INSTI CM0-10 Business. Hotel h. When “FD_BASE” is selected on display (b) [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Data Install Set install FD to drive : x If you are ready. When the Return Key is pressed [INSTI] System Install ACT System : 0 System Install Now! ! Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM File Number: 1 x DM Install Progress 0: end Date: 1995/03/10 15:19 Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM 0 25 50 75 100% ************************************** CF SPD The data of the FD is being installed.

Hotel j. the display returns to (h). When the install is completed [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install Normal end! ! Are all FD loaded? Yes / No When “No” is selected. CHAPTER 2 Page 466 Revision 4. the display returns to (a).INSTI CM0-10 Business.0 ND-45687 (E) . When “Yes” is selected [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install all end! ! Return to menu? Yes / No When “No” is selected. k. When “Yes” is selected. the display returns to the menu.

INSTI CM0-10 Business. Hotel l. When a system of the HD is selected [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Do you want to initialize the HD in the PBX? Yes / No When “No” is selected. When Main Memory” is selected on display (a) [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Select system to install 0 SYSTEM / 1 SYSTEM m.0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 467 Revision 4. the display returns to (r).

Hit the return key o.INSTI CM0-10 Business. p.0 ND-45687 (E) . When the Return key is pressed [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Format HD in PBX Format now ! ! The HD is being formatted. When “Yes” is selected [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Set System management FD (basic software #1) in PBX FDD If you are ready. When formatting is completed [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM System management file install to PBX HD Install now ! ! CHAPTER 2 Page 468 Revision 4. Hotel n.

When the directory has been created on the HD [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Data install Set install FD to FDD in PBX If you are ready. When the system management fifle has been installed [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Create directory on HD in PBX Creating now ! ! Creating a directory on the HD. Hotel q.0 . Hit the return key ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 469 Revision 4. r.INSTI CM0-10 Business.

INSTI CM0-10 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 470 Revision 4. When the Return key is pressed [INSTI] System Install Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install Now! ! Install passage 0: end The data of the FD is being installed. Hotel s.0 ND-45687 (E) .

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 471 Revision 4.0 . Select “Yes” to return to the menu.INSTI CM0-10 Business. the display returns to (r). Hotel t. When “Yes” is selected [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install all end Return to menu? Yes / No When “No” is selected. u. the display returns to (a). When Data Install is completed [INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Are all FD loaded? Yes / No When “No” is selected.

Entry Procedure • Example for the IMG Processor Occupancy List INTERVAL: 1 INTERVAL: Measurement information for output interval 1 . 3. including: • • • Occupancy data for the past 24 hours.Every ten minutes 2 .Every one hour Ready? CHAPTER 2 Page 472 Revision 4. Function This command provides occupancy statistics for the local processor. Precautions None 4. recorded at either 10-minute or 1-hour intervals Maximum occupancy for the past 24-hour period Average occupancy over the same 24-hour period The results can be printed but not displayed. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2.LPRO CM0-11 LPRO Processor Occupancy List 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Related Reference Command None 5.

7 19.0 .(94/10/2315:49 to 94/10/24 16:50 MAXIMUM DATE TIME 26.3 SYSTEM 0...0 13.XX XX.7 19.0 13.3 AVERAGE XX...XX ...7 10/24 15:25 ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 473 Revision 4..-Maximum occupancy ratio of 10 seconds .LPRO CM0-11 • Example (for the IMG) LP OCCUPANCY LIST TIME 17:00 18:00 19:00 MM 0..

make busy resetting in software is not allowed. Entry Procedure Make Busy of Processor Bus PBUS NO:0 MB:1 WRT? Y PBUS No.: MB: Processor Bus Number (0/1) Make Busy Information 0: Idle 1: Busy Note: When the Processor Bus Number is entered.0 ND-45687 (E) . In this case. the current status is displayed. if the system is operating with one processor bus. and an error is indicated. Accordingly. • 4. Precautions • If the BUSR circuit card corresponding to a Specified processor bus is made busy by the MB switch. Related Reference Command None. CHAPTER 2 Page 474 Revision 4. the make busy state can be reset using the MB switch of the BUSR circuit card. any attempt to make busy that bus will result in an error. Hotel siness. This command is for the UMGx only. 3. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2.MBBS CM0-03 Business. Function This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the processor bus. The system will not allow all processor buses to be made busy at the same time. tel MBBS Make Busy of Processor Bus 1. 5.

the current status of the entered LENS is displayed. the make busy request is executed after the call is completed. When the designated LENS is a port of the SMINT. DMBT Make Busy of LENS LENS:000001 MB:1 WRT? Y LENS: MB: Line Equipment Number Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy Note: When the “LENS” is entered. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. “SMINT: XXXXX-X” is displayed. “SMINT: EMM00-0”) 4. (Ex.0 .MBLE CM0-01 Business. it means that the circuit card is not mounted or has been made busy by the MB switch. MBST DMBL. Proceed to the next operation by pressing the ENTER key. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: 5. tel MBLE Make Busy of LENS 1. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 475 Revision 4. Hotel siness. DMBS. When “PKG CHECK” is displayed. Precautions • • • If the LENS of a trunk or station which is busy on a call is entered. Function This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of LENS (Line Equipment Numbers). 3. Entry Procedure MBTK.

3. UNDER PROCESSING: If make busy has not been executed two seconds after inputting the command. Function This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the circuit card in which the port microprocessor is contained. This confirmation occurs once. In this case. 4. This setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. after two seconds. If setting of the make busy state is specified. this command must be input again. The following messages are displayed during and after execution of this command.MBPM CM0-03 Business. “UNDER PROCESSING” is displayed. an error will result if an attempt is made to reset the circuit card.). etc. EXIST BUSY PORT: If any circuits (line/trunk) of the specified circuit card are busy. DMBL • • • CHAPTER 2 Page 476 Revision 4. If the circuit card is not mounted. any attempt to reset the make-busy state in software will result in an error. this message is displayed. If the location of the circuit card containing the port microprocessors is specified in this command. the make busy state will be displayed. the operating state of all circuit cards mounted in the associated unit is displayed. Precautions • If the specified circuit card is made busy by the MB switch. However. MBLE Display Line/Trunk: DMBS. this command also checks whether the request has been executed as specified. setting of the make busy state is allowed even if this message is displayed. the MB switch can be used to place the circuit card in operation. MBTK. To check whether execution has been completed. If the request has not been performed as specified. DMBT. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Related Reference Command Assignment Line/Trunk: MBST.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel siness. When specifying the PMN (Port Microprocessor Location Number) of a multiple-width circuit card (such as the DTI. tel MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor 1. but. this message will be displayed. be sure to specify the actual mounting location.

Hotel 5. thus enter the data from the MAT.MBPM CM0-03 Business. Note: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 477 Revision 4. 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy When “PMN” is entered. CIRCUIT CARD TYPE LC TRK DTI RST ATI DLC MODEM T GWT Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) XX X XX Group Number Unit Number Module Group Number PMN: MB: Make Busy Information (0/1). Entry Procedure • When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system: PMN:00100 MB:1 WRT? Y LC The type of circuit card is displayed here.0 . the current status of the entered Port Microprocessor is displayed.

g. Note 2: Indicates a circuit card using 16 ports (e. 24 DTI) is mounted in Slot 9 and is in make busy state.) Make Busy of Port Microprocessor PMN : Port Microprocessor PMN :00000 XXXX Equipment Number (5 digits) MB : Make Busy Information (0/1) MB :X 0 : Make Idle 1 : Make Busy 0 GROUP NO.g. Hotel • When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system (Unit 0 of PIMJ is used in the following example. 8 RST) is mounted in Slot 4 and is in make busy state.MBPM CM0-03 Business. OPE N-OPE # # # * * * * * * * 5 10 15 20 23 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 PMN: MB: Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) Make Busy Information (0/1) 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy Note 1: Indicates a circuit card using 8 ports (e.g. CHAPTER 2 Page 478 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Note 3: Indicates a circuit card using 24 ports (e. 16 COT) is mounted in Slot 6 and is in make busy state. “##” is displayed on Group 00 because no data is assigned.

Make Busy OK (Make Idle OK): The trunk concerned has been made busy (or idle) as designated. the trunk concerned was already under “Make Busy” (or “Make Idle”) status as designated. . tel MBRT Make Busy of Route 1. Thus. the Trunk Number of the trunk under processing and message “Making Busy Now!!” or “Making Idle Now!!” are displayed on the CRT screen. the message “PKG CHECK” is printed in the list. When a specific circuit card is not mounted or is under “Make Busy” status with its MB switch set in the UP position.MBRT CM0-04 Business. Note: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 479 Revision 4. 3.0 . “Make Busy” status cannot be changed by means of this command.PKG CHECK: The circuit card is not mounted or MB switch on the circuit card is in the UP position. 4. Entry Procedure RT: 1 MB: 0 WRT? Y RT: MB: Route Number Make Busy Information (0/1) 0: Idle 1: Busy The parameters of the data to be provided to the printer are as follows. Precautions • • • Even if there is any trunk under Make-Busy (or Idle) status in the route. .TK: Trunk Number . . Hotel siness.LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) . While execution of this command is in progress.Already Busy (Already Idle): Before this command has been executed. Function This command is used for assigning IDLE/BUSY status for all the trunks in the route designated. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Make-Busy setting (or clearing) is executed with respect to all the trunks in the route. Related Reference Command None 5.

Precautions • • This command is allowed only when bit 4 of System Data 1. Related Reference Command None 5. Indexes 116 to 121 (port type specification) 4.: MB: Port Number (0-7) Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy Note: When “PORT No.0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry Procedure Make Busy of System Message Printout PORT NO. the current status of the entered PORT No. Function This command allows or inhibits the automatic printout of system messages on the stand-alone printer. System Data 1. 3. Hotel siness.” is entered. is displayed. Index 39 (system message output port specification) System Data 1.: 0 MB: 0 WRT? Y PORT NO. Port specification by this command has priority over the following data: a.MBSM CM0-03 Business. CHAPTER 2 Page 480 Revision 4. c. Index 38 (printer installation specification) System Data 1. b. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Index 86 is “1” (automatic system message printing function in service). tel MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout 1.

Upon completion of the call. Hotel siness. it means that the circuit card is not mounted or has been made busy by the MB switch. 4. LHST Make Busy of Station TN:1 MB:1 WRT? Y STN:3155 TN: STN: MB: Tenant Number Station Number Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy Note: When “TN” and “STN” are entered.MBST CM0-01 Business. the make busy assignment will be put into effect. Entry Procedure MBLE DMBL. LSTN. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: 5. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations. When “PKG CHECK” is displayed. LHEN. the current status of the specified station is displayed. DMBS LLEN. Precautions • • Make busy assignment is executed even if the specified station is engaged in a call. 3.0 . Press ENTER to return to TN to enter new data. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 481 Revision 4. tel MBST Make Busy of Station 1.

4.0 ND-45687 (E) .MBTC CM0-04 MBTC Make Busy of Trunk . Precautions • Be sure not to make all trunks busy.56789 TK 01234. Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 482 Revision 4.Make Idle 1 .56789 MB MB X: 1100 00000 10X: 1X:00000 00000 11X: 2X: 0001 12X: 3X: 13X: 4X: 14X: 5X: 15X: 6X: 16X: 7X: 17X: 8X: 18X: 9X: 19X: TK 01234.Continuous 1.56789 MB 20X: 21X: 22X: 23X: 24X: 25X: TK:1 TO RT: TK: MB: Route Number Trunk Number Make Busy Information (0/1) 0 . 3. trunks 1. Entry Procedure Make Busy of Trunk . 2. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2.Make Busy In the example above. and 23 are busy.Continuous RT:10 MB: 0 TK 01234. Related Reference Command None 5. Function This command is used to display trunks that are busy and to make busy a range of trunks.

the make busy assignment will be put into effect. Note: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 483 Revision 4. it means that the circuit card is not mounted.0 . Hotel siness. Precautions • • Make busy assignment is executed even if the specified trunk is engaged in a call. the current status of the specified trunk is displayed. Function This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. DMBT LLEN. LHEN. 3. Proceed Press the Backspace key to go back to TK. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: 5.MBTK CM0-01 Business. 4. When “PACKAGE” is displayed. Upon completion of the call. Entry Procedure MBLE DMBL. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. LTRK Make Busy Trunk RT:1 MB:1 WRT? Y TK:3 RT: TK: MB: Route Number Trunk Number Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy (outgoing) (depends on setting of ARTD) Outgoing make busy Package make busy Blocking make busy 2: Make busy (bothway) When “RT” and “TK” are entered. tel MBTK Make Busy of Trunk 1. or has been made busy by the MB switch.

Entry Procedure Make Menu File CCIS ACD PSM VMM FMM TMM OAI AEP ISDN ACD (OAI) :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Change MENU (Y/N)? MENU Addition (0/1) 0: 1: Not Addition Addition CHAPTER 2 Page 484 Revision 4. Precautions • Make sure the appropriate disk is loaded before making an addition. 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2.MMNF CM0-11 MMNF Make Menu File 1. 3. Related Reference Command None 5. Function This command is used to make menu files.0 ND-45687 (E) .

list up the data by the List Up command. Also. 4. • Name Display Data Load This parameter is necessary to load the Name Display Data stored in a floppy disk into the system. When executing data Save/Load using this command. Function • Name Display Data Save This parameter is necessary to save into a floppy disk the Name Display Data assigned by the ANDD command. list up the data using the List Up command (LNDD in advance to save. Be sure to perform data corrections before and after loading in this manner.NDBU CM0-04 Business. • Name Display Data Verify This parameter is necessary to verify the Name Display Data in the system with the Name Display Data stored in a floppy disk. after the data have been loaded. Hotel siness. Precautions • • Before saving the Name Display Data. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. the correspondence between station numbers and the user information cannot be guaranteed when the correspondence between LEN and Station Numbers before data loading and after data loading differ from each other. the floppy disk to be used must be formatted (initialized). 3. Related Reference Command For Name Display DataAssignment: ANDD Deletion: ANDD Display: ANDD List up: LNDD ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 485 Revision 4. be sure to load the data after listing up check errors. When loading the data. tel NDBU Name Display Data Back Up 1.0 . • Since data loading is executed as per the LEN number.

Function: OFFICE: DATE: Operation Mode S: Save L: Load V: Verify P: Verify with Error List Office Name Date of the File The following messages are displayed during execution or upon completion of this command: FLOPPY DISK IS FILLED: There is no space in the floppy disk. Entry Procedure: Name Display Data Backup [INPUT PARAMETERS] (S:Save L:Load V:Verify P:Verify with Error List) FUNCTION: S [FILE INFORMATION IN FD] OFFICE: NEC CORPORATION DATE: 85/01/01 FLOPPY DISK SET IN DRIVE-A READY FOR OPERATION (Y/N) ?Y File Information displays. CHAPTER 2 Page 486 Revision 4. COMPLETED: ERRORS: Save.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel 5. Number of Unmatched Data. Load or Verify has been completed. This message is displayed only in the case of FUNCTION = V (Verify).NDBU CM0-04 Business.

If it is unnecessary data put a protect seal on the notch. The FD (floppy disk) in which you are going to save the PM memory should be formatted. Function This command saves the contents of PM (port microprocessor) into FD (floppy disk) or verifies them. ISSUE ( = issue of software) and office name.PMBU CM0-11 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Information of firmware (program code) also appears on the screen. Precautions • • • When an error message appears on the screen after data entry. < In VERIFY Mode > • Data stored in the FD is invalid. destroyed. Related Reference Command None Table 2-11 Counteraction Table against Command Execution Error ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE OF ERROR RESPONSE Disk I/O Error • Flaw on the FD < In SAVE Mode > • The contents of the FD have been • Format FD.0 . 3. inserted into the Drive. • Confirm the data stored in the FD is necessary or not. rejecting Data writing. then use it after formatting. by entering SP number ( = firmware number). see Table 2-11. Write Protect Error • FD is protected by write protect notch. • If you have the same result even using the formatted FD. tel PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up [for Engineering use only] 1. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 487 Revision 4. When you cannot read out the information of the firmware in the PM memory. 4. File Not Found • There is no file in the FD which is • Replace it with the proper one. change the FD. you can take out the information. Hotel siness.

PMBU CM0-11 Business. Parameters of File information appear on the display. Entry Procedure Port Microprocessor Memory Backup [Input Parameter] Function: v (S:Save V:Verify P:Verify with Error list) PMN : 00010 (PM Number) Capacity: 64 (K Byte) Note [File Information] SP Number: 0455 ISSUE : 06 PMN : 00010 Office : NEC Corporation Date : xx/xx/xx FLOPPY DISK SETTING ON DRIVE-A READY (Y/N)? COMPLETED! RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)? Function: Modes S: V: P: Save Verify Verify with Error list PMN: The location of the Circuit Card on which the firmware program is mounted. Note: Enter the capacity of PM memory which you are going to save into a FD. Firmware Software ISSUE displayed again Office Name xx/xx/xx SP Number: ISSUE: PMN: OFFICE: DATE: CHAPTER 2 Page 488 Revision 4. Hotel 5. Floppy Disk is set in the Drive-A? (Y/N): Set a formatted FD into Drive-A. XX X XX Group Number Unit Number Module Group Number Capacity: Capacity of Port Microprocessor’s memory to save into FD (2/4/8/16/32/64).0 ND-45687 (E) .

the MAT will automatically print out any Fault Data in the system. 3. Entry Procedure Release Alarm RELEASE (Y/N)? Y When processing has been completed. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 489 Revision 4. Function This command is used for clearing the fault indications. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. the following displays: RELEASE (Y/N)? Y RELEASED! ! RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)? RELEASED: Completion of alarm release.) 4. RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next prompt Y: Return to MENU. tel RALM Release Alarm 1. Precautions • When an alarm is indicated and the MAT is initially powered on. (The printer must be turned on.RALM SYS Business. Related Reference Command None 5.0 . N: Start operation again. Hotel siness.

RLST CM0-03 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

RLST

Release of Station/Trunk

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to release a station or trunk. 3. Precautions • One of the following messages is displayed, depending on the connection status of the specified station or trunk. IDLE: BUSY: MAKE BUSY: LOCKOUT: Idle state Busy state Make busy state Lockout state

The busy tone (reorder tone) state is displayed as “BUSY”. • • • When the trunk number is input (Type 2), the line equipment number (LENS) of the trunk is displayed. If this command is used to force the release of a station, and that station is in the off-hook state, recall is indicated. The STN (Station No.) or LENS of a Dterm must be designated for the prime line.

4. Related Reference Command None

CHAPTER 2 Page 490 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

RLST CM0-03 Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure • For a Station

Release of Station/Trunk TYPE:1 TN:1 IDLE RELEASE (Y/N)? Y STN:3111

Connection status is displayed here. In the case of Busy Tone state or Reorder Tone state, “BUSY” is displayed. When the status is “BUSY” and the station/trunk is connected to a certain destination, the information of the connected destination is displayed as follows.

Destination is a station: Destination is a trunk:

LENS: XXXXXX TN: X STN:XXXX LENS: XXXXXX RT: XXX TK: XXX 1: Stations for Release 2: Trunk for Release 3: LENS for Release Kind of Release 1: Station Release 2: Trunk Release 3: LENS Release Tenant Number Station Number Route Number Trunk Route Number Intraoffice Route Number Trunk Number Line Equipment Number

TYPE:

TN: STN: RT:

TK: LENS:

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 491 Revision 4.0

RLST CM0-03 Business, Hotel

For a Trunk:

Release of Station/Trunk TYPE:2 RT:1 IDLE RELEASE (Y/N)? Y TK:1 LENS:000160

LENS of the designated trunk is displayed.

TYPE: TN: RT: TK: LENS: • For LENS:

Kind of Release (Enter 2.) 2: Release of a Trunk Tenant Number Route Number Trunk Number Line Equipment Number

Release of Station/Trunk TYPE:3 LENS:000001 IDLE RELEASE (Y/N)? Y

TYPE: LENS:

Kind of Release (Enter 3.) 3: Release of a LENS Line Equipment Number

CHAPTER 2 Page 492 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

RVTL CM0-09 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

RVTL

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to delete a schedule for virtual tie line implementation period in Virtual Tie Line Service. 3. Precautions • The entry range (DATE) of the Date Range is within one year.
Example:

01/01-12/31: 12/01-11/30: •

One year from January 1st to December 31st. One year from December 1st to November 30th of the following year.

The Week Range is entered as follows.
Example:

MON-FRI: SAT-SUN: MON- MON:

Five days from Monday to Friday Two days from Saturday to Sunday One day if the same Monday is designated.

Designation in reverse direction MON- SUN: TUE-SUN: SAT-WED: Seven days when going back by one week Six days when going back by two weeks Five days when going back by three weeks

When the Date Range is one day, only the starting week is displayed. The relationship between the Data Range and the Week Range is as follows.
Example:

In the case of DATA; 11/08-11/22, WEEK; MON-WED In a case where 11/08 is Wednesday, 11/22 is Wednesday of two weeks after. In the designated Date Range, 8th is the first Monday, 13th through 15th are Monday through Wednesday of next week, and 20th through 22nd are Monday through Wednesday of the week after next. Thus, these seven days are the subject for processing. • When displaying the currently assigned data by designating a specific date or by batch designation (designation of a specific period), the data is displayed as follows. If only one day is to be deleted, the data of that specific day is displayed. If a specific period is designated, the data of only the first date of the designated period is displayed. Note, however, that if no data is assigned on the first day of the designated period, Error is displayed.

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 493 Revision 4.0

RVTL CM0-09 Business, Hotel

4. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: 5. Entry Procedure AVTL LVTL

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data TL / SPC:

NEXT? Y

TL / SPC:

Kind of Tie Line (T/S) T - Time Link S - Semi Permanent Connection

For T (Time Link) selection
Remove Virtual Tie Line Data DATE : 03/27-03/31 PTN: 0 WEEK : TUE-SUN IC/OG : OG RT: 12 TK: 1 D-LENS : 001014 CH: 6 CALLING: 1111 NEXT? Y

CHAPTER 2 Page 494 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

RVTL CM0-09 Business, Hotel

a.

If “Y” is entered after “Next?” the display changes as follows:

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data KEYPAD: 1 CALLED : 2222 SUB NO : 123 TIME : 08:30-17:20 DEL? RESULT : 03/27

DATE:

PTN: WEEK:

IC/OG:

RT: TK: D-LENS: CH: CALLING: KEYPAD: CALLED: SUB NO: TIME:

RESULT:

[aa]/[bb]-[cc]/[dd]: Date Range aa: Start Month (01-12) bb: Start Day (01-31) cc: Last Month (01-12) dd: Last Day (01-31) Pattern Number (0-15) [ee]-[ff]: Week Range ee: Start week (SUN, MON, TUES, WED, THURS, FRI, SAT) ff: Last week (SUN, MON, TUES, WED, THURS, FRI, SAT) King of Assign (IC/OC) IC: Incoming Call OG: Outgoing Call Route Number Display Trunk Number Display LENS of Dch Bch Number Display Calling Number Display Keypad Information (0/1) Called Number Display Sub Address Number Display (Only Assign Data is) [aa]:[bb]-[cc]:[dd]: Time Range aa: Start Time Display bb: Start Minute Display cc: Last Time Display dd: Last Minute Display [aa]/[bb]: Result Display aa: Month bb: Day

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 495 Revision 4.0

RVTL CM0-09 Business, Hotel

For S (Semi Permanent Connection) selection
Remove Virtual Tie Line Data PTN: 0 IC/OG: D-LENS: CALLING: SUB:

RT:

TK: CH:

PTN: IC/OG:

RT: TK: D-LENS: CH: CALLING: CALLED: SUB:

SUB NO:

Pattern Number (0-15) Kind of Assign (IC/OG) IC - Incoming OG - Outgoing Route Number Trunk Number Lens of Dch Bch Number (6-24: every 6ch/1-30) Calling Number (Max. 24 digits) Called Number (Max. 24 digits) Kind of Sub Address (0/1) 0 - Not Assigned 1 - Assign Sub Address (Max. 12 digits)

CHAPTER 2 Page 496 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

SINZ SYS Business, Hotel
siness, tel

SINZ

System Initialize

1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used to initialize the PBX from the MAT. Also, at the time of system initialization, this command allows the programs and the office data to be loaded from a hard disk into the RAM. If no office data file exists in the hard disk, the system starts off-line. 3. Precautions • This command is used to initialize the system. It is generally not used during system operation. However, if this command is used during system operation, it is necessary to check the operating state of the system. • • During system initialization, “UNDER-PROCESSING” is displayed on the screen. In some cases, when the operation returns to MENU, a password is necessary to access the system.

4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure

System Initialize 1. System Initialize 2. Office Data Load & System Initialize 3. Program Load & System Initialize 4. Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize Ready?: Yes/No

a. Using digit keys, “ ” key, and “ ” key, select a mode. With a mode selected a supplementary explanation corresponding to the selected mode will be displayed. When the Enter key is pressed, the operation proceeds to the next step. When the “/” key is pressed, the screen returns to MENU screen. b. Using “→” key and “←” key, select whether the processing designated by this command is to be executed or not (Yes/No). When the Enter key is pressed, the processing will be executed. With No selected, the operation returns to mode selection. ←

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 497 Revision 4.0

SPTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel
siness, tel

SPTS

Scanning of Port Status

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command displays momentarily the working status of PM (= Port Micro processor) on MG (= Module Group), Unit and Group basis. • By entering Module Group Number, you can see the following status on a Module Group basis. (BY): All Busy (ID): Idle at least one (MB): Under Make Busy Status (- -): Not mounted Note By entering Unit Number, you can obtain the following information on a circuit card basis. [On a circuit card basis] (ON): On-Line status (MB): Make Busy/Not mounted [On a circuit level basis] (I): Idle (M): Line Busy/Not programmed By entering the Group number, you will see the type of the Circuit Card (ISSUE, Type, Group Status, OnLine, MB, and not mounted). Each circuit level information (TN number, STN number, TEC, Status) appears. This information appears when the Circuit Card is in make busy status (MB key is set upward) or when the designated location has no Circuit Card.

Note:

3. Precautions • To interrupt the processing while PM status is being observed, use the following keys:
KEY FUNCTION

/ ESC 4. Related Reference Command Make Busy: Display:

All processing halts returning to menu. You can resume the processing or return to PM designation.

MBST, MBTK, MBLE, MBPM DLEN, DISS

CHAPTER 2 Page 498 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

SPTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure • Display of Scanning (by designating MG)
Scanning of Port Status Type? (l:MG/2:Unit/3:Group):1 MG Number?: 0 Group 22 23 Unit 0 DS MO Unit 1 CF Unit 2 . . ID BY Unit 3 Scanning Package Status ID : Idle MB: Make Busy BY : Busy --: Not Mounted <ESC>Abort

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 LC LC LC LC DL DL LC LC LC DL DL KT TK AI KS RS LC LC LC LC ID ID ID BY BY .. MB MB MB MB BY BY ID ID ID MB MB BY BY BY ID .. .. .. LD LC LC DL DL DL DL LC LC LC LC TA AI RS RS CF SM DT AI RS BY MB BY .. .. ID ID ID ID MB MB MB MB BY BY BY ID ID ID ID ID BY ID ID HU DT SM CF AI TK DL DL DL
MO MO

MB BY MB .. .. ID ID ID . . . . . . . . . . . .

ID ID ID MB . . . . . . . .

Type: MG Number:

Display Type (Enter 1) 1: MG Module Group Number

Type of Circuit Cards and the working status of PM in each Group appear on the display. (Refer to Table 2-12 below.)
Table 2-12 Type of Circuit Cards TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARDS FUNCTION NAME

LC TK RS AI DL CF MO DT DS

Line Circuit Trunk Register Sender Attendant Interface Digital Line Circuit 3 party conference Modem Pool Trunk Digital Interface Trunk DST

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 499 Revision 4.0

SPTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel

Display of Scanning (by designating Unit)
Scanning of Port Status Scan Type ? (1:MG 2:UNIT 3:GROUP) : 2 MG No. ? : b
0 L C PKG Kind –> Status –> Level-7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O M M O O O O M O O O O N B B N N N N B N N N N B B B B I I B I M M M M B B B B M M M M M M M B I I I I B B B M B B B B I I I I B B B B B B B B I I I I I I I I I I I B B B B I M M M M M M M M O M M O M M O O O M M M N B B N B B N N N B B B B B B B B B B B I M M M I M M M I I M B B L L I I M B M I B I I I B I B I B I B

Scanning PORT STATUS I = IDLE B = BUSY <ESC> - Abort
10 L D D L C L L C 12 L T C K 16 R S 20 R T A S K I 22

L = LOCK OUT M = MAKE BUSY

UNIT No : c
5 L L L L C C C C

Display Type (Enter 2) 2: Unit Note Unit Number: Unit Number Type: The status of Circuit Cards in each Unit can be displayed.
Note:

The entire PIM (two units) will display.

CHAPTER 2 Page 500 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

SPTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel

Display of Scanning (by designating Group)

Scanning of Port Status SCAN TYPE ? (1:MG 2: UNIT 3:GROUP) : 3 MG No. ? : d SP No. : 0100 TN 1 1 2 2 5 5 7 15 STN 2400 2410 2415 2420 2431 2444 2451 2460 UNIT No. ?: e ISSUE: 01 GROUP No. ? : f KIND OF PACKAGE:

Scanning

<ESC? - Abort L C O N I B B L M B I B 16LC ON LINE IDLE BUSY BUSY LOCK OUT MAKE BUSY BUSY IDLE BUSY

Level - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PACKAGE STATUS: TEC (TELEPHONE CLASS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 2=BP : 2=BP : 1=DP (10PPS) : 3=DP/PB :

Display Type (Enter 3) 3: Group MG Number: Module Group Number Unit Number: Unit Number Group Number: Group Number Type: The Issue and Type of Circuit Cards, the status of the Group, Terminal data of each circuits and their status appear on the display.
Note:

Unassigned ports are displayed as “space.”

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 2 Page 501 Revision 4.0

SPTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel

Display of Scanning (by designating Group-Trunk)

Scanning of Port Status SCAN TYPE ? : (1:MG 2:UNIT 3:GROUP) : 3 MG No. ? : D SP No. : 0100 RT Level- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UNIT NO. ?: e ISSUE : 01 TK GROUP No. ? : f : : PACKAGE STATUS : TCL (TRUNK CLASS) : : : : : 1 = DDD LINE : 2 = FX LINE : 3 = WATS LINE : 10 = DICTATION TRUNK : KIND OF PACKAGE

Scanning

<ESC> - Abort T O O N 4COT ON LINE

1 2 3 4

15 20 22 25

M B I B

MAKE BUSY BUSY IDLE BUSY

Type: Display Type (Enter 3) MG Number: Module Group Number Unit Number: Unit Number Group Number: Group Number The issue and Type of Circuit Cards, the status of the group, the terminal data of each circuits (= level) and their status are appeared.
Note:

Unassigned ports are displayed as “space.”

CHAPTER 2 Page 502 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

4. Make busy and lockout status do not belong to idle status nor to busy status. Function This command displays the designated trunk status (busy/idle) at predetermined intervals. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Precautions • When you want to interrupt the processing while trunk status is being observed. you can use the following keys. tel SRTS Scanning of Route Status 1. Hotel siness. the following keys are effective. (maximum 15 routes) 3.0 . KEY FUNCTION / ESC • • • All processing halts. This takes you out of the command and returns you to the Main menu. Delete data at the cursor location. Any route status does not appear when the number of trunking in the designated route is 0. KEY FUNCTION ESC INSERT DELETE Stop entering the data before reaching 15 routes. While entering route number which is to be observed. You can resume the processing or return to route designation. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 503 Revision 4.SRTS CM0-11 Business. Insert additional data at the cursor location.

“Stop display? (0: stop. the designated route status (Number of trunks. 0: Return to Display of Route Observation Entry 1: Route Observation Status restarts On the screen. Hotel 5. press ESC. at one minute interval. Entry Procedure • Display of Route Observation Entry Display Route Number? (Max 15) RT Number: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 1 2 3 4 5 6: 6 7: 7 8: 8 <ESC>-Input Data End <INS>-Insert <DEL>-Delete Input data is correct? (Y/N): Y Print out Required? (Y/N): Y Checking Trunk Configuration (XXX) RT Number: Observed Route Number Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Confirmation of Observed Route Number Trunk Configuration: XXX= Trunk Number • Display of Route Observation Status Route Status RT/Number of Trunk 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5/ 6/ 7/ 15 20 16 1 18 30 22 Time10:00 Time10:05 Idle Busy Idle Busy 10 5 10 5 Time10:10 Idle Busy Time10:15 Idle Busy Scanning Time10:20 Idle Busy RT: Route Number Number of Trunk: Number of Trunks in each Route Time: Sampling Time Idle: Number of idle trunks Busy: Number of busy trunks • To return to the display (1) while Route Status is on the screen.SRTS CM0-11 Business. 1: continue)” displays. idle trunks and busy trunks) is displayed with time indication.0 . ND-45687 (E) Note: CHAPTER 2 Page 504 Revision 4.

Route Traffic. Route Traffic 3. DTF3. Selection of drive (FDD): A B set OK? Yes/No ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 505 Revision 4. Precautions • The following types of traffic measurement can be backed up: a. • Terminal Traffic Route Traffic Station Peg Count ATT Peg Count Route Peg Count MS-DOS formatted FDs are required.Terminal Traffic 2. DTF2. b. Function This command is used to back up traffic data which has been stored on the hard disk of the MAT onto a floppy disk on the basis of type of traffic measurement data such as Terminal Traffic.0 . ATT Peg Count 5. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. e. 3. ATT Peg Count and Route Peg Count.TDBU CM0-03 Business. d. PTF1 ATRF Traffic Data Back Up Selection of back up data:1. Related Reference Command Display: Assignment: 5. Station Peg Count 4. Route Peg Count Please insert floppy disk. Hotel TDBU Traffic Data Back Up 1. Station Peg Count. 4. Entry Procedure DTF1. c.

Function • This command causes the CPU to execute line tests and displays the results of the tests performed. the results of the tests can be known in about 500 msec. Test as to whether a telephone set is connected to the line being tested. TEST ITEM CONTENT OF TEST • Ground Test (GT) 1 False Cross and Ground Test (FCG) Continuity Test (CON) Test as to whether ground exists on either A wire or B wire. Hotel siness. the test result becomes invalid. the three kinds of tests shown in Table 2-13 below are executed in sequence in the time periods shown in Figure 2-7. the test result becomes invalid. Table 2-13 Kind of Tests ITEM No. 2 3 Command Input START 0-133 ms GT TEST 133 ms GT RESULT FCG TEST 133 ms FCG RESULT CON TEST 133 ms CON RESULT 400-532 msec Figure 2-7 Line Test Sequence CHAPTER 2 Page 506 Revision 4. If ground has been detected at less than 25 Ω resistance. the test result becomes invalid. tel TSTL Test Station Line 1. Figure 2-8 shows the functional block diagram. As shown in Figure 2-7. Test as to whether -48 V exists on either A wire or B wire.0 ND-45687 (E) . If a telephone set is connected to the line via more than 10 Ω resistance. by Test Scan Order given by the CPU. In accordance with the Line Test Start Order given from the CPU.TSTL CM0-03 Business. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. If -48 V via less than 25 Ω resistance has been detected.

4. Hotel TEL LC LTST LTST CON CR CON CR DETECT CKT.0 . and the test ending station number must be a higher number than the test starting station number. refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8. If tests are to be executed for a single station. G -48V FCG Figure 2-8 Functional Block Diagram of TSTL 3. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 507 Revision 4. GT RESULT FCG RESULT LINE TEST START SEQUENCE CKT.TSTL CM0-03 Business. For the line test sequence and the functional block diagram. respectively. the station to be tested must be entered as both the starting and ending station number. LTST (PH-M16) CON RESULT OK/NG CON RELAY CONTROL FCG LTST -48 V/G DETECT CKT. Precautions • • • The starting and ending test station numbers must consist of the same number of digits.

Entry Procedure Test Station Line TN:1 STN:3111 TO 3113 CON: OK GT:OK FCG:OK TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]: Station Number a: First Station Number b: Last Station Number When only one station number is to be tested.0 ND-45687 (E) . Hotel 5. the first station number [a] and the last station number [b] are the same. CHAPTER 2 Page 508 Revision 4.TSTL CM0-03 Business. GT: FCG: CON: Ground Test (OK/NG) False Cross and Ground Test (OK/NG) Continuity Test (OK/NG) These parameters are automatically displayed after the test has ended.

Function This command is used to test the operation of trunk routes (OGT. Assignment of Trunk Test data for this command. (The LTST can only send PB signal. 4. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 509 Revision 4. Precautions • The following must be assigned before using this command.0 . The ATTD command is used to set the Trunk Test Data. b.TTLC CM0-03 Business.) Other commands cannot execute during waiting for start time on TYPE = 2. its test result is not printed out. This trunk test can only be used for trunks which can receive PB. 3. a. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Hotel siness. etc. tel TTLC Test Trunk Line Connection 1.). BWT. • • • Assignment of Individual Trunk Access service. If the designated trunk is not assigned. using the LTST.

START TIME initially displays the same time as PRESENT TIME.) 2: Schedule Execution [a]TO[b]: Range of Routes a: First Route Number b: Last Route Number CHAPTER 2 Page 510 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Entry Procedure • For Immediate Execution TYPE:1 RT:1 TK:1 TO:10 TO:2 RESULT: 2-1 CONNECTION OK! While the test is in progress.TTLC CM0-03 Business. Test Type (Enter 1.) 1: Immediate Execution RT: [a]TO[b]: Range of Routes a: Start Route Number b: Last Route Number TK: [c]TO[d]: Range of Trunks c: Start Trunk Number d: Last Trunk Number RESULT [e] to [f]: Tested Route & Trunk e: RT at the end of test f: TK at the end of test TYPE: • For Schedule Execution TYPE:2 RT:1 TO:10 TK:1 TO:2 RESULT: 2-1 CONNECTION OK! START TIME: xx:xx PRESENT TIME: xx:xx READY? While the test is in progress. Change the START TIME as needed.) TYPE: RT: Test Type (Enter 2. (WAITING flashes until the clock reaches the specified start time. Hotel 5. the Route and Trunk Number of the trunk which was last tested are displayed. the Route and Trunk Number of the trunk which was last tested are displayed.

Hotel TK: [c]TO[d]: Range of Trunks c: First Trunk Number d: Last Trunk Number RESULT [e] to [f]: Tested Route & Trunk e: RT at the end of test f: TK at the end of test CONNECTION OK!: Processing completed correctly. Note: One of the followings message is printed out when the status code is “FF”in CONNECTION NG. PROCESSING ERROR: Test processing has failed. Contents output through printer. Refer to the following table. (Refer to message following and printed out message. REGISTER is busy. Test processing error has occurred. Designated route number is incorrect. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 511 Revision 4. SENDER is busy.TTLC CM0-03 Business. MB switch is ON or LTST is not active.) The test result of the trunk displayed in parameter RESULT is automatically displayed. TRUNKS IS NOT ASSIGNED: Designated trunk is not assigned. Designated trunk is busy. XX indicates aborted status. Charging is impossible Origination is restricted. CODE (XX) MEANING 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 15 FF Note Test function of subscriber is invalid. Designated trunk number is incorrect for Hooking. LTST PKG ERROR: LTST Circuit Card is not mounted. CONNECTION NG (XX): Processing is aborted. • Trunk test was not executed • Internal parameter error • Last order is being executed. Designated trunk number is incorrect.0 . Designated trunk is busy for Hooking. Inter-digit is time over at sending dial code.

• Time out because test tone response has not been assigned in ATTD.0 ND-45687 (E) . (Illegal response) RECEIVE TEST TONE: Test Tone is received. LIST BUSY: STA connected to LTST is busy.TTLC CM0-03 Business. RECEIVE RBT: Ring Back Tone is received. DIAL FORMAT NG: Dialing format is incorrect. TRUNK BUSY/MAKE BUSY: Designated trunk has been made busy. CHAPTER 2 Page 512 Revision 4. NO RESPONSE: There is no response. Hotel LTST NOT ASSIGNED: LTST is not assigned. ROUTE NOT ASSIGNED: Designated route is not assigned. (Illegal response) PB IS SENDING: PB signal is being sent. LTST MAKE BUSY: STA connected to LTST has been made busy. and test cannot be executed. LTST PKG BUSY: LTST is being used in another test. (Illegal response) RECEIVE DIAL TONE: Dial Tone is received. TEST DATA NOT ASSIGNED: Trunk test data for the route is not assigned in the ATTD command. • LTST is busy under illegal condition. SENDING HOWLER: Howler is being sent. • Time out with no answer.

6100 version software or later must be installed in the system. 4. Hotel XATM X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis 1. Related Reference Command AIOC ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 513 Revision 4. The ATM module must be connected with the PBX. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command is used for readout of the Cell Traffic information on the following circuit cards: • • PA-SC40 (CLAD) PA-SC41 (CIFP) 3. Precautions • • • This command is used for Business system only.XATM CM0-10 Business.0 .

: XXXXXXXXXX Number of receive cell. VPI: Virtual Path Identifier VCI: Virtual Circuit Identifier CHAPTER 2 Page 514 Revision 4.TYPE: “CLAD” or “CIFP” is displayed according to LENS information. Read number of receive cell: “Yes”: Reads out the number of received cell.0 ND-45687 (E) . : XXXXX Number of scrap cell by SNP error. : XXXXX Number of SN correction cell by SNP error. : XXXXX PKG-TYPE : CLAD Read number of send cell : YES /NO Read number of receive cell : YES /NO Read error counter : YES /NO VPI :XXX VCI :XXXX READY? Y 1: LENS: CELL Monitoring Assign “1” only. Read error counter: “Yes”: Reads out the error counter. Read number of send cell: “Yes”: Reads out the number of send cell. : XXXXX Number of scrap cell by SN missing detection. Entry Procedure • When the CLAD circuit card is mounted on the designated LENS: X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis 1 :CELL Monitoring LENS :XXXXX Diagnosis Results Indication Area Number of send cell.XATM CM0-10 Business. Hotel 5. : XXXXXXXXXX Number of scrap cell by cell detection of insert mistake. Line Equipment Number XX X XX Group Number (00-23) Unit Number (0-3) Module Group Number (00-07) PKG . Designation of VPI and VCI is required.

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 515 Revision 4. Line Equipment Number XX X XX Group Number (00-23) Unit Number (0-3) Module Group Number (00-07) PKG . .TYPE: “CLAD” or “CIFP” is displayed according to LENS information. : XXXXX Number of undefine cell from ATM Module. (circuit → ATM Module) : XXXXXXXXXX Number of receive cell. : XXXXX Number of mistaken cell from communication line. Read number of send cell: “Yes”: Reads out the number of send cell. Hotel • When the CIFP circuit card is mounted on the designated LENS: X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis 1 :CELL Monitoring LENS :XXXXX Diagnosis Results Indication Area Number of send cell. Read number of receive cell: “Yes”: Reads out the number of received cell.0 . XXXXX Number of mistaken cell from ATM Module: : XXXXX PKG-TYPE : CIFP Read number of send cell : YES /NO Read number of receive cell : YES /NO Read error counter : YES /NO READY? Y 1: LENS: CELL Monitoring Assign “1” only. (ATM Module → circuit) : XXXXXXXXXX Number of undefine cell from communication line.XATM CM0-10 Business. Read error counter: “Yes”: Reads out the error counter.

XHFC CM0-10 Business. If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis. this command causes its detailed data to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer. this command displays and prints the information on the fault logical drive and the number of faulty sectors. If the cleaning has not finished normally. 3. this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality. etc. Function This command is used to execute the following diagnoses: • HFC Card Diagnosis By executing a read/write check of the RAM and ROM sum check. Related Reference Command None CHAPTER 2 Page 516 Revision 4. • Floppy Disk Drive Diagnosis By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX..0 ND-45687 (E) . tel XHFC X-ray HFC [for IMG (ICS). Hotel siness. 4. MMG (ICS). Precautions • While a diagnosis is being executed. the diagnosis result is displayed. a diagnosis error is displayed or printed. and UMG (ICS)] 1. this command diagnoses the HFC card for its normality. When the diagnosis finishes. a message “In Execution” is displayed. this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality. • Hard Disk Diagnosis By executing a read/write check on the files on the hard disk of the PBX. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis.

HFC0 /1. HJFC1 HFC: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 517 Revision 4. Program Files 0. Hotel 5. HFC 0 1. Diagnosis of PKG 2. HFC0 /1. Execute read test for all files.0 . All Files 2. Diagnosis of FDD 0. Entry Procedure • HFC card diagnosis X-Ray of HFC Function: 1. Diagnosis of HD 3. IOPP loop-back test HFC: Ready?: Diagnosis Process of HFC Package: Executing FUNCTION: HFC (0/1): • Enter 1: Diagnosis of PKG 0. Area: HFC: Ready?: Yes /No Diagnosis Process of Hard Disk: Executing Diagnosis Process of HFC Package: Executing FUNCTION: AREA (1-3): Enter 2: Diagnosis of HD 1. Program File 1 0. HFC0 1. HFC1 Hard disk diagnosis X-Ray HFC Function: 1. Program File 0 3. HFC1 Yes /No Execute the following diagnosis: * RAM read/write check * ROM sum check * MINF. All Files 2. Diagnosis of HD 3. HFC1 Execute read test for hard disk file. Diagnosis of FDD 1. Diagnosis of PKG 2.XHFC CM0-10 Business.

XHFC CM0-10 Business. HFC0 /1. Diagnosis of PKG 2. HFC1 CHAPTER 2 Page 518 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Diagnosis of FDD 0. HFC 0 1. Set OK? Yes/No FUNCTION: HFC (0/1): Enter 1: Diagnosis of PKG 0. HFC1 Yes /No Execute cleaning of floppy disk drive. Hotel • Floppy disk drive diagnosis X-Ray HFC Function: 1. HFC: Ready?: Diagnosis Process of Floppy Disk Drive Please insert cleaning floppy disk. Diagnosis of HD 3.

this command causes a diagnosis error message to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer. If the cleaning has not finished normally. • Hard Disk Diagnosis By executing read/write check on the files in the hard disk of the PBX. tel XHFD X-RAY HD or FDD [for IMGx. 4. Hotel siness. this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality. 3. a diagnosis error has been found as a result of the diagnosis. a message “In Execution” is displayed. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 519 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2.XHFD CM0-10 Business. and IMGdxh] 1. Precautions • While a diagnosis is being executed. When the diagnosis finishes. the diagnosis result is displayed.0 . IMGxh. • Floppy Disk Drive Diagnosis By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX. this command causes the information of the faulty logical drive and the number of faulty sectors to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer. If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis. this command diagnoses the hard disk for its normality. Function This command is used to execute the following diagnoses.

All Files 2.0 ND-45687 (E) . Diagnosis of FDD 1.XHFD CM0-10 Business. Diagnosis of HD 2. Floppy disk drive diagnosis X-ray HD or FDD Diagnosis Function: System: Ready?: 1. Diagnosis of HD 2. Entry Procedure a. Hard disk diagnosis X-ray HD or FDD Function: Area: System: Ready?: 1. Diagnosis of FDD zero one Yes/No Execute cleaning of floppy disk drive. Diagnosis Process of Floppy Disk Drive: Executing FUNCTION: SYSTEM: Enter 2: Diagnosis of FDD zero one CHAPTER 2 Page 520 Revision 4. Hotel 5. Program File zero one Yes /No Execute read test for hard disk file. Diagnosis Process of Hard Disk: Executing FUNCTION: AREA: SYSTEM: Enter 1: Diagnosis of HD Area Designation (1-2) 1: All Files 2: Program File zero one b.

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 521 Revision 4.CHAPTER 3 HOTEL SYSTEM ASSIGNMENT COMMANDS The following Assignment Commands are used for the Hotel/Motel System only.0 . Commands which are applicable to other systems as well as to the Hotel System are documented in Chapter 2.

DLEN. SYS1 INDEX 165. 3.AACL CM3-01 Hotel tel AACL Administration Station Class Change 1. 4. Floor (FLR)). Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 1-4. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2.0 ND-45687 (E) . 18 and 23 may be assigned via this command. b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided). Route Restriction Class (RSC). ROOM CLASS and Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX). DSTN LHEN. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: AAST RAST RAST.Ground/Underground (G). 12-15. Service Feature Class (SFC). Floor Service Data is displayed only in the case of ASYD. Function This command is used to change the data assigned to an Administration Station: Telephone Equipment Class (TEC). LHST -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC CHAPTER 3 Page 522 Revision 4. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only.

TN:1 TEC:2 NXT? STN:2000 RSC:1 SFC:1 This is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). as assigned in the ASFC command. as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15).AACL CM3-01 Hotel 5. NEXT Entering Y. Entry Procedure • For general Administration Station: a. Route Restriction Class (0-15). RSC: SFC: NXT: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 523 Revision 4.0 . TN: STN: TEC: Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Note: lf stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC. Assign either “PB” in such case. and change the data of ROOM CLASS [See (b)]. TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned.

Change the data of ROOM CLASS.0 ND-45687 (E) . Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8: Not used 9: House Phone-Admin 10-15: Not used CHAPTER 3 Page 524 Revision 4.AACL CM3-01 Hotel 6. TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 WRT? TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed. ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone.

Assign either “PB” in such case. TN:1 TEC:2 NXT? STN:2000 RSC:1 SFC:1 This is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered.AACL CM3-01 Hotel • When Floor Service is provided: a. TN: STN: TEC: Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Note: If stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command. as assigned in the ASFC command. and change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)]. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15). RSC: SFC: NXT: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 525 Revision 4. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC. Route Restriction Class (0-15). TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned.0 . NEXT Entering Y.

ROOM CLASS: ANX: G: FLR: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone. TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:0 G:0 WRT? FLR:1 The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed. Change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR. Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8: Not used 9: House Phone-Admin 10-15: Not used Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127) CHAPTER 3 Page 526 Revision 4.AACL CM3-01 Hotel b.0 ND-45687 (E) .

e. When entering the Connection Status Index (Cl) information. If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system. • 4. delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determine the service which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation) 3.” or “Busy Service” must be designated by entering of the character N. If the Guest and Admin. data need only be assigned for TN = 1. use the AGNP command for assigning the Guest station numbering plan. H. Function This command is used to assign. “Normal. Related Reference Command List up: LAPD ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 527 Revision 4. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Station Number) the Station Numbering data must first be deleted before the new numbering plan data can be assigned via this command.0 . or B. Numbering are separated. the old data must be deleted before new data is assigned. This type of assignment will only function correctly is ASYD SYS-1.AANP CM3-01 Hotel tel AANP Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data 1.” “Hooking. (0/ 1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for All Tenants) Note: • • When changing any of the numbering plan data. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Index 92 is properly assigned. When a first digit of a particular numbering plan is to be deleted and the first DC (Digit Code) is already in use (i.

#) Connection Status Index N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Number of necessary Digits (1-6) Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT 0: Out of Service 1: Inservice Note: BLF is not applicable to Hotel Attendant Console. Entry Procedure Assignment of Area Code Numbering Plan Data TN:1 1st DC:5 CI:H NND:2 WRT? BLF:0 TN: 1st DC: CI: NND: BLF: Tenant Number 1st Digit Code (0-9. *.0 ND-45687 (E) . CHAPTER 3 Page 528 Revision 4.AANP CM3-01 Hotel 5.

then press the ENTER key. If a station number currently being used is to be assigned as a new number. DSTN LHEN. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: 5. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Input a number which is not currently assigned. LHST TN:1 STN:2500 NEW STN:3500 WRT? TN: STN: NEW STN: Tenant Number Old Station Number New Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 529 Revision 4. 3. Function This command is used to change a currently assigned Administration Station Number. confirm the LENS location of the circuit card (PA-16LC.AASN CM3-01 Hotel tel AASN Administration Station Number Change 1.0 . 4.) accommodating the station. When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed during assignment. Entry Procedure AAST RAST RAST. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. DLEN. delete the station first via the RAST command. etc.

i. SID = 15).e. When assigning speed calling (SRV = SSC. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Unused levels should not to be assigned. Function This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when a Special Access code or Trunk Access code has been dialed for the Administration Station. When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC. and Guest is common. 3. SID = 57). the maximum necessary digits (NND) is 5. When changing the data. (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 160 b6 = 1). the total number of digits of the access code and abbreviated digit code equals the NND.0 ND-45687 (E) . After assigning Split Access (SRV = SSC. the maximum necessary digits NND is 15. SID = 63). the number must first be deleted in the ASPS. SID = 42). Note: If the numbering plan for Admi. When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRV = SSC. After assigning Floor Service (SRV = SSC. When Split Access data is to be deleted. Precautions • • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. the ACC equals the number of necessary digits (NND). When Floor Service data is to be deleted.: ACC for speed calling = 1 digit Abbreviated digit codes = 00-99 (2 digits) Total Number of Necessary Digits (NND) is 3. Split Access data must be assigned in the ASPS command. the maximum necessary digits (NND) is 8. SID = 17). SID = 56). SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account Code (SRV = SSC. this command is used to assign the guest numbering plan as well. When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC. The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command. SID = 60). the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned. When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC. • • • • • • CHAPTER 3 Page 530 Revision 4. the number must first be deleted in the ASPF.AASP CM3-01 Hotel tel AASP Assignment of Administration Special Access Code 1. Floor Service data must be assigned in the ASPF command.

Cancel ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 531 Revision 4. Entry 9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C. Entry Procedure • For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36. TN: ACC: CI: SRV: NND: SID: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service: (Enter SSC./Tie).AASP CM3-01 Hotel 4. Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C. 56. and 57) TN:1 ACC:10 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:15 NND:2 WRT? The NDD parameter is displayed only when required by SID. Related Reference Command List up: LASP -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5.0 . When displayed.O. Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back.) 1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back. 56./Tie). enter the data.O.) SSC: Service Code Number of Necessary Digit (1-15) Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36. 57.

Cancel Do Not Disturb. Entry Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O. Entry (via Guest Station) Do Not Disturb. Cancel Not used Call Pickup Direct Hotel Service Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Dial Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Dial Access to Lock Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) Last Number Call Not used Faulty Trunk Report Not used Automatic Wake Up Call. Group. Entry OG Trunk Queuing.AASP CM3-01 Hotel 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22-27: 28: 29: 30-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58-59: 60: 61: 62: 63: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C./ Tie). Access Not used Call Forwarding-I’m Here. Entry Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O.O.0 ND-45687 (E) . Cancel (via Guest Station) Not used Not used Floor Service Split Access Not used Attendant Manual Override Call Park Access Code Call Park Local Retrieval Code Call Park Remote Retrieval Code CHAPTER 3 Page 532 Revision 4./ Tie)./Tie). Cancel Group Announcement. Cancel Speed Calling-Station. Entry Automatic Wake Up Call. Entry Speed Calling-System. Cancel Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C. Entry Group Announcement.O. Entry Call Forwarding-I’m Here. Access TAS Answer Individual Trunk Access Not used OG Trunk Queuing./Tie). Cancel Speed Calling-Station.

Cancel. Same Special Code 34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC. Boss/Secretary Calling 35-37: Not used ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 533 Revision 4.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 36.AASP CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSC.0 .) Hotel Service Hotel Service Code 1: To be cleaned without ID Code 2: Cleaning Completed without ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID 21-24: Not used 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-1 26: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2 27: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-3 28: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-4 29: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-5 30: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-6 31: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-7 32: Not used 33: Automatic Wake Up Setting. SID = 36: (Hotel/Motel Service) TN:1 ACC:20 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:36 STATE:1 WRT? TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: 36: STATE: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.

b3 = 1) • For SRV = SSC. Station) Not used 2nd Wake-Up Call (Automatic) Set 2nd Wake-Up Call (Semi-Automatic) Set 2nd Wake-Up Call Cancel Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Not used Dummy Number STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided. SID = 56 (Floor Service) TN:1 ACC:30 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:56NO:1 TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: NO: Note: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.AASP CM3-01 Hotel 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56-62: 63: Note: Note: Automatic Wake-Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Automatic Wake-Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval Direct Data Entry-Station (via Guest Station) Alert Service Start (Special Admin.) 56: Floor Service Kind of Assignment Number (0-15) This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPF. b3 = 0) STATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided. Station) Alert Service Stop (Special Admin. CHAPTER 3 Page 534 Revision 4.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 56. (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164.0 ND-45687 (E) . (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164.

The data to be assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. This parameter serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.0 .) 57: Split Access (a) Enter the data for parameters NO and KIND. RSC. NO:1 KIND:0 WRT? NO: This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual Access.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 57. 0: Class: assign this if the access code is to be shared between Guest and Aministration with no correspondence to TN. SID = 57 (Split Access): a. This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPS.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC. rests. and/or sifts. TN:1 ACC: 30 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:57 TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N. 2: RSC: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified RSCs. or SFC. Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate tons.AASP CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSC. Enter the data for parameter TN through SID. 3: SFC: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified SFCs. or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as Administration or Guest. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 535 Revision 4. Note: KIND (0-3): This parameter specifies the Split Access Parameter Classification. 1: TN: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified TNs.

Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station).) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56. Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand. Set (for Admin) 55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON. Entry 47: Line Load Control. Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station).0 .AASP CM3-01 Hotel • For SSCA (Other than SID = 56): TN:1 CI:N SID:46 WRT? ACC:10 SRV:SSCA TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SIDA: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA. Service 57-65: Not used 66: Multi Channel Recording (REC) 67: Not used 68: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY) 69-84: Not used 85: Dial Access to Unlock 86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station). Cancel (for Admin) 56: Guest/Admin. Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand. Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD). Cancel 52: Not used 53: Boss-Secretary Override 54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON. Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD). Entry 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station).) 1-40: Not used 41: Voice Call 42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control. Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station). Cancel 92-95: Not used 96: Follow Me Phone 97: Call Hold Conference 98-105: Not used 106: Call Return 107-255: Not used ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 536 Revision 4. Entry 87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station).

enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP. SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin.) 56: (Guest/Admin. PAGA or PAGC.0 .) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A: (Enter 56. Admin. 1: Guest A/G: • For SRV = OGC. PAGC: TN:1 CI:N RT:2 ACC:9 SRV:OGC TN: ACC: CI: SRV: RT: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter OGC. PAGA. Service) This Parameter specifies the Admin.) OGC: Outgoing Call PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 537 Revision 4.AASP CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSCA. Service): TN:1 CI:N SIDA:56 WRT? ACC:15 SRV:SSCA PN0:1 A/G:A TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SIDA: PNO (1-15): Note: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA./Guest Numbering Parameter Classification For this parameter./Guest 0: Admin.

(If RETURN key is pressed after entering a RT No. of the alternate routes one after another.0 ND-45687 (E) .AASP CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = OGCA: TN:1 CI:N CNT:3 WRT? ACC:25 SRV:OGCA 3RT:5 Following entry of CNT.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection (Flag Route) LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number Second Dial Tone (0/1) 0: – 1: Second Dial Tone Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization code) CHAPTER 3 Page 538 Revision 4. the number ahead of RT increases by one and then next RT No.. can be entered. enter Route No. TN: ACC: CI: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA. LCRS: TN:1 CI:N RT:2 ACC:15 SRV:LCR 2nd DT:1 AH:0 TN: ACC: CI: SRV: RT: 2nd DT: AH: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.) “WRT?” appears on the display after specifying all alternative routes in the preceding parameter.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) Number of advanced route Route Number SRV: CNT: RT: • For SRV = LCR.

) ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Number (2-15) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 539 Revision 4.0 .) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from Access code • For SRV = ANNC: TN:1 CI:N EQP:3 ACC:19 SRV:ANNC TN: ACC: CI: SRV: EQP: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.AASP CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = UNIF: TN:1 CI:N SKIP:0 ACC:40 SRV:UNIF TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SKIP: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF.

When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message appears during station assignment. Precautions • • • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. When assigning the stations for Floor Service. • 4. DLEN. b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided)”. SYSl. 3. The RAST command is used to delete or display this data. LHST -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC CHAPTER 3 Page 540 Revision 4. etc. confirm that the circuit card is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) assigned for the station.AAST CM3-01 Hotel tel AAST Assignment of Administration Station Data 1. If the circuit card (PA-16LC. Press the ENTER key after confirming the location. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction Data Command (ARSC).) on which the station is assigned is made busy. the data must have been assigned as “ASYD. Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 1-4. 12-15. DSTN AACL. INDEX 165. RSC = 0 cannot be assigned here because it is reserved for an attendant. AASN LHEN.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Related Reference Command Deletion: Display: Change: (Part) List up: RAST RAST. The DSTN command can be used to display this data as well. 18 and 23 may be assigned via this command. The Service Feature Class (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Class Command (ASFC). Function This command is used to assign Administration Station data. all other station circuits on that circuit card will also be made busy.

AAST CM3-01 Hotel -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display: 5. as assigned in the ARSC command. as assigned in the ASFC command. Tenant Equipment Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. STN:2000 TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:2 NXT? TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC:1SFC:1 NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Entry Procedure • MBLE. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC. DMBS For general Administration station: a. MBST DMBL. (See (b)). Assign either “PB” in such case. Service Feature Class (0-15).0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 541 Revision 4. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). NEXT Enter Y and enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS. RSC: SFC: NXT: Note: If stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command.

0 ND-45687 (E) . ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone. Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used CHAPTER 3 Page 542 Revision 4.AAST CM3-01 Hotel b. TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 WRT? The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed. Enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS.

TN:1 STN:3333 LENS:001010 TEC:2 NXT? RSC:1 SFC:1 NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. NEXT Enter Y.0 .AAST CM3-01 Hotel • When Floor Service is provided: a. TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: NXT: Note: If stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command. as assigned in the ARSC command. and enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b)]. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign either “PB” in such case. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 543 Revision 4. as assigned in the ASFC command. Service Feature Class (0-15). Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.

0 ND-45687 (E) . ROOM CLASS: ANX: G: FLR: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone.AAST CM3-01 Hotel b. Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127) CHAPTER 3 Page 544 Revision 4. TN:1 STN:3333 FLR:10 ROOM CLASS:0 ANX:0 G:0 WRT? The TN and the STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed. Enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR.

Data Link Interface Trunk is a dummy trunk.0 . Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2.ADLI CM3-02 Hotel ADLI Assignment DLINT Package 1. 3. delete and display the LENS information for Data Link Interface Trunk (DLINT) in the case of Fixed Connection. 4. Entry Procedure LTRK Assignment DLINT Package RT:919 TK:1 LENS:003080 WRT? RT: TK: LENS: Intra-office Route Number (919) Trunk Number (1-32) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 545 Revision 4. Function This command is used to assign. The Route Number of Data Link Interface Trunk is 919. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Related Reference Command List up: 5.

Night assignment should be input twice: once for the period before midnight. Refer to the example below for clarification: Example: If the time period from 9:00 p.0 ND-45687 (E) . Because midnight is assigned as hour 00:00. if the day and night tables are used. If the same time is specified for both Start and End. to 7:00 a. and once for the period after midnight.ADNR CM3-02 Hotel tel ADNR Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction 1. Precautions • • • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only.m. Related Reference Command None 5. the restriction period will be 10 minutes. Function This command is used to assign the specific Start and End times pertaining to Day/Night Restriction or to display the Day/Night Restriction classification of a specific time.m. CHAPTER 3 Page 546 Revision 4. is to be assigned as Night. the assignment must be input as follows: 00:00-07:00 = Night 07:10-20:50 = Day 21:00-23:50 = Night 4. Restriction is assigned in military time (24 hour cycle) in units of 10 minutes. When Data “1” is assigned for bit 6 of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 170. ASSIGN/CHECK:A ASSIGN/ CHECK: Enter A when entering the data. Day/Night Connection Restriction will take place regardless of ATTCON night mode changeover. End time must not be earlier than Start time. The ARSC command may be affected. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. 3. Set “ASSIGN” mode. Entry Procedure • When data are assigned anew: a.

ASSIGN/CHECK:C ASSIGN/ CHECK: b. RSC:1 TN:1 D/N:D START TIME:0800 END TIME: 1900 WRT? TN: D/N: RSC: Note: Tenant Number Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Route Restriction Class (0-15) Remember that RSC11 through 15 are used in the “Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change” service. The Restriction Class (Day or Night) of the time specified in the CHECK TIME parameter. START TIME: Restriction Start Time END TIME: Restriction End Time • For checking (displaying) the data: a. Enter the data for each parameter. Tenant Number Route Restriction Class (0-15) The specific time to be checked when displaying D/N Restriction data.0 . RSC: 1 CHECK TIME: 1200 CLASS: DAY Day or Night is displayed. Set “CHECK” mode. Enter the data necessary for displaying the data. TN: RSC: CHECK TIME: CLASS: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 547 Revision 4.ADNR CM3-02 Hotel b. TN: 1 Enter “C” when causing the data to be checked (displayed).

0 ND-45687 (E) . These ten numbers correspond to values 1 to 10 for the DSS parameter of this command. delete and display the called number data corresponding to the Hotel Attendant Console’s Direct Station Select (DSS) keys.ADSS CM3-02 Hotel tel ADSS Assignment of Direct Station Select Data 1. Precautions • • • • This command is used for Hotel System only. The DSS function is only valid for the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console and may not be assigned for Business System Consoles. Function This command is used to assign. DSS Function Key Numbers are 1 to 10. This feature must be enabled in ASYD SYS1 INDEX 161 BIT5 in order to operate. Related Reference Command List up: 5. 4. Entry Procedure LDSS Assignment of Direct Station Select Data ATN: 1 DC: 3000 WRT? DSS:1 ATN: DSS: DC: Attendant Number DSS Key Number (1-10) Called Number (1-14 digits) CHAPTER 3 Page 548 Revision 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. 3.

Always assign data “00”. Precautions • • • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. The LEVEL of LENS-B must be 4-7. Entry Procedure LFXC Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System LENS-A:003083 LENS-B:013084 WRT? EAD-A:00 EAD-B:00 LENS-A: LENS-B: EAD-A: EAD-B: Line Equipment Number of Data Link Interface Trunk Line Equipment Number of Dterm Always assign data “00”. When assigning data by this command. the data must have already been assigned by command ADLI. LENS-A should not be smaller than LENS-B.AFXC CM3-02 Hotel tel AFXC Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System 1. The message of EXECUTING is displayed while a fixed connection processing is being executed. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 549 Revision 4. Function This command is used to assign. delete and display the data path between the Data Link Interface Trunk (DLINT) and Dterm pertaining to Fixed Connection.0 . the data must be assigned to ASYD SYS1 INDEX 60 b4 = 1 (Fixed Connection Service is provided). 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. 3. When assigning data by this command.

Floor (FLR)). Floor Service Data is displayed only in the case of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165 b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided). ROOM CLASS and Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX). 3. STN:2000 RSC:1 SFC:1 NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Service Feature Class (SFC). TN:1 TEC:2 NXT? Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC. Route Restriction Class (RSC). Function This command is used to change the data assigned to a Guest Station: Telephone Equipment Class (TEC). and 10 may be assigned via this command.0 ND-45687 (E) . DLEN. Entry Procedure • For general Guest Station: a. Tenant Number Station Number TN: STN: CHAPTER 3 Page 550 Revision 4. DSTN LHEN. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: AGST RGST RGST.AGCL CM3-01 Hotel tel AGCL Guest Station Class Change 1. 4. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Ground/Underground (G). LHST -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC 5. Precautions • • Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 5-8.

0 . Route Restriction Class.AGCL CM3-01 Hotel LENS: TEC: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used Note: When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command. ROOM CLASS: 1 WRT? ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) Example: 1: Single Room 2: Twin Room ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 551 Revision 4. STN:2000 The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed. as assigned in ASFC. Assign “PB” in such case. RSC: SFC: NXT: b. NEXT Enter Y. [See (b)]. and change the data of ROOM CLASS. TN:1 Change the data of ROOM CLASS. TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class.

and change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)]. Assign “PB” in such case. Route Restriction Class.0 ND-45687 (E) . Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used TN: STN: LENS: TEC: Note: When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command.AGCL CM3-01 Hotel • When Floor Service is provided: a. as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class. as assigned in ASFC. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). TN:1 STN:2000 LENS:O01010 TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1 NXT? NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. RSC: SFC: NXT: CHAPTER 3 Page 552 Revision 4. Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC. NEXT Enter “Y”.

Change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR. FLR:1 TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:O G:O WRT? ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) Example: 1: Single Room 2: Twin Room ANX: G: Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127) FLR: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 553 Revision 4. The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed.AGCL CM3-01 Hotel b.0 .

those station numbers must first be deleted by the RGST command before the 1st DC can be deleted in this command.AGNP CM3-01 Hotel tel AGNP Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data 1. access codes. “Hooking”. delete the data pertaining to the number before deleting the 1st DC by this command. which have already been assigned in the system. H. Related Reference Command List up: LGNP CHAPTER 3 Page 554 Revision 4. When deleting a 1st Digit Code (lST DC) pertaining to station numbers. For example. This command is only used to set up the Numbering Plan for Guest Stations. AANP is used. 3. if “7” is the 1st DC of Guest station numbers of Level “7”. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. etc. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only. or B. data need only be assigned for TN = 1. Function This command is used to assign. or “Busy Service” must be designated by entry of the character N. 4. (0/ 1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for all Tenants) • Note: • • • Previous data should be deleted prior to changing the numbering plan data. Numbering Plans are separated.0 ND-45687 (E) . This type of assignment will only function correctly if ASYD SYS-1. delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determine the service which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation). If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system. Index 92 is properly assigned. To Assign Admi. Stations or Guest Stations if the Numbering Plans are common. “Normal”. When entering the Connection Status Index (CI) information. if the Guest and Admi.

Entry Procedure TN:1 CI:N NND:3 WRT? 1ST DC:1 BLF:O TN: 1ST DC: CI: NND: BLF: Tenant Number 1st Digit Code (0-9.0 . ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 555 Revision 4. #) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Number of Necessary Digits (1-6) Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT 0: Out of Service 1: In service Note: BLF is not applicable to Hotel/Motel Attendant Console. *.AGNP CM3-01 Hotel 5.

0 ND-45687 (E) . Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. delete the station first via the RGST command. 3. confirm the LENS location of the circuit card (PA-16LC. etc.AGSN CM3-01 Hotel tel AGSN Guest Station Number Change 1. Input a number which is not currently assigned. When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed during assignment. Entry Procedure AGST RGST RGST. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: 5. Function This command is used to change a currently assigned Guest Station Number.) accommodating the station. LHST Guest Station Number Change TN: 1 STN:4000 NEW STN:5000 WRT? TN: STN: NEW STN: Tenant Number Old Station Number New Station Number CHAPTER 3 Page 556 Revision 4. then press the ENTER key. DLEN. DSTN LHEN. 4. If a station number currently being used is to be assigned as a new number. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2.

When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC. the maximum number of necessary digits (NND) is 5. SID = 42). Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Split Access data must be assigned in the ASPS command. SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account Code (SRV = SSC.AGSP CM3-01 Hotel tel AGSP Assignment of Guest Special Access Code 1. SID = 63). When assigning speed calling (SRV = SSC. After assigning Floor Service (SRV = SSC. the maximum number of necessary digits (NND) is 8. and Guest. When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRV = SSC. 3. The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command.e. the number must first be deleted in the ASPF. Unused levels should not to be assigned. SID = 56).: ACC for speed calling = 1 digit Abbreviated digit codes = 00-99 (2 digits) Total Number of Necessary Digits (NND) is 3 When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 557 Revision 4. When Split Access data is to be deleted the number must first be deleted in the ASPS command. the maximum number of necessary digits NND is 15.0 . SID = 60). SID = 57). When Floor Service data is to be deleted. Floor Service data must be assigned in the ASPF command. This command is only used when the data in ASYD SYS1 INDEX 160 b1 is assigned as “1” for separate numbering plan for Admi. i. After assigning Split Access (SRV = SSC. Precautions • • • • • • • • • • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. SID = 17). the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned. the ACC equals the number of necessary digits (NND). Function This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when a Special Access code or Trunk Access code has been dialed for the Guest Station. When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC. SID = 15). the total number of digits of the access code and abbreviated digit code equals the NND. When changing the data.

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

4. Related Reference Command List up: LGSP

-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5. Entry Procedure • For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56 and 57):
TN:1 CI:N SID:15 WRT? ACC:10 SRV:SSC NDD:2

This parameter is displayed only when required by SID. When it displays, enter the data.

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: NND: SID:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Number of Necessary Digit (1-15) Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56, 57.) 1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back; Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back; Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Entry 9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Cancel
ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 558 Revision 4.0

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58-59: 60: 61: 62: 63:

Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Entry Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Cancel Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Entry Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Cancel Speed Calling-Station; Entry Speed Calling-System; Access TAS Answer Individual Trunk Access Not used OG Trunk Queuing; Entry OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access Not used Call Pickup Direct Hotel/Motel Service Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Dial Authorization Code/Forced Account Code Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) Last Number Call Not used Faulty Trunk Report Not used Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel Group Announcement; Entry Group Announcement; Cancel Do Not Disturb; Entry Do Not Disturb; Cancel Not used Not used Floor Service Split Access Not used Attendant Manual Override Call Park Access Code Call Park Local Retrieval Code Call Park Remote Retrieval Code

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 559 Revision 4.0

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

For SRV = SSC, SID = 36 (Hotel Service):
TN:1 CI:N SID:36 ACC:20 SRV:SSC STATE:1

WRT?

TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: STATE:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 36.) 36: Hotel Service Hotel Service Code (SID = 36) 1: To be cleaned without ID Code 2: Cleaning Completed without No ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without No ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID Code 21-24: Not used 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-1 26: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2 27: Maid Dial Answer Back With ID Code-3 28: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-4 29: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-5 30: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-6 31: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-7 32: Not used 33: Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code 34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling
ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 560 Revision 4.0

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

35-37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47-50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56-62: 63:
Note:

Not used Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval Direct Data Entry-STA Alert Service Start (Special Admin. Station) Alert Service Stop (Special Admin. Station) Not used Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Not Used Dummy Number

STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3 = 0) STATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3 = 1)

For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service)
TN = 1 CI:N SID:56 ACC = 30 SRV:SSC NO:1

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: SID: NO:
Note:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 56.) 56: Floor Service Kind of Assignment Number (0-15)

This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPF.

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 561 Revision 4.0

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

For SRV = SSC, SID = 57 (Split Access): a.
TN:1 CI:N SID:57

Enter the data for parameters TN through SID.
ACC:15 SRV:SSC

TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: b.
NO:1

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 57.) 57: Split Access

Enter the data for parameters NO and KIND.
KIND:0

WRT?

NO:

This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual Access. This parameter serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPS.

Note:

KIND (0-3):

This parameter specifies the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data to be assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate TNs, RSCs, and/or SFCs, or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as Administration or Guest. 0: Class: assign this if the access code is to be separated between Guest and Administration with no correspondence to TN, RSC, or SFC. 1: TN: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified TNs. 2: RSC: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified RSCs. 3: SFC: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified SFCs.

CHAPTER 3 Page 562 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

For SRV = SSCA (Other than SIDA = 56):
TN:1 CI:N SID:50 WRT? ACC:10 SRV:SSCA

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: SIDA:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.) 1-40: Not used 41: Voice Call (D term) 42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control; Entry 47: Line Load Control; Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel 52-55: Not used 56: Guest/Admi Service 57-85: Not used 86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry 87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Entry Note 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used 96: Follow Me Phone 97-255: Not used

Note:

These indexes are used when ASYD, SYS1, Index 79, bit 2 is assigned as “1” (Split Call Forwarding is in service.).

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 563 Revision 4.0

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin. Service):
TN:1 ACC:15 CI:N SRV:SSCA SIDA:56 PN0:1 A/G:0 WRT?

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: SIDA: PNO (1-15):
Note:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index (1-255): (Enter 56.) 56: (Guest/Admin. Service) This Parameter specifies the Admin/Guest Numbering Parameter Classification

For this parameter, enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP. Admin/Guest 0: Admin 1: Guest

A/G:

For SRV = OGC, PAGA, PAGC:
TN:1 ACC:9 CI:N SRV:OGC RT:2

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV:

RT:
CHAPTER 3 Page 564 Revision 4.0

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA or PAGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call (without Route Advance) PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number
ND-45687 (E)

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

For SRV = OGCA:
TN:1 CI:N CNT:3 WRT? ACC:25 SRV:OGCA 3 RT:5

Following entry of CNT, enter Route No. of the alternate routes one after another. (If RETURN key is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases by one and then next RT No. can be entered.) “WRT?” displays after specifying all alternative routes in the preceding parameter.

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: CNT: RT: •

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (with Route Advance) Number of Routes to be entered Route Number

For SRV = LCR, LCRS:
TN:1 CI:N RT:2 ACC:15 SRV:LCR 2nd DT:1 AH:0

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV:

RT: 2nd DT: AH:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection (Flag Route) LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number Second Dial Tone (0/1 = -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization code)

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 565 Revision 4.0

AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

For SRV = UNIF:
TN:1 CI:N SKIP:0 ACC:40 SRV:UNIF

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: SKIP: •

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from Access code

For SRV = ANNC:
TN:1 CI:N EQP:3 ACC:19 SRV:ANNC

TN: ACC: CI:

SRV: EQP:

Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.) ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Number (2-15)

CHAPTER 3 Page 566 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

AGST CM3-01 Hotel
tel

AGST

Assignment of Guest Station Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign Guest Station data. The RGST command is used to delete and display this data. The DSTN command can be used to display this data as well. 3. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 5-8, 10, 12 and 18 may be assigned to Guest stations. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction Data Command (ARSC). RSC = 0 cannot be assigned because it is reserved as an outgoing Restriction Class for the attendant only. The Service Feature Class (SFC) work in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Class Command (ASFC). If the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) to which the station is assigned is made busy, all other station circuits on that circuit card will also be made busy. When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message appears during station assignment, confirm that the circuit card is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) assigned for the station. Press the ENTER key after confirming the location. When assigning the stations for Floor Service, the data must have been assigned as “ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).

• • •

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 567 Revision 4.0

AGST CM3-01 Hotel

4. Related Reference Command Deletion: Display: Change: (Part) List up: RGST RGST, DLEN, DSTN AGCL, AGSN LHEN, LHST

-Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display:

MBLE, MBST DMBL, DMBS

CHAPTER 3 Page 568 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

AGST CM3-01 Hotel

5. Entry Procedure • For general Guest Station: a.
TN:1

Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.
STN:2000

LENS:001010 TEC:5 NXT? RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11: Not used 12: D term 13-17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi Line) 19-31: Not used

TN: STN: LENS: TEC:

Note:

When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign “PB” in this case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NEXT Enter Y, and enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS [See (b)].

RSC: SFC: NXT:

ND-45687 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page 569 Revision 4.0

AGST CM3-01 Hotel

b.
TN:1

Enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS.
STN:2000

The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed.

ROOM CLASS:1 WRT?

Example:

1: Single Room 2: Twin Room

Note:

When the Dterm is used, ROOM CLASS is fixed to “15”. When Floor Service is Provided.

Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.
TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010 TEC:5 NXT? RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11: Not used 12: D term 13-17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi Line) 19-31: Not used

TN: STN: LENS: TEC:

Note:

When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign “PB” in this case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).

CHAPTER 3 Page 570 Revision 4.0

ND-45687 (E)

NEXT Enter Y. as assigned in ARSC. ROOM CLASS: (0-15) Note ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground FLR: Floor (1-127) Note: When the Dterm is used.0 .AGST CM3-01 Hotel RSC: SFC: NXT: c. TN:1 Route Restriction Class. Service Feature Class. ROOM CLASS is fixed to “15”. STN:3333 ROOM CLASS:0 ANX:0 WRT? G:0 FLR:10 The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed. and enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)]. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 571 Revision 4. as assigned in ASFC. Enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR.

data entry is not necessary. Function This command is used to set the functions of the top row of ICI (Incoming Call Identification) keys for answering incoming calls at the Hotel Attendant Console. Therefore when the default function indicated in ( ) is to be used. LHEN CHAPTER 3 Page 572 Revision 4. 3. CCSA WATS FX (NANS) 4 (BUSY) 5 EMG (TIE) 6 DND KEY NUMBER (ICPT) 3 TF 1 GST (HP) 2 OT RCL ADM LDN In the above. • This command can be executed under one of the following conditions. The ATT has been made busy by means of the MB switch on the 2ATI circuit card. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only. and their Key Numbers. The following shows the location of the keys which can be set by this command. the function indicated in each ( ) is the default function. or if the function set has been deleted.0 ND-45687 (E) . The DAY/NIGHT key on the ATT is set to the NIGHT position.AHKP CM3-02 Hotel tel AHKP Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern 1. Related Reference Commands List up: LHKP -Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK. c. a. 4. The 2ATI circuit card is not mounted or is made busy. which becomes valid if no other function has been set by this command. b. DLEN List up: LTRK.

0 . Entry Procedure Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern ATN:1 KYN:1 FUNC:1 WRT? ATN: KYN: FUNC: Attendant Number Key Number (1-6) FUNCTION CODE (1-16) 1: CAS Line 2: Not used 3: Priority Call 1 4: Priority Call 2 5: Priority Call 3 6: GST2 7: Wake-Up Call 8: Interposition Transfer 2 9-16: Not used ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 573 Revision 4.AHKP CM3-02 Hotel 5.

“the number of Guest Stations belonging to one Suite Room”. Related Reference Command Delete: List up: 5. etc.AHSU CM3-02 Hotel tel AHSU Assignment of Suite Room Station 1. Function When the system provides Suite Room Service. Branch stations are not included in the number of suite room stations. 188. The master guest station of a suite room must be assigned without exception. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. The station to be assigned as a suite room station must have already been assigned as a guest station. RHSU LHSU TN:1 TYPE:S TN: TYPE: Tenant Number Suite Room Type S: Single Suite Room D: Double Suite Room CHAPTER 3 Page 574 Revision 4. 3. A phantom number can be assigned to the master guest station of a suite room.0 ND-45687 (E) . Enter the data for parameters TN and TYPE. 189) pertaining to Suite Room Service inclusive of “Suite Room Service Provided/Not Provided”. this command is used to assign a specific guest station as a suite room station. Entry Procedure a. INDEX = 187. • • • • 4. Ensure to confirm beforehand the system data (AHSY. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only.

0 . SING PHANTOM:3000 M1:2000 S3:2003 S2:2001 S4:2003 SING PHANTOM: Phantom Number Note Ml: Master Guest Station Number S2-S4: Slave Guest Station Number Note: When a Phantom Number is not necessary.AHSU CM3-02 Hotel b. enter “****”. ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 575 Revision 4. Enter the data for parameters SING PHANTOM through S4.

Function This command is used to assign and display the Hotel System parameters. Data of Hotel System parameters must to be entered using hexadecimal numbers. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. For the contents of the Hotel System parameters. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only.AHSY CM3-01 Hotel tel AHSY Assignment of Hotel System Parameter 1. refer to the “Office Data Specification”. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LHSY Assignment of Hotel System Parameter INDEX:5 WRT? DATA:00 INDEX: DATA: Hotel System Parameter Index (0-2047) System Parameter (Hexadecimal) CHAPTER 3 Page 576 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . 4. 3.

Inter-tenant station to station connection will allowed for each RSC until it is restricted via this command. enter A. ASSIGN/CHECK:A CALLING TN:1 CALLED TN:2 RSC:1 RSC:2 LSCR ASSIGN/ CHECK: CALLING TN: When entering the data. Entry Procedure a. RSC and CALLED TN.0 . 3.ASCR CM3-02 Hotel tel ASCR Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction 1. enter C. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. RSC. Function This command is used to assign and display station to station connection restriction data based on the Route Restriction Class (RSC) of respect tenants. and when causing the data to be checked (displayed). 4. CALLED TN: RSC: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 577 Revision 4. Called Tenant Number respective Route Restriction Class (0-15). Related Reference Command List up: 5. Enter the data for parameters CALLING TN. RSC: Calling Tenant Number respective Route Restriction Class (0-15).

ASCR CM3-02 Hotel b. RES D/N:D RES:1 WRT? DIAL/ATT:A D/N: DIAL/ATT: RES: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Designates whether restriction applies to stations or attendant D: Stations A: Attendant Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed CHAPTER 3 Page 578 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . Enter the data for parameters D/N. DIAL/ATT.

6 digits) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 579 Revision 4. 4. When deleting data by this command. Function This command is used to assign.0 . the Access Code for Floor Service must be deleted in advance by the “AASP” or “AGSP” command. When assigning data by this command. When assigning data by this command. bit 7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided)” must have been assigned. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2.ASPF CM3-01 Hotel el ASPF Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data 1. Related Reference Command List up: 5. 3. Entry Procedure LSPF D/N:D TN:1 ANX:0 G:0 NO:0 FLR:1 A/G:G DC:0905 WRT? D/N: TN: ANX: G: NO: FLR: DC: Day/Night D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Annex (0-3) Ground/Under Ground 0: Ground 1: Under Ground Kind of Assignment Number (0-15) Floor (1-127) Called Number (Max. delete and display Floor Data for the Access Code of the Floor Service. the Access Code for Floor Service must have been assigned by the “AASP” or “AGSP” command. “ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165. Precautions • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only.

c.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel tel ASPS Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number 1. SID = 57) must be deleted as well. or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as Administration or Guest. SID = 57) before an access code can be assigned via this command. Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate TNs. CHAPTER 3 Page 580 Revision 4. d. This command is programmed when access codes for trunks and features and/or station numbers are to be shared between Guest and Administration stations. The relationship between “KIND” and “F” is shown below: a. but be sure to delete the this command first. Split Access must be specified in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC. For “KIND = 0 (Administration/Guest)” F = 0: Administration 1: Guest 2-15: Not used For “KIND = 1 (TN (Tenant))” F = 0: TN = 0 | | 15: TN = 15 For “KIND = 2 (RSC)” F = 0: RSC = 0 | | 15: RSC = 15 For “KIND = 3 (SFC)” F = 0: SFC = 0 | | 15: SFC = 15 • • b. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. the data assigned for the access code in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC. SID = 57). 3. The data to be assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. delete and display Split Access Data when an Access Code is Assigned for this feature in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC.0 ND-45687 (E) . When data is to be deleted in this command. RSCs. Parameters “KIND” and “F” specify the Split Access Parameter Classification. For parameter “NO”. and/or SFCs. Function This command is used to assign. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. enter the data assigned by command AASP or AGSP.

Related Reference Command List up: LSPS -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel 4. Entry Procedure • For Station Number: D/N: D NO:0 KIND:0 F:0 SRV:STN STN:2 WRT? D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: STN: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the station number being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the station numbers being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3): 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter STN.0 .) STN: Station Number Level Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 581 Revision 4.

When displayed./ Tie). Entry 9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C. Access 16: TAS Answer 17: Individual Trunk Access 18: Not used 19: OG Trunk Queuing. Entry 20: OG Trunk Queuing. D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: SID: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.O.O.0 ND-45687 (E) . Cancel 10: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C. enter the data. Cancel 12: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C. Cancel 14: Speed Calling-Station. Entry 15: Speed Calling-System.O.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36./Tie)./Tie). Entry 11: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C. Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TEC 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter SSC. Cancel CHAPTER 3 Page 582 Revision 4./Tie).O. Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back. 56.O. Entry 13: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.) 1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back./ Tie).O./Tie). 56): D/N: D NO:0 KIND:0 SRV:SSC SID:15 NND: WRT? F:0 The NDD parameter is displayed only when required by SID.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36.

Cancel Do Not Disturb.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel 21: 22-27: 28: 29: 30-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57-59: 60: 61: 62: 63: Speed Calling-Station. Group. Cancel Group Announcement. Cancel Not used Call Pickup Direct Hotel/Motel Service Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Dial Authorization Code/Forced Account Code Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) Last Number Call Not used Faulty Trunk Report Not used Automatic Wake Up Call. Access Not used Call Forwarding-I’m Here. Entry (via Guest Station) Do Not Disturb. Entry Call Forwarding-I’m Here. Entry Group Announcement. Entry Automatic Wake Up Call. Cancel (via Guest Station) Not used Not used Floor Service Not used Attendant Manual Override Call Park Access Code Call Park Local Retrieval Code Call Park Remote Retrieval Code ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 583 Revision 4.0 .

Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-5) Kind of Service: (Enter SSC. Under Repair. Clear with ID Code 23: Not Used 24: Repair Needed with ID Code 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-1 26: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2 CHAPTER 3 Page 584 Revision 4.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSC.0 ND-45687 (E) .) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 36.) 36: Hotel/Motel Service Hotel/Motel Service Code 1: To be cleaned without ID Code 2: Cleaning Completed without ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID Code 21-24: Not used 22: Use Not Allowed. SID = 36 (Hotel Service): D/N: D NO:3 KIND:0 F:0 SRV:SSC SID:36 STATE:1 WRT? D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: SID: STATE: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.

(ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164. Boss/Secretary Calling Not used Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval Direct Data Entry-STA Alert Service Start (Special Administration Station) Alert Service Stop (Special Administration Station) Not used Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Not used Dummy Number STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided. b3 = 0) STATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided. Same Special Code For Guest Station Secretary Telephone. Cancel. b3 = 1) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 585 Revision 4.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 34: 35-37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47-50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56-62: 63: Note: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-3 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-4 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-5 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-6 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-7 Not used Automatic Wake Up Setting.0 . (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164.

Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) CHAPTER 3 Page 586 Revision 4. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.0 ND-45687 (E) . SID = 56 (Floor Service): D/N: D NO:1 CI:N SID:56 WRT? KIND:0 SRV:SSC NO:1 F:0 D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: SID: NO: Note: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. • For SRV = SSCA (Other than SID = 56): D/N: D NO:1 SRV:SSC SID:50 WRT? KIND:0 F:0 D/N: NO: KIND: F: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (Enter 56.) 56: Floor Service Kind of Assignment Number (0-15) Note This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPF.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSC.

Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand. Set (for Admin) 55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON. Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand. Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD). Entry 89: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station).) SSCA: Service Code Appendix Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.) 1-40: Not used 41: Voice Call 42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control.0 . Entry 87: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station). Entry 47: Line Load Control.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel SRV: SIDA: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA. Entry 88: Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station). Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD). Cancel 91: Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station). Cancel 90: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station). Cancel 52: Not used 53: Boss/Secretary override tone 54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON. Cancel 92-95: Not used 96: Follow Me Phone 97: Call Hold Conference 98-105: Not used 106: Return Call 107-255: Not used ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 587 Revision 4. Cancel (for Admin) 56: Guest/Admin Service 57-65: Not used 66: Multi Channel Recording-DAT (Record) 67: Not used 68: Multi Channel Recording-DAT (Replay) 69-85: Not used 86: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station).

0 ND-45687 (E) . CHAPTER 3 Page 588 Revision 4.) 56: (Guest/Admi Service) This Parameter specifies the Admi/Guest Numbering Parameter classification Note For this parameter.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = SSCA. SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin Service): D/N: D NO:1 CI:N SIDA:56 WRT? KIND:0 SRV:SSCA PNO:1 A/G:0 F:0 D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: SIDA: PNO (1-15): Note: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A: (Enter 56. enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP.

) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) Number of advanced route Route Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 589 Revision 4. ‘WRT?’ displays. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value: (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGC: Outgoing Call PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number For SRV = OGCA: D/N: D NO:5 SRV:OGCA CNT:3 WRT? 3 RT:5 KIND:0 F:0 After entering CNT. the number ahead of RT increases by one and the next RT No. (If ENTER is pressed after entering a RT No. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter OGC.0 . of the alternate routes one after another.) When as many RT Numbers as designated by CNT are entered. PAGA.ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = OGC. PAGC. can be entered.. enter Route No. PAGC: D/N: D NO:4 SRV:OGC RT:3 WRT? KIND:0 F:0 D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: RT: • Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. PAGA. D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: CNT: RT: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.

Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value: (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS. CHAPTER 3 Page 590 Revision 4.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number Second Dial Tone (0/1 = -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization Code) For SRV = UNIF: D/N: D NO:7 SRV:UNIF SKIP:0 WRT? KIND:0 F:0 D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: SKIP: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF.) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digit to be skipped from Access Code.0 ND-45687 (E) .ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = LCR. LCRS: D/N: D NO:6 KIND:0 F:0 SRV:LCRS RT:10 2nd DT:0AH:0 WRT? D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: RT: 2nd DT: AH: • Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.

ASPS CM3-01 Hotel • For SRV = ANNC: D/N: D NO:6 KIND:0 SRV:ANNC EQP:3 WRT? F:0 D/N: NO: KIND: F: SRV: EQP: Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access code being assigned.) ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment number (2-15) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 591 Revision 4.0 . Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.

4. Function This command is used to assign or display restriction data for connections between Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs). Set “ASSIGN” mode. CALLING TEC:1 CALLED TEC:1 D/N:D RES:O WRT? CALLING TEC: Calling Telephone Equipment Class Note CALLED TEC: Called Telephone Equipment Class Note D/N: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode RES: Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Note: The attendant must be entered as TEC: 31 CHAPTER 3 Page 592 Revision 4. Enter data for each parameter. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Connections between TECs will be allowed until they are restricted via this command.ATCR CM3-02 Hotel tel ATCR Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction 1. Enter “A” when entering data.0 ND-45687 (E) . LTCR ASSIGN/CHECK:A CHECK: b. Entry Procedure • When assigning new data: a. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. 3.

0 . Enter the data necessary for data display. CALLING TEC: Calling Telephone Equipment Class CALLED TEC: Called Telephone Equipment Class D/N: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode RES: Restriction Data RES: Restricted ALL: Allowed ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 593 Revision 4.ATCR CM3-02 Hotel • For checking (displaying) the data: a. CALLING TEC:1 CALLED TEC:1 D/N:D RES:RES Restriction Data. ASSIGN/CHECK:C ASSIGN/CHECK: Enter “C” when causing the data to be checked (displayed). b. Allow or Restrict will be displayed. Set “CHECK” mode.

Function This command is used to display the program issue of the HP/MRC in the Hotel System. Related Reference Command: None 5. the program issue of the ACT-side HP is read out. 4. In the case of the HP. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. 3. VERSION: ISSUE: DATE: Program Version Program Issue Number Program Issue Date CHAPTER 3 Page 594 Revision 4.HISS CM3-02 Hotel tel HISS Display of Hotel Program Issue 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . Display of Hotel Program Issue Processor: PROCESSOR: HP/MR Display of Hotel Program Issue Processor: VERSION ISSUE DATE The system type is displayed here. Precautions • • This command cannot be used in the Business System. Entry Procedure • Enter the type of the processor.

• Main Memory Verify This command is used to verify that the data in Main Memory of HP is identical to that stored on the floppy disk. 4. on the floppy disk.0 . Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. flaw. the initialization (formatting) of the Floppy Disk is necessary. Error Indications “FILE NOT FOUND?”: There is no MM file on the floppy disk. Precautions • • • • This command is used for Hotel system only.HMBU CM3-02 Hotel tel HMBU Hotel Main Memory Backup 1. Related Reference Command None ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 595 Revision 4. etc. 3.) DISK I/O ERROR!?”: There is a scratch. Before saving the Main Memory of HP. (Incorrect floppy disk was inserted into the unit. Function • Main Memory Save This command is necessary for saving the data in main memory of HP onto a floppy disk.

“NEXT FLOPPY DISK SETTING ON DRIVE-II (Y/N)?”: This message is displayed when the ENTER key is pressed following the “FLOPPY DISK IS FULL!” message. FUNCTION: Operation Mode A: Save V: Verify P: Verify with Error List EXEC COUNT: Number of Processor to be Specified (Max. 11) SEGMENT: Main Memory SEGMENT Address of Processor OFFICE: Office Name DATE: File Date ERRORS: Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed for Function = V (Verify). 11) PROCESSOR:HP-O (HP Only) SEGMENT:0000 (Hexadecimal) [FILE INFORMATION IN FD] OFFICE:NEC TOKYO DATE:93/06/25 [FRI] IS A FLOPPY DISK SET IN DRIVE-B AND READY FOR OPERATION (Y/N)? Y FILE Information is displayed This line memory area Kbytes and the progress processing.HMBU CM3-02 Hotel 5.0 ND-45687 (E) . COMPLETED: Save. means of 256 shows of the When this command is being processed or has been completed. CHAPTER 3 Page 596 Revision 4. the next message is displayed. If Y + ENTER is entered after changing the Floppy Disk. Verify have been completed. the following messages are displayed: “FLOPPY DISK IS FULL!”: This message means that the floppy disk is full. RETURN TO MENU (Y/N): Indication of next job Y: Return to MENU N: Start operation again. processing is resumed. Entry Procedure [INPUT PARAMETERS] FUNCTION:S (S:Save V:Verify P:Verify with Error List) EXEC COUNT:1 (Max. When the ENTER key is pressed.

3.RAST CM3-01 Hotel tel RAST Remove Administration Station Data 1. or Phantom station must also be deleted. INDEX 165. Function This command is used to delete Administration Station data. If the pilot station of a station hunting group is deleted. DSTN LHEN. • • • • 4.) is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) of the station. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: AAST DLEN. Similarly. the speed calling data for that group will be deleted. Ground/Underground (G). Floor (FLR)) are displayed only in the case of ASYD. Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX). if the master station of a speed calling group is deleted. The data is assigned in the AAST command and displayed via the DLEN or DSTN command. etc. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only. LHST ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 597 Revision 4. confirm that the circuit card (PA16LC. the station hunting data for that group will also be deleted. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. “SECRETARY EXIST”.0 . SYSl. b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided). If “NIGHT EXIST”. Secretary. an error message will be displayed. When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed. If an attempt is made to delete a station which is busy. or “PHANTOM EXIST” is displayed after a station is deleted. Depress Enter key after confirming the location. the corresponding Night.

TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: NXT: Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). as assigned in the ARSC command.) STN:2000 TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:2 RSC:1 NXT? SFC:1 “NXT?” displays when the data for up to SFC have been displayed. LENS. as assigned in the ASFC command. Service Feature Class (0-15). Enter the data for parameters TN. the data subsequent to TEC are displayed.0 ND-45687 (E) . STN. CHAPTER 3 Page 598 Revision 4. (With these parameters entered. Entry Procedure • For general Administration station: a. [See (b)]. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS.RAST CM3-01 Hotel 5.

Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 599 Revision 4. STN:2000 The TN and STN entered in (a) display.RAST CM3-01 Hotel b.0 . TN:1 Display the data of ROOM CLASS. ROOM CLASS:1 DEL? ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone.

0 ND-45687 (E) . STN. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS through FLR. as assigned in the ASFC command. CHAPTER 3 Page 600 Revision 4. (With these parameters entered. as assigned in the ARSC command. the data subsequent to TEC are displayed) STN:2000 TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:2 RSC:1SFC:1 NXT? “NXT?” displays when the data for up to SFC have been displayed. [See (b)]. LENS. Enter the data for parameters TN. TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: NXT: Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). Service Feature Class (0-15).RAST CM3-01 Hotel • When Floor Service is provided: a.

STN:2000 G:0 FLR:1 TN and STN entered in (a) display.RAST CM3-01 Hotel b. Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm V and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 601 Revision 4.0 . TN:1 Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR. ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:0 DEL? ROOM CLASS: ANX: G: FLR: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone.

etc. or “PHANTOM EXIST” is displayed after a station is deleted. an error message will be displayed. • • • • 4.) is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) of the station. This data is assigned in the AGST command and displayed via the DLEN or DSTN command. the speed calling data for that group will be deleted. LHST CHAPTER 3 Page 602 Revision 4. “SECRETARY EXIST”. Precautions • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Similarly. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2.RGST CM3-01 Hotel tel RGST Remove Guest Station Data 1. Floor (FR)) are displayed only in the case of ASYD. When the or “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed. If the pilot station of a station hunting group is deleted. Function This command is used to delete Guest Station data. If “NIGHT EXIST”. INDEX 165. 3. confirm that the circuit card (PA16LC. Depress RETURN key after confirming the location. SYSl. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: AGST DLEN. or Phantom station must also be deleted. DSTN LHEN. if the master station of a speed calling group is deleted. Secretary. If an attempt is made to delete a station which is busy. the corresponding Night.0 ND-45687 (E) . Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX). b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided). Ground/Underground (G). the station hunting data for that group will also be deleted.

ROOM CLASS:1 DEL? ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 603 Revision 4. [See (b).0 . LENS. Enter the data for parameters TN. STN. TN:1 Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15). (With these parameters entered.RGST CM3-01 Hotel 5. TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: NXT?: b. the data subsequent to TEC are displayed. Service Feature Class (0-15). NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS data. as assigned in the ASFC command. Entry Procedure • For general guest Station: a.] Display of the data of ROOM CLASS STN:2000 The TN and STN entered in (a) display. as assigned in the ARSC command.) STN:2000 TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:5 RSC:1 NXT? SFC:1 “NXT?” displays when the data up to SFC have been displayed.

as assigned in the ASFC command. (With these parameters entered.] TN: STN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: NXT?: CHAPTER 3 Page 604 Revision 4. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15).0 ND-45687 (E) . Enter the data for parameters TN. the data subsequent to TEC are displayed. LENS.) STN:2000 TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:5 RSC:1 NXT? SFC:1 “NXT?” displays when the data up to SFC have been displayed.RGST CM3-01 Hotel • When Floor Service is provided: a. Service Feature Class (0-15). as assigned in the ARSC command. STN. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b).

TN:1 Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.0 . ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:0 DEL? G:0 FLR:1 ROOM CLASS:Room Class (0-15) ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground FLR: Floor (1-127) ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 605 Revision 4. STN:2000 The TN and STN entered in (a) display.RGST CM3-01 Hotel b.

TYPE:S PHANTOM/MASTER:P P-STN:3000 TN: TYPE: PHANTOM/ MASTER: P-STN: Tenant Number Suite Room type (Enter S. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2.RHSU CM3-02 Hotel tel RHSU Remove Suite Room Station 1. The station to be deleted must already be assigned as a suite room station. 4.) P: Phantom Number Phantom Number CHAPTER 3 Page 606 Revision 4.) S: Single Suite Room Phantom Number/Master Guest Station Number (P/M) (Enter P. The suite room station must be deleted by designating the phantom number when a phantom number has been assigned at the time of the suite room station assignment or by designating the master guest station number when a phantom number has not been assigned. 3. this command is used to delete a specific guest station assigned as a suite room station. Function When the system provides Suite Room Service. TN:1 AHSU AHSU LHSU Enter the data for parameters TN through P-STN. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: 5. Precautions • • • This command is used for Hotel system only. Entry Procedure • When Phantom Number has been assigned: a.0 ND-45687 (E) .

SING PHANTOM: **** M1:2000 S3:2002 DEL? S2:2001 S4:2003 Asterisks (****) display when no phantom number has been assigned.S4: Slave Guest Station • When Phantom Number has not been assigned: a. SING PHANTOM:3000 MI:2000 S2:2001 S3:2002 S4:2003 DEL? SING PHANTOM: Phantom Number M l: Master Guest Station S2.RHSU CM3-02 Hotel b. SING PHANTOM: Ml: S2-S4: Phantom Number Master Guest Station Slave Guest Station ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 607 Revision 4. TN:1 Enter the data for parameters TN through M-STN. TYPE:S PHANTOM/MASTER:M M-STN:2000 TN: TYPE: PHANTOM/ MASTER: M-STN: Tenant Number Suite Room type (Enter S.) S: Single Suite Room Phantom Number/Master Guest Station Number (P/M) (Enter M.) M: Master Guest Station Number Master Guest Station Number (a) Display the data of SING PHANTOM through S4.0 . Display the data of SING PHANTOM through S4.

CHAPTER 3 Page 608 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .This page is for your notes.

0 . “Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment. This section covers all List Up commands. Command Name Floppy Disk Name COMMAND LABD < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME CM0-06 ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code Output Item Meaning ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 609 Revision 4.CHAPTER 4 LIST UP COMMANDS List Up commands print out data that has already been assigned.” on Page 610. including the Output Item and the meaning. The List Up commands and their associated assignment commands are included in Table 4-1. The illustration below shows the relationship between List Up commands and Data assignment commands. in alphabetical order.

ACFO. ANCD ACFS ACIC ACID ACMO ACND ACNP ACOC ACPG ACPG ACSA ACSC ADA1 ADA2 ACDD ADIM ADNR ADPC CHAPTER 4 Page 610 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment LIST UP COMMAND ASSIGNMENT COMMAND LABD LAKP LAND LANI LANP LARP LASP LATC LCBC LCDN LCEG LCEL LCFC LCFS LCIC LCID LCMO LCND LCNP LCOC LCPG LCPL LCSA LCSC LDA1 LDA2 LDID LDIM LDNR LDPC AABD AAKP AAND AANI AANP AARP AASP AATC ACBC ACDN ACPE ACPE ACSI.

ASPA ANPT ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 611 Revision 4. ATRK AHKP AHLS AHMS AHMS2 AAST. ATRK ALMG ALPE AMAT AMDD ANDD. AMND ANND ANPD. AGST.0 .Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment LIST UP COMMAND ASSIGNMENT COMMAND LDSS LEFR LEKD LEVT LFCD LFCP LFRS LFXC LGNP LGSP LHEN LHKP LHLS LHMS LHMS2 LHST LHSU LHSY LICD LIZP LKYD LLEN LLMG LLPE LMAT LMDD LNDD LNND LNPD LNPT ADSS AEFR AEKD AEVT AFCD AFCP AFRS AFXC AGNP AGSP AAST. AGST AHSU AHSY AICD AIZP AKYD ASDT.

ARRC ARDN AREF ARNP ARPC ARSC. ASHU ASlD ASTP. ASTD CHAPTER 4 Page 612 Revision 4. AISP. ATGL APCR ARAC ACFR. ASHU ASHC.0 ND-45687 (E) . ASPD ASDC ASGD ASHC. AAED APAT. AUNT. ASHP. AOSP ASLU ASMD ASPF ASPS ASDT. ASTN ASYD. ATNR ARTD ARTE ARTI ASAT ASCR AISA. ASHP.Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment LIST UP COMMAND ASSIGNMENT COMMAND LOPR LOSD LPAE LPAT LPCR LRAC LRCF LRDN LREF LRNP LRPC LRTC LRTD LRTE LRTI LSAT LSCR LSDA LSDC LSGD LSHG LSHL LSID LSLP LSLU LSMD LSPF LSPS LSTN LSYD AOPR BOSD APHN. ASFC.

Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment LIST UP COMMAND ASSIGNMENT COMMAND LTAS LTCP LTCR LTDP LTRK LUAD LUCD LUNE LVTC LVTL ATAS ATCP ATCR ATDP ATRK AUAD AUCD AUNE AVTC AVTL ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 613 Revision 4.0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) .Start Tenant Number b .End Tenant Number LARP Area Code Restriction Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > OGRT: Outgoing Route number DC: Destination Code RSC: Route Restriction Class RES: Restriction Data LATC Authorization Code Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number AUTHORIZATION CODE: Authorization Code ACR: Authorization Code Restriction Pattern Number SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class RSC: Route Restriction Class CHAPTER 4 Page 614 Revision 4.LABD CM0-06 NAME LABD COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME ACC Restriction Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number ADC: Abbreviated LAKP Attendant Key Information Data List (for Business System) CM0-05 < Output Item > ATTENDANT: Attendant Console Number FUNCTION CODE:Function Code KEY NUMBER: Key Number LAND Automatic Number Identification Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > ROUTE: Route number AT: STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing CC: Main Central/Satellite Central STNL: STA Number Lengths COC: Central Office Code SKIP: Call Originator Digit to be Skipped ADD: Office Code to be Added DC: Office Code LANI ANI Data List CM0-06 <Output Item> TN: Tenant Range (a to b) a .

LCBC CM0-09 NAME LCBC COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Call By Call Service Data List CM0-09 < Output Item > TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern Number OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern RA: Order of Route Advance MN: Service Mode INT: National/International NET: Kind of Network SERV: Feature/Service CODE: Facility Coding Value BAND: WATS Band Number SCC: SCC Distinguish No.0 . LCCD Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List CM0-06 FUNC: Kind of Function A/C: Amp/Compulsion cut TN [a]TO [b]: Tenant Range LCDN Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number DC: Destination Code CDN: Number of Digits of Consecutive Dialing LCEG List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data CM0-11 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Group 1ST-STN: 1st Station Number STN: Station Number LCEL List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data CM0-11 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Group 1ST-STN: 1st Station Number STN: Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 615 Revision 4.

F.-Don’t Answer LCIC CIC Data List CM0-08 < Output Item > DETERMINATE POINT CODE:Determinate Point Code CSC GROUP NUMBER: CSC Group Number CIC NUMBER: CIC Number LENS: Line Equipment Number LCID Caller ID Data List CM0-08 < Output Item > TYPE: 1 (Fixed) TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number CID: Calling ID Number (Max. For Night Connection Data MG: Module Group Number NCU PKG: PFT Circuit Card Number PORT: Port Number ROUTE: Route Number TRUNK: Trunk Number 3.F. 28 digits) SRV: Service Kind (5/6) CHAPTER 4 Page 616 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) . For Call Forwarding Data TENANT: Tenant Number ATTENDANT/STATION: Call Forwarding Destination CALL FORWARDING: Call Forwarding Service STATION NUMBER: Station Number LCFS Call Forwarding Station Data List CM0-04 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TRK/STN: Receive Call Kind CF-V: Transfer Destination of C.F.-Busy Line CF-D: Transfer Destination of C. For Connection Service Index Data ROUTE: Route Number NSI: Night Connection Service Index TENANT: Tenant Number ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code TRUNK: Trunk Number STN: Station Number 2.LCFC CM0-05 NAME LCFC COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Call Forwarding /Connection Service Index Data List CM0-05 1.-All Calls CF-B: Transfer Destination of C.

0 .O.LCMO CM0-06 NAME LCMO COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Clock Manual Override Data List Block Number Start Time Pattern Number End Time CM0-06 < Output Item > BLOCK NUMBER: START TIME: PATTERN NUMBER: END TIME: LCND Calling Number Data List CM0-09 < Output Item > CNP: Calling Number Pattern ADD: Number of Digits of the Additional Number SKIP: Skip Digit DC: Digit Code of the Additional Number LCNP Calling Number Pattern Data List CM0-09 < Output Item > OG/IC: Kind of Connection CNP: Calling Pattern Number RT: Route Number LCOC Central Office Code Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number DIGIT CODE: C. Number TRUNK: Trunk Number LCPG Call Pickup Group Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Group LCPL Call Pickup Group Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Group LCSA Connection Service Index A List CM0-05 < Output Item > ROUTE NUMBER:Route Number CSIA: Connection Service Index A TENANT: Tenant Number TRUNK NUMBER:Trunk Number ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code STATION NUMBER:Station Number ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 617 Revision 4.

0 ND-45687 (E) .LCSC CM0-08 NAME LCSC COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME CSC Data List CM0-08 < Output Item > CSC GROUP NUMBER: CSC Group Number CIC GROUP NUMBER: CIC Group Number CCH LENS: CCH Accommodate Location LDA1 DTE Attribute Data 1 List CM0-06 < Output Item > CDN: Counter Display Number STN: Station Number CNTP: Connection Protocol FCY: Facility RST: Restriction CI: Calling Indicator TN: Tenant Number MEDIA: Media TCP: Transmission Control Protocol PRI: Priority SRP: Send Receive Priority LDA2 DTE Attribute Data2 List CM0-06 L< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number CDN: Counter Display Number AUTO: Auto Answer MDM2: Incoming MODEM Number PRTY: Parity Addition HDX: Half/Full Duplex CODE: Kind of Data HL: Hot Line RA: Kind of RA STN: Station Number DTR: DTR (ER) Control MDM1: Originating MODEM Number SPD: Bit Speed Rate ASYC: Asynchronous STOP: Stop Bit PRFN: Profile Number HTL: Hot Line Originate Condition CHAPTER 4 Page 618 Revision 4.

Urgent Mode TENANT: Tenant Number RSC1: Calling Route Restriction Class RES: Restriction Data FRI: Facility Restriction Index RSC2: Called Route Restriction Class ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 619 Revision 4.0 .LDID CM0-06 NAME LDID COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Dial In Service Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ROUTE NUMBER: Route Number RECEIVE DIGIT CODE: Receive Digit Code CHANGE DIGIT CODE: Change Digit Code ADD DIAL SERVICE: Additional Dialing TRANSFER SERVICE: Transfer Service LDIM Dial Intercom Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > MGNO: Module Group Number G-ID: Group ID Number Per MG N: Dial Intercom Digit Number BCR: Bridge Call Restriction ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN TN: Tenant Number ICM STN: lntercom Station Number LDNI Day/Night Information List CM0-04 <Output Item> TN [a] TO [b]: Tenant Range LDPC Determinate Point Code Data List CM0-08 < Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number DETERMINATE POINT CODE: Determinate Point Code LEFR EPN Facility Restriction Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > DAY/NIGHT/URGENT: Day. Night.

LEKD CM0-05 NAME LEKD COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME External Key Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > MG: Module Group Number NCU PKG: RFT Circuit Card Number CP: Change Control Pattern ROUTE: Route Number CNT: Count of Input Tenants CTN: External Key Number TENANT: Tenant Number TRUNK: Trunk Number LEVT List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS CM0-09 < Output Item > RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number DESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 24 digits) CALLED: Called Number (Max.0 ND-45687 (E) . 24 digits) C_RT: CCIS Signal Route Number C_TK: CCIS Signal Trunk Number VRY: Verification of Connection OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC Service RA: Order of Route Advance of CBC Service LFCD Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data List Line Equipment Number (Side-A) Line Equipment Number (Side-B) Equipment Additional Data Equipment Additional Data Call Forwarding by Calling Service List CM0-06 < Output Item> LENS-A: LENS-B: EAD-A: EAD-B: LFCP CM0-09 < Output Item > D/N: Day/Night Mode CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature Index TN: Tenant Number CALLING PARTY: Calling Party Number and Called Party Number ITC: Information Transfer Capacity CFD: Call Forwarding Destination STN: Station Number CHAPTER 4 Page 620 Revision 4. 6 digits) CALLING: Calling Number (Max.

LFRS CM0-06 NAME LFRS COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Flexible Route Selection Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number NUMBER PATTERN CODE: Number Pattern Code OPR: Outgoing Pattern Routing ROUTE: Route Number OTHER OPR: Other Outgoing Pattern Routing LHLS Hot Line Data List Hot Line Tenant Number Hot Line Station Number Call party’s Tenant Number Called party’s Abbreviated Digit Code Called party’s Trunk Number Called party’s Station Number Called party’s Route Number CM0-05 <Output Item> HOT LINE TENANT: HOT LINE STATION: CON: CON ADC: CON TRUNK: CON: CON ROUTE: LHMS Hold Music Data List CM0-06 <Output Item> RT: Route Number HMSC: Hold Music Data LHMS2 Hold Music Data List CM0-06 <Output Item> TN: Tenant Number RT: Route Number HMSC: Hold Music Data LICD Intercom Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > MGNO: Module Group Number A/M: Automatic/Manual Signaling ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN ICM STN: lntercom Station Number G-ID: Group ID Number per MG BCR: Bridge Call Restriction TN: Tenant Number SIG STN: Signaling Station Number LIZP Internal Zone Paging Data List Tenant number of calling party Internal Zone Paging group number (01-99) Tenant number of IZPSTN Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group CM0-11 TN: IZPG: IZPTN: IZPSTN: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 621 Revision 4.0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) . STN: Tenant Number and Station Number of Prime Line KD: Kind of Line RG: Ringing Data for each individual line of the Multilines ICM: Kind of Intercom G-ID: Group ID Number LLEN LENS Data List (for Business System) CM0-05 < Output Item > 1. CHANGE DATA 3. ALL DATA 2. For Trunk ROUTE: TRUNK: LLMG Route Number Trunk Number Alarm Grade Data List FK-FI: ALM: GR: System Message Alarm Kind Grade CM0-11 <Output Item> 1. For Station LENS: Line Equipment Number STATION NUMBER: Station Number RSC: Route Restriction Class TENANT: Tenant Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class 2.LKYD CM0-05 NAME LKYD COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Key Data for Dterm List CM0-05 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TP: Type of Dterm RING: Ringing Data for Multilines PRI: Priority of Answering a Call ICM: Kind of Intercom G-ID: Group ID Number SPK: Speaker ANS: Answer ORG: Originating MWD: Message Waiting Data Display Selection S: OG from Prime Line KEY NO.: Key Number KEY INDEX: Kind of Service FUNC: Function Key Number PRIME/MULTI LINE TENANT. DEFAULT DATA CHAPTER 4 Page 622 Revision 4.

LLPE CM0-06 NAME LLPE COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Line Privacy Expansion Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LMAT Master Attendant Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number MASTER ATTENDANT: Master Attendant Number NIGHT MASTER ATTENDANT: Night Master Attendant OTHER ATTENDANT: Attendant Number LMDD MODEM Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > MODNO: MODEM Number DR: Data Ready HDX: Half/Full Duplex 2W/4W: 2W MODEM / 4W MODEM ASYNC: Asynchronous RSGT: RS-CS Guard Timer CDN: Counter Display Number R: Modem Ringing M/D: MODEM/DST SPEED: Bit Speed FCY: Facility LNDD Name Display Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number NAME: User’s Office Name ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 623 Revision 4.0 .

For Number of Necessary Digits Data ROUTE: Route Number IN COMING: Incoming Call NECESSARY DIGITS: Number of Necessary Digits OUT GOING: Outgoing Call 2. For Numbering Plan Data TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status Index BLF: Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON 1ST DC: 1st Digit Code NND: Number of Necessary Digits 2. For Maximum Number of Digits Data TENANT: Tenant Number MND: Maximum Necessary Digits AN: Account Number A/D: Analog/Digital Line Data DIAL CODE: Dial Code TOLL: Toll Code Identification RATE: Option Service Data LNPD Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List (for Business System) CM0-05 < Output Item > 1.0 ND-45687 (E) .LNND CM0-05 NAME LNND COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Necessary Digit Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1. For Special Access Code Data TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status Index NND: Number of Necessary Digits CNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code Dialing SID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index A ACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of Service RT: Route Number SUB: SUB Address LNPT Numbering Data List for PTT Network Digit Code (starting and ending) CM0-06 DC: CHAPTER 4 Page 624 Revision 4.

For Announcement Equipment Data TENANT: Tenant Number ROUTE: Route Number CONNECT TIME: Duration of Connection MULTI SIGNAL: Multiple Connection EQUIPMENT NUMBER: Equipment Number TRUNK: Trunk Number REMOTE ANSWER: Answer Signal Sending SENDING RBT: Sending RBT ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 625 Revision 4. For Phantom Number Data TENANT: Tenant Number PHANTOM NUMBER: Phantom Number STATION NUMBER: Station Number PHANTOM KIND: Kind of Phantom 2.0 .LOPR CM0-06 NAME LOPR COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List Time of Day Change Pattern Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number Order of Route Advance Route Advance End Indication Outgoing Route Number Number of Digits to be Skipped Pattern Number Location Overflow tone Priority Restriction Class List Up of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Date CM0-06 <Output Item> TDPTN: OPR: RA: E: RT: SKIP: PNL: OVFT: PRSC: LOSD CM0-04 < Output Item > • Circuit Card TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number and Speed Calling Data LENA: Line Equipment Number < Output Item > • FD TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number and Speed Calling Data LPAE Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1.

For Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data ATTENDANT NUMBER: Attendant Number TRUNK GROUP NUMBER: Trunk Group Number ROUTE: Route Number LPCR Primary Call Restriction Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number BLOCK NUMBER: Block Number PRIMARY CALL DIGIT CODE: Primary Call Digit Code RSC: Route Restriction Class RES: Restriction Data LRAC Remote PBX Access Code Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > INCOMING TRUNK TENANT: Incoming Trunk Tenant Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code TENANT: Tenant Number LRCF List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1. For Call Forwarding Restriction Data TENANT: Tenant Number TRANSFER SERVICE FEATURE INDEX: Transfer Service Feature Index CALL CATEGORY INDEX (CCI): Call Category RES: Restriction Data CHAPTER 4 Page 626 Revision 4.LPAT CM0-05 NAME LPAT COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME PAD Data /Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1.0 ND-45687 (E) . For Alternative Route Restriction Data INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number ALTERNATIVE ROUTE INDEX: Alternative Route Index (ATT/DIAL) RESTRICTION DATA: Restriction Data 2. For PAD Data TDM/ST: Tandem Connection/Station Connection INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number SERVICE CLASS: Service Feature Restriction Class INCOMING PAD: Incoming Pad Data OUTGOING PAD: Outgoing Pad Data ROUTE: Route Number 2.

For Tenant Restriction Class Data DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ORIGINATING: Originating Tenant TERMINATING TENANT: Terminating Tenant TENANT RESTRICTION INDEX: Tenant Restriction Index RES: Restriction Data ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 627 Revision 4. For Route Restriction Class Data TENANT: Tenant Number RSC CODE: Route Restriction Class RRI: Route Restriction Index DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ROUTE: Route Number RES: Restriction Data 2. For Service Feature Restriction Data TENANT: Tenant Number SERVICE INDEX: Service Feature Index RES: Restriction Data DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode SERVICE RESTRICTION CLASS:Service Feature Restriction Class 3.LRDN CM0-08 NAME LRDN COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Remote Control Day/Night List CM0-08 < Output Item > INDEX: Point Code for Satellite Day/Night Mode POINT CODE: Point Code LREF Reference Number Information Data List CM0-09 <Output Item> REF: Reference Number (Start. End) LRNP Reverse Numbering Plan Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code LRPC Remote Point Code for Centralized Service CM0-08 < Output Item > CSN: Centralized Service Number RPC: Remote Point Code LRTC Route/Service Feature Class Data and Tenant Restriction Class/Tenant Restriction Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1.0 .

0 ND-45687 (E) .LRTD CM0-05 NAME LRTD COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Route Class Data List Route Number Signal Interface for Outgoing Signal Selection for Outgoing Signal Interface for Incoming Signal Selection for Incoming Type of Trunk Function Trunk Class Line/Trunk Identification Trunk Release Pattern Outgoing Trunk Queuing Detailed Billing Information Toll Denial Battery Reversal Distinctive Ringing Pattern Flexible Routing Pattern Designation Tenant Number Check Line Signal Detailed Billing Information Always output “0” Always output “0” E911-ANI Service Always output “0” Always output “0” Busy Service Line Trunk Privacy Analog/Digital Line Data Call Waiting Service OG Trunk Queuing-Deluxe Detection of Blocking Signal Trunk Selection Sequence Number Display of Dterm between offices ACD Service 2 Wires/4 Wires Authorization Code of ATTCON Dialed Number CoMSW:Always output “0” Split Cal Forwarding Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Attendant-Identification of Incoming Trunk Display Trunk Reversal Identification Tone Level Answer Signal from Trunk Side CM0-05 <Output Item> ROUTE: OSGS: ONSG: ISGS: INSG: TF: TCL: L/T: RLP: TQ: SMDR: TD: DR: AC: TNT: LSG: SMDR2: H/M: MC: EANI: D: MSB: BT: PRV: A/D: CW: TPQ: BL: TRKS: DPLY: ACD: 2W/4W: FAAT: DC: SCF: MSW: TR: OC: R/L: RVSD: TL: ANS: CHAPTER 4 Page 628 Revision 4.

LRTD CM0-05 NAME LRTD. continued COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME TELP: PAD: OGRL: ICRL: HD: GUARD: WINK: VAD: CLD: FA: BC: TCM: TDMQ: TRSC: GW: TCMA: SMDR3: HDT: CD: CCH: TC/EC: IRE: SCR: LYER1: NET: INT: HKS: SCF: SMDR4: Time Elapse Identification Service PAD Control Data Release Timing for Outgoing Trunk Connections Release Timing for Incoming Trunk Connections Trunk Hold Timing Outgoing Inhibit Timing after Trunk Release Width of Wink Signal Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Terminal Class Mark Tandem Off Hook OG Queuing Trunk Restriction Class Gate Way Always output “0” Always output “0” Heterogeneous Data Trunk Consecutive Dialing Common Channel Handler Always output “0” Always output “0” Step Call Restriction for Tie Line Call Layer 1 USER/NET Identification Interface Specification Trunk Hooking Signal Split Call Forwarding Always output “0” ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 629 Revision 4.0 .

LRTE CM0-06 NAME LRTE COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data CM0-06 <Output Item> RT: TCMN: TCMC: MFSP: KPST: KPPT: STC: MC: MT: TONE: PPTM: MPTM: LPTM: RSAX: CST: CSEG: CSEU: CSEL: CMP: TALK: FOT: RST: TOCI: TOCD: ODGD: RLS: GWD: H1: DT: CI: OID: TKS: PAD2: TRM: TRPX: LDR: TSC: SATS: RVPX: DQ: SLOV: SDTO: ADVPRA: Route Number Number of Digit of TCM (S Code) TCM and Sending Sequence Sending Speed Duration of KP Sending Pause after KP Sending Stop Code MP Start Cause MF Frequency TONE Designation for TRK Call Termination Sender Prepause Sender Minimum Pause Sender Inter-Digit Pause Index Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Trunk Override Calling Trunk Override Called Always output “0” Always output “0” Gate Way Data Service Always output “0” Always output “0” ISDN Sending Information Always output “0” Always output “0” Pad Control Data 2 Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Slumber Time Override System Message automatic output when Connection Acknowledge Signal not received ISDN PRI Fail safe Routing Service CHAPTER 4 Page 630 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .

LRTE CM0-06 NAME LRTE. continued COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME IND: UU2: DCH: CMRT: PREF: DFS: BOB: HO1CH: IFR: CONV: CNI: Inter-office Name Display Always output “0” Always output “0” Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunks Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Indonesia Compulsion Cut Service SMDR Called Party’s Number Conversion Calling Number Identification Format ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 631 Revision 4.0 .

Restoration timer (TC × MTC) sec.0 ND-45687 (E) .LRTI CM0-09 NAME LRTI COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Trunk Application Data List CM0-09 <Output Item> RETMSG: RST: HMT: TRCRST: TRSRST: T309LNK: T309CON: LLCRST: VCM: OVRT: POOL: DTRT: TMPRT: CODEC: PASS: IRL: MTC: TC: TS: CDCSPD: DVRST: RSCT: ROCG: RICG: STSENQ: ANI: SRV: TON: NPI: SPMET: ECCIS: ECCISTM: ECCISOB: ECCISIB: L/T: ECCISTD: MFCG2: CLBK: Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE WITH Analog Trunk Assignment of Restart Always output “0” Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link Failure Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 Failure Call Restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information Element Always output “0” Always output “0” Always output “0” Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm) Temporary Route Information over CCIS Always output “0” Always output “0” Clear call when DTI alarm is detected Assignment of Timer T309 Value. Timer T309 Counter Value Always output “0” Always output “0” Call Restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDN Call Restriction by Temporary Route Information Outgoing Call Account by Temporary Route Information Incoming Call Account by Temporary Route Information Status Inquiry Message Send Timing to demand ANI Information Additional Service Selection Type of Number Numbering Plan Identification Meter Pulse Observation Control Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS) Release Timer for E-CCIS Line OG Billing for E-CCIS Line IC Billing for E-CCIS Line Local/Toll (for Russia) Addressing Information used in E-CCIS Calling Party Category Kind of Collect Call Blocking Signal CHAPTER 4 Page 632 Revision 4.

0 . For Individual Speed Calling Entry Area Data TENANT: Tenant Number MASTER/SLAVE: Station Type (Master Station/Slave Station) BLOCK: Number of Blocks STN: Station Number REMARK: Remarks LSDC Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > KIND: Kind of Selection OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number OFFICE: Office Code TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern Number RA: Route Advancing Order EFFECT: Designing Data LSGD Special Group List Tenant Number Function Number Station Number Specific Terminating Device Group Number CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: FUNCTION NUMBER: STATION NUMBER: GROUP NUMBER: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 633 Revision 4.LSAT CM0-05 NAME LSAT COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Specific Attendant Number Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > ATTENDANT NUMBER: Attendant Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code of Specific Attendant Number TENANT: Tenant Number LSDA Speed Calling Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1. For Speed Calling Data TENANT: CD: ADC: Tenant Number Telephone Number Abbreviated Digit Code 2.

Circular Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number 3. For Station Hunting-UCD Group Data TN: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group ADD: Number of Stations to be Added TN-B: Tenant Number of the UCD Overflow Group STN-B: Station Number of the UCD Overflow Group TNA. For Station Hunting . For Station Hunting-Terminal Group TN: Tenant Number PILOT STN: Pilot Station Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group SCRET: Secretary Number 2. STNA: Tenant Number and Station Number of the UCD Group TNB.LSHG CM0-05 NAME LSHG COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Station Hunting/UCD Data List CM0-05 <Output Item> 1. For Station Hunting .0 ND-45687 (E) .UCD Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group CHAPTER 4 Page 634 Revision 4. STNB: Tenant Number and Station Number of the UCD Group (To be Hunted) LSHL Station Hunting/UCD Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1.Terminal Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number PILOT STN: Pilot Station Number STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group PHANTOM: Phantom Number 2. For Station Hunting . For Station-Hunting Circular Group Data TN: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number 3.

LSID CM0-06 NAME LSID COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Special Incoming List CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number GROUP NUMBER: Specific Terminal Device Group Number FUNCTION NUMBER: Function Type STATION/ATT: Type of Specific Terminating Device (Station/ATT) LSLP Selection Translation Pattern Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > 1. For Outgoing Selection Pattern Number Data OUTGOING PATTERN NUMBER: Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number SKIP: Number of Skipped Digits ADD: Number of Added Digits DIGIT INFORMATION:Additional Digit Information LSLU Slumber Time Data List CM0-04 < Output Item > FUNC: Kind of Function TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number G: Slumber Time Group Number CNT: Slumber Time Counter TFR: Transfer kind (ATT/Announcement) FROM: Slumber Time Start Time TO: Slumber Time End Time LSMD Service Module Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > KOSM: Kind of SM NOSM: Logical Number of each SM SMPN: SM Port Number SMI: Mounting Position of SMINT ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 635 Revision 4. For Selection Translation Pattern Data IC/OG: Incoming/Outgoing ROUTE: Route Number TENANT: Tenant Number PATTERN NUMBER: Selection Translation Pattern Number 2.0 . For Incoming Selection Pattern Number Data INCOMING PATTERN NUMBER: Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number DIGIT INFORMATION: Additional Digit Information 3.

Station Number TENANT: Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class STATION NUMBER: Station Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class • The following data is printed out when it belongs to Station Hunting-Terminal or Circular Group SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group • The following data is printed out when it belongs to Call Pick Up Group. the following data appears PILOT: Pilot Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group CHAPTER 4 Page 636 Revision 4. Station Number TENANT: Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class STATION NUMBER: Station Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class • The following data is printed out when it belongs to Station Hunting-Terminal or Circular Group SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group • The following data is printed out when it belongs to Call Pick Up Group. CNT: Number of Station in the Call Pick up Group • When Phantom Number is assigned.0 ND-45687 (E) . CNT: Number of Station in the Call Pick up Group • When Phantom Number is assigned.LSTN CM0-05 NAME LSTN COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Station Data (Number Group) List (for Business System) CM0-05 < Output Item > 1. the following data appears PILOT: Pilot Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group < Output Item > 1.

LSYD CM0-05 NAME LSTN (Continued) COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME • In case of Hot Line the following appears. STATE TRANSLATION INFORMATION: State Translation Information ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 637 Revision 4. CON TN: Called Party’s Tenant Number ADC: Called Party’s Abbreviated Digit Code STN: Called Party’s Station Number • In case of Dterm the following data appears Dterm Key Position: Dterm Key Data • The following data is printed out when it belongs to UCD Group CNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the UCD Group 2. STATE TRANSLATION CATEGORY NO.0 . For Unit Data MODULE GROUP: Module Group Number UNIT TYPE: Unit Type Indication UNIT/PKG NUMBER: Unit/Circuit Card Number 3.: State Translation Category No.: State Translation Main Category No. Specific Attendant Number RT: Route Number CNT: Number of Trunks (Attendant) TN (ATN): Trunk (Attendant) Number TN: Tenant Number 3. For System Data SYS: System Data Type HEXA: Data (00-FF) in Hexadecimal Format TN: Tenant Number (Only SYS = 2) INDEX: System Data Index BINARY: Data in Binary Format 2. For State Translation Data STATE TRANSLATION MAIN CATEGORY NO. For Listed Directory Number TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number LSYD System/Unit/Status Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > 1.

0 ND-45687 (E) .LTAS CM0-05 NAME LTAS COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME TAS Service Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number MODULE GROUP NUMBER:Module Group Number UNIT NUMBER: Unit Number CIRCUIT NUMBER: Circuit Number LTCP Time/Pattern Information Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > START TIME: Start Time END TIME: End Time PATTERN: Pattern Number LTDP Toll Code Restriction Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode TDM/OG: Tandem/Outgoing Connection RSC: Route Restriction Class OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number DIGIT CODE: Destination Code TDI: Restriction Data LTRK Trunk Data List CM0-05 < Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number TRUNK: Trunk Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class CNT: Number of Tenants TENANT: Tenant Number LUAD UCD Delayed Announcement Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > GROUP COMMON:Announcement Data is Common to all Group TN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station STN: Station Number of UCD Group Control Station DLYT: Delay Timer MSGT: Message Timer RP: Designation of Number of Times Announcement is heard. lNT: Repeating Interval CNT: Number of Announcement Trunks RT: Route Number of Announcement Trunk TK: Trunk Number of Announcement Trunk CHAPTER 4 Page 638 Revision 4.

LUCD CM0-06 NAME LUCD COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME UCD Control Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station STN: Station Number of UCD Group Control Station QTH ACT: UCD Queing Peg Count QTH: UCD Queing Peg Count Value CWT: Threshold Value of Call Waiting MCI: Message Center Interface Data Transfer LUNE Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List CM0-06 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number NUMBER PATTERN CODE:Number Pattern Code SKIP: Number of Possible Skipped Digits ROUTE: Route Number LVTC Virtual Tie Line Call Data List CM0-09 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number use Virtual Tie Line Call LVTL Virtual Tie Line Data List CM0-09 < Output Item > DATE: Date Range PTN: Pattern Number IC/OG: Kind of Assign RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number D-LENS: LENS of Dch CH: Bch Number CALLING: Calling Number CALLED: Called Number KEYPAD: Keypad Information SUB: Kind of Sub Address SUB No.0 .: Sub Address WEEK: Week Range TIME: Time Range RESULT: Result ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 4 Page 639 Revision 4.

This page is for your notes.0 ND-45687 (E) . CHAPTER 4 Page 640 Revision 4.

LANP CM3-03 CHAPTER 5 HOTEL SYSTEM LIST UP COMMANDS The following List Up commands are used for hotel/motel applications only.0 . NAME LANP COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Tenant Number Connection Status Index Number of Necessary Digits 1st Digit Code Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON CM3-03 < Output Item > TENANT: CI: NND: 1 ST DC: BLF: LASP Administration Special Access Code Data List CM3-03 < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status Index NND: Number of Necessary Digits CNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code Dialing SID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index A ACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of Service RT: Route Number SUB: SUB Address LDNR Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List Tenant Number Day Hour Route Restriction Class Night Minute CM3-03 < Output Item > TN: DAY: HOUR: RSC: NIGHT: MINUTE: LDSS Direct Station Select Data List Attendant Number Called Number DSS key Number CM3-03 < Output Item > ATN: DC: DSS: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 5 Page 641 Revision 4.

LFXC CM3-03 NAME LFXC COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME List Up of Fixed Connection (Nail Down Connection Data) Line Equipment Number of Data Link Interface Trunk Line Equipment Number of Dterm CM3-03 < Output Item > LENS-A: LENS-B: LGNP Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Tenant Number Connection Status Index Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON 1st Digit Code Number of Necessary Digits Guest Special Access Code List Tenant Number Connection Status Index Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON 1st Digit Code Number of Necessary Digits LENS Data List Function Unit Number Module Group Number Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List CM3-03 <Output Item> TENANT: CI: BLF: 1 ST DC: NND: LGSP CM3-03 <Output Item> TENANT: CI: BLF: 1 ST DC: NND: LHEN CM3-03 <Output Item> FUNC: UNIT: MG: LHKP CM3-03 <Output Item> ATTENDANT: Attendant Console Number FUNCTION CODE:Function Code KEY NUMBER:Key Number LHST Station Data (Numbering Group) List Tenant Number Line Equipment Number Route Restriction Class Room Class Station Number Telephone Class Service Feature Restriction Class CM3-03 < Output Item > TN: LENS: RSC: CLASS: STN: TEC: SFC: CHAPTER 5 Page 642 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .

: G: DC: TENANT: ANX: FLR: ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 5 Page 643 Revision 4.LHSU CM3-03 NAME LHSU COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Suite Room Data List CM3-03 < Output Item > TN: Tenant Number TYPE: Suite Room Type LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class MSTN: Master Guest Station Number STN: Slave Guest Station Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class PHANTOM: Phantom Number LHSY Hotel System Parameter List Hotel System Data Index Data in Binary Format Data (00-FF) in Hexadecimal Format CM3-03 < Output Item > INDEX: BINARY: HEXA: LSCR Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03 < Output Item > CALLING TN: Calling Tenant Number CALLING RSC: Route Restriction Class of Calling Side CALLED RSC: Route Restriction Class of Called Side CALLED TN: Called Tenant Number LSPF Special Access Code Floor Data List Day/Night Kind of Assignment Number Ground/Underground Called Number Tenant Number Annex Floor Range CM3-03 < Output Item > D/N: NO.0 .

F: Development Parameter Value (0-15) KIND OF SERVICE: Kind of Service NND: Number of Necessary Digits CNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code Dialing SID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index A ACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of Service RT: Route Number SUB: SUB Address TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List Day/Night Telephone Class of Calling Side Telephone Class of Called Side CM3-03 LTCR < Output Item > D/N: CALLING TEC: CALLED TEC: CHAPTER 5 Page 644 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E) .: This Parameter Specifies the number (0-63) of the station number being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the station numbers being assigned.LSPS CM3-03 NAME LSPS COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME Same Number Special Access Code Data List CM3-03 < Output Item > NO.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful